paget" « ae sy “ Y rer ue Fe elt, ch a perio ae -bab ~ fem ee ON odie Arete ong t= Sharm 7 s Oe beaep dN saeeeche abet ghee ae pea se oe f oe os i eres : axe Fees ; Recrreanoeca prarierer er yt aes fe ee ss Bal el a ot oe rer Canara, Pere: . rat Although not specifically dated, this passage was probably | written about 1828 for on the opposite page there is a note on the Ruffed | Grouse dated October 16 of that year. | All the localities from which Prairie Chickens have been reported are in- | dicated in Figure 2. | The next mention of Prairie Chickens in Essex County is contained in a letter quoted by Mcllwraith (1894) which was received from Mr. W. E. Wag- | staff, “one of the oldest and most respected settlers in the County of Essex.” | Mr. Wagstaff wrote: “I have never seen prairie chickens alive, but have heard of their being seen in bands about Sandwich. When I first came to Amhurst- burg about 1840, I heard the old sports tell of having killed them in the gardens of the town.” The earliest Ontario specimens that are still preserved are probably a male and female from the collection of the Hon. G. W. Allen, which is now in the Royal Ontario Museum of Zoology and Palaeontology. “These specimens are labelled Essex County, 1846. There are two other specimens from the same collection but they lack data. The first mention of Prairie Chickens on the prairies near the mouth of the Thames, described by Jameson, appears in the 1850's. Edwin Sandys says in a book he co-authored with T. S. Van Dyke (1902) that the first Prairie Chicken he ever heard booming . . . “was in western Ontario on what is known as Raleigh plains — an extensive tract of low marshy land lying for miles along the south bank of the Thames River.” He was a boy at the time and succeeded in shooting a male while investigating the strange noise. He remarks: “Later developments proved the old male to have had company, to be exact, upon the plains in question, and upon another similar expanse a few miles away, there were years later as many as seventy-five or one hundred ‘chickens’.” He did not mention the date of this incident but he does say that it occurred when “Spring shooting of geese, duck, and snipe was then both legal and °Now part of the city of Windsor. ‘1X91 OY] Ul POUONUOU! OLIEIUG UJOISAMYINOS UT Sal[eooT “7 ANNI 41 “paaseseid uaaq aAdy ®@ q Suswidads UINIIYD JOG YOIYR WO) 5914110907 | ' “pdysodai uaa pa q O A\ id 33036 BADY SUINIIND BIOIg YINYM WOss $3915110907 d aa ~ we) WIA 1109470 the Xd eS er S ee OIMVINO NY3LS3M-HLINOS NI $311171V907 j 3 x y 3] % 7 | WVHIUH ? ° S Le 1 ye x s : se 9uN@320 11um << Yr ' 3 Sur p----- ===> = ° ' ay ia v4 ‘ N | 8 ' S wiv? 4s CO > \ oo ' 5 > Sees PY I 7, * Nae ' NOoLe@WY] S ll K f ? v) Ny. x iS : ; N iw \ VOIHOIW ‘a eh ey) [ea} a Zz q =) 3 ” 5 1 N (6) nnn SS Ou op EY x LUMSDEN: A 1966 42 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 80 amazingly good. ” ‘Thus it must have been prior to 1856 when the first law re- stricting spring hunting of waterfowl in Upper Canada was passed. Cottle (1859) includes Tetrao cupido in his list of birds adding in a foot- note: “On the authority of an inn-keeper at Chatham who asserted that they were occasionally seen in the neighbourhood.” This was probably not far from the locations mentioned by Sandys. Evidence that Prairie Chickens spread as far as Toronto at an early date 1S provided by its inclusion in a list of birds contained in a Handbook of Toronto — : (1858). ‘The species is marked with an asterisk which the author explains in a footnote that “Specimens of those so marked have been obtained in the im- mediate vicinity of Toronto.” It is probable that the bird had reached Hamilton by this time also but it was not until later that its presence was definitely recorded there. Mcllwraith (op. cit.) mentions having seen a male in fine spring plumage shot in May, 1886, “between the bay and the lake near the canal at the beach.” This was probably on Burlington Beach. In November, 1887 he bought a male and female in the market at Hamilton which are now in the Royal Ontario Museum. While it is possible that these specimens had been shot in the vicinity of Hamilton, it is more likely that they had been imported from the west. There is a specimen in the collection of Mr. Hoyes Lloyd of Ottawa which was prepared by Mr. E. F. G. White. In answer to an inquiry about the origin of this bird, Mr. White in a personal com- munication wrote: “The bird that Mr. Lloyd has is an import, most likely from Chicago. Back in the eighties Bate and Co. of Ottawa used to sell game that he bought in Chicago. At the time we bought the grouse he had several wild turkeys, ... At that time Lapointe — a fish and game dealer, used to import game from Europe or England, we got lapwing and one golden plover from him and quail .. . I have seen black cocks and red grouse in the shipments.” Holland Marsh was the northernmost locality reached by Prairie Chickens. J. P. Turner in a personal letter to Mr. J. L. Baillie dated July 17, 1932 wrote, “Many years ago my father shot some Prairie Chickens near Holland Marsh and I have heard of other early records.” Baillie (1947) mentions two Prairie Chickens shot by John Turner while snipe shooting at the Holland River marsh about 1875. The last record for this area was a bird Edwin Sandys said he had flushed about 1889. Towards the end of the nineteenth century we find that all references to Prairie Chickens in southern Ontario associate them with large marsh areas. The original prairies had long since come under the plough and the poorly drained low prairies were being speedily tiled for cultivation. Pioneer farming with the widespread use of fire as an aid to clearing had given way to a more intensive form of agriculture and little suitable range for Prairie Chickens re- mained except in and around poorly drained land. One of the largest marshes in southern Ontario lies on the estuary of the St. Clair River in Kent County. Part of it extends across the border into Michigan. Morden and Saunders (1882) record Prairie Chickens from the St. Clair Flats in their list published in 1882. Also, a specimen from the “Flats” | 1966 LUMSDEN: PRAIRIE CHICKEN IN ONTARIO 43 and one labelled “Wallaceburg” were taken by Dr. H. J. Garnier in February and March of 1885. Saunders (1910) was probably referring to these specimens when he wrote “The country around Chatham, and from there to Windsor, has much ground suited to the needs of this bird and there can be little doubt that it was once common through most of this territory, although the district ten miles north of Chatham is the only spot from which records have been preserved.” He mentions two specimens which were not saved but were taken near Chatham about 1882 or 1883 and passed through the hands of Alex Gow. The last specimen of a Prairie Chicken from southern Ontario, now in the Royal Ontario Museum, was preserved by Gow. It was a female shot on 29 April, 1897 on Fighting Island, a marshy island in the Detroit River, eight miles ~ south of Windsor. By 1900 there may have been a few small isolated populations struggling to survive in the face of agricultural development. I can find evid- ence of only one group of birds which lasted into the twentieth century, signi- - ficantly on an area where modern farming was introduced relatively late. The _ old Indians who live at the Walpole Island Indian Reserve, which includes the ' Ontario side of the St. Clair Flats, remember the species well and those of middle age remember their parents talking about Prairie Chickens. Their name for the bird was “‘Ke-wa-nee”. It appears that some were still to be found as late as the 1920’s for Mr. William Soney, now 88 years old, shot one on St. Annes Island “about 40 years ago”. Mr. Silas Thomas now over 75 years old shot his last, “about 30 or 40 years ago”, on the Hickory Ridge on Walpole Island. ‘This area, according to Mr. Earl Sands, was a prairie with a few scat- tered thorn bushes. It lies adjacent to St. Annes Island. Mr. Bill Dodge and Mr. Clarence Sands both saw them for the last time on this prairie about 1923 or 1924. CoNCLUSIONS At this late date incontrovertible evidence of Prairie Chicken occurrence in Ontario in pre-settlement days would have to come from archaeological in- ' vestigations. It is unfortunate that, so far, few pre-contact Indian sites have been examined in the area in which Prairie Chickens might have occurred. Wintemberg (1939) does not record the species in the Lawson site in Middle- _sex County. Through the courtesy of Dr. K. E. Kidd, Curator, Department of Ethnology, Royal Ontario Museum, I was able to examine the bone material _ collected in the Krieger site, Harwich Township, Kent County. There were no Prairie Chicken bones in this collection. Prairie Chickens were certainly present in Essex County in 1828. We can probably say that the bird did not reach the Toronto area in Fothergill’s time. He gave such a good account of the birds of his home area that, had Prairie Chickens been present, he undoubtedly would have included them. Between the time of his death in 1840 and 1858 they must have reached Toronto. Shortly after this it is probable that the bird was occupying its greatest area and had reached its peak of abundance in southwestern Ontario. The distribution of Prairie Chickens in the province at this time was pro- bably discontinuous and the birds were only locally abundant. They were 44 Tue CANaApIAN FIeELD-NATURALIST Vol. 80 probably never an important game bird and were hardly mentioned in the testimony on game presented to the Game and Fish Commission which reported to the Legislative Assembly in 1892. After 1875 all records of the bird indicate that it was inhabiting marshes and we may conclude that it found its range on the farm lands deteriorating because of changes in agricultural practices. It is probable that by the 1880's there were only isolated colonies which disappeared one by one. The last specimen to be preserved came from Sandwich West, in 1897, the — township from which it was first reported in 1828. The bird apparently sur- vived in this part of the province until about 1923 or 1924 on the Walpole Island Indian Reserve. REFERENCES AnonyMous. 1832. Statistical sketches of Upper Canada for the use of immigrants. By a backwood’s man. Probably Dr. Wil- liam Dunlop. AnonyMous. 1856. Game laws of Upper Canada, 1856. Anonymous. 1858. The Hand-Book of Toronto. By a member of the Press. Pro- bably G. P. Ures. Bird Section may have been written by Dr. S. P. May. (Baillie pers. com.) Ammann, G. A. 1957. The Prairie Grouse of Michigan. Michigan Department of Conservation. 200 pp. Baur, J. L. 1944. Charles Fothergill, 1782-1840. Canadian Historical Review 25:376-396. . 1947. Prairie Chickens in On- tario. Sylva 3(1). Corrie, T. 1859. A list of birds found in Upper Canada. Canadian Field-Naturalist and Geologist 4(3). Coyne, J. H. 1895. The country of the Neutrals, from Historical Sketches of the County of Elgin. Elgin Historical and Scientific Institute, St. Thomas. Day, G. M. 1953. The Indian as an ecolo- gical factor in the northeastern forest. Ecology 34(2) :329-346. Dorr, E. 1960. Climatic changes of the past and present. American Scientist 48 (3): 341-364. Fornercitt, Cuartes. Memoirs and illustra- tions of natural history in various parts of the British Empire. Unpublished manu- script in the library of the Royal Ontario Museum of Zoology. Hamerstrom, F. N., O. E. Marrson and F. HamerstroMm. 1957. A guide to Prairie Chicken management. Wisconsin Con- servation Department Technical Wildlife Bulletin No. 15: 127 pp. IrepELL, A. 1796. Unpublished surveyor’s notes in the files of the Surveys Branch, Ontario Department of Lands and Forests. Jameson, A. B. 1837. Winter studies and summer rambles in Canada. Lajeunesse, E. J. 1960. The Windsor border region. University of ‘Toronto Press. 374 pp. Lauriston, V. 1952. Romantic Kent. More than three centuries of history 1626-1952. Shepherd Printing Company, Chatham. p. 28. Lee, T. E. 1952. A preliminary report on an archaeological survey of southwestern Ontario for 1950, Annual Report National Museum of Canada, Bulletin No. 126. Leopotp, A. 1931. Game survey of the north central states. Madison, Wisconsin. MclIiwrairy, T. 1894. The birds of On- tario. Toronto. Second edition. McNirr, P. 1790. Unpublished field notes in the files of the Surveys Branch, Ontario Department of Lands and Forests. ee . 1793. Unpublished report to Lieutenant Colonel England in the files of the Surveys Branch, Ontario Department of Lands and Forests. MircHett, G. W. 1914. Lord Selkirk’s Baldoon settlement. Kent Historical So- ciety Papers and Addresses, 1:15. Morpen, J. A. and W. E. Saunpers. 1882. List of the birds of western Ontario. The Canadian Sportsman and Naturalist 2(12). Montreal. Morais, J. L. 1943. Indians of Ontario. On- tario Department of Lands and Forests, Toronto. p. 75. Sanpys, E. and T.S .Van Dyxe. 1902. Up- land Game Birds. New York. Saunpers, W. E. 1910. Pinnated Grouse in southern Ontario. The Auk 27(1): 79. 1966 ScHmipT, K. P. 1938. Herpetological evi- dence for post glacial eastward extension of the steppe in North America, Ecology 19(3): 396-407. Tuwaites, R. G. 1903. A Jesuit Relations and allied documents. 1:108. A. C. Mc- Clurg & Co., Chicago. Transeau, F. N. 1935. The Prairie Pen- insula. Ecology 16(3) :423-437. LUMSDEN: PRAIRIE CHICKEN IN ONTARIO 45 Urouuart, F. A. 1957. Changes in the fau- na of Ontario. University of Toronto Press. 75 pp. Watkins, L. W. 1901. Michigan birds that nest in open meadows. Michigan Histori- cal Collections. WIntTeMBeERG, W. J. 1939. Lawson Pre- historic Village site, Middlesex County, Ontario. National Museum of Canada, Bulletin 94. Received for publication 21 May 1965 4 SUMMER BIRDS WINTERING ON SOUTHERN VANCOUVER ISLAND Davin STIRLING Parks Branch, Department of Recreation and Conservation, Victoria, B.C. RECENT CHRISTMAS BIRD COUNTS have shown that well over 100 bird species can be found in winter on southern Vancouver Island, which for the purposes of this paper is that part south and east of Sooke Harbour, Finlayson Arm, and a line joining these two. In December 1961, 124 species were noted on count day and 14 others were seen during the week giving a total of 138 species. To obtain comparable counts elsewhere one must go to southern California, the Gulf Coast, and Florida. By comparison, the 1963 Audubon Society Christmas Bird Count showed Edmonton with 31 species, Toronto 72 species, and Halifax 52 species. ‘otal individuals usually range between 45,000 and 50,000. Species contributing most to the grand total are gulls and waterfowl, robins and some- times starlings are the most abundant of the passerines. If we disregard all “expected” species and the usual observations of “un- usual” species several forms usually regarded as summer visitors or migrants appear regularly and sometimes abundantly on Christmas counts. Cowan (1940) gives details of winter occurrence of ten species of summer birds during ithe ten years 1929 to 1938. He gives climatalogical data for the ten years 1887 to 1896 and the ten years 1929 to 1938 to support his postulation that increased occurrence of certain species is influenced by an amelioration of winter climate during the latter ten years. Although climatic changes could be an important reason for the increase in wintering records of summer birds, habitat modifications and thorough coverage of the area by bird-watchers in recent years appear to be factors which deserve recognition. 46 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 80. TaBLE 1. — Number of observations (O) and total numbers seen (T) of sixteen wintering species. Asterisks indicate species mentioned by Cowan (1940). All observations are from December and January; most data are from Christmas counts. 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 Species OQ} Te! OUT VO ee) Os TsO. as sO) ilies Oe aie *Band-tailed Pigeon 1 2) - —|- —| 6/ 48] 1 PNM) OME, 422 Mourning Dove =| A 1/1 il] = al oats eal Dalal eae 2 Rufous Hummingbird = —| 1 ih il hj] il 1);-| - -—|- — *Lewis’ Woodpecker 1 DA A lal ie 1/-); -—]|] -| -]} 1 2 *Hermit Thrush = —| 1 2) —- -| 3 Shiko Sule 9} 3 5 *Western Bluebird = Sl a 2 | Zor S |) AS) 4 PP I On eoS Water Pipit = —| 1 el il 3| - -|—] —| 2] 39] - - *Cedar Waxwing — —| 2/505) 2 |}100) 2/121] 1 | 32 | 5/259] 9 | 406 Orange-crowned Warbler 1 1} 1 1/1 1 | eet *Audubon’s Warbler - - —| 1 tal 1) 1 Sal 3] - = *Red-winged Blackbird SST pal Po W197 17 |, 40)) 3.) (S845 Si OAS sana Brown-headed Cowbird — 1 6) | = ee eet a 4 American Goldfinch — —| 1 Py} = —| 2 TAS E25 | ers ele Savannah Sparrow = —| 1 i= =| 1 8} By lla 5 || 2 2 *White-crowned Sparrow Si) Oy 2) lO Se soi 4 CAS POM Ze Ail) Ab ils *Golden-crowned Sparrow 6] 60} 9 | 36] 7 |195|}10) 101} 7 | 92 }11)129] 9 | 104 Changes in habitat due to the activities of man have increased the amount | of food and cover available to certain species. Dense thickets of broom, Cytisus scoparius and blackberry, Rubus spp. along fences are favoured shelter- | ing areas for White-crowned and Golden-crowned Sparrows that seek food on | adjacent field verges. Cattle feeding lots and farm yards have wintering flocks | of blackbirds and Starlings. Ornamental and commercial plantings of berry- | bearing shrubs such as mountain ash, Sorbus spp, English hawthorn, Crataegus | oxyacantha, and holly, I/ex sp. have added considerably to the food supply of | Band-tailed Pigeons, Cedar Waxwings, and Robins. Sheltered gardens and | bird feeders help Rufous Hummingbirds and warblers to survive through at | least part of mild winters. Feeders are so popular now that they have become | an important aid to wintering small passerines. White-crowned and Golden- | crowned Sparrows, warblers, Hermit Thrushes, and a remarkable number of | stragglers from east of the Rockies have been observed at feeders; passerine stragglers are seldom seen anywhere else, and they usually remain at the same} feeder throughout the winter. There are enough observers in the field now to make it unlikely that any species of bird will remain undetected for long. The limited extent and sharply defined boundaries of the Victoria area, and the fact that w intering species prefer to remain more or less sedentary help to insure that these birds will be} quickly reported and kept under observation. The Victoria Christmas count is well organized and the compilers have tried hard to keep doubtful sightings) — off the records. An added check on sight records is the fact that most question-} able species stay in the area for Sgeral weeks at least and therefore are seen} well by several ‘reliable observers. 11966 STIRLING: BirpS ON VANCOUVER ISLAND 47 I have compiled a table of winter records for the years 1958 to 1964 inclusive for nine of the ten species noted by Cowan. Winter records for an additional seven species which have been seen during this same period have been included. This table shows that most of these species have increased, some markedly since Cowan’s notes of 1929 to 1938. Only one species, the Lewis’ Woodpecker, has shown a decrease. Cowan (1940) says “It is now an abundant breeding species.” He cites records of one or two birds every winter for the years 1936 to 1939. In the winter of 1938-39 twelve to fourteen wintered in the oak groves of the Uplands. The Lewis’ Woodpecker is no longer abundant on southern Vancouver Island. Only one or two breeding pairs were known during any summer from 1958 to 1961. Part of this declining population remained through the winter as the table shows. No breeding Lewis’ Woodpeckers were found from 1962 to 1964. None wintered in 1962 or 1963. As there have been no records from other Island localities for several years it seems that the Vancouver Island population has disappeared. In early December, 1964, two were seen. These were possibly stragglers as they disappeared after a few days. REFERENCES Cowan, I., McT. 1940. Winter Occurrence of Summer Birds on Vancouver Island, British Columbia. Condor 42:4. NationaL Aupuson Society , 1964. Audu- bon Field Notes 18:2. Vicroria NaturaList 1958-65. Christmas Bird Count, 15:6; 16:6; 17:6; 18:6; 19:6; 20:6; 21:6. Received for publication 16 May 1965 wy CorRRECTION NOTE In the paper “Some new or critical vascular plants of Alaska and Yukon” by A. E. Porsild which appeared in The Canadian Field- Naturalist 79(2), substitute for line 6 on page 80 the following correct line: densely glandular with purplish black stalked glands”, but in other respects it THE SUPPOSED NESTING OF THE SLATY-BACKED GULL IN CANADA W. Eart GopFRey National Museum of Canada, Ottawa, Ontario THE ONLY EVIDENCE Of nesting on the North American continent of the pale- | arctic Slaty-backed Guil, Larus schistisagus, was recorded by Bent (1921, p. 87). | This is based on a specimen, adult male, bearing a label stating that it was | taken from a nest on Harrowby Bay, northwestern Mackenzie, on June 9, | 1901, by Captain H. H. Bodfish. The record is included in the breeding distribution of the species in the A.O.U. “Check-list of North American Birds” (Fifth edition, 1957). A. M. Bailey (1948) questioned the record on the grounds that Harrowby Bay is far from the known breeding range of this gull. He examined the | Harrowby Bay specimen (in the Museum of Comparative Zoology collection), considered it small for schistisagus, but did not refer it to any other species. E. O. Hohn (1958) spent the period July 18 to 23, 1955, on Harrowby Bay and made a careful but vain search for evidence of schistisagus there. How- ever, in rejecting the Harrowby Bay record he made an unwarranted assump- tion that Bailey (1948) decisively established that the Harrowby Bay specimen is not a Slaty-backed Gull. Bailey did not establish that. In fact, it seems probable that the specimen really is a Slaty-backed Gull as it was originally so identified by no less an authority than Robert Ridgway. The writer has not examined it. Captain Bodfish’s data on the specimen label are all the evidence available. Captain Bodfish was a whaler and a remarkable man. He was not, however, an ornithologist although his broad interests included birds and the collected | specimens of them. Due doubtless to lack of proper instruction, his methods |} of preparing bird specimen labels appear to have been faulty. This is shown in a letter in the files of the National Museum of Canada written by Louis B. |} Bishop on January 28, 1929, to P. A. Taverner, the appropriate parts of which || are as follows: | “For weeks I have been trying to find a minute to write you on a subject on which I meant to talk with you in Charleston, but forgot every time we were together. That is that Paroquet Auklet in my collection, supposed to be from Franklin Bay, Arctic America. “When I was in New Haven I read up in my catalogue all I had written || about this lot of skins, found them all, and the original labels in the cases in which they were not attached to the skins, and attached them. As I wrote you I bought this lot from Babbitt of Taunton, and he wrote me all were collected by Captain Bodfish at Franklin Bay. All the skins had data, but these Were written on slips of paper and slipped under the wing, and contained no 48 1966 GODFREY: SLATY-BACKED GULL IN CANADA 49 place. In at least one instance in a pair of birds in which the measurements were on the labels I found from measuring the birds that the labels had become transposed, the male slip of paper being under the wing of the female. All these slips of paper were the same, apparently torn from envelopes, except that of the Paroquet Auklet, and that was on different paper. And on going over these birds in my collection it came to my memory that I had always been a little doubtful if this bird had been collected with the others, or if Bodfish had taken it farther west, and sent it to Babbitt with the others. And I want you to have all the facts before you publish the record.” f In his absorbing autobiography * ‘Chasing the Bowhead”, Bodfish (1936) tells us that on the voyage in question eastern Siberia was wistzed on the way north in June 1900; the winter of 1900-1901 was spent on Baillie Islands, near Harrowby Bay; anne that the voyage ended in San Francisco on Nouenle: 7, 1901. In view of the known facts that Bodfish was in Siberian waters (although north of the known breeding range of the Slaty-backed Gull), that he had a habit of not attaching labels to specimens, and that he sometimes relied on memory for locality data, the chances for error in specimen data are great and, consequently, the Harrowby Bay record is quite unacceptable. There is, chewetone, no valid record of the Slaty- backed Gull nesting on the North ‘American continent and no valid record of any occurrence of the species in Canada. REFERENCES AMERICAN Or,nirHoLocists’ UNION. 1957. Check-list of North American Birds. Fifth edition. Baltimore, American Ornitholo- gists’ Union. 691 pp Bartey, Autrrep M. 1948. Birds of arctic Alaska. Colorado Museum of Natural History, Popular Series, No. 8: 1-317. Bent, ArtHuR C. 1921. Life histories of North American gulls and terns. United States National Museum, Bulletin 113: 1- 345. BoprisH, Hartson, H. 1936. Chasing the bowhead. Harvard University Press, Cam- bridge, 281 pp. Houn, E. Orro. 1958. The supposed oc- currence and nesting of the Slaty-backed Gull in the western arctic region of Canada. The Canadian Field-Naturalist 72 (1): 5-6 Received for publication 4 June 1965 REPORT OF COUNCIL TO THE EIGHTY-SEVENTH ANNUAL MEETING OF THE OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS’ CLUB December 7, 1965 DRING THE PAST YEAR, five meetings of Council were held at the National Museum of Canada: December 17, 1964, March 18, June 3, October 19 and November 23, 1965. “The average attendance was fourteen members. The Club’s business was conducted in the usual orderly manner. Appointments for 1965 were made as follows: Editor, THe Canapian Frecp-NaATurRALIST = bake Coo Business Manager, THE CanapiAN FieLp-NaTurALIst —W. J. Copy Chairman, Publications Committee —D. D. Hocartu Chairman, Excursions and Lectures Committee — H. N. MacKenzie Chairman, Reserve Fund Committee —H. Lioyp Chairman, Membership Committee —F. H. Scuuttz Chairman, Bird Census Committee — G. H. McGee Chairman, Macoun Field Club Committee — H. Grou Chairman, F.O.N. Affairs Committee —R. FritH Chairman, Public Relations Committee — Feiss Chairman, Sites Committee — W.K. W. BaLpwin O.F.N.C. Representative to A.A.A.S. Council —V. E. F. Sotman REPORT OF THE PUBLICATIONS COMMITTEE Since the last report of Council, four numbers of THE Canapian FIELp- Nartura.ist have been published. These included the last two numbers of Volume 78 which contained 152 pages and the first two numbers of Volume 79 which contained 158 pages, or a total of 310 pages in all. Papers, notes ane] reviews were distributed as follows: PAPERS NOTES REVIEWS I BYOL ENO Clete er use ees ani CaM Was Sh 6 2 Entomology 2:2 ac Vai 0 0 1 Plerpetolog yi) site wei 7 4 2 lehthyologiy, man) se wasn eree 2 0 3 Marina opivar at se eee a a 3 2 0 Ornithology, eae ee ei 7 12 8 Miscellancousmi ) aati ints 6 1 7 31 21 26 The editor has reported that Volume 79 Numbers 3 and 4 will be published before the end of the year. Adequate manuscripts are on hand for at least the first number of Volume 80. Expenditures for the year were as follows: Volume.78 (Nos. 3 and’4) and’79. (No. 1). 2) $3,983.59 Reprints for Volume 78 Nos. 2, 3 and 4) and 79 (No. 1) 1,243.41 Total $5,227.00 50 966 Report oF COUNCIL 51 The publication of THe Canapian Firtp-NaATurRALIsT was materially assist- ed this year by a grant of $500 from the Conservation Committee of the Can- idian National Sportsmen’s Show. ‘This assistance is gratefully acknowledged. REPORT OF THE ExcurRSIONS AND LECTURES COMMITTEE Five meetings of the Committee were held in 1965 and four issues of the 1ewsletter were released. Activities undertaken included six bird recognition lasses, held under the leadership of Mr. George McGee; nine bird walks, includ- ng four of the ever popular Tuesday morning outings; an evening to observe ‘rogs; a woodcock singing ground visit and a spring flower hike. The flower aike was a co-operative venture with the Macoun Field Club and drew some 55 enthusiastic youngsters and 20 adults. The annual club dinner featured Dr. John S. Tener of the Canadian Wild- ife Service as guest speaker. His excellent illustrated talk “Wildlife of East Africa” was enjoyed by 110 members and their guests. At the request of the Federation of Ontario Naturalists the club undertook whe task of preparing a record of Snowy Owl sightings during the 1964-65 winter. The more than 80 observations were recorded and collated by Miss ois Kingston. ‘These were then spotted on a map of the Ottawa area and sent o the F.O.N. A planned series of outings to observe shore birds during the fall migration oeriod had to be cancelled due to the unusually high water levels which dooded the places where these birds normally feed in their passage through the area. Plans for the winter season include some further bird recognition classes ind “an introduction to wild plants” series. REPORT OF THE RESERVE FUND COMMITTEE Our total holdings remain unchanged from last year. These are 28 shares of Bell Telephone Stock and $3,000 in Ontario Hydro 3% bonds. REPORT OF THE MEMBERSHIP COMMITTEE Sixty-four new active members were added during the year. Of these, 18 were local, 25 were individuals outside of Ottawa and 21 were institutions. Deletions totalled 20. Of these, 5 were due to death, 7 resigned and 8 were in arrears for 3 years. On November 23, 1965, Council unanimously elected Mr. Hoyes Lloyd an honorary member. The membership now consists of: Patrons 2 Honorary 5} Life 10 Affiliated Societies 9 Active — local individual 173 — local institutional 14 — Outside individual 253 — Outside institutional 286 Associate 36 Total 788 Se THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 80 Four editions of the Club newsletter were distributed during the year. In- formation brochures and application forms were distributed to interested persons. i Report OF THE Birp Census CoMMITTEE The Club’s forty-sixth consecutive annual Christmas Bird Count was held on Saturday, January 2, 1965. A total of 6754 birds of 45 species were reported compared with 5893 birds of 52 species in the previous year. The number of individuals and the number of species are both somewhat higher than the 10 year average. Three new species were added to our all time list which now totals 92 species. A total of 41 persons in 13 parties took part in the count. The results of the count were reported to the National Audubon Society and have been published in the Audubon Field Notes. The results were also published in the February 1965 Newsletter and were made available to the Kitchener-Waterloo Club for inclusion in a tabulation covering some 26 clubs in Ontario. Report OF THE Macoun FieLtp CLtus CoMMITTEE Under the direction of Mr. A. A. Ellis, with assistance from Mr. G. Tessier and Mr. S. D. MacDonald, and latterly also of Mr. M. Shcheponek, all of the Museum staff, and of Mr. H. Groh of the O.F.N. Club, the activities of the Macoun Field Club have proceeded normally. A few spring and fall excursions to outlying points, notably one with the Field-Naturalists into the Gatineau Hills, have been held. The usual indoor sessions of the three age groups have continued with good satisfaction. The High School group meets late Friday afternoons, with increased numbers except perhaps of girl members. Program varies from fairly technical presentations by outside specialists to those of members on their own projects; or to showings ‘of slides and films. The other groups, in turn on Saturday mornings, usually have capacity attendance to receive less advanced fare, and on alternate weeks to present their own observations and specimens, with their necessary comment, followed by discussion. By member vote, credits are earned toward badge or other standing. The nucleus of a library has recently started through the generosity of the Kiwanis Club of Rideau which is also presenting instruments and otherwise joining the present sponsors in under-writing the costs. The seventeenth birthday party was well attended and was featured by a presentation to Mr. Groh for continuous service to the Club and its Little Bear, of a scroll bearing the signatures of Mr. McGee and Dr. Glover, for the sponsoring organizations. The annual invitation to its dinner by the Senior Club, brought along the usual exhibits from members and a report by President John Robertson. Elections for the ensuing year resulted in selection of the following: Presi- dent, Senior, Robert Sprules; Intermediate, Chris Fyles and Junior, Darrell Larose, with supporting Executives. 1966 - Report oF CoUNCIL 53 Report oF THE F.O.N. Arratrs COMMITTEE No official joint activities of the F.O.N. and the Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club were held in 1965. Eight members of the O.F.N.C. attended the annual meeting of the F.O.N. held at Queen’s University, Kingston on April 24 and 25, 1965. Four members including the President of the O.F.N.C. attended the Federation gathering at Point Pelee National Park on May 9-10, 1965. Sale of 42 dozen Christmas cards gave the O.F.N.C. a return of $10.50. Sale of 1965 Christmas cards is in progress at date of this report. ReEpPoRT OF THE PuBLICc RELATIONS COMMITTEE Notices of forthcoming Club activities were submitted each month to “What’s On In Ottawa”. An account of one of the Club’s early morning bird walks was prepared _ for the Public Relations Officer of the National Capital Commission. Most liaison with Ottawa newspapers was handled direct by the President ~ and other Club members. REPORT OF SITES COMMITTEE An active subcommittee headed by Dr. J. M. Gillett had several meetings following up Mrs. Sheila Thompson’s submission to Council on Gatineau Park. Continuing co-operation of National Capital Commission management was ~ obtained. The chairman served on Dr. J. S. Row’s advisory committee to the N.C.C. on the Mer Bleue mire following submissions of several years standing from our Club. A full report to N.C.C. directors was produced July 21, 1965. It is highly important that 1966 Council obtain N.C.C. report on progress made on Rowe Committee recommendations in view of long delayed action upon our Club’s original proposal. The preservation and management of the Mer Bleue is an urgent matter: further delays will leave little worth preserving in this classic locality of Canadian natural history. The Chairman visited the Bronson Avenue Bridge hackberry site with assistant city arborist following a report from Dr. W. G. Dore. Our President was advised upon communication with City of Ottawa regarding the death of the veteran tree and the preservation of root sprouts in accordance with city ordinance to preserve this site as nearly as possible in a natural state. Redis- covery of our Club’s files covering the period of first communication with Mayor and Council should prompt further action by 1966 Council. No formal meetings of the committee were held. A. W. RaTtHweELL, Secretary STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL STANDING THE OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS’ CLUB 30 NOVEMBER 1965 CURRENT ACCOUNT ASSETS LIABILITIES Balance in Bank 30 Noy. 1965... $ 6,887.83 Cheques Outstanding........... $ 220.64 BillseRecetvablesnseei | eee 1S 22) an Ballance sey ie weet sens cue cere 6,785.41 $ 7,006.05 $ 7,006.05 RECEIPTS EXPENDITURES Balance in Bank 30 Nov. 1964... $ 3,729.87 Can. Field-Naturalist (3 nos.).... $ 3,983.59 Fees: ree 26 901g) Dc Seas Separates & Illustrations........ 1,243.41 PRISE RO aa e Editorisionoranitims seit eee 200.00 INGK GENRES Stic stan 514.65 ; 5s f Weecaiitea ee 111.00 Business Manager’s Honorarium. 100.00 ——— 3,882.90 Excursions & Lectures Committee 41.13 Separates & Illustrations. ....... 2,588.22 Macoun Field Club............. 124.34 Sale of Back Numbers... +. .---- 1,677.81 Clerical Assistance for Treasurer. . 46.95 Geology of Ottawa District... . 138.30 é Geology of Gatineau-Liévre. . . 17715. pe OStaserca Sta Woneny. | a5 eee 298.24 Field Checking List/Birds..... 16:00) aBankiDiscounttas:: “ee ye ieee 30.45 Donations: Sportsmen’s Show.... 500.00 Miscellaneous.................. 143.64 Kiwanis Club of Bala eke Bear Rideau for Macoun g Bicid Chibi ae 80.00 SOPNOVAML OOS ees: $6,887.83 Macoun Field Club Collection. . . 21.00 Less Cheques 0/s...... 220.64 Wiiscellancoustean oe aera 227.09 ———— 6,667.19 $12,878.94 $12,878.94 RESERVE FUND ASSETS LIABILITIES $3,000 Ontario Hydro 3% Bonds, ManketuvalUuemem ee yee oe $ 2,815.00 28 Shares Bell Telephone Stock, MnCl E Wells sa 6eeaenooeauss 1,618.50 Nil Balance in Bank 30 Nov. 1965... 301.68 $ 4,735.18 2 nee eee EXPENDITURES ] I < 30 . 1964... 150.59 E Bae Ai dir eENE | AR Rea sphere: : 4.49 Safety Deposit Box Rental... ... $ 5.00 Ontario Hydro Bond Interest... . 90.00 Balance in Bank 30 Nov. 1965... 301.68 Bell Telephone Dividends....... 61.60 $ 306.68 $ 306.68 PUBLICATIONS FUND ASSETS LIABILITIES $1,500 Ontario Hydro 3% Bonds, Mate tava Ulery eens as retuned eal $ 1,391.25 5 Shares Bell Telephone Stock, mMankebavalvencs = ( mcm, J } ) iL J Ss ¢ “OOM } 4 a The Canadian Field-Naturalist: + VoLuME 80 APRIL-JUNE 1966 NuMBER 2 Me, 6 GitiVERSITY FURTHER OBSERVATIONS ON LARGE CANADA GEESE MOULTING ON THE THELON RIVER, NORTHWEST TERRITORIES Ernie Kuyt Canadian Wildlife Service, Fort Smith, Northwest Territories THE PURPOSE of this paper is to present additional information on the race(s), - origin, and migration routes of the Canada Geese which moult on the Thelon - River, N.W.T. Previous observations by this writer on the Thelon River suggested that _non-breeding Great Basin Canada Geese (Branta canadensis moffitti) regularly _ summer and moult in the Central Canadian Barrens (Kuyt, 1962). Scott (1950) mentioned the pre-moult migration of large Canada Geese into the Perry River District, 200 miles north of the Thelon River, as follows: “Before the breeding season, parties of big Canada Geese (? B. c. moffitti) were seen migrating down the river. Four were found moulting with Lesser Canadas and Ross’s and on the last day of July, a party of nine big Canadas was seen on the Perry already able to fly on new primaries. There was no evidence of breeding in the large race, but it was recognized by the natives as distinct from the Lesser Canadas. It is thought that non-breeding birds may continue northward this far in order to find suitable moulting territory.” Also relevant is a report by Cowan (1954) of the band returns from two Canada geese banded as juveniles in the Cariboo district, British Columbia, which is ascribed by Delacour (1954) to the range of B. c. moffitti. They were shot 250 miles northwest of Lookout Point, Thelon River, in the Bathurst Inlet area of the Northwest Territories, one as a yearling and one as a three-year-old. A number of races of Canada Geese have been reported to inhabit the Thelon River area. Clarke (1940) found broods, and Hanbury (1904) found Canada Goose nests on the upper Thelon. Specimens taken there by Clarke were referred by P. A. Taverner to B. c. leucopareia. Delacour (1954) includes the Thelon River in the breeding range of B. c. parvipes. Although I have seen several thousand Canada Geese in the Thelon River area during the summers of 1960 to 1964, I have never observed nests or young Canada Geese there. In recent years, the area appears to have been used solely as a moulting area for large Canada Geese. Sterling (1963) noted that groups of Canada Geese in the Beverly Lake- Aberdeen Lake area of the Thelon River tended to remain segregated between successive aerial inspections. He suggested that each group of moulting geese may have been a distinct segment of a flyway or sub-flyway population. Mailing date of this number: June 17, 1966. 63 64 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 80 PROCEDURES During 1963 field studies of interrelationships between wolves and barren- ground caribou, I had the opportunity to band moulting Canada Geese on the Thelon River between Lookout Point (64°11’N., 102°33’W) and a point about 35 miles downstream. The moulting geese, usually encountered on the river, were slowly herded to shore and captured on land. A labrador retriever was used in the work, and of 140 geese banded, 72 were captured by the dog. During the summer of 1963, R. T. Sterling, Ducks Unlimited, Saskatoon, carried out preliminary investigations on geese in the Beverly Lake-Aberdeen Lake sections of the Thelon River system, about 80 miles northeast of Lookout Point. On July 12, he captured 500 moulting Canada Geese from a flock of several thousand. ‘Thirty birds banded previously were included in the catch. He kindly allowed me to examine the banding and recovery data on the 30 retraps. In order to establish definitely that the Canada Geese observed on the Thelon River belonged to one of the larger races, I weighed 125 of the moulting birds captured in the Lookout Point area. Two geese accidentally killed during banding were submitted to H. C. Hanson for subspecific identification. RESULTS The distribution of weights, to the nearest half-pound, of live geese cap- tured in the Lookout Point area, is given in Figure 1. The average weight of 65 males was 9.3 Ibs., while the average weight of 60 females was 7.8 lbs. Average weight declined during the period of moult. For the first 20 males and 20 females banded, average weights were 9.4 lbs. and 8.0 Ibs. respectively. Those birds had just begun to moult. For the last 20 geese caught, average weights were 8.9 Ibs. for males and 7.4 Ibs. for females. Those birds regained flight about one week later. Among the 140 geese captured in the Lookout Point area were seven which had been banded previously. The information on the original banding of those seven birds is presented in Table 1 along with information on a single goose taken in 1960, and a previously unreported recovery from i962. Of the geese banded in the Lookout Point area in 1963, 17 were recovered during the hunting season of that year and 1964. Data on those returns are presented in Table 2. Of the 30 recaptures taken by Sterling in the Beverly Lake-Aberdeen Lake area, 10 were banded at Rochester, Minnesota, one of the major wintering areas of the Giant Canada Goose (B. c. maxima), and 16 bands originated from waterfowl refuges in Missouri, Texas, South Dakota, Wisconsin, Arkansas, and Oklahoma. The remaining four geese were banded in southern Manitoba and Saskatchewan. Discussion Hanson (1962) has discussed in detail the changes in body weight associated with moulting in Canada Geese. He treated flightless geese and newly flying Number of Geese Number of Geese 1966 Kuyt: Canapa GEESE ON THE THELON RIVER 65 22 65 Males —nmu pd 10.5 I 15 I2 AINA Weight in Ibs. 27 60 Females ath 1 oO Weight in Ibs. Figure 1. Distribution of weights within lb. classes of Canada Geese captured near Look- out Point, Thelon River, N.W.T. birds which have not completed all of their feather moult as two distinct cate- gories. Apparently under the stress of moulting, body fat reserves break down and the size of the pectoral muscles is reduced through protein katabolism. The weight of these muscles during the flightless period of the moult is 30 and 36 per cent less in males and 25 and 41 per cent less in females (for yearlings and adults respectively), than the average weights of these muscles at the end of migration. When flight is again possible, the weight of the pectoral muscles increases markedly. Vol. 80 THE CANADIAN Fie_p-NATURALIST 66 aes INpy pyeway SINPYy £961 ‘ST ATnL £961 ‘8z sunt qyew Qpnpy ogyeuley WNpy ayew VNpy £961 ‘8g cunt £961 ‘8c ouN{ £961 ‘67 ounf ayew ‘pNpy ayewoy YINpy o[ PW s1PIN £961 ‘OE ounf yer) ‘oT puowpary owes) pue “yy ‘YyeiQ "YseA\ “@PIOPIV ower jo “jJdaq “YyseAy oyep] ‘surids epos ower) pue “yf oYyepy £961 ‘Sg cunt 7961 ‘LE ounf 0961 ‘of eunf Y UopSYyL IWUlOg ‘O'T M.87oCOT “NT To¥9 “Y uopsy Wulog “O'T M6FoTOT “N/T ZoF9 “LM 'N ‘4Ty UOpoy.L e]eWej ‘sunox T78S8-81S O9SSF-8IS e[eUul ‘TROT M,6£0C0T ““N/9ToF9 TLOSE-8SS “UMN “IOATYY uojey T, o]eul “sunNO K C961 ‘QZ qunf M.97.COT “Nv TToP9 F6888-81S “Y UopeYyL “Wurlog *O'TJ “SUNOX 196] ‘6 ounf M.97.COT “N/T ToF9 16P6I-8SS “Y UOpPYL ‘Wrlog ‘OT ejew ‘Suno,A C961 “7% Apne M,97oCOT “Nu TT ob9 FOZOS-8SS “Y UopsyL, “Wwrog ‘O'T = 2961 ‘47 oun[ M.9SoFOT “NvSToF9 91006-81S ae “LM N ‘404TY Uofe YL “SUNOA ZOOL ‘OF AqnL NM. PPOTOT Ni LoF9 LIESE-8SS “UMN ‘2047 Y UOTSY LL = £961 ‘LZ “UeL M.LEoCOT “NET oF9 9L8L7-87S 0961 ‘Lz ounf 0961 ‘T eunt LS6l ‘¢¢ oun[ ‘JUOJT ‘MOATOSOY PWT qdoq ‘y pue “5 juOs, “MOA M\ ‘TOPO ysl pue ourer) “Wod\\ “IGON ‘eo1V Us][aMoT ‘WIOD “qd ‘qf oles ‘IGaN eueyUo ‘PIPIN ‘PU IPM “FN Ulopaog MOS.9LT “N,OfoEF O4PPI euRUuOsy ‘PPI Do eIR eee NBO PaO SB paps1od0y 97eq J® po1aA0I9y se popurg oye] }e popurg UOTIEWAOJUT ATBAOIIY UOTEUNOJUT Surpueg “DMN ‘J0ARY uopey.L {UIOg INoYoo'T Jesu painjdeseai asaex) epeuey papueg — |] ATAV] 1966 Kuyt: CanapA GEESE ON THE THELON RIVER 67 TABLE 2. — Recoveries of Canada Geese banded on Thelon River, N.W.T. Banding information Recovery information Banded at Date Banded as Recovered at Date Lookout Point area, June 23, 1963 | Adult, male Tampico, Mont. Oct. 6, 1963 Thelon River, N.W.T 528-82230 , Lookout Point area, June 23, 1963 | Adult, male Bassano, Alta. Oct. 14, 1963 Thelon River, N.W.T 528-82226 Lookout Point area, June 28, 1963 | Adult, male Adrain, Ore. Oct. 20, 1963 Thelon River, N.W.T. 528-82256 Lookout Point area, June 30, 1963 Adult, male Zurich, Mont. Oct. 30, 1963 Thelon River, N.W.T. 528-82288 Lookout Point area, June 25, 1963 | Adult, male Hanna, Alta. Hunt season Thelon River, N.W.T. 528-82241 1963 Lookout Point area, June 29, 1963 | Adult, male Chinook, Alta. Hunt season Thelon River, N.W.T. 528-82272 1963 Lookout Point area, July 18, 1963 | Adult, male Domo, Sask. Hunt season Thelon River, N.W.T. 528-88944 1963 Lookout Point area, June 30, 1963 | Adult, male Loveland, Colo. Dec. 18, 1963 Thelon River, N.W.T. : 528-82296 Lookout Point area, June 28, 1963 | Adult, female | Lamar, Colo. Dec. 21, 1963 Thelon River, N.W.T 528-82265 July 18, 1963 | Adult, female | Wellington, Colo. Mar. 7, 1964 Lookout Point area, Thelon River, N.W.T. 528-88930 Thelon River, N.W.T. Thelon River, N.W.T. July 13, 1963 June 28, 1963 Adult, male 528-88911 Beverly Lake, Keewatin, N.W.T. Adult, female Beverly Lake, July 11, 1964 July 11, 1964 Thelon River, N.W.T. June 29, 1963 528-82274 528-82251 Keewatin, N.W.T. Keewatin, N.W.T. June 30, 1963 | Adult, female | Malta, Mont. Oct. 4, 1964 528-82290 Thelon River, N.W.T. | June 30, 1963 | Adult, female | Lethbridge, Alta. | Oct. 6, 1964 528-82292 Thelon River, N.W.T. | June 28, 1963 | Adult, male Rainier, Alta. Oct. 9, 1964 528-82258 - Thelon River, N.W.T.| June 19, 1963 | Adult, male Brooks, Alta. Oct. 22, 1964 528-82221 Adult, female | Foam Lake, Sask. | Nov. 16, 1964 68 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 80 Most of the 17 band recoveries from the 140 geese banded were made in the area which Delacour (1954) considers to be the range of distribution of B. c. moffitti. Wowever, Hanson’s information on the weight loss associated with moult suggests that most of the geese captured near Lookout Point would weigh more than 12 pounds in autumn. Mershon’s (1925) discussion of autumn weights of “Large” Canada Geese shot in North Dakota in the 1880's suggests a weight range of 12 to 18 pounds for B. c. maxima. A review of the status and distribution of the large Canada Geese, now being completed by H. C. Hanson of the Illinois Natural History Survey, indicates that many western prairie populations are referable to B. c. maxima. Ten geese recaptured by Sterling (1963) in the Beverly Lake area had been banded near Rochester, Minnesota where B. c. maxima was recently re- discovered. Thus it seemed possible that some of the birds captured near Lookout Point might be of that subspecies. That was confirmed by H. C. Hanson when he examined two geese accidentally killed during banding and identified them as B. c. mzaximia. Of the 30 recaptures made by Sterling in the Beverly Lake area in 1963, 10 had been banded near Rochester, Minnesota and three in southern Manitoba. The remainder had been banded in waterfowl refuges in Missouri, Texas, South Dakota, Wisconsin, Arkansas and Oklahoma — known wintering areas of birds breeding in Manitoba (Sterling, 1963). The nine banded geese recap- tured in the Lookout Point area had been banded in the Northern United States and six of these were recorded as having been banded as “young” or “locals” (Table 1). Thus all recaptures made on the Thelon River to date conform to the original thesis of a pre-moulting northward movement of non- breeding Canada Geese belonging to populations which breed in the northern United States and southern Canada. It is noteworthy that all previously banded geese captured in the Beverly Lake-Aberdeen Lake area were banded east of the 101° meridian, whereas all of those captured near Lookout Point originated from United States refuges west of that line. Similarly, bands placed on geese in the Lookout Point area were recovered in Saskatchewan, Alberta, Montana, Oregon, and Colorado, in all cases west of 101° (Table 2). Two geese banded near Lookout Point in June and July 1963 were retrapped the following year at Beverly Lake. Those two retrapped birds are the only two from the Lookout Point banding and from Sterling’s hunting season recoveries that have not followed the pattern of the other retraps. Since an east-west separation of about 70 miles exists between the two banding locations on the Thelon River system, the data indicate that the Lookout Point geese and those of the Beverly Lake-Aberdeen Lake area follow separate flyways in both spring and autumn migrations and that this segregation is generally maintained in the moulting area. It would be valuable for management purposes to learn if the various groups of Canada Geese that moult on the Thelon River always follow separate migration routes, and where they rejoin the breeding populations with which they are associated. Towards those ends it would be useful to band samples of the moulting groups at various locations on the Thelon River. 1966 Kuyt: Canapa GEESE ON THE THELON River 69 The writer wishes to record his appreciation to D. R. Flook and A. Dzubin, Canadian Wildlife Service, and to R. T. Sterling, Ducks Unlimited, for sugges- tions in the preparation of this note. REFERENCES Crarke, C. H. D. 1940. A biological in- vestigation of the Thelon Game Sanct- uary. National Museum of Canada Bulle- tin 96. 135 pp. Cowan, I. McT. 1954. An indication of population mixing in Canada Geese. The _ Miurrelet 35:45. - Detacour, JEAN. 1954. The waterfowl of the world. Vol. 1. Country Life, London 284 pp. Hansury, D. T. 1904. Sport and travel in their relation to seasonal stresses. Arctic Institute of North America. Technical Paper No. 12. Montreal. 68 pp. Kuyt, E. 1962. Northward dispersion of banded Canada Geese. Canadian Field- Naturalist. 76:180-181. MersHon, W.B. 1925. im Field and Stream May, 1925:26-27 (Original not seen; cited from Delacour, 1954). Scorr, Perer. 1950. The Perry River Ex- pedition, 1949. Severn Wildfowl Trust the Northland of Canada. London and New York. (Original not seen; cited from Clarke, 1940). Hanson, Harotp C. 1962. The dynamics of condition factors in Canada Geese and Annual Report 3:56-64. STERLING, R. T. 1963. Wascana goose sum- mers on the Arctic Prairies. The Blue Jay 21:134-135. Received for publication 22 June 1965 Ms SOME FEATURES OF THE FLORA OF THE ISLANDS OF EASTERN LAKE ONTARIO RoBpert HAINAULT Fowler Herbarium, Queen’s University, Kingston, Ontario THE EIGHT Low limestone islands under study extend in an east-west band of about 60 km length between Prince Edward County in Ontario and Jefferson County in New York (Figure 1). For purposes of the botanical survey, por- tions of the mainland areas, Long Point, Ontario, and Stony Point, New York, were included and comparison is made with the Kingston and other mainland areas where the flora is better known. Nobody has collected on these islands before. The field work was conducted in 1963 and 1964 and some results have already been reported (Hainault 1964). “The nomenclature follows Glea- son and Cronquist (1963). The collections are deposited in the Fowler Her- barium of Queen’s University. Abundant Southern Species A good proportion of the species of the islands are unusual by their greater abundance as compared with the mainland in the vicinity of Kingston, about 35 km north. These plants occur even farther north but become widely scat- tered and uncommon. 70 Tue CANADIAN FrieLp-NATURALIST Vol. 80 For example, Cardamine douglas, a species which reaches the Ottawa area, is found in nearly all the rich woods and brings considerable colour to an other- wise drab spring flora. Podophyllum peltatum, which blooms later, is also remarkably abundant on the islands. Near Kingston it seems peculiarly restricted to a band about 15 km wide along Lake Ontario and then peters out in patches down the shores of the St. Lawrence River. Among the trees, Acer nigrum substitutes almost entirely for A. saccharum. Black maple is still common around Kingston but becomes much rarer north of that city. Another southern plant which deserves mention is the high climbing variety of poison ivy, Rhus radicans var. radicans. It is very abundant in sev- eral places but is the much rarer of the two varieties in the Kingston region and farther north is known at only a few scattered localities along the lower Rideau (Ottawa, Ont.) and Ottawa rivers (Grenville, Que.). Northern Extensions of Southern Species These plants have the local northern limit of their range in Prince Edward County, although a few reach Montreal or even Lake St. Pierre. Most of them are absent in several counties west of Prince Edward but reappear farther west in the Toronto area or the Niagara Peninsula. They approach the islands rather by way of northern Oswego County, New York State. Peltandra virgimica was collected by John Macoun (1888:72) in the Belle- ville area in 1877 but it has not been seen there since. It is common on Long Point, Galloo Island, and Stony Point. It is also found in northern Oswego county and has been collected at one point in the Niagara peninsula (where it is perhaps introduced) by Bert Miller and others (Soper 1962). The plant is also found on Lake St. Pierre where it seems to have arrived by way of the Richelieu River. Lindera benzoin is common in southwestern Ontario (Soper 1952). East of Toronto it disappears but is found again in several localities near Belleville. It grows on Stony Point and Beschel has found it in northern Oswego County. Hibiscus palustris it probably the most spectacular flower of the area. In Ontario it has been reported only from the Lake Erie region (Soper 1962). At the eastern end of Lake Cinteate it grows in New York State on Stony Island and Stony Point. Valerianella chenopodifolia, formerly known only from Welland and Elgin Counties in Ontario and not collected since 1921 (Soper 1962), is common on Yorkshire Island, half-way across the lake, just on the Ontario side of the border. Species of the Limestone Plains The very thin soil in the area is characteristically covered by extensive stands of Canada bluegrass, Poa conrpressa. Bare patches of limestone are surrounded by striking zonations related to depth of soil. These “alvar” habitats (Beschel 1965) are also extensive in the terrain between Kingston and Belleville and contain several rare plants, ephemeral annuals or tuberous rooted 1966 HAINAULT: FLora oF IsLANDs val Belleville PRINCE EDWAR DY GCOUNTY Figure 1. The island chain of eastern Lake Ontario. perennials, essentially the same at all places. I will mention a few: Eleocharis compressa, Ranunculus fascicularis, Myosotis verna, Isanthus brachiatus, Scutel- laria parvula, Satureja acinos, Hedeoma hispida, and Triodanis perfoliata. ? J D) 5) Southern Extensions of Boreal Species Certain widespread plants in the Canadian North become rare in southern Ontario; thus, a small forest of spruce and fir, Picea glauca and Abies balsamuifera on Galloo Island is unusual in that it is surrounded by southern elements of the deciduous forest. Its presence indicates moderate acidity of the substrate as further shown by the presence of woodland sphagna and Leucobryum glaucum. Agropyron trachycaulum, Stellaria longipes and Draba arabisans are other locally common northern plants which favour, however, the calcareous substrate exposed on the shores. European Introductions The introduced flora is proportionately rich, perhaps because the early settlers going to the islands took with them all kinds of garden and farm plants which later escaped and became established. Stony Point is especially interest- ing as it has such alien plants as Reseda Jutea, very common on roadsides, and Rosa tomentosa, reported in Eastern North America so far only from Prince 72 Tue CANADIAN Fre_p-NATuRALIST Vol. 80 Edward Island (Gleason and Cronquist 1963: 383); it is common and seems to compete with Rosa eglanteria in colonizing old pastureland. Lotus corniculatus is abundant on Galloo Island where it has recently been cultivated as forage for sheep. Species Transported by the Indians It is difficult to know what wild plants were used and carried from place to place by the Indians before the arrival of Europeans because ethnobotanical and historical information is so vague in regard to species but Allium canadense at least seems to have been distributed in that fashion. It is a non-fruiting wild onion poorly equipped to spread itself by natural means. In the area, it is found either around known Indian campsites or in other obvious places where the Iroquois must have landed when they used the chain of Islands to cross the end of Lake Ontario. The onion is found on Long Point, Main Duck Island, Yorkshire Island and Stony Island, but is absent on the mainland from suitable habitats away from the water routes. Its distribution is being studied in detail by W. G. Dore. The particular distribution of Podophyllum peltatum, as mentioned above, also suggests transportation by Indians. DISCUSSION The floristic affinities and special composition of the vegetation present two problems in particular which will be assessed more fully as the study progresses. Insularity The islands have had relative biological isolation in the past and this aspect should be reflected in the present day constitution of their flora. ‘The relation- ship between species number and area when contrasted with analogous situations on the mainland should give a measure of the degree of this isolation in quantitative terms. History of the Flora The presence of southern elements seemingly isolated from occurrences farther to the west in the same latitude brings up the interesting question of their routes of migration. The assumed absence of these species in the tract westward along the shore of Lake Ontario between Prince Edward County and Toronto may be due to insufficient collecting. It is always difficult to prove the absence of a species, yet several botanists have visited this tract and the critical species are not revealed among their collections. The possibility of a migration northward along the east shore of Lake Ontario (Dore et al. 1959) is more attractive and the arguments in its favour can be listed. . The northward extension of numerous southern species is quite con- tinuous as far as northern Oswego County, e.g. Peltandra virginica, Castanea dentata, Sassafras albidum, Lindera benzoin, Nyssa sylvatica. 1966 Hatnautt: Fiora or IsLtanps 73 2. From there some of these elements jump westward to the islands which, in general, have a flora of southern character. 3. Such southern elements drop out in the same latitude farther westward in and beyond Prince Edward County where favourable conditions still prevail. Migration could now be stabilized or still active. It is generally agreed that the “Carolinian” elements had a wider and more northerly distribution in the Xerothermic Period. The local isolation of certain species along the eastern end of Lake Ontario and as far north as the Ottawa valley today may | be due to their persistence in special habitats during the subsequent general extinction. Why they did not persist in the region west of Prince Edward County, in the same latitude where the moderating effects of the lake should have aided their survival is still difficult to explain. More knowledge is needed regarding former levels of Lake Ontario and _ the migratory customs of the Indians. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS The Ontario Research Foundation and the McLaughlin Research Fund supported my study which is being supervised by Dr. R. Beschel. Mr. Guy Brassard assisted in 1963. Permission to work on the islands was kindly given by the owners and several agencies assisted with transportation. REFERENCES Bescuet, R. E. 1965. Comments on the Harnaurt, R. 1964. La flore de quelques vegetation of the Kingston region. Blue iles du lac Ontario. ACFAS 32° Congr. Bill 12; 32-36. Ann., Ottawa, abstract. Dorr, W. G., F. H. Montcomery, S.C. Zor- Macoun, J. 1888. Catalogue of Canadian Tar and W. J. Copy. 1959. Field trip 9, plants. Part I[V.-Endogens. Dawson Brs., southern Ontario. IX International Botani- Montreal, 248 p. cal Congress, Montreal, 40 p. Soper, J. H. 1962. Some genera of restrict- Greason, H. A., and A. Cronguisr. 1963. ed range in the Carolinian flora of Can- Manual of vascular plants of northeastern ada. Transactions of the Royal Canadian United States and adjacent Canada. Van Institute 34, pt. 1, 2-56. Nostrand, Toronto, 51 and 810 p- Received for publication 22 June 1965 A STUDY OF WATERFOWL NESTING ON THE SASKATCHEWAN RIVER DELTA GerALD H. TownsenpD Department of Wildlife Management, University of Wisconsin, Madison THIs PAPER PRESENTS an evaluation of factors influencing ‘nesting success in a floating-sedge habitat on a portion of the Saskatchewan River delta. Loss of delta wetlands is occurring at an accelerated pace through hydro-electric flood- ing and agricultural drainage (Smith, Dufresne, and Hansen, 1964), and this study of nesting success represents one phase of a larger study to evaluate the importance of such wetlands to waterfowl. Species selection of nest sites, dates of nest initiation and hatching, average clutch sizes, and nesting success were determined to provide background information useful in developing manage- ment procedures for marsh areas of the Saskatchewan delta. The study area was part of a large marsh formerly managed for muskrats (Ondatra zibethicus) by the Hudson’s Bay Company, and presently under joint management for muskrats and waterfowl by the Saskatchewan Department of Natural Resources and by Ducks Unlimited (Canada). The marsh (known locally as the fur lease) lies south of Cumberland House, Saskatchewan, and immediately south of the old channel of the Saskatchewan River (Figure 1). It includes about 500 square miles of shallow lakes, marshes, and stands of willow (Salix spp.) and balsam poplar (Populus balsamifera). A natural levee along the banks of the Saskatchewan prevents drainage of the marsh into the river, and the water levels of the adjacent marsh are usually from 4 to 10 feet higher than the latter. Precipitation averaging 16.9 inches per year (Depart- ment of Transport, 1964) and spring runoff are insufficient to maintain water levels on the marsh, and these sources are supplemented by river water brought along an upstream ditch. This and other ditches connecting the major lakes within the marsh were built in the late 1930’s and early 1940’s by the Hudson’s Bay Company to distribute water through the marsh. One of the 30 major lakes, Egg Lake, was chosen as the site of the nesting study (Figure 1). Its floating shoreline, largely of sedges (Carex sp.) or sedges and short willows, was typical of other lakes on the lease. Along part of the shore, phragmites (Phragmites communis) formed a tall border separating the open water from the sedge community behind. Most islands were also of floating sedge, with varying amounts of willows interspersed. Several islands had a mixture of cattail (Typha latifolia) and sedge as co-dominants, and most had small patches of phragmites, often border- ing parts of the islands. Approximately 2 miles of shoreline including about 122 acres along the northwest portion of Egg Lake were searched for nests. In addition, 14 islands totaling 51 acres were searched, giving a total of about 173 acres under investi- gation. 74 1966 TownseEND: WATERFOWL NESTING 75 of EGG LAKE SCALE IN MILES —————————— 0 Figure 1. Map of study area. Dotted areas were searched for nests. Inset at lower right shows Egg Lake in relation to other lakes on the lease. The present investigation was financed by Ducks Unlimited (Canada) and the University of Wisconsin. C. H. Moulder conducted a major part of the nest searching in 1963. Thanks are due J. R. H. Noble, who supplied unpub- lished climatic averages for Cumberland House. I am indebted to R. A. McCabe, J. J. Hickey, L. B. Keith, and W. G. Leitch for critical advice. MeruHops Intensive nest searching was begun on 27 May 1963 and 25 May 1964. Two or three persons, walking abreast 20-40 feet apart, searched through the wet quaking marsh attempting to flush nesting ducks. Searching was confined to the morning hours, at a time when a high percentage of laying hens are found on their nests (Mendall, 1958; Sowls, 1955). Most nests, however, were discovered in the early stages of incubation, rather than during laying. An effort was made in approaching nests to disturb the surrounding cover as little as possible. Each nest was identified by number and marked for sub- sequent visits with a tuft of sedge tied to a nearby willow. Nests were re- visited every 7-10 days. Individual nest histories were coded for data processing, and the com- puting facilities of the University of Wisconsin College of Agriculture were used in data analysis. Reference was made to Dixon and Massey (1957) and Steele and Torrie (1960) for statistical tests and tables of significance. Confid- ence limits, unless otherwise stated, are at the 95 per cent level of significance throughout the paper. 76 Tue CanapiANn Frie_p-NATURALIST Vol. 80 SuMMaARY OF Nests FounD A total of 225 nests belonging to 11 species of ducks were found on the study area. They include 89 Lesser Scaup (Aythya affinis), 49 Ring-necked Duck (A. collaris), 32 Blue-winged Teal (Amas discors), 15 Canvasback (Aythya valisineria), 13 Mallard (Anas platyrhynchos), and 7 Gadwall (A. strepera) nests. In addition, from one to three nests of Redhead (Aythya americana), Ruddy Duck (Oxyura jamaicensis), Green-winged Teal (Anas carolinensis), Pintail (A. acuta), and Shoveler (Spatula clypeata) were found. — | Three other species of ducks, Common Goldeneye (Bucephala clangula), Buf- flehead (B. albeola), and American Widgeon (Mareca americana), were observ- ed with broods on or near Egg Lake. Eighty-four nests were found in 1963, and 141 in 1964. Forty-three per cent were found on islands, although only 30 per cent of the total area searched comprised islands. PHENOLOGY OF NESTING Early-Spring Conditions The old channel of the Saskatchewan River was already open when I arrived at headquarters camp on 4 May 1963; and in 1964 the ice went out here on 27 April. By 30 April 1964, the smaller shallow lakes had opened sufficiently to permit boat travel, and the edges of the larger lakes were melting. Egg Lake opened on 5 May 1963 and on 3 May 1964. Early-nesting ducks must depend entirely on the previous year’s vegetation for nest materials and concealment. Sedges and grasses are often flattened by the weight of snow, except near the bases of low willows, but after the first two weeks in May these old stems are soon pushed up somewhat by the new growth which gradually becomes apparent. By 20 May the new sedge is 6-10 inches high. Hardstem bulrush (Scirpus acutus) on Egg Lake is, in general, not dense enough to provide suitable nesting cover for diving ducks. Stands present the previous fall that would seemingly provide adequate cover in spring usually fall short of this expectation. Cutting of stems by muskrats or ice action often completely removes the previous year’s growth from beds of this emergent, and stems are windrowed along lake shores in spring. Small beds of floating bulrush that have torn loose from the bottom of the lake offer better nesting cover in the early spring than does anchored emergent growth. Ice action does not affect cover on these floating islands, and the few Canvasback nests found on Egg Lake in bulrush were here rather than in emergent stands. One or two other lakes on the lease, however, did have emergent stands of bulrush dense enough to support nesting ducks. Whether the high, spring density of old stems indicates a lack of ice shifting in these smaller lakes, or is due to a smaller density of muskrats, I do not know. Cattail and phragmites do not flatten under the weight of snow and provide the best potential concealment during the first part of May. Nests of the early- nesting Canvasback were found in these cover types. Water levels on the lease are generally highest just after breakup, due to late-fall buildup for muskrat management and to spring runoff. Egg Lake ELEVATION (FT,) 1966 TOowNSEND: WATERFOWL NESTING 77 EGG LAKE WATER LEVELS 873.0 871.0 15 15 15 15 MAY JUNE JULY AUG. - Ficure 2. Water levels of Egg Lake during the summers of 1962-1964. water levels typically decline progressively during the nesting season (Figure 2). Because much of the immediate shoreline of Egg Lake is floating, its relative wetness does not change significantly with fluctuating water levels un- less the lake is so low that the floating mat comes to rest on the lake bottom. For about 2 weeks following breakup, however, these floating mats are frozen in the ice at lake levels existing the previous fall. Thus, any major increase in early-spring lake levels would probably flood the immediate shoreline and inundate the floating islands. Waterfowl Arrival Except for the White-winged Scoter (Melanitta deglandi), most species were present on the marsh when I arrived (4 May 1963, and 27 April 1964). The only specific observations of ducks recorded for the month of April came from Russell Robertson (Houston and Street, 1959, p. 199), manager of the lease. In 1959 he recorded the following arrival dates: Mallard and Pintail, 5 April; Lesser Scaup, 18 April; Canvasback, 28 April, and Blue-winged Teal, 6 May. By the end of the first week in May 1963, Mallards, Canvasbacks, Golden- eyes, Pintails, Redheads, Gadwalls, and Green-winged Teal were paired and on territories. Scaups and Ring-necks were paired, but still remained in large groups on the lakes. By 20 May these latter species were on territories. Dates of Nest Initiation The histories of 60 nests in 1963 and 96 nests in 1964 were complete enough to backdate to time of nest initiation. No distinction was made between “first nests” and “renests.” The earliest Mallard and Canvasback nesting records were 26 April and 1 May respectively, before ice breakup was complete and 78 Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 80 DATE OF NEST INITIATION JUNE JULY PERCENTAG Figure 3. Percentage of Scaup and Ring-neck nests beginning each week in 1963 and 1964. Sample sizes include 28 Scaup nests in 1963 and 40 in 1964; and 15 Ring-neck nests in 1963 and 23 in 1964. while the normally floating shorelines were still frozen in place. The earliest Blue-wing, Scaup, and Ring-neck nest records were 11 May, 15 May, and 16 May respectively. Mean dates when laying began during 1963 and 1964 respectively for 86 Scaup were 3 June + 3 days and 2 June + 2 days; for 38 Ring-neck, 30 May + 4 and 31 May + 3; for 19 Blue-wing, 26 May + 8 and 1 June + 3; and for 150 nests of all species, 1 June + 2 and 31 May + 2. Mean dates in 1963 were not significantly different from those in 1964 for any of the species. The distribution of initiation dates for Scaup and Ring-neck showed differ- ences between years, however, with the levels of significance approaching 85 per cent for Scaup, and 99 per cent for Ring-neck (Figure 3). On Egg Lake, Scaup apparently reached a nesting peak 1 week earlier in 1964 than in 1963, and I suspect that lack of renesting in 1964 caused this difference. Small- sample size might account for the extreme variation in the 1963 Ring-neck data. Brood observations provided a more complete picture of nesting chron- ology on the marsh because of the much larger sample obtained. I estimated mean dates of nest initiation for each species by backdating class I broods seen throughout the lease. Thirty-five days were used as the average interval between nest initiation and hatching. Mean dates of nest initiation for Mallards, Canvasbacks, and Goldeneyes were during the third week in May; for Redheads, Buffleheads, and Widgeons during the last week in May; and for Blue-wings, Ring-necks, and Scaups during the first week in June. Average dates for Ruddy Duck and White-winged Scoter nests were in mid-June. Weekly variation in beginning of nesting differed little between years for Scaups and Canvasbacks, but Ring-necks peaked one week earlier in 1963 than 1966 TownseNpD: WaTERFOWL NESTING 79 DATE OF NEST INITIATION APRIL MAY JUNE JULY APRIL MAY JUNE JULY o o ” Oo uno VOAnna Puwamnnr ve te AiG Or OG STi Haan Te eet | a a o ty = A ln i foe ety oe We ALLARD PERCENTAGE RING- NECK wo N ' 2 NO LY AUGUST DATE OF HATCH Figure 4. Distribution of successful nests of 5 species according to time of both initiation and hatching, as determined from backdating broods. Brood numbers include 438 Scaup, 163 Canvasback, 387 Ring-neck, 145 Blue-wing, 42 Mallard, and 1,481 all species. in 1964 (Figure 4). Blue-wing brood numbers in 1964 were small, as were those of the Mallard in both years, and this probably accounts for the observed differences between years. Figure 4 also presents the percentage of successful hens of all species begin- ning to nest each week. Selecting a date to start maintaining constant water levels can thus be done with a knowledge of what fraction of the nesting popu- lation will be affected. At least 4 per cent of the nests were started by 12 May 1963, and 8 per cent by this date in 1964. The percentage of nests being started increased rapidly thereafter, and any subsequent water-level manipula- tion might have affected a substantial portion of the nesting population. Average Hatching Dates The 1963-64 mean dates of hatch determined from nest data were: for 57 Scaup, 5 July + 2 days; for 37 Ring-neck, 2 July + 2; and for 13 Blue-wing, 30 June + 5 days. Evidence from brood data indicates that the peak hatch occur- red during the first week of July in 1963, and during the second week of July in 1964 (Figure 4). Mean dates of hatch for all species, determined from brood 80 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 80 data, were 7 July + 1 and 4 July + 1, for a 2-year average of 6. July + 1. Ninety-two per cent of the successful nests were completed by 22 July 1963, and 99 per cent by the same date in 1964 (Figure 4). Mean hatching dates determined from 438 Scaup, 387 Ring-neck, and 145 Blue-wing broods (10 July + 1, 9 July + 1, and 7 July + 1 respectively) averaged 5-7 days later than those indicated by nest records. This difference could be due to a bias in the brood backdating procedure; or, since brood counts apply to the entire marsh, it could be that a slightly higher nesting success on Egg Lake tended to advance the mean date of hatch here. Since Egg Lake has more mammal-free islands than most of the other lakes on the marsh, I believe the latter explanation is more plausible. Mean dates of hatch for 163 Canvasback, 42 Mallard, 79 Goldeneye, and 99 Ruddy Duck broods were 22 June: a= 1-22) June =2)4 23) June ==) 2 yand 15° July,== lerespecsielye ; GENERAL Nest Data Nesting Cover and Nest Densities The percentages of each cover type searched on the islands and mainland were estimated by eye. They included approximately 45 per cent sedge, 40 per cent sedge-willow, 10 per cent sedge-cattail, and 5 per cent phragmites, with smaller amounts of cattail, cattail-phragmites, sedge-phragmites, and bulrush cover. Nesting Scaups, Ring-necks and Blue-wings tended to select the sedge habitat, while the Mallards seemed to prefer the sedge-willow complex (Table 1). Canvasbacks utilized phragmites over the other types. Average densities of nests found in 1963 and 1964 were 0.45 and 0.73 nests per acre respectively, with a 2-year average of 0.59. Intensity of searching was greater in 1964 than in 1963, and this probably accounts for the difference — between years. ‘These figures represent minimum densities for the study area, because the procedure for locating nests relied mainly on flushing the hens, and undoubtedly some nests were missed. Nest densities on the islands averaged 0.82 nest per acre, while those on the mainland were 0.47. Densities were highest in the sedge cover, 1.0 nest per acre, and lowest in phragmites, 0.2 nest per acre (Table 1). Clutch Size Clutch sizes were determined for 203 nests in which laying was known to be completed. Blue-winged Teal had the highest average clutch size with 9.8 + 0.4, while Canvasbacks had the lowest with 7.2 + 0.9. Scaups had slightly larger clutches than Ring-neck, 9.0 + 0.3 vs. 8.4 + 0.4. Sample sizes were 25, 14, 84, and 46 respectively. Average clutch size of Scaup decreased as the nesting season progressed. The simple correlation coefficient between clutch size (Y) and date of nest initiation (X) was —0.526 (66 nests), and highly significant from zero, while the simple regression coefficient was —0.097, also highly significant. Thus for every 10.3 days during the nesting season, the average clutch size of Lesser Scaup decreased by one egg. Although the Blue-wing and Ring-neck clutch 1966 Townsenp: WATERFOWL NEsTING 81 TABLE 1. — Nest densities and percentages of nests in major cover types. Only nests found by systematic searching are included. Percentages of nests in each cover type Cover Acres a 7 Nests/ |- type searched oe acre Ri C Bl ; Seaup | Ring [Camge| Blve- | matter Oe CES CUS ler Gi eaee Sedge 71.5 U2 1.0 17% 19% 71% 80% 25% Sedge-willow 68.7 17 0.3 8% 4% 0% 13% 50% Sedge-cattail 14.8 9 0.6 8% 15% 71% 7% 17% Phragmites 9.8 2 0.2 2% 0% 47% 0% 0% sizes also declined during the nesting period, the changes were not statistically significant, probably due to insufficient sample size. The average number of eggs hatching in 55 Scaup, 37 Ring-neck, and 13 Blue-wing nests was 8.7 + 0.4, 8.4 + 0.4, and 9.2 + 1.0 respectively. This rep- resents an average decrease from the completed clutch size of 0.3 egg per nest for Scaups, 0 for Ring-necks, and 0.8 for Blue-wings. Out of 1,131 eggs laid in successful nests of all species, 51 (4.5 per cent) failed to hatch because of death of the embryo, infertility, etc. “This compares with a loss of 7.3 per cent found by Keith in Alberta and 9 per cent for eight previous studies (Keith, 1961). Nestinc SUCCESS Biases Attributed to Presence of the Investigator Nesting studies are often criticized because of the possible influence of the investigator on the predation and/or desertion rate. Trails made by the investigator to nests, nest markers, increased desertions, and defecation by flushing hens have all been cited as introduced effects that increase predation (Hammond and Forward, 1956). In an effort to reduce these effects, I attempted to approach each nest from a different direction during each visit, and kept the number of visits toa minimum. Visible nest markers consisted of a clump of dead grass tied to a willow nearby. The markers resembled those used by local Indians in marking muskrat traps and are seen frequently on the marsh. If a bird defecated on a nest when flushed, I washed the nest and eggs by sprinkling water over them, and I covered all nests with nest material upon leaving. To determine whether or not defecting on the nest by the hen, and sub- sequent washing of the nest and contents by me, had any significant effect on the predation rate, I recorded whether or not a bird defecated when flushed. In 196 first visits, 30 per cent of the hens defecated when flushed from the nest. After a period of from 7 to 10 days, each nest was revisited, and its fate noted. Twelve per cent of 58 nests on which hens defecated during first visit were destroyed. Twenty per cent of 138 nests not defecated on were destroyed. 82 THE CaNnapiAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 80 | TABLE 2. — Summary of fate of nests in 1963 and 1964. Predation Site Deserted Hatched Total Mammal Avian Unknown Mainland 2 14 7 28 62 113 Island 3 1 6 5 70 85 Total 5 15 13 33 132 198 A Chi-square test yields no significant difference between the two groups. Due to the flooded conditions of the study area, reducing the possibility of lingering human scent, I suspect that the presence of persons searching for nests had very little effect on the predation rate. Computing Nesting Success Nesting success was computed by two methods. The customary method, whereby the number of successful nests is divided by total nests of known fate, was used because it provides a basis of comparison with previous nesting studies. Another procedure, developed by Mayfield (1961), was also used, because it takes into account the previously uncorrected bias resulting from incomplete nest history. Briefly, this procedure expresses nest success in terms of a daily survival rate, calculated by dividing total unsuccessful nests by the total number of nest days of observation. The probability of a nest surviving the entire period of laying and incubation is the daily survival rate (1 — mortality rate) raised to a power representing the number of days required for egg laying and incubation. To use this procedure, one must assume a constant survival rate throughout the nesting period of 35 days. Fate of Nests, Islands vs. Mainland Thirty-one per cent of 198 nests were destroyed by predators, and 3 per cent were deserted. Less than half of the predators could be identified with rea- sonable assurance as being mammalian or avian. Of these, mammalian predators destroyed two-thirds of the mainland nests, but only one on the islands (Table 2). Major predators on islands were Crows (Corvus brachyrhynchos) and Ravens (C. corax), while probable predators on the mainland included foxes (Vulpes vulpes), weasels (Mustela spp.), coyotes (Canis latrans), and possibly skunks (Mephitis mephitis) and mink (Mustela vison). There was no reason to suspect that avian predation on islands was different to that on the mainland. Nest loss on the mainland was 63 per cent, and that on the islands was 27 per cent, and the difference of 36 per cent represents the probable amount of predation caused by mammalian species not reaching the islands. Nesting Success by Species Overall nesting success for 1963 was 70 + 10 per cent, calculated by the standard method, or 58 per cent, calculated by Mayfield’s procedure (Table 3). 1966 TOWNSEND: WATERFOWL NESTING 83 TABLE 3. — Overall nesting success of major species in 1963 and 1964. Confidence limits on percent success are at the 95% level, and numbers of nests are in parentheses. 1963 1964 Species Percent Mayfield Percent Mayfield success percent success success percent success Lesser Scaup 73 + 16 (33) 62 (35) 64+ 14 (50) AT (54) Ring-necked Duck Sou alin Clap) 83 (18) 76+ 16 (29) 60 (31) Canvasback 100 (3) 100 (3) 100 (5) 100 (12) Blue-winged Teal WY) ae Shi (2) 20 (16) 60 + 27 (15) 36 (16) Mallard 67 (3) 46 (3) 56+ 38 (9) 37 (10) Total 70 + 10 (76) 58 (84) 65+ 8 (122) 47 (141) Nesting success in 1964 was 65 + 8 per cent and 47 per cent respectively. Success by species is presented in Table 4. Keith (1961) reported 20 per cent success for 115 Scaup nests in parkland habitat. Rogers (1964) found Scaup nesting success very low on prairie pot- holes, and he attributed this partly to increased predation during years of low water. Ring-neck success in floating- sedge habitat in Maine was 69 + 4 per cent, almost equal to that found in this study (Mendall, 1958). Scaup and Ring- neck seemingly are more successful nesting in flooded or floating sedge. Blue-wing nesting success in the present study was considerably lower than that of Scaup and Ring- -neck, and comparable to success found in the park- lands (48 per cent in 84 nests) (Keith, 1961), and in prairie potholes (32 per cent in 192 nests) (Stoudt et al., 1953, 1954, 1955, 1956). Blue-winged Teal, however, tended to select the disiez sedge habitat, shite resembles somewhat the moist meadows or hayfields surrounding potholes and parkland impoundments. TaBLe 4. — Mainland and island nesting success of major species during 1963-64. Confidence limits on standard method are at the 95% level, and numbers of nests are in parentheses Mainland nesting success] Island nesting success | Overall nesting success Species re Standard |Mayfield; Standard |Mayfield} Standard | Mayfield method method method method method method Lesser Scaup 55+ 16 (40) | 37 (45) | 79+ 12(43) | 70(44) | 67+ 10 (83) | 53 (89) Ring-necked Duck | 76+ 15 (33) | 63 (35) | 92+ 16(13) | 86(14) | 80+ 12 (46) | 69 (49) Canvasback — (0);}— (2) 100 (8) | 100(13) 100 (8) | 100 (15) Blue-winged Teal | 42+ 24 (19) | 17 (23) | 75+ 36 (8) | 60 (9) | 52+ 20 (27) | 28 (32) Mallard De) se 4 (ff) || 115) (es) 10 (GS) 1100) (S)) |) S8ee Sl CA) |) sO (ls) All divers 60+ 11 (79) | 42 (83) | 824+ 9(69)| 88(75) | 70+ 7(148) | 56(158) All dabblers 44+ 17 (34) | 24 (39) | 814 21(16) | 67(18) | 56+ 14 (SO) | 35 (57) All species 55+ 9(113) | 37(122) | 82+ 8(85) | 73(93) | 67+ 7(198) | 51(215) 84 Tue CanapniAn Fretp-NATURALIST Vol. 80 TABLE 5. — Number of nests by species in each site classification, - 1963-64. Canvasback total includes two nests found in emergent vegetation. Site classification Species Rio Total . emi- : Floating flonan Solid Lesser Scaup 42 25 12 79 Ring-necked Duck 21 12 13 46 Blue-winged Teal 5 d 17 29 Mallard 3 1 5 9 Canvasback 3 0 6 11 Miscellaneous species 9 7 7 23 Total 83 52 60 197 Nesting Success Related to Site Classification and Distance to Water The floating-sedge mats used by nesting Scaups, Ring-necks, and even Blue-wings were typically riddled with small channels and openings that apparently provided excellent interspersion of nesting cover and water. Fifty- three per cent of the Scaup nests, 46 per cent Ring-neck nests, and 17 per cent of the Blue-wing nests were found in this site type (Table 5). Where the ground was solid or semisolid, water often lay in the depressions between sedge hummocks, and scarcely a square yard of cover existed without some water on it. Only in the center of a few of the large islands, and back from the lake- shore 50-100 yards, did moist rather than flooded sedge meadow exist. Forty-seven per cent of 77 nests were found on quaking sites in 1963, while 84 per cent of 118 nests were discovered here in 1964. Lake levels, however, were approximately 3-4 inches higher in 1964 (Figure 2). This suggests that the ducks chose to nest in the same area in both years, even though the area was somewhat wetter in 1964. I made two measurements of nest distances from water, i.e., to the nearest large body of water, usually the lake itself, or an opening greater in area than 50 x 50 feet, and to the closest water, such as a small channel, or flooded sedge. In distance to large water, the Canvasback nested closest, followed in order by the Scaup, Ring-neck, Blue-wing, and the Mallard (Figure 5). The mean distance of all nests from large water was 74 + 12 feet. Success- ful nests averaged 64 + 13 feet from water, and unsuccessful nests averaged 82 + 24 feet. Apparently nests closest to the lakeshore suffered less predation. It appears from a species breakdown (Table 6) that predation falls heaviest on dabblers because they are more reluctant to nest in extremely wet sites close to water than are divers. Canvasback, Ring-neck, and Scaup nests averaged 1-2 feet from nearest water, while Mallard and Blue-wing nests averaged 6 + 5 and 17 + 10 feet respectively. Mean distances from nearest water were smaller in 1964 than in 1963, probably due to the difference in water levels previously mentioned. 1966 ‘TOWNSEND: WATERFOWL NESTING 85 100 Ww | w Ld = 80 We (@) = 60 ud O a uJ a an XO > fe | = = 20 O O 11-20 2|-30 31-40 41-50 51-lOO 101-150 151-200 DISTANCE FROM LARGE WATER (FT.) Figure 5. Distribution of nests of 5 species from large bodies of water (greater than 50 x 50 feet). Sample sizes include 15 Canvasback, 85 Scaup, 49 Ring-neck, 32 Blue-wing, and 12 Mallard nests. All nests averaged 5.0 + 2.0 feet from nearest water, with successful nests at 2.3 + 0.7 feet, and unsuccessful nests at 10.0 + 5.5 feet. Once again there was the indication that nests closest to water, 7.e., on the wettest sites, were more successful. Keith (1961) found the opposite relationship, predation being the highest along the Juncus zone closest to water. However, closeness to water in his prairie pothole study referred to a moist-soil condition, which presumably made odors easier to detect. I suspect the primary reason for less predation close to water in the present study was that the floating-mat conditions deterred foxes, coyotes, and skunks from consistently hunting in these areas. Nesting Success Related to Cover Types Two morphologically different groups of sedges were found on Egg Lake, i.e., the “needle-leafed” sedges, consisting of Carex lanuginosa and C. diandra; and the “broad-leafed” sedges, C. lacustris, C. aquatilis, C. atherodes and C. rostrata. The data, upon examination, showed no significant difference in hat- ching success between the groups, and the two cover types were thus com- bined into one — the sedge zone. Another major cover type, the sedge-willow zone, included sedges as understory with interspersed low willow species, Salix candida, and S. pedicellaris, as dominants. Nests in the sedge zone experienced a lower predation rate (32 + 8 per cent in 131 nests) than did those in the sedge-willow complex (57 + 18 per cent in 30 nests). The mean distance of nests from large water in the sedge zone was 86 THe CaAnapiAn Frevp-NATURALIST Vol. 80 a 80 + 14 feet, while that for the sedge-willow zone was 140 + 127 feet. I 1 suspect the predation rate was more a function of wetness of habitat than cover | type per se — the sedge zone being adjacent to open water, and the sedge- | willow zone farther inland. . MANAGEMENT The aim of this section is to make recommendations for increasing water- fowl productivity in habitats comparable to the one involved in the present study. The data can be used in formulating a water-level management plan involving multiple interests. Water Levels During Nesting At least 5 per cent of all ducks had begun nesting by 12 May. There is very little time between ice breakup at the end of April and the beginning of waterfowl nesting in which to raise or lower water levels without threatening nests of the Mallard and Canvasback in particular. Toward the end of the nesting season, approximately 95 per cent of successful nests were completed by 20 July. Species most vulnerable to loss of nests at this time are the Ruddy Duck and the White-winged Scoter. Water levels should not be changed be- fore this date. Species differences in requirements for nesting must be considered when establishing optimum levels to hold water. I found a significant shift in the species composition of brood counts between 1962 and 1963 on lakes that had markedly lower water levels in 1963 (Townsend, unpublished data). The per- centage of dabblers in total brood counts increased in 1963 on lakes which had lower water levels that year, while there was no significant change in brood percentages on those lakes that had no water level changes. Unfortunately, part of the differences observed could be due to a change in species observ- ability of broods associated with lower water levels; the magnitude of this bias remains unknown. If the differences were real, then the question arises whether or not they reflect a decline in diver production, an increase in dabbler production, or combination of both, under low-water conditions. Since the nest data indicate higher success for nests closer to water, perhaps higher water levels would increase nest success by causing nests to be situated closer to water. When water levels are increased, the floating-mat vegetation surrounding many of the lakes merely floats higher. Toward drier ground the water may flood vegetation where it is anchored solidly to the bottom, but this ring of flooded sedge or sedge-willow would probably act as a deterrent to mammal predators attempting to reach the floating zone. Holding water high would probably benefit divers more than dabblers, although dabblers also make use of floating sites for nesting (Table 5). On lakes where nesting cover is adequate and much of the immediate shore- line tends to be floating, | recommend holding the water high. Where the shoreline is not floating, and increased emergent vegetation is desired, water levels should be held lower. This can be accomplished largely by control structures between lakes. | 1966 TOWNSEND: WATERFOWL NESTING 87 Increasing Nesting Success The present study indicates that nesting success on this small portion of the Saskatchewan delta is as high or higher than average success reported for the prairies. Nevertheless, a substantial percentage of nests are lost each year to predation. In view Of the extremely high nesting success observed on islands, creating more nesting islands in impoundments of this type might be one way to increase production. The irregularity of lake shorelines could be used to ad- vantage, by converting peninsulas into islands through channel blasting. An- _ other way of creating islands would be to raise the water levels of lakes that have floating shorelines, thereby creating a strip of flooded shore around the lake separating the floating cover from the mainland. SUMMARY A total of 225 duck nests were studied during 1963 and 1964 in floating- - sedge habitat on the Saskatchewan River delta. Clutch sizes averaged 9.0 + 0.3 for Lesser Scaup, 8.4 + 0.4 for Ring-necked Duck, 7.2 + 0.9 for Canvas- back, and 9.8 + 0.4 for Blue-winged Teal. Mean dates of nest initiation and hatching were determined from nests and backdating 1,481 class I broods. Mean dates of nest initiation for Mallards, Canvasbacks, and Common Golden- eyes occurred during the third week in May; for Redheads, Buffleheads, and Widgeons during the last week in May, and for Blue- -wings, Ringnecks, and Scaups during the first week in June. ‘Peak hatches occurred during the first week of July in 1963 and the second week of July in 1964. A significant de- crease in clutch size of one egg for every 10.3 days’ delay in nesting was observ- ed for Scaup. Island nest densities averaged 0.82 nest per acre while mainland densities were 0.47 nest per acre. Overall nesting success was 70 + 10 per cent in 1963 and 65 + 8 per cent in 1964. Mayfield’s procedure of computing nest- ing success reduced these figures to 58 per cent and 47 per cent respectively. Island nesting success averaged 82 + 8 per cent, while that on the mainland was 55 + 9 per cent. Success was highest among nests closest to water. Recom- mendations for improving nesting success include the construction of small nesting islands out of peninsulas and raising water levels to deter foxes and other mammals from reaching floating shorelines. REFERENCES DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORT, METEOROLOGICAL Carlton to Cumberland. Saskatchewan Brancu, Toronto, Ontario. 1964. Cum- Natural History Society Special Publica- berland House, Saskatchewan — Climatic tion No. 2, Regina, Saskatchewan. 205 pp. averages, 1931-1960. Unpublished memo. Kerru, L. B. 1961. A study of waterfowl Dixon, W. J. and F. J. Massey, Jr. 1957. ecology on small impoundments in south- Introduction to statistical analysis. 2nd eastern Alberta. Wildlife Monographs 6. edition. McGraw-Hill Book Company, 88 pp. New York. 488 pp. Mayrietp, H. 1961. Nesting success calcu- Hammonnp, M. C. and W. R. Forwarp. 1956. lated from exposure. Wilson Bulletin 73 Experiments on causes of duck nest pre- (3) :255-261. dation. Journal of Wildlife Management Menparr, H. L. 1958. The ring-necked 20(3) :243-247. duck in the Northeast. University of Houston, C. S. and M. G. Srreer. 1959. Maine Studies, Second Series, No. 73, The birds of the Saskatchewan River: Orono, 317 pp. 88 Tue CANADIAN Fre_p-NATURALIST Vol. 80 Rocers. J. P. 1964. Effect of drought on Scientific Report Wildlife No. 21, Wash- reproduction of the lesser scaup. Journal of Wildlife Management 28 (2) :213-222. SmitH, R. H., F. Durresne, and H. A. HAn- SEN. 1964. Northern watersheds and del- tas. Pages 51-66. In J. P. Linpuska and A. L. Netson (Editors), Waterfowl tomor- row. Bureau Sport Fisheries and Wildlife, Fish and Wildlife Service, United States Department of the Interior, Washington, D.C. 770 pp. Sowts, L. K. 1955. Prairie ducks: a study of their behavior, ecology and manage- ment. The Stackpole Company, Harris- burg, and The Wildlife Management In- stitute, Washington, D.C. 193 pp. STEEL, R. G. D. and J. H. Torrie. 1960. Principles and procedures of statistics: with special reference to the biological sciences McGraw-Hill Book Company, New York. 481 pp. Stoupt, J. H. 1953. Waterfowl breeding ground survey of Redvers area, Saskatche- wan. Pages 52-60. In Waterfowl popula- tions and breeding conditions—summer 1952. United States Fish and Wildlife Ser- vice and Canadian Wildlife Service Special ———.,, and B. A. YEacer. ington, D.C. 303 pp. ; , and R. J. Butrer. 1954. Water- fowl breeding ground survey of Redvers area, Saskatchewan. Pages 55-64. Im Water- fowl populations and breeding conditions —summer 1953. United States Fish and Wildlife Service and Canadian Wildlife Service Special Scientific Report Wildlife No. 25, Washington, D.C. 250 pp. , and M. Stinnett. 1955. Water- fowl breeding ground survey of Redvers area, Saskatchewan, 1952-1954. Pages 56- 65. In Waterfowl populations and breed- ing conditions — summer 1954. United States Fish and Wildlife Service and Can- adian Wildlife Service Special Scientific Report Wildlife No. 27, Washington, D.C. 288 pp. 1956. Water- fowl breeding ground survey of Redvers area, Saskatchewan, 1952-1955. Pages 63- 72. In Waterfowl populations and breed- — ing conditions — summer 1955. United States Fish and Wildlife Service and Canadian Wildlife Service Special Scien- tific Report Wildlife No. 30, Washington, D.C. 267 pp. Received for publication 26 August 1965 we ———— Mee cuts ee pt eee PR EE, THE ABUNDANCE OF LEMMINGS AT ABERDEEN LAKE, DISTRICT OF KEEWATIN, 1959-63 A. H. MacpHEerson Canadian Wildlife Service, Ottawa OBJECTIVE A RECENT sTupy by the Canadian Wildlife Service at Aberdeen Lake (64° 37’ N., 99° 43’ W.), District of Keewatin, Northwest Territories (Figure 1), of the factors controlling the abundance and harvests of the arctic fox (Alopex _ lagopus), included regular assessment of the lemming population near base _ camp by means of a line of snap-traps. The indices of lemming abundance so obtained between 1960 and 1963 are here presented and discussed, with some supplementary field notes. MeETHOD Although no trapping was done, it was observed on a visit to the study area in 1959 that lemmings were very scarce. In 1960, camp was established at Aberdeen Lake in May, and in early June, a prefabricated building was erected as a base for the study. In mid-June, a line of twenty snap-traps was laid, at lemming sign, in a roughly circular course of about one and a half miles, with the cabin near the circumference. ‘The traps were left out over the next three years, but were baited (with raisins) and set only for two-day periods in mid-June and mid-July. Lemming specimens caught in 1960, 1961 and 1963 were deposited in the collections of the National Museum of Canada, those of 1961 by my wife, Elizabeth Macpherson. ‘The 1962 collection was sent to the University Zoological Museum, Oslo, Norway. ‘The traps were positioned so as to sample the sedge meadows favoured by the brown lemming Lemmus sibiricus (=trimucronatus), the dry ridges inhabited by the varying lemming Dicrostonyx torquatus (= groenlandicus) and a variety of intermediate habitats. The animals caught, plus identifiable set-offs, were recorded. In June 1960, the 40 trap-nights yielded 14 Dicrostonyx and nine Lemmus: these catches were arbitrarily given index values of 100, and subsequent catches were given per- centage values of the first catches. Each time the traps were reset, fewer appeared to be in “good” locations, close to signs of lemming activity. At the same time, previously unnoticed lemming sign was seen at places on the line where no traps had been set. It appeared probable that, if the traps had been placed anew each year at fresh sign, larger catches would have resulted in the years since the year in which the line was first established. An effort was made in 1963 to estimate the extent of the loss in efficiency that was believed to have occurred. A new line of 20 traps was set at lemming sign in an area similar to that of the first, or standard trap line, and centred about a quarter of a mile from it. A two-day trapping period produced a slightly higher catch of both species in this new area than in the first. I took this result to mean that the standard line was not catching as many lemmings as it would have done had it been reset in similar habitat, but 89 90 Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 80 TABLE 1. — Adjusted lemming population indices, Aberdeen Lake standard trap line (see text). Dicrostonyx Lemmus Combined Weare as | June July June July June July 1960 100 100 100 44 100 72 1961 121 81 24 13 74 48 1962 12 19 41 7 26 13 1963 36 43 33 11 34 27 at fresh sign, each year. The loss in efficiency was assumed to have been pro- ressive since 1960, and cumulative yearly increments were added to the indices of 1961, 1962 and 1963, of 2.3 units for Dicrostonyx, 3.7 for Lemmus, and 2.9 for the combined lemming index (Table 1). Only adjusted indices are given in this paper. The differences observed, and for which adjustments to the indices were made, may have, of course, been due merely to chance variation about the mean. In fact, the increments added were so small as to make very little difference to the results. Stupy AREA Brown and varying lemmings occupy different habitats on the central arctic tundra. In summer, the brown lemming is typically an inhabitant of sedge meadows, particularly of wet cotton-grass lowlands, and the varying lemming of the dryer, more barren uplands. ‘The relative number of each species caught on a trap-line is therefore dependent,to a great extent on the proportion of wet and dry habitats on its course. Some description is there- fore required of the study area and its vegetation. The area trapped lies at the west end of Aberdeen Lake, and is underlain by more or less flat-bedded Dubawnt Sandstone, Precambrian in age, but so generally covered with till and debris that only the occasional frost-heaved slab is visible on the surface. The former glaciation of the area is indicated by num- erous eskers and related depositional features, as well as by fluted moraines. The country is low and rolling on the north side of the lake, with emerged strand features dating from a period of post-glacial marine transgression. On the south shore, the land rises gently to some 800 feet above the lake, and shows bold terraces, evidence of deep proglacial lakes. As might be expected from its geomorphic history (Bird, 1951), the sandstone has been much weathered and redeposited as lacustrine and alluvial plains or terraces. In walking over the study area, one crosses a succession of low, rounded rises and intervening gentle dips. ‘The rises display prominent wind blow-outs, often associated with caribou trails, and are characteristically surfaced with pebbles, cobbles and coarse sand. The vegetation of nearby, similar areas has 1966 MacpHEersSON: ABUNDANCE OF LEMMINGS 91 ABERDEEN erdeen_. ec Ne ¢ rears _|Lake,* Figure 1. The location of the standard trap line at Aberdeen Lake (top) in the District of Keewatin, Northwest Territories (bottom). been desuribed by Kelsall and Loughrey (Kelsall, 1960) and by Krebs (1964). In well-drained places, it is often very sparse, being limited to a few clumps of grass and cushion plants. Elsewhere, the ridges may be densely clothed in black, crinkly lichen (Alectoria) which itself may cover a continuous layer of sphagnum moss, broken here and there by clumps of grass, or by mud-boils sup- porting tenacious birch or rhododendron plants. The dips are occupied typic- ally by wet cotton grass and sedge meadows, often tussocked. Other common components of the slope vegetation are berries such as bilberry and baked-apple. On the sides of the ridges, intermediate associations occur, and these, as well as most of the other associations, often include Labrador tea as a prominent component. 92 Tue CanapiANn Frecp-NaturALIST Vol. 80 | i Barrow Med. Low AJAOD FA J ODFAJAODFAYJ AOD FA Li OE SEE a Aberdeen Lake High ig 4 , | y Dicrostonyx Med. | / Lemmus Low / [NESTS O10) TENSE NO) oy ie S/N SO io) Sa YN Ol ie ye A ©) 0) CESSES LS CEES SR 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 Ficure 2. A hypothetical curve of changes in the number of trappable lemmings (Dicro- stonyx and Lemmus) at the northwest corner of Aberdeen Lake, 1959-1963, based on ({ ee Beeb) adjusted snap-trap indices (see Table 1). The indices are shown as “x's For com- parison, the relative abundance of the two species, according to Krebs (1963), 115 miles to the east at Baker Lake, is shown by an “L” for Lemmus and a “D” for Dicrostonyx. LEMMING NUMBERS Table 1 and Figure 2 show the lemming indices obtained: in the figure they are joined by curves representing the supposed relative population SIZe for the intervals between trapping periods. Figure 2 also includes an estimate of lemming numbers in 1959, based entirely on casual observations made near the study area. The relative abundance of lemmings in the latter half of July at Aberdeen Lake and Baker Lake, as estimated on the basis of intensive studies by Krebs (1963 and 1964, and 7m litt.) is shown in Table 2 Differences between the two sets of indices for Aberdeen Lake exist in part because those of Krebs are based on a July trapping period, whereas mine are means of June and July trapping periods. As might be expected, Krebs’ indices compare better with the July figures from Table 1 alone. His figures were based on a much larger number of trap nights (645 in 1960 to 2,226 in 1962), but are perhaps less directly comparable from year to year. The productivity of the two sets of trap lines also differed greatly. Krebs’ traps were set accord- ing to a standard grid pattern, and caught their maximum of 15 lemmings per 1966 MacpHerson: ABUNDANCE OF LEMMINGS 93 TABLE 2. — Comparison of estimates of lemming abundance at Baker Lake and Aberdeen Lake, 1959 to 1963. (1) Krebs (1963): relative density based mainly on live trapping, (2) Krebs (in litt.; also 1964): crude indices based on snap-trapping, (3) means of June and July indices from Table 1. All reduced to percentages of highest number in the series. Baker Lake Aberdeen Lake Year (1) (2) (3) Lemmus | Dicrostonyx | Lemmus | Dicrostonyx | Lemmus | Dicrostonyx 1959 2 ~7 - = = = 1960 100 100 100 100 100 99 1961 7 21 59 55 26 100 1962 2 24 32 14 33 16 1963 31 40 100 trap nights in 1960. In the same year, mine caught lemmings at the rate of over 50 per 100 trap nights. DIscussiIon The synchrony between the population oscillations of the two lemmings is noteworthy, particularly in view of the differences in appearance and habitat between the two species. The synchrony is more pronounced in the Baker Lake data than in that from Aberdeen Lake, where Dicrostonyx apparently increased considerably in the winter of 1960-61, a period for which Krebs (1963) deduced a decrease at Baker Lake. It is also notable that the Baker Lake and Aberdeen Lake lemming oscillations were in phase, when one con- siders that only the most tenuous sort of continuity could be held to exist between the lemming populations of the two areas, separated by 115 miles of hills, boulder fields, lakes and rivers. According to verbal report, the cyclic high of 1960, at least, was synchronous over an even larger area, including Eskimo Point, some 300 miles southeast of the Aberdeen Lake base camp. The pronounced downturn that lemming populations usually took during the summer months is in accord with the generalizations of Pitelka (1957), although, as Krebs (1963) has pointed out for Baker Lake, predation and destruction of cover are untenable explanations for this phenomenon in the District of Keewatin. The shape of the curve of population increase given by Pitelka (Figure 3), however, differs markedly from that obtained by snap- trapping at Aberdeen Lake, and also, apparently, from that based on Krebs’ abundant data. The precipitous decline, followed by a rising curve interrupted by minor declines each summer, of the Barrow lemmings, is perhaps duplicated in the 1961-63 Dicrostonyx data from Aberdeen Lake, but not by the contem- porary Lemmus indices. The 1959-1961 Keewatin Lemmus data, however, cannot be related to any part of the Point Barrow brown lemming curve, nor to the hypotheses of Lack (1954), Pitelka (1957) and Bee and Hall (1956), which invoke either critical predation or food shortage following degradation of the plant cover. 04 THe CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 80 125 >< 100 Dicrostonyx 75 50 25 1959 1960 196] Figure 3. The curves from Figure 2 (bottom) compared with the generalized curve of Pitelka (1957) for the Lemmmus cycle at Point Barrow, Alaska. The recording of changes in the abundance of Aberdeen Lake lemmings, and their apparent synchrony between species and between places, is the main object of this report. Some comments on the shape of the curve constructed about the index points have also been made. For a study of the biological phenomena associated with Keewatin lemming cycles, and their possible causa- tion, the reader is referred to Krebs (1963, 1964). For critical readings of this note in manuscript, | am indebted to Dr. C. J. Krebs of the University of Indiana, and to Dr. D. A. Munro, Mr. A. G. Loughrey and Mr. D. Eagles of the Canadian Wildlife Service. REFERENCES Ber, J. W. and E.R. Harr. 1956. Mammals ————. 1964. The lemming cycle at of northern Alaska. University of Kansas Baker Lake, Northwest Territories, dur- Museum of Natural History Miscellaneous ing 1959-62. Arctic Institute of North Am- Publication No. 8. 309 pp., illus. erica Technical Paper No. 15, 104 pp., Biro, J. B. 1951. The physiography of the illus. middle and lower Thelon Basin. Geo- Lack, D. 1954. The natural regulation of graphical Bulletin 1: 14-28. animal numbers. 8 + 343 pp., illus. Ox- Kexsatt, J. P. 1960. Co-operative studies ford. of barren-ground caribou 1957-58. Can- Prrerxa, F. A. 1957. Some aspects of popu- adian Wildlife Service Wildlife Manage- lation structure in the short-term cycle ment Bulletin (1) 15. 4 + 145 pp., illus. of the brown lemming in northern Alaska. Kress, C. J. 1963. Lemming cycle at Baker Cold Spring Harbour Symposium on Lake, Canada, during 1959-62. Science 140 Quantitative Biology 22:237-251. (3567): 674-76. Received for publication 21 September 1965 PROBOSCIDEAN MOLARS FROM MANITOBA Harvey R. YouneG Department of Geology, Brandon College, Brandon, Man.* THE RECORD of mammoth remains in Manitoba has been summarized by Leith (1949). These remains consist of two tusk fragments and two teeth found in Pleistocene gravel deposits at the following locations (Figure 1); 1. A tusk fragment; from the south bank of the Swan River, 34 miles north of the town of Benito. 2. A tusk fragment, in a gravel pit 4 miles east and 1 mile north of Transcona. Leith suggests the probable location of this find as Section 12, Township 11, Range 4, East of the Principal Meridian. 3. A milk tooth; in a kame or esker deposit at Birds Hill, northeast of Winnipeg. The exact location is unknown. 4. A molar tooth; in a gravel pit in the southeast quarter of Section 21, Township 9, Range 7, East of the Principal Meridian, five miles east of Dufresne. Leith points out that the tusk fragments are short, poorly preserved and cannot be positively identified. However, he assigns the teeth to Mammonteus prinugenius, noting that in some respects they resemble the molars of Parelephas jefferson. To the above list may be added two more recent discoveries. In the spring of 1959 Mr. J. Pritchard of Rathwell, Manitoba, discovered a small molar tooth in a gravel pit in section 16, Township 9, Range 9, West of the Principal Meridian. The site is on the south bank of the Assiniboine River, approximately nine miles northeast of Rathwell. This specimen is now in the collection of the Manitoba Museum, Winnipeg. The most recent find, from western Manitoba, occurred in October 1964 _when Mr. H. Treloar of Rivers, Manitoba, discovered a large tooth in a gravel pit in the northeast quarter of Section 35, Township 11, Range 21 West of the Principal Meridian. The deposit in which the tooth was found consists of stratified and cross-bedded sands and gravel, with occasional thin clay beds. Klassen (1963) has mapped the adjacent area to the north of the gravel pit and indicates a minor meltwater channel trending through the site. Although the sand and gravel at the site are probably post-glacial and associated with this meltwater channel, they may represent late glacial (Wisconsin) or early post- glacial stream terrace deposits. The tooth from the Rathwell location (Figures 2, 3 and 4), with the ex- ception of the root talons, appears to be complete and little abraded. Its total length, measured at right angles to the ridge plates, is 95 mm. Maximum width is 36 mm and the height of the 9th ridge is 45 mm. The total number of ridge plates is 12, although the anterior and posterior ones are indistinct. The grind- *Present Address: Department of Geological Sciences, Miller Hall, Queens University, Kingston, Ont. 5) 96 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 80 MANITOBA 2 SCALE IN MILES go 2 > Fy \ x 3 > > _ Ay gnEPENKECK t~ b ca ZF RA O Ue PM tmlcane a KAIROS " Ss TERRA NOVA pe S ~ a y FALL pr Ste Lun . ra 6 —2——_——} Ces? ye S GRANTS FALL Ficure 1. Map of the Terra Nova River System showing locations mentioned in the text. 101 102 Tue CanapiAn FieLtp-NatTurALIstT Vol. 80 Figure 2. Outlet of Kepenkeck Lake where ouananiche were plentiful, June, 1952. TABLE 1. — Station list and number of fish collected at each station on the Terra Nova River system. Summer, 1952. Station Number of fish 1. Terra Nova Lake 64 2. Terra Nova River at Lake St. John Dam 66 3. George’s Pond 32 4. South West Terra Nova River 3 5. Maccle’s Lake 17 6. Kepenkeck Lake 41 7. Upper Kepenkeck Lake 8 TOTAL 231 MATERIALS AND MetHops A total of 231 fish were collected from several stations on the Terra Nova River system as listed in Table 1. The locations of all points listed are shown in Figure 1. The fish were collected by means of gill nets, fyke nets, angling and the use of a small handseine which measured about 3 ft. x 3 ft., leaded along the footrope, and equipped with two wooden handles. One of the most successful angling locations was at the outlet of Kepenkek Lake (Figure 2) where 41 fish ranging in size from 9.9 cm. to 29.8 cm. were angled during one 103 ANDREWS: LANDLOCKED SALMON IN THE TERRA Nova River SystEM read + ¢ qYsIT ¢ Bic qeak +7 oy ¢ “TOATYY BAONT eIJa] ‘UOW]RS poyoo]pUR, Wo sayeog ¢ TAD 104 Tue CANADIAN FIeELp-NATURALIST Vol. 80 Table 2. — Age-length relationship of landlocked salmon in the Terra Nova River system. Summer, 1952. Figures in parentheses indicate number of fish in each age group. Calculated length Age Length (years) (cm.) we ee, 24 1 9.9(1) 6.9 2 11.3(27) 11.4 3 17.6(44) 15.9 4 21.7(44) 20.4 5 25.0(57) 24.9 6 28.1(24) 29.4 7 32.0(12) 33.9 8 38.5(4) 38.4 9 38.2(3) 42.9 half hour at sunset on June 22, 1952. The dam site at Lake St. John was another very successful angling location. Measurements are given as fork lengths to the nearest millimeter and ages were determined by the scale method. Typical scales taken from the area between the lateral line and the adipose fin, are shown in Figure 3. The scales were preserved in blotting paper, removed in the laboratory and washed, they were then mounted on glass slides and read using a standard microprojector. RESULTS Length distribution The ouananiche ranged in size from 6.5 to 48.5 cm. (Figure 4) with a modal length of 24.5 cm. Included in the modal length-group were 42 fish or 25.4 per cent of the sample. Absence of fish smaller than 6.5 cm. is attributed to the collecting technique where fish smaller than 6.5 cm. could pass through the meshes of the nets used or they were too small to angle. ‘The largest fish (48.5 cm.) was taken by gill net in Terra Nova Lake and a second ouananiche measuring 40.8 cm. was also taken by gill net in Terra Nova Lake. Scott and Crossman (1964) report the largest ouananiche taken in their sample in Lake St. John, Newfoundland, at 48.1 cm., fork length, with a live weight of approximately 2% pounds. The largest fish taken in Lake St. John in our sample was 37.5 cm. Age frequency Ages ranged from 1 + to 9+ years with the modal age at 4 + years as shown in Figure 5; 66 fish or 27.5 per cent of the sample were contained within this modal group. The mean age of the total sample was 4.4 years. Age-length relationship Mean lengths for each age-group are shown in Table 2 and Figure 6. Growth demonstrates a straight line relationship Neath 1966 ANDREWS: LANDLOCKED SALMON IN THE TERRA Nova River SYSTEM 105 40 20 NUMGER OF FISH IN EACH LENGTH GROUP 7 10 13 16 19 22 #25 28 3! 34037 4 = 43 % 49 LENGTH OF FISH IN 3 CENTIMETER GROUPS Figure 4. Length distribution of landlocked Atlantic salmon in the Terra Nova River system, summer, 1952. where Y = length, X = age, a = slope, and b — y intercept. The values of a and b have been calculated at 4.5 and 2.4 respectively, thus the equation Y = 4.5X + 2.4 fits the observed data. 106 THe CANADIAN FreLp-NATURALIST Vol. 80 TABLE 3. — Age-length relationship of young salmon in the upper (S. W. Gander River) Gander River. May-August, 1951. Figures in parentheses indicate the number of fish in each age-class. (Andrews, 1965). Apenntears A SA culees mae connalleiad Actual lengt ( een : 1+ 7.1(15) Weil 2+ 9.8(91) 9.2 3+ 11.3(54) 11.3 4+ 13.5(3) 13.4 54 21.9(2) 15.5 6+ 21.0(3) 17.6 ioe 33.4(1) 19.3 For comparison age-length data (Table 3) for parr and post-smolts of sea- running Atlantic salmon from the upper Gander River (South West Gander River) have been included in Figure 6. This data also shows a straight line relationship where the equation Y = 2.1X + 5.0 fits the observed data. The slopes of the lines indicate a faster rate of growth for landlocked salmon in the Terra Nova River as compared with parr of sea- running Atlantic salmon from the nearby Gander River. Thus age 2+ sea- running salmon in the upper Gander River average 9.2 cm. and landlocked salmon in the Terra Nova River average 11.4 cm.; at 3+ years Gander River salmon average 11.5 cm. whereas landlocked salmon in the Terra Nova River average 15.9 cm. The difference continues to increase with increasing age, thus 6+ year-old salmon in the upper Gander average 17.6 cm. as compared with 29.4 cm. for landlocked salmon in the Terra Nova River. The difference is small at the end of 1+ years but the regression of the lines (Figure 6) indicates that the fry of landlocked salmon are smaller than the fry of sea-running Atlantic salmon, the y intercept of the former being 2.4 cm. and for the latter 540) Gina, DISCUSSION Many of the inland ponds, lakes, rivers, and streams of Newfoundland support well established populations of landlocked salmon and the Terra Nova River system, including its several associated ponds and lakes is no exception. The species is an excellent game fish although it does not reach the size com- monly attained by adult Atlantic salmon which migrate upstream from the sea. Maximum length in the Terra Nova River system ranges from 30 to 45 cm. and the maximum weights between 2 and 3 pounds. Scott and Crossman (1964) report that “Generally speaking, the larger waters seem to carry the | 1966 ANpREws: LANDLOCKED SALMON IN THE TERRA Nova River System 107 80 70 60 50 40 NUMBER OF FISH IN EACH AGE GROUP 20 Oo 3 4 5 6 7 9 AGE IN YEARS COMPLETED Figure 5. Age composition of landlocked Atlantic salmon in the Terra Nova River system, summer, 1952. larger ouananiche.” They also report (1964) ouananiche of 7.0 and 8.5 pounds weight from Kaegudeck Lake, Bay du Nord River, and Red Indian Lake, Ex- ploits River, respectively. 108 Tue Canapian Frecp-Naturatist Vol. 80} 40 @— LANDLOCKED SALMON, TERRA NOVA RIVER O— SEA-RUN ATLANTIC SALMON, GANDER RIVER x» — LANDLOCKED SALMON ,TERRA NOVA RIVER 30 (SCOTT & CROSSMAN, 1964) FORK LENGTH IN CENTIMETERS nN ° jy 2° Sie 4+ 5+ 6* Tae st Si AGE IN YEARS COMPLETED Figure 6. Mean length in centimeters of different age-groups; landlocked Atlantic salmon in the Terra Nova River system, summer, 1952. TABLE 4. — Age-length relationship of 41 landlocked salmon from Terra Nova River system. (Scott and Crossman, 1964, p. 43). Age Mean fork length Speen (sania) from scales (mm.) 1 123 66.5 4 153 112.5 s 208 161.5 4 235 203.8 2 290 255.8 6 319 307.8 u 374 361.2 8 464 418.0 1966 ANpbREWS: LANDLOCKED SALMON IN THE TERRA Nova RIver SYSTEM 109 Scott and Crossman (1964) collected 41 landlocked salmon from the Terra Nova River in 1960. Data from this collection are shown in Table 4 and plotted in Figure 6 for comparison with the 1952 data of this paper. Their back calculations from scales for age-length relationships are remarkably similar to our calculated age-length relationships based on the equation Y=45X +24 Their direct measurements show a higher rate of growth for each year class. This, they report “may be due to the small sample size. It may also be due to the fact that only the bigger members of the younger age groups were taken in the mesh sizes used.” To conclude, it may be said that the landlocked salmon population of Newfoundland inland waters represent an angling resource which has been Jittle utilized in the past. Its rate of growth in the Terra Nova River system, at least, where “pan sized” fish of 20 cm. (8 inches) or more is reached in from 3 to 4 years indicates that greater utilization, from a biological point of view, may be warranted. ACKNOWLEDGEMENT The author wishes to thank Mr. Allenby Pinhorn, Fisheries Research Board of Canada, St. John’s, for critically reading the manuscript. REFERENCES Anprews, C. W. 1965. Growth of young Fishes occurring in the fresh waters of in- salmon (Salmo salar L.) in the Gander sular Newfoundland. Canada Department River system, Newfoundland. Canadian of Fisheries, and Contribution No. 58 of Field-Naturalist. 79(4): 230-239. Life Sciences, Royal Ontario Museum, Scorr, W. B. and E. J. Crossman. 1964. University of Toronto, Received for publication 20 December 1965 wy REVIEWS The Mammals of Alberta By Dewey Soper. Hamley Press Ltd., Ed- monton, Alberta, Canada, 1964, 402 pp., 67 coloured pl., 41 figures, maps. $5.00. Alberta is only the second province with a full book-length treatment of its mammalian fauna and therefore must be considered a leader in this field among the Canadian provinces. It is also fortun- ate in having the well-known Canadian naturalist Dewey Soper undertake this project. Mr. Soper has been studying the distribution of Alberta mammals for many years. The author commences with good in- troductory chapters on the history and environment of Alberta, faunal zones (after Merriam), changes in the mammal fauna, population cycles, fragments of life history, economic values, and ZOOZC0- graphy. Then follow individual accounts of the 153 species and subspecies found in the Province under the headings of vernacular and scientific names, descrip- tion, size, distribution, habitat, and re- marks including life history and unusual records. There are distribution maps and many sketches of heads, skulls and ap- pendages from the author’s talented pen. The taxonomic treatment follows that of Muler and Kellogg (1955 U.S. National Museum Bulletin 205) in general, but Soper follows some more recent mono- graphic treatments such as those of Find- ley (1955) for Sorex vagrans, Peterson (1952) for Alces alces and Rausch (1953) for Ursus arctos. He follows Anderson (1946 National Museum of Canada Bul- letin 102) for vernacular names and in- cludes some personal choices. The application of vernacular names for subspecies has gone out of style re- cently. The professional taxonomist has no use for them as he has the scientific trinomials, while the many modifying adjectives only serve to confuse the lay- man. Unfortunately, this book has many | examples of the pitfalls caused by the use of vernacular names for subspecies. The | full treatment of each subspecies has ne- | cessitated the repetition of much life his- | tory data under each form and resulted | in such statements as “the general biology and behaviour of this subspecies (dusky porcupine) appears to be virtually the _ same as that of the Alaskan porcupine” (page 253). It introduces pitfalls such as the legend under plate 37 listing the com- | mon name “yellow-haired porcupine” — | a name not used in the text for any of the three subspecies of porcupine fully de- scribed. Unfortunately most of the distribution | maps have been so reduced that the leg- ends are illegible. Fortunately the distri- | bution maps for the big game species, | prepared by R. Webb in 1959, are full | page size and clear. It is regrettable that there was such a | delay in publishing this book. The author | on page 102, writes of the present time | as being 1961, and although 1964 is print- ed on the title page, the book was dis- tributed in 1965. There is only one 1960 paper cited in the text and most papers referred to are prior to 1959. Had the author been able to revise the text re- cently I expect he would have followed more recent taxonomic treatments. The caribou is a good case in poimt. Soper follows Anderson’s (1946) names and states first that the mountain caribou (R. fortidans) is closely related to the bar- ren-ground caribou (R. arcticus), but on the next page he states that in many ways it is similar to the woodland caribou (R. caribou). Hall and Kelson listed North American caribou as subspecies of the Eurasian reindeer as early as 1959, and this has been widely accepted for several years. The text is remarkably free of ty po- graphical errors. The most obvious is the 110 1966 repetition of the line containing the beaver’s name on page 179. In spite of the above taxonomic short- comings, the book is rich in the author’s personal animal lore gained over a life- time of close study of mammals. Few other authors could write such a book -and borrow so little from other authors. A. W. F. BANFIELD National Museum of Canada, Ottawa, Ontario. 1A New Dictionary of Birds Edited by A. LanpssoroucH ‘THOMSON. McGraw-Hill Book Company, London and New York. 1964. 928 pp., 16 color plates, 32 pp. of photographs, 300 plus line drawings. ($17.50). As the title implies, this is an extreme- ly comprehensive reference work on birds and their many aspects. It appears to be a worthy successor to Alfred ' Newton’s great classic A Dictionary of Birds which, since 1896, has had a long and honorable record. Although similar in plan to Newton, with subject material arranged alphabetically, it is a complete- ly new and different book containing a vast wealth of up-to-date information. It is intended for the ornithologist who requires specific information outside his own particular experience; for biologists needing facts concerning the specialized field of birds; and for the general reader who is looking for particular or general ornithological information. General information relating to birds as a class is abundantly represented throughout on just about any subject such as classification, structure, evolu- tion, adaptations, behavior, life histor- ies. Even subjects like birds in folk-lore, superstition, literature, and the arts are fully dealt with. Treatment of the vari- ous kinds of birds is usually found under the appropriate families and is usually extremely well done (bird names are listed individually to place them for the non-ornithologist in their respective REVIEWS 111 families). Information extends also to other branches of science that affect bird life such as, for example, vegetation, climate, statistical methods, and very many biological terms. The extremely wide subject coverage is made possible by bringing together special contributions from over 200 orni- thologists and other specialists, artists, and photographers in 27 countries of the world. It is profusely, often beautifully, illustrated by 16 color plates, many out- standing photographs, and numerous text figures. This vast assemblage of information 1s of very high quality but it is doubtless inevitable that a few errors should creep in. The captions for all three Rock Ptar- migan plumages shown are scrambled (p. 129). The flat assertion is made (p. 400) that the Ruffed Grouse “booms” by striking its wings against its breast and that both sexes “boom”’!! The definition of ‘juvenal’ completely misses the definite and highly efficient distinction between it and ‘juvenile’ in North American usage. The color plates are mostly well done. However Plate 18 is somewhat less 1m- pressive than the others. The Gray Jay is shown with a conspicuous white eye- ring and a too-pale iris that gives it an unnatural stare. Although it is realized that the iris in the Mew Gull is indivi- dually variable in color, a bright yellow iris in (presumably) first-year birds 1s not the usual color in this reviewer’s experience at least. No ornithologist, professional or ama- teur, can fail to be impressed by the great wealth of up-to-date authoritative information brought together in this handsome volume and no ornithologist should be without it. The British Orni- thologists’ Union and the editor are to be congratulated on the production of this book which surely is destined to be a classic. W. Eart GopFrrey National Museum of Canada Ottawa, Ontario 112 Principles of Paleontology. Agnatha, Fishes Edited by D. V. Osrucney. Published by “Nauka”, Moscow, 522 pages, illustrated. 4 rubles 50 copecks (in Russian). Ichthyologists have been fortunate in having publications which surveyed knowledge on fish fossils. These include Zittel’s (1898) Handbuch der Palaeon- tologie, Woodward’s (1898-1901) four volume Catalogue of fossil fishes in the British Museum, Woodward's revision of Zittel (1932, in English), Grasse’s (ed., 1958) three fish volumes of Tvaité de Zoologie, and Piveteau’s (ed., 1964—) three fish volumes of Traité de Paleon- tologie now being issued. Romer’s (1933 and later editions) Vertebrate Paleon- tology summarily deals with fish. The book reviewed here is a fine addition to these studies of palaeoichthyology. The study of fossil fishes in North Am- erica and particularly Canada has not re- ceived the attention it deserves. This is not from the lack of suitable deposits in Canada. All of the major studies above are European. The reviewers would like to draw this untramelled Canadian field of study to the attention of young bio- logists. The Principles of Paleontology com- prises a series of volumes being publish- ed on different fossil groups. The volume on fishes is finely bound in green cloth. Its binding, paper and illustrations reflect the current rise in quality of Russian publications. The text is preceded by a table of contents, a stratigraphical table (without geological age) and a short introduction, and ends with an index to taxa. The body of the text is divided into chapters, each of which covers a class or subclass, is individually authored and is followed by its own bibliography and set of plates. Each chapter is well-salted with text- figures. Descriptions and geological spans are given for each fossil taxon down to the genus; taxa not represented by fos- sils are omitted. The author and date is cited for most families and genera. THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 80 The classes dealt with are Diplorhina, Monorhina, Acanthodei, Chondrich- thyes and Osteichthyes, while a last chap- ter includes as incertae sedis the Order Conodonti. Under the major taxa are included sections on history, morphol- ogy, systematics, ecology, and geological and biological significance. The classification is generally con- servative. Fewer classes are recognized than in the somewhat split classification of Berg’s (1940) Classification of fishes both recent and fossil. Separate classes for hagfishes, lampreys, and ratfishes, for example, are dropped. Surprisingly the taxonomic endings of the American, Stenzel are adopted, whereas most North Americans currently follow the Russian ichthyologist Berg! The union of the crossopterygians and lungfishes in a sub- class Sarcopterygii does not seem well advised; their nasal passages have been shown to be ontogenetically dissimilar. The coverage of Osteichthyes seems reasonably complete, although Mallotus and Artediellus known from Pleistocene fossils and the Ramphosoidei are omitted. Unfortunately Patterson’s (1964) study on Mesozoic acanthopterygians was pub- lished too late for inclusion. Although some publications up to 1963 are includ- ed, Parsch’s (1962) study on fossil fish of Alberta, and Uyeno and Miller’s (1963) important survey of late Cenozoic fresh- water fish records from North America have been omitted. Compilation is of course necessary to produce a work of this sort. But there are new data and new figures. New taxa include — in the Heterostraci: Olbiaspi- dida (Order) and Olbiaspididae (p. 78); in the Monorhina: Tannuaspididae (p. 98); in the Placodermi: Radotinidae (p. 132); Groenlandaspidae (p. 143); Eulep- taspidae (p. 144); Hussakofiidae (p. 148); Erromenosteidae (p. 150); in the Acan- thodii: Polyacrodontidae (p. 212); in the Chondrichthyes: Pseudodontichthyidae (p. 255). The lack of new phylogenetic dendrograms 1s disappointing. | | The chapter on conodonts uses a classi- fication with families, though most stud- ents of conodonts today — at least in the west — no longer retain this category for what are recognised as “form gen- era”, not true genera. It is interesting to recall that though conodonts were dis- ‘covered first in 1859 in the Leningrad area, they have since been almost totally ignored by Russian workers. The present chapter leans heavily upon recent Ger- -man and American work. _ This volume will be of considerable value in the study and identification of fossils because of its descriptions and smany figures and its literature summaries sat the end of each chapter. - D. E. McALuisTER B D. L. DinELEY National Museum of Canada, Ottawa, and | University of Ottawa, Ottawa, Ontario. Tuktu: A Question of Survival | By Fraser Symineton. Canadian Wildlife Service, Department of Northern Affairs and National Resources, Queen’s Printer, Ottawa, 1965. 92 pp. 19 plates and 1 fold- out map. $2.00. This is a popular treatment of the “caribou problem” which faces federal and provincial game authorities who are charged with managing this important northern renewable natural resource. Mr. Symington has done a very capable job of translating the many official reports of field biologists into a more digestible language for the layman, without losing any of the feeling of the rawness of the land and the urgency of the situation. The booklet opens with a pictorial essay on the barren-ground caribou and then is introduced by the Honourable Arthur Laing, Minister of Northern Af- fairs and National Resources. The author treats the problem in a series of chapters on the land, the caribou and the people REVIEWS 113 and concludes by presenting a caribou management program with an outline of basic principles. This booklet should per- form the important task of bringing the public up to date on the barren-ground caribou situation in northern Canada. A. W. F. BAanFietp National Museum of Canada, Ottawa, Ontario. Fishes of the Sea of Japan and neighbouring parts of the Okhotsk and Yellow Seas. By G. U. Linppere and M. I. Leceza. Pub- lished by “Nauka”, Moscow and Lenin- grad, Part I, 1959, 207 pages, 108 figures; Part II, 1965, 389 pages, 324 figures (In Russian). The isolation of the Sea of Japan by sills, its geological history and its mixed arctic, temperate and tropical faunal ele- ments make it especially interesting to the ichthyologist. The fish fauna of the Sea of Japan has not been recently surveyed as a whole. Matsubara (1955) in Fish morphology and hierarchy surveyed the Japanese portion of the Sea of Japan and Chung (ed., 1961) in The fauna of Korea, fishes, the Korean portion. The former does not contain synonymies and descrip- tions and the latter does not give synony- mies. Lindberg and Legeza’s study give both of these plus keys, distribution and a figure for each species. Part I includes from the lampreys to the ratfishes, Part II from the sturgeons to the threadfins, and presumably a later part(s) will cover the remainder of the fishes. This study will be valuable to those interested in the fish fauna of the Japan Sea and to those interested in the amphi-pacific members of the Canadian Pacific fish fauna. It is hoped that the last part will contain a zoogeographical discussion of the area. D. E. McALLIsTEeR National Museum of Canada Ottawa, Ontario. NOTES Some Unusual Bird Records from the Peace River District GLaucous-wINGeD GuLL, Larus glauces- cens. Mr. Gavin Craig of Wembley, Alberta, has kindly allowed me to ex- amine some specimens in his collection of mounted birds. Among them are two sub-adult gulls of this species. One of these is in second-year plumage. It was found shot at Bear Lake about 25 kilo- meters northwest of Grande Prairie in mid-September 1958. The other is about a year older and is coming into adult plumage. It was taken at the same place on 11 August 1959. Mr. Craig says (cor- respondence), “It was very thin and seemed sick”, and also, “During the fall of 1959 there were 10 or 12 second year gulls of this kind in the Bear Lake area”’. Neither specimen was sexed. These specimens constitute earlier re- cords of the Glaucous-winged Gull in Alberta than that previously reported by Merilees (1961, Canadian Field-Natur- alist 75:170). It appears that Glaucous- winged Gulls, especially those in their second year, may be of fairly regular oc- currence in the Peace River District and that they occasionally wander farther east. GREATER Scaup, Aythya marila. On 9 October 1961, a Greater Scaup was shot by Mr. Frank Smith at Lake Sas- katoon north of Wembley, Alberta. The specimen was mounted in flying position and placed in the collection of Gavin Craig. Although not sexed it appears to be a female. Several Lesser Scaups were shot from flocks on this occasion but this bird was alone. Mr. Craig says that in the flesh this one was noticeably larger. The extension of white onto the primaries, the size and shape of the beak and of the “nail”, make identification certain. Two Greater Scaups taken in northeastern Alberta on 13 May 1920, are the only other authenticated records of this species in the province. WESTERN Kinepirp, Tyrannus verticalis, On 31 May 1965, Mr. Craig saw a Western Kingbird around his home at Wembley. It stayed for some time allow- ing a close approach and positive identi- fication. Barn Swatitow, Hirundo rustica. The barn swallow was unknown as a breeding bird in the Peace River District in 1958 according to Salt and Wilk (The Birds of Alberta, Department of Econ- omic Affairs, Government of Alberta). In June, 1964, A. J. Erskine saw Barn Swallows in the Lesser Slave Lake area at Desmarais, Grouard, and Joussard, and found a nest with young at Red Earth on 9 July. On 31 May 1965, Barn Swallows were nesting in a porch at Gavin Craig’s home at Wembley. Mr. Craig says he has seen the species before and believes they nest “here and there in the Peace River Area”. A similar westward extension of breeding range of this species has been noted in the Rocky Mountains area of Alberta. Barn Swallows now nest on buildings at Johnson’s Canyon, about 30 kilometers west of Banff, and at Lake Louise. VarieD TuHrusH, /xoreus naevius. On 21 June 1965, John Hubbard, a zoology student at the University of Michigan, collected two Varied Thrush- es about 55 kilometers south-southwest of Grande Prairie. The skeletons have been placed in the collection of the University of Michigan. Both specimens were fe- males with brood patches and post-ovu- latory ovaries. Both were carrying food. There seems no doubt that they were breeding birds. These specimens extend the known breeding range of the Varied Thrush in Alberta northward into a re- gion which is some 75 kilometers away from the mountain habitat usually oc- cupied by this species in the province. 114 + -! 1 | men, 1966 ‘BLACK- THROATED GREEN WARBLER Dendroica virens. Mr. Hubbard found this species not uncommon in suitable habitat south of Grande Prairie. Of greater significance, however, is the fact that he heard several singing males in the Chetwynd-Moberly Lake area of British Columbia some 100 kilometers west of the Alberta border. He collected a male near Chetwynd on 25 June 1965. This specimen is in the col- ‘lection of the University of Michigan. ‘Munro and Cowan (1947, A Review of the Bird Fauna of British Columbia, B.C. Provincial Museum) give no records of the species for the province. This speci- therefore, represents the first authenticated record of the Black-throat- ed Green Warbler in British Columbia. W. Ray Sat Department of Anatomy University of Alberta Edmonton, Alberta 8 July 1965 _An Unexplained Mass Mortality of Turtles Linpsay’s presentation of an unexplained case of ophidian mortality (1966 Canad- ian Field-Naturalist 80 (1): 59) has prompted this note on an observed mass mortality in a population of turtles. Al- though these data were not followed up with tests to determine the cause of death, they may serve to emphasize that catestrophies do happen in reptilian populations and perhaps will alert some future observer to thoroughly investi- gate a similar discovery. On the afternoon of May 15, 1954 I visited a large shallow pond about one mile south of Stittsville, Carleton County, Ontario and found numbers of dead, bloated turtles floating in the water near shore. Examined at that time were Bland- ing’s Turtle, Emyvdoidea blandingi, a large male and a small female, and Mid- land Painted Turtle, Chrysemys picta marginata, one large female and four medium sized males. The afternoon of May 19 the pond was revisited and a count of all dead turtles was taken. One NOotTEs 115 six-inch female E. blandingi and forty- seven C. p. marginata were examined. The carapace length of the latter, to the nearest half inch are tabulated below by sex. Carapace: 3 3.55 44.5 5 5.5 6 6.5 7 Total Females Tima Os Desi See OMS kaa oe: Males 00208 3 500 18 The Chrysemys exhibited relatively little morphological variation and all had a dark mid-plastral figure though on four (three females and one male, all six-inch specimens) this marking was faint. All had a narrow red line down the middle of the carapace and other characteristics were typical of marginata. On May 20 the pond was again examined and four additional Chrysemys, overlooked pre- viously, were found, three females and one male, all six inches in shell length. This brought the total to 59 turtles; 56 Chrysemys (33 females, 23 males) and 3 Emydoidea (2 females, 1 male). No live turtles were observed on any visit, though the weather was sunny and mild on each occasion. There were no external clues on any of the turtles to indicate how they might have died. Unfortunately, at that time I was ignorant of the services available from the Animal Diseases Research Insti- tute, Canada Department of Agriculture, and made no effort to save any of these bloated specimens. The pond, though devoid of reptilian life, contained active amphibians. Pseu- dacris t. triseriata (May 15, 19, 20), Rana clamitans (May 15, 20) and Hyla versi- color (May 15) were heard calling on the dates given. Rana pipiens were seen May 19 and 20, with about a dozen in evidence on the first date. No dead am- phibians were noted at any time. It is relatively unusual to see dead rep- tiles or amphibians in the field, other than road kills, and at present there is no satisfactory explanation for the obser- vations reported here. J. SHERMAN BLEAKNEY Biology Department Acadia University Wolfville, Nova Scotia 8 April 1965 116 Tue CaNnapiAN Fietp-NATURALIST New Nesting Records and Clarification of Breeding Status Of Some Birds in the Perry River Area, Northwest Territories Tue purpose of this paper is to report new nesting records for the Perry River area, N.W.T., and to clarify the breed- ing status of some species in that area for which previous information is incon- clusive. Observations were made in the Perry River region from July 8 to Aug- ust 12, 1965, while the writer was assist- ing J. P. Ryder in Canadian Wildlife Service studies of Ross’s geese (Anser rosSi1). The first annotated list of birds of the Perry River area was presented by Gavin (1947). That work was supplemented by a detailed ornithological survey by Han- son, Queneau, and Scott in 1949 (Han- son, et al, 1956). Aleksiuk (1964) record- ed one addition and changes in the status of some species. Observations on the avifauna of areas to the east and west of Perry River were reported by Fraser (1957). Observations for Adelaide Pen- insula were reported by Macpherson and Manning (1959), and for Bathurst Inlet by McEwen (1957). Squatarola squatarola. BLACK-BELLIED PLOVER Gavin reported that the Black-bellied Plover was a “fairly common summer visitor”, but did not give information on breeding status. Hanson, et al, and Alek- suk reported it to be only a migrant at Perry River. Macpherson and Manning stated that the Black-bellied Plover was the commonest plover on the Adelaide Peninsula, some 100 miles east of Perry River, although no nests were found. On July 9, 1965, a nest containing four eggs was found on a low-lying Precam- brian outcropping near the mouth of the Perry River. The eggs pipped on July 25 and hatched by July 27. One egg failed to hatch. Vol. 80 rolia bairdi. Batrv’s SAN Erolia bairdii. Batrv’s SANDPIPER Baird’s Sandpiper, not recorded by Gavin, was reported by Aleksiuk to oc- cur probably only as a migrant. Hanson, et al, believed that it possibly bred in the area. Observations in 1965 confirm the lat- ter generalization. On July 21 a nest con- taining four pipped eggs was found on a rocky hillside on Perry Island. Hatching was completed by July 22. Another pair was observed feigning injury on Perry Island on July 22, but no nest or young were located. A third pair also feigning injury was observed on July 24 near the mouth of the Perry River but no nest or young were found. Erolia alpina. DUNLIN This species was not recorded by Gavin or Aleksiuk, and Fraser did not record it in the central Canadian Arctic. Hanson, ez al, observed only three indi- viduals and presumed that the species did not breed at Perry River. Macpherson and Manning state that it “is a rare mi- grant on the east side of Sherman Basin but perhaps breeds on the east coast and in other parts of the Adelaide Peninsula.” On July 17 a pair of adults with a brood of four newly hatched young were found on the tundra 15 miles inland near the Perry River. Lobipes lobatus. NoRTHERN PHALAROPE The Northern Phalarope was found to be uncommon by Hanson, et al, and Aleksiuk. Gavin earlier reported that it is “as abundant as the Red Phalarope (Phalaropus fulicarius) and nests in simi- lar situations.” My observations in 1965 showed it to be more common, or at least more conspicuous, than the Red Phala- rope. On July 14 a nest containing four eggs was found in moist grass near a small tundra pond four miles inland. On July 31 one adult and three young were seen feeding on an island in the Perry River. 1966 Anthus spinoletta. Water Pirir Only Hanson, et al, recorded this species at Perry River. His party observ- ed adults feeding full-grown young on July 27, 1949. The Water Pipit was common in 1965, being found on nearly every high Pre- cambrian outcropping, both on coastal islands and inland. A nest containing four newly-hatched young and one egg was found on the summit of an outcrop- ping on Winter Island on July 14. Three pairs were observed feeding full-grown young on Perry Island on July 21. A second nest containing three young was found near the mouth of the Perry River on July 24. A brood of four was observ- ed the same day in proximity to the second nest mentioned above. Plectrophenax nivalis. Snow BUNTING Gavin reported the Snow Bunting to be a very abundant nester on coastal 1s- lands and in the interior. Aleksiuk and Hanson, et al, found it to be only a com- mon migrant and a scarce summer resi- dent. McEwen found this species to be an uncommon breeder at Bathurst Inlet about 100 miles west of the Perry River. My observations in 1965 are in accord- ance with those of Gavin, for this species is a common summer resident and breed- ing bird, especially along the coast and on the coastal islands. A nest contain- ing four young and one egg was found on July 14 near our base camp at the mouth of the Perry River. On July 16 the nest contained five young. During the last two weeks of July several young were observed. Some were able to fly only short distances while others were capable of sustained flight. REFERENCES Avexsiuk, M. 1964. Observations of birds and mammals in the Perry River region, N.W.T. Arctic 17(4): 263-267. Fraser, J. K. 1957. Birds observed in the central Canadian Arctic, 1953, 1955, 1956. Canadian Field-Naturalist 71(4): 192-199. NOotTEs 117 Gavin, A. 1947. Birds of Perry River Dis- trict, Northwest Territories. Wilson Bul- letin 59(4): 195-203. Hanson, H. C., P. Queneau and P. Scott. 1956. The geography, birds, and mam- mals of the Perry River region. Arctic Institute of North America. Special Pub- lication Number 3. 96 pages. Macpenerson, A. H., and T. H. MAnnine. 1959. The birds and mammals of Ade- laide Peninsula, N.W.T. National Museum of Canada Bulletin 161, 57 pages. McEwen, E. H. 1957. Birds observed at Bathurst Inlet, Northwest ‘Territories. Canadian Field-Naturalist 71(3): 109-115. SPENCER G. SEALY Department of Zoology University of British Columbia Vancouver 8, British Columbia 28 September 1965 The First Breeding Record of Brandt’s Cormorant in Canada THE RANGE of the Brandt’s Cormorant, (Phalacrocorax penicillatus) extends from southeastern Alaska to Baja Cali- fornia (Bent, 1922). In British Columbia it is a common fall and winter visitor to southern parts of the Strait of Georgia and to the waters near Victoria, and 1s present in large numbers in summer on the west coast of Vancouver Island (Munro and Cowan 1947). Although this cormorant is known to breed on the coast of the State of Washington and southern Puget Sound region at Lopez and Matia Islands (Drent and Guiguet, 1961), the only suggestion of nesting in British Columbia is based on the presence of adult birds on Solander Island in sum- mer (Munro and Cowan 1947). In the summer of 1964, R. Y. Edwards, B.C. Department of Recreation and Con- servation, and one of the authors (D.S.) noticed many cormorants on and around Sea-lion Rocks, five barren islets in Wickaninnish Bay (49°03’ N. latitude, 125°43’ W. longitude) 0.5 to 0.8 miles from shore and lying just south of Green Point. The cormorants were concentrat- 118 Tue CANADIAN FIeELp-NATURALIST ed on the largest island which is about 180 yards by 60 yards in area and rises about 20 feet above maximum high tide level. Study with a 15X telescope showed that the cormorants were Brandt’s Cor- morants and the fact that individual birds were seen carrying seaweeds to the rocks suggested the possibility of nesting. On July 26, 1965, Mr. T. A. White, crab fisherman from Tofino, put us ashore on the large island. On top of the jagged, but nearly level, lee side of the island about 15 feet above maximum high tide level we found a breeding colony of Brandt’s Cormorants. The colony con- sisted of 110 nests in three groups form- ing a rough triangle. Group 1 was about 35 feet from group 2 and a hundred feet from group 3, while group 2 was fifty feet from group 3. Nests were low bowls three to four feet apart. They were con- structed mainly of dry false eelgrass, (Phyllospadix torreyi Wats.), as well as some marine algae and a few feathers. Eggs and young varied from two to four in each nest. The largest group of nests had fewer and smaller young than the other two groups. The ratio of young to eggs and the size of these young in group 2 seemed to suggest that this was the most desirable site. Group 1, how- ever, had more nests. Possibly this site, although not as good as the other two, had a greater area suitable for nest build- ing. All nests were built at the edge of cliffs where cormorants could easily escape by “falling off”. Nests Eggs Young Group 1 58 132 14 Group 2 29 21 66 Group 3 23 21 41 Total 110 174 121 Breeding adults were remarkably easy to approach. Most, particularly those with young, remained on their nests un- til we were within 20 to 25 feet. At this distance the buffy band across the throat and blue gular pouch were plainly visible. Vol. 80 Good colour slides were obtained. Adults returned to their nests very soon after we moved away from the nests. The only other breeding bird species encountered was the Glaucous-winged Gull. Downy young were abundant. Other birds observed on the islet were Black Oystercatchers, one Pelagic Cor- morant, Surfbirds, Ruddy Turnstones, Black Turnstones, Wandering Tattlers, one Dowitcher, and California Gulls. The size of the cormorant colony may be restricted by other animals. It seems possible that competition for nesting sites exists between cormorants and gulls (an estimated 1,000), and large numbers of rocsting non-breeding cormorants may compete for space with breeding birds. The rocks are used also by northern sea- lions, Eumetopia jubata. More than fifty were present during our visit; two hund- red were counted there in 1964. It is pos- sible that these ponderous animals help to restrict the space available for cormorant nests. This colony of Brandt’s Cormorants in Wickaninnish Bay, Vancouver Island, 1s the first to be discovered in Canadian waters, but other colonies may be found when this coast becomes better known ornithologically. REFERENCES Bent, A. C. 1922. Life Histories of North American Petrels and Cormorants and their allies. United States National Mu- seum. Bulletin 121. Drent, R. H. and C. J. Guieuer. 1961. A catalogue of British Columbia sea-bird col- onies. B.C. Provincial Museum Occasional Paper No. 2. Munro, J. A., I. McT. Cowan. 1947. A review of the bird fauna of British Colum- bia. B.C. Provincial Museum Special Pub- lication No. 2. Daviw STIRLING FRANK BUFFAM Parks Branch Department of Recreation and Conservation Victoria, B.C. 15 October 1965 eee NS BO LAY Braden rel Oe Eel if DEC 20 1966 _ The CANADIAN Botanical Investigations in Northeastern Saskatchewan: The Subarctic Patterson— _ Hasbala Lakes Region Grorce W. Arcus 119 xtralimital Occurrences of Raccoons in Ontario Donatp W. Simkin 144 bservations on Canadian Birch (Betula) Collections at the Morgan Arboretum. _ Wil. B. papyrifera of British Columbia W. H. Brirrarn and W. F. Grant 147 Tris missouriensis Nutt. in Southwestern Alberta and in Central and Northern British Columbia B. pE Vrizs 158 The Names of Yellow Birch and Two of Its Varieties T. C. BraysHaw 160 The Cirriped Stomatolepas elegans (Costa) on Leatherback Turtles from _ Nova Scotian Waters Victor A. ZuLto and J. SHERMAN BLEAKNEY 162 Vegetation of Cottonwood Forests on Kodiak Island Epwarp W. BraLs 166 Reviews 172 Arachnida — Physiology of Mollusca, Volume 1— Fishes of the Western North Atlantic, Part __ 5, Order Iniomi and Order Lyomeri— Catalogue Systématique des Noms de Genres de Poissons Actuels — Raccoons and Eagles—A Monograph of the Lemnaceae — Other New side Litles. - Notes _ Additional Bird Observations at Bathurst Inlet, N.W.T. Joun P, Ketsait, 178 ~ Incubation Periods of Some Subarctic Birds Josern R. Jeut, Jr, and D. J. T. Husserz 179 : Sighting of a Hudsonian Godwit (Limosa haemastica) near Vancouver, B.C. Fren W. Dosson 180 _ Mass Movements by Snowshoe Rabbits, Lepus americanus Joun HensHaw 181 Breeding Records of the Ring-necked Duck (Aythya collaris) in Riviére-du-Loup and Rimouski Counties, Quebec Austin Reep 182 ~ Record of Utricularia purpurea in Newfoundland Hipa E. SmitH 182 Can. Field Nat. | Vol. 80 Ottawa, July-September 1966 No. 3 | p. 119-182 | THE OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS’ ‘CLUB - FOUNDED IN 1879 — Patrons — Tueir ExceLtLeENciEs THE GOVERNOR GENERAL AND MADAME VANIER The objects of the club are to foster an acquaintance with and a love of ae encourage investigation and to publish the results of original — and ee in all branches of natural history. The club is a corporate member of the Federation of Ontario Naturalists an affiliated with the American Association for the Advancement of Science. se MEMBERS OF COUNCIL President: Grorce H. McGes, 2052 Woodcrest Road, Ottawa 8, Ontario First Vice-President: H. N. MACKENZIE Second Vice-President: F RANCIS R. Coon Ontario. Vacs Treasurer: Mrs. Roy D. Watnwricut, 263 Sherwood Dr., Ottawa 3, Oneti oe Additional Members of Council: Miss A. Bannine, Miss V. Humpuries, Miss L. Kines 0: Miss M. Sruart, Mrs. H. A. THomson, Fatuer F. E. BanIM, FATHER R. LEGAULT, Mzss W. K. W. BALDWIN, A. W. F. Banrietp, E. L. BousFiExp, Ww. J. Copy, R. Fria, J. GuttetTt, H. Grou, if W. Groves, D. D. Hocartu, W. J. Inman, H. Lioyp, W. W. ak Mosautn, A. E. Porsitp, J. S. Rowe, F. H. SCHULTZ, D. A. Smita, V. E. F. Soun G. TessiEr, J. C. Woottev. : AUDITORS: J. M. Gittett and R. J. Moore THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Editor: Francis R. Cook Business Manager: W. J. Co National Museum of Canada, Ottawa, Ontario Centra] Experimental Farm, Ottawa, Associate Editors: ol J. Atcock (Geology), Joun W. ARNOLD (Entomology), W. A. BE I (Paleontology), J. SHERMAN Bieakney (Herpetology), ArrHur H. oe (Malacology), Witt1am G. Dore (Botany), W. Ear. Goprrey (Ornithology), A Huntsman (Marine Biology), D. E. Mek eee (Ichthyology), PHILIP M. Younen (Mammalogy). : The Canadian Field-Naturalist is published quarterly by the Onawa Field-Natur list Club with assistance of the affiliated societies listed on the outside back cover. Manuscript representing personal observations or the results of original research in any branch of tural history are invited. In the preparation of papers authors should consult the m recent issue and the information for contributors on the inside back cover. Advertising rates and prices of back numbers of this journal and its predecessors, TRANSACTIO OF THE OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS’ CLUB, 1879-1886, and the or NATURALIST, 1887-1919, are obtainable from the business manager. Authorized as second-class mail by the Post Office Department of Ottawa, and for payment of postage in Cash. DEC 20 1966 HARVARD The Canadian Field-Naturalist “"~"” VotumeE 80 JULY-SEPTEMBER 1966 Numer 3 BOTANICAL INVESTIGATIONS IN NORTHEASTERN SASKATCHEWAN: THE SUBARCTIC PATTERSON - HASBALA LAKES REGION Grorce W. Arcus W. P. Fraser Herbarium, University of Saskatchewan, Saskatoon INTRODUCTION Most vegetation maps of Canada depict a triangle in northeastern Saskatchewan _ within the subarctic. Rowe (1959) includes this region in his Northwestern _ Transition Section in which “coniferous forest passes northward into a zone of _ subarctic woodland”; Porsild (1958) includes it in the subarctic forest-tundra _ transition, and it is contiguous with Ritchie’s (1962) “open spruce forest ~ with lichen scrub” of Manitoba. If this region does lie within the subarctic, botanical investigation should reveal (1) some low arctic species unknown in Saskatchewan (2) tundra vegetation, at least in exposed habitats and (3) the northern edge of the range of some boreal taxa. The study was designed to examine these possibilities and _to add to the data concerning the taxonomy and distribution of taxa in the flora of northern Saskatchewan. The locality selected for study was the Patterson-Hasbala Lakes region (Figure 1) which lies well within the supposed subarctic triangle in north- eastern Saskatchewan. As the interests of the field party included ornithology as well as botany an extensive survey method, covering as much area as possible, was used. Although this method minimized the opportunity for intensive study, it led to the chance discovery of tundra habitats and unusual plant distributions which might otherwise have been missed. In 1962 and 1963 a total of 29 days were spent in the field; 7 days at “Quillwort” Lake (2.4 km south of Hasbala Lake), 11 days at Hasbala Lake, 10 days at Patterson Lake and 1 day at Warren Lake (Lat. 59°45’ N., Long. 102°42’ W.). ACKNOWLEDGMENTS This research was supported by grants from the National Research Council of Canada and the Institute for Northern Studies, University of Saskatchewan. I am indebted to my field companions, Dr. R. Nero and Mr. R. Carson (the latter in 1963 only) for their cooperation and assistance without which this research would not have been possible. I appreciate the efforts of the specialists who examined certain groups of plants: J. Calder, A. Cronquist, H. Crum, W. Dore, M. Hale, F.. Hermann, A. E. Porsild, C. Reed, R. Shoenike, J. Thomson, and R. & A. Tryon. I appreciate the critical comments of Mr. M. Mailing date of this number: 8th December, 1966. 119 120 Tue CANapIAN FieLtp-NaTuRALIST Vol. 86 Swan and the editorial advice provided by Mrs. Sandomirsky, Publications | Editor, University of Saskatchewan. Previous BoranicaL INVESTIGATIONS No botanical studies have been conducted in the subarctic triangle of Ki northeastern Saskatchewan but several have been made in the vicinity. The | earliest botanical collections in the vicinity of northeastern Saskatchewan were | made by J. W. Tyrrell, a member of J. B. Tyrrell’s geological expedition in | 1893 (J. B. Tyrrell, 1898). During 1893 the expedition passed through | Saskatchewan traveling from Lake Athabasca to Black Lake and northward | on the Chipman River to Selwyn Lake, about 150 km west of Hasbala Lake. | On a second trip in 1894 they passed about 48 km east of Hasbala Lake on the | Little Partridge River, Manitoba, enroute to Kasba Lake, N.W.T. Unfor- | tunately, there were no plants collected on the 1894 trip; however, some | botanical observations were made. The area south of Kasba Lake was | described as “generally low, flat and wooded with small black spruce”. | Stunted aspen were observed at the foot of a dry esker and Vaccimium vitis- idaea, Empetrum nigrum and Arctostaphylos alpina (as A. arctica) were noted to be abundant. ) More recent collections have been made in the nearby northern coniferous forest and the arctic tundra. Collections in the northern coniferous forest have been made by Scotter (1961, 1964, 1965 and Thomson & Scotter, 1961), Ritchie (1959) and Baldwin (1953). Scotter’s collections from the vicinity of Black Lake, Saskatchewan and Cochrane River, Manitoba (including Kasmere Lake and Fort Hall, about 73 km southeast of Hasbala Lake) were made in connection with his ecological study of the barren-ground caribou range. Ritchie’s ecological studies were centered in Manitoba near the confluence of the Big Spruce and Seal Rivers, about 320 km southeast of the area described herein. Baldwin’s collections were made over an area ranging from Reindeer Lake northward to Nueltin Lake, Manitoba. Collections from the southern edge of the arctic tundra northeast of Saskatchewan have been made by several collectors. Harper’s collection from a sparsely wooded portion of northwestern Nueltin Lake, N.W.T. were identified and published by A. E. Porsild (1950). Scoggan’s collections from Baralzon and Nejanilini Lakes were listed in 1952 and later summarized in his Flora of Manitoba (1957). Larsen (1965) carried out ecological investigations at the north end of Ennadai Lake. | Srupy AREA In general, the topography of northeastern Saskatchewan is rolling with elevations up to about 1,550 feet. A variable thickness of glacial till, consisting of loosely packed gravels containing many boulders derived from the under- lying bedrock, covers most of the region (Taylor, 1963). At about longitude 104°W. we observed a change in the depth of the surficial till deposit. West of this point exposed bedrock was prominent and the till deposit was thin, but, to the east, little bedrock was exposed and such glacial features as eskers, drumlinoid ridges, ribbed moraines and abandoned beach lines were prominent. 1966 Arcus: BoranicaL INVESTIGATIONS 121 102° 15' bide NORTHWEST TERRITORIES _ 102° 00' p SASKATCHEWAN 2 Rs RING \ 2 Patterson fe Lake ™granite x cliff ) 1 1 1 ' ' t \ 1 1 6 Arctic Butte M44), MME Northeastern Corner of Saskatchewan 1962-1963 Expeditions pan ; cs by yoal rent g A camp Scale (approximate) —--— ROUTE 0 1 2 3 14Nl ESKER MIVES ee 0 1 2 3 4 5 KILOMETERS. Vana marie Figure 1. The northeastern corner of Saskatchewan. Sand deposits located south and west of Hasbala Lake are probably attributable to Glacial Lake Kazan, in the southwestern District of Keewatin, which was described by Lee (1959). This Pleistocene Lake was estimated to stand between 1,253 and 1,260 feet above sea level and would have innundated much of the area around Hasbala and Patterson Lakes. The strata underlying much of the area is granite which is often red in colour (Tremblay, 1959). Red granite cliffs and a hill composed of red granite were observed west of Patterson Lake. In the region around Hasbala Lake, which Tremblay did not visit, we observed metamorphic cliffs composed of gneisses similar to those described by Tremblay as “fine- to medium-grained, granular, massive to foliated, quartz-feldspar-biotite gneiss”. PLANT COMMUNITIES A brief consideration of the vegetation of northeastern Saskatchewan will permit a better understanding of the habitat notes in the annotated catalogue of plant species. The communities described here were recognizable in the field, however, their limits are arbitrary. Vegetational patterns are often obscured by the complex regeneration of plants after fire and habitat intergrada- tion. Some of the following communities were dominant features in the 122 Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 80 landscape; others are noteworthy minor features. The types described in this report are: Forest Communities Picea mariana — lichen woods Picea mariana — feather moss woods Picea mariana muskegs Pinus banksiana woods Picea glauca woods Lake Margin Communities Aquatics Carex fens Salix fens Rocky lake margins Sand beaches Esker Communities Slopes and summits Kettles Sand blowouts Open sandy—gravel surfaces Cliff Communities Granite cliff Metamorphic cliff Tundra Communities Moist boulder field Dry rock field Forest Communities A forest vegetation dominated by Picea mariana covers much of north- eastern Saskatchewan. Picea mariana, somewhat smaller than in forests to the south and west, occupies a variety of habitats from dry esker ridges to wet muskegs and stream margins. Individuals of Pinus banksiana, Betula “papyri- fera”, Larix laricina, and, rarely, Picea glauca may be associated with P. mariana, but pure stands of these associates are uncommon. ‘The following forest types are recognized (1) Picea mariana — lichen woods, (2) Picea mariana — feather moss woods, (3) Picea mariana muskegs and (4) Pinus banksiana woods. ‘These four forest types are the predominant, more or less stable, forests observed in the area. Complex mixed forests are common resulting from intergradation of habitats and regeneration after fire which is a major environmental factor in subarctic forests (Scotter, 1965). PICEA MARIANA—LICHEN Woops. Dry woods dominated by Picea mariana, with a lichen-covered floor, occupied the summits and slopes of eskers, till ridges, old beach ridges, and outcrops covered with a shallow soil. ‘These woods were park-like with widely spaced trees and sparse undergrowth. The ground cover was dominated by Stereocaulon paschale, Cladonia spp., and Cetraria nivalis. Interspersed among these lichens were the mosses Ptiliam 1966 Arcus: BoTaNicaL INVESTIGATIONS 123 crista-castrensis and Hylocomium splendens and mats of Empetrum nigrum, Vaccinium vitis-idaea and Loiseuleria procumbens. The lycopods Lycopodium annotinum, L. clavatum, L. complanatum and L. sabinaefolium var. sitchensis were locally abundant. The shrub layer was composed of scattered clumps of Betula glandulosa, Vaccinium myrtilloides, V. uliginosum, Ledum groenlandi- cum, Salix arbusculoides, S. bebbiana, S. glauca and S. planifolia. The herb layer was sparse, and mainly consisted of Calamagrostis canadensis, Oryzopsis pungens, Comandra livida, Epilobium angustifolium and Pedicularis labradorica. Pinus banksiana, Betula “papyrifera” and B. fontinalis occurred as secondary species. A soil pit dug in a till ridge west of Patterson Lake revealed a shallow organic horizon of 2 cm above 33 cm of sandy-stony parent material which was stained a reddish-brown colour. There was no frost at 35 cm, the depth of the pit. PICEA MARIANA — FEATHER Moss woops. On the lower slopes of eskers, ull ridges, stream margins and other well drained mesic sites there was an increase in the proportion of the forest floor covered by feather mosses, principally Hylocomium splendens, Pleurozium scherberi, Ptilium crista- castrensis, Ptilidium ciliare and Rhacomitrium canescens. The shrub layer was more dense and lacked the park-like aspect of the Picea mariana — lichen woods. Common shrubs here included Betula glandulosa, Alnus crispa and Salix bebbiana. Less common were Salix planifolia, S. arbusculoides, Ribes triste and Rubus idaeus var. strigosus. “(he ground cover was usually sparse and included Lycopodium annotinum, L. clavatum, Agrostis borealis, Calamagrostis canadensis, Carex capillaris, C. leptalea, C. vaginata, Smilacina trifolia, Stellaria longifolia, Mitella nuda, Ribes triste, Rubus chamaemorus, Viola palustris, Linnaea borealis ssp. americana, Erigeron lonchophyllus, Petasites frigidus var. palmatus, Taraxacum certophorum and scattered patches of the lichen Parmelia physodes. In moister habitats Sphagnum increased in importance. In this zone, between the feather moss woods and the muskegs, the forest floor usually consisted of patches of feather mosses, active Sphagnum fuscum hummocks, and dead mosses covered with lichens. Soil pits dug into inactive Sphagnum hummocks and lichen patches revealed a shallow but variable peat layer 8-36 cm deep and no frost at 40-50 cm, the depth of the pits. An actively growing Sphagnum hummock contained frost at 33 cm and no sign of inorganic material. PICEA MARIANA MUSKEG. In areas of impeded drainage a vegetation dominated by Picea mariana and several species of Sphagnum occurred. The trees of Picea mariana were more closely spaced than in the other forest types and were sometimes accompanied by individuals of Larix laricina. The dominant shrubs were Betula glandulosa, Ledum groenlandicum and Salix planifolia. Low shrubs of frequent occurrence were Rubus chamaemorus, Vaccinium vitis-idaea, Cornus canadensis, Salix myrtillifolia, Ribes hud- somanum, Kalmia polifolia and Chamaedaphne calyculata. The ground cover 124 Tue CANADIAN Firetp-NATURALIST Vol. 80 was mainly Sphagnum fuscum and other sphagna including S. warnstorfianum, S. lindbergii, S. wulfianum, and, in wet depressions, S. cuspidatum. Other mosses which occurred in varying abundance included Auwlacomnium palustre, Drepanocladus venicosus, Hylocomium splendens, Tomentypnum nitens and Pleurozium schreberi. Werbs which occurred scattered in the mosses were Equisetum sylvaticum, Carex capillaris, C. magellanica, Scirpus caespitosus, Smilacina trifolia, Parnassia multiseta, Rubus acaulis, Pedicularis labradorica, Petasites frigidus var. palmatus, Erigeron lonchophyllus and Senecio paupercula. Bare silt frost boils were sometimes observed in intermittent drainage channels between Sphagnum hummocks. ‘These frost boils contained a unique assemblage of arctic and subarctic species including Juncus triglumis ssp. albescens, J. castaneus and Carex bicolor. Here also were Tofieldia pusilla, Potentilla fruticosa and Senecio paupercula. ; Two general types of treeless vegetation were located in poorly drained pockets within the Picea mariana muskegs. Both types had a peaty substrate and graded into Picea mariana muskeg. ‘The first was the SPHAGNUM BocG which was characterized by the dominance of Sphagnum fuscum and other sphagna including S. recurvum. Bogs of this type were observed at the margin of a lake south of Hasbala Lake and west of Patterson Lake. Characteristic species included Carex limosa, Salix pedicellaris, Eriophorum chamissonis, Drosera anglica, Chamaedaphne calyculata, Utricularia intermedia and the mosses Drepanocladus exannulatus and Aulacomnium palustre. An occasional tree of Larix laricina occurred on the bog margin. A second type, THE Carex — Scirpus FEN, was characterized by the presence of sedges and the absence of Sphagnum. The dominant species were Carex limosa, C. diandra, C. aquatilis, Scirpus caespitosus, S. hudsonianus and Drepanocladus venicosus. Associated with these species were Equisetum fluviatile, Sparganium minimum, Triglochin maritima, Carex buxbaumu, C. chordorhiza, C. livida, Eriophorum viridi-carinatum, Utricularia intermedia and U. vulgaris. In the zone between the Carex — Scirpus fen and the Picea mariana muskeg was a drier, shrubby vegetation characterized by Scirpus caespitosus and S. hudsonianus and scattered shrubs of Betula glandulosa, Myrica gale, Kalmia polifolia, Vaccinium uliginosum and occasional trees of Larix laricina and Picea mariana. Associated with these species were Lycopodium selago, Triglochin maritima, Tofieldia pusilla, Salix arctophila, S. reticulata, Pedicularis labradorica and Pinguicula vulgaris. PINUS BANKSIANA Woops. Pure stands of P. banksiana were not common and this species was usually associated with Picea mariana on eskers, sandy till ridges, old beach lines and in burned areas. A few woods with P. banksiana the dominant species were observed in extensive sand blowouts. Here, the trees were widely spaced, the undergrowth was scanty and the forest floor was usually lichen covered. Characteristic species included scattered shrubs of Betula glandulosa, Vaccinium myrtilloides, Vaccinium vitis-idaea and Ribes 1966 Arcus: BoTraNnicAL INVESTIGATIONS 125 glandulosum, and the herbs Carex abdita, C. foenea, Calamagrostis purpurascens, Festuca saximontana, Poa pratensis and Arnica lonchophylla. Putative introgressant forms of Pinus are discussed in the catalogue. Minor Forest Communities Picea GLAUCA woops. Picea glauca is rare in northeastern Saskatchewan and only one stand dominated by P. glauca and a possible stand remnant was seen. A small stand of P. glauca with associated P. mariana and Larix laricina was located a few kilometers west of Hasbala Lake. The habitat was wet and the ground moss covered. Common in this stand were Carex scirpoidea, C. vaginata, Orchis rotundifolia, Salix abrusculoides, S. glauca, S. myrtillifolia, S. reticulata, Mitella nuda, Rubus acaulis, Arctostaphylos alpina ssp. rubra and Aster hysopifolius. A single individual of Picea glauca, standing about 5 m tall, was found on a small patch of turf in the middle of a sand blowout within a Picea mariana — lichen woods. ‘The size of the tree and the well-developed turf in which it was growing suggested that it represented a relict of a more extensive forest that was destroyed by fire. My observations on the occurrence of P. glauca in northeastern Saskat- chewan do not agree with Tyrrell (1898), Ritchie (1959) and Larsen (1965) who maintain that P. glauca is the chief tree species on eskers in the subarctic. In this area P. mariana is the only species of Picea observed on eskers. A possible explanation for this apparent disagreement has been suggested by Ritchie who observed that P. mariana occurs on eskers where P. mariana forests are contiguous to the eskers, possibly because of the large number of seed parents. In the study area P. mariana forests occurred adjacent to the eskers and occupied much of the surrounding till plains. It is also possible that hybridization and introgression between P. mariana and P. glauca, which has been suspected by Larsen (1965), may result in species misidentification. A study of this possibility as well as further exploration of eskers in northern Saskatchewan is desirable. Lake Margin Communities The marginal vegetation of lakes located on glacial till is subdivided, for convenience, into aquatic, Carex fen or meadow, Salix fen, rocky lake margin and sand beach communities. The floating aquatics Potemogeton richardsonui, P. filiformis, P. alpinus var. tenuifolia, Nuphar variegatum, Ranunculus aquatilis var. capillaceus and Calligeron giganteum often occurred along lake margins. In shallow water, emergent Equisetum fluviatile may form extensive monodominant stands sometimes with Utricularia intermedia and Potentilla palustris. Isoetes muri- cata var. braunii occurred in sand between rocks on the margins of most lakes in the area, especially in protected coves. Carex FENS occurred on mucky or peaty lake margins and graded either directly into Picea mariana muskeg or through a Salix fen to muskeg. Large 126 Tue CANADIAN FieLp-NATURALIST Vol. 80 Carex fens dominated by Carex rostrata or C. aquatilis were common. The following species occurred in these fens: Carex canescens, C. paupercula, C. physocar pa, Eriophorum angustif olium, Scirpus hudsonianus, Salix arctophila, S. glauca, S. pedicellaris, Cicuta mackenzieana and Galium trifidum. SALIX PLANIFOLIA FENS with an understory of Calamagrostis canadensis, Carex aquatilis, C. physocarpa, C. rostrata and Veronica scutellata were common on lake margins. These fens were apparently seasonally flooded, although they were dry on the surface in late summer. Species which also occurred in these fens were Equisetum arvense, Carex brunnescens, Eriophorum angusti- folium, Myrica gale, Betula glandulosa, Stellaria caly cantha, Actaea rubra, Ribes glandulosa and Rubus acaulis. Rocky LAKE MARGINS were sometimes edged with turf shaded by species of Salix and the adjacent forest. Habitats of this type on Patterson and Hasbala Lakes supported a number of interesting arctic and subarctic species which | were uncommon elsewhere. These included Juncus filiformis (dominant), Selaginella selaginoides, Carex garberi, Luzula nivalis, Salix reticulata, Poly- gonum viviparum, Coptis trifolia var. groenlandica, Parnassia Rotzebuei and Primula mistassinica. SAND BEACHES Were uncommon here and occurred only where the lake was eroding a sandy esker or an old bench line. The vegetation on beaches was scanty and included Equisetum arvense, Carex physocarpa, Juncus filiformis, Ranunculus reptans and Rorripa icelandica var. fernaldiana. Esker Communities Eskers are a prominent feature of the landscape in northeastern Saskat- chewan. They occur as single or multiple ridges separated by elliptical or circular depressions (kettles) or as chains of isolated conical hills (Taylor, 1963). An esker of the multiple ridge type south of Hasbala Lake was visited and a brief visit was made to a single ridge esker near Warren Lake. The ESKER SLOPES AND SUMMITS were usually covered with open Picea mariana —\ichen and P. mariana —feather moss woods. Pinus banksiana occurred on eskers either in association with Picea mariana or in small, almost pure stands. Betula “papyrifera” occurred on moist slopes in association with Picea mariana. The kerries or depressions on and between ridges were dry or held small lakes and ponds. Dry kettles and dry open slopes were dominated by Cetraria, Cladonia and Stereocaulon in association with Agrostis scabra, Calamagrostis inexpansa, Festuca saximontana, Oryzopsis pungens and Poa glauca. Mats of Vaccimum vitis-idaea, Arctostaphylos uva-ursi, Saxifraga tricuspidata and Potentilla tridentata also covered large areas. Here also were Lycopodium complanatum, L. sabinae folium var. sitchensis, Trisetum spicatum, Carex foenea, Anemone multifida, Erigeron acris var. asteroides, Antennaria umbrinella, Artemisia campestris var. borealis and Solidago spathulata var. neomexicana. 1966 Arcus: BoTaNniIcAL INVESTIGATIONS 127 A stand of dwarfed Picea mariana was observed in the bottom of one dry kettle. The trees ranged from 2 to 3 m tall and showed signs of wind pruning. A similar condition was described by Larsen (1965) at Ennadai Lake, N.W.T. SAND BLOWOUTS Were common on sandy eskers but were rarely extensive. Mats of Empetrum hermaphroditum, Potentilla tridentata, and the trailing rhizomes of Carex foenea stabilized the sand. Also occurring in blowouts were Agrostis scabra, Calamagrostis canadensis, C. inexpansa, C. purpurascens, Poa glauca, Festuca saximontana, Carex bigelowti, C. brevipes, C. supina var. spaniocarpa and scattered shrubs of Juniperus communis var. depressa. The margin of one blowout at Warren Lake was occupied by a shrubby growth of Populus tremuloides \ess than 1 m tall. OPEN SANDY-GRAVEL SURFACES supported such pioneer species as Rhacomi- trium canescens, Carex glacialis, C. supina var. spaniocapa, Festuca saximontana and Poa glauca. Cliff Communities A GRANITE CLIFF west of Patterson Lake supported a community dominated by scattered trees of Betula “papyrifera”, the shrubs Ledum groenlandicum, L. palustre var. decumbens, Vaccinium uliginosum, V. vitis-idaea and Rubus idaeus var. strigosus. Other vascular plants collected here were Empetrum hermaphroditum, Ribes glandulosum, R. triste, Poa glauca and Calamagrostis canadensis. Lichens covering the dry ledges included Peltigera malacea, Cladonia amaurocraea, C. alpestris, C. alpicola, C. cornuta, C. rangiferina and Actinogyra muhlenbergia. The fern Polypodium vulgare var. virginiana formed large colonies in some lichen mats and Gymnocarpium robertianum occurred in crevices with mosses. Some wet faces supported dense mats of the mosses Ulota crispa, Cynodontium tenellum and Dicranum elongatum. Tundra Communities Tundra vegetation has not been previously described in Saskatchewan. Two communities considered to be tundra because of their treeless condition, arctic taxa and areal extent were studied in the Patterson—Hasbala Lakes region. One was a moist boulder field and the other a dry rock field. Moist BOULDER FIELD. A prominent assemblage of arctic and subarctic species was discovered on a boulder field which filled a narrow stream valley south of Hasbala Lake. The boulder field, about 1.5 km long, had a marked gradient and a shallow stream flowing down its centre. At the upper end of the valley a deep, compact turf over the boulders was covered with a thicket dominated by Betula glandulosa, Vaccinium uliginosum and Potentilla fruticosa. Under these shrubs there was an almost continuous mat of the arctic willows Salix arctophila and S. reticulata. Scat- tered in the thicket were Salix myrtillifolia, S. planifolia and Myvica gale. Here also were Carex norvegica, C. scirpoidea, C. dioica ssp. gynocrates, Scirpus caespitosus var. callosus and Polygonum viviparum. ‘Vhe arctic-circumpolar 128 Tue Canapian Fietp-NaATuRALIST Vol. 80 Juncus triglumis ssp. albescens occurred here, as in the Picea mariana muskeg, on open, hard packed silt frost boils. Toward the lower end of the valley the turf became thinner and finally disappe: ared. The vegetation was progressively less dense and finally occurred only in sand-filled cracks and spaces between boulders. Vaccinium uliginosum increased in relative abundance over Betula glandulosa; Salix arctophila and S. reticulata remained prominent and the frequency of S. glauca increased. The number of herbaceous species increased downstream and Equisetum arvense, E. scirpoides, Agrostis borealis. Carex bigelowi, C. diandra, C. dioica ssp. gy/ocrates, C. norvegica, C. saxatalis var. miliaris, C. scirpoidea, Polygonum viviparum, Anemone parviflora, Parnassia multiseta, Rubus acaulis, Astragalus alpinus, Epilobium palustre and Galium trifidum were noted. A small, but conspicuous stand of Poa alpina occurred in cracks on a large boulder. | A dense thicket of Salix planifolia, S. serissima and Betula glandulosa 2 to 2.5 m tall occurred directly over the stream. Here the thicket was so dense that the tops of the shrubs could support the weight of a man. Growing in the deep shade beneath this thicket were Viola palustris and Scutellaria galeri- culata var. epilobiifolia. Dry Rock FIELD. Tundra vegetation was observed on the north and northwest sides of the summit of Arctic Butte, a granite hill at 1550 feet elevation located 3.2 km southwest of Patterson Lake. Arctic Butte was covered with red granite rubble and a shallow, coarse-textured soil. Scattered, stunted individuals of Picea mariana and Betula fontinalis occurred on the hill, but in general the summit was treeless. The vegetation was dominated by Empetrum hermaphroditum, Vaccinium uliginosum and Loiseuleria procumbens. Betula glandulosa, Pedicularis labradorica, Carex capitata and Vaccinium vitis-idaea were common, and the shrubs Salix bebbiana, S. planifolia, S. glauca, S. arbusculoides, Ledum palustre var. decumbens and Andromeda polifolia were scattered throughout. Also here were Carex bigelowii, Eriophorum brachyantherum and Calamagrostis canadensis. The arctic taxa Carex capitata and Luzula confusa occurred in deeper soil around the base of boulders and Carex glacialis occurred only on bare soil near the centre of frost boils. This rock field is similar to those described by Larsen (1965) from the south end of Ennadai Lake, N.W.T. In subarctic Saskatchewan arctic taxa begin to appear, although infre- quently, in both boreal and tundra communities. For example, Salix reticulata occurred in a small muskeg at the edge of an esker kettle and in a Vaccinium uliginosum—Scir pus caespitosus fen in association with Salix arctophila, Lycopo- dium selago and Pinguicula vulgaris. Lycopodium selago also occurred infrequently in Picea mariana muskegs sometimes with Loiseleuria procumbens and in wet Picea mariana—Salix planifolia woods on stream margins. Salix arctophila appeared infrequently in Carex fens and in wet drainageways in Picea mariana muskegs and Loiseleuria procumbens frequently was noted in Picea mariana—lichen woods. Arctic taxa also occurred in small numbers in such restricted habitats as rocky lake margins and silt frost boils. 1966 Arcus: BoraNicaAL INVESTIGATIONS 129 ANNOTATED CATALOGUE OF PLANT SPECIES The following catalogue contains 203 taxa of vascular plants, 42 bryophytes and 24 lichens. ‘The relatively high number of vascular plants in this area as compared with surrounding areas such as Black Lake, 132 taxa (Scotter, 1961), Big Spruce River, 135 taxa (Ritchie, 1959) and Neultin Lake, 134 taxa (Porsild, 1950) may be a reflection of its transitional subarctic vegetation in which some low arctic species begin to appear and boreal species still persist. A number of species new to Saskatchewan are reported here, including 13 vascular plants, 15 bryophtes and 1 lichen. The nomenclature is after Scoggan (1957) except where synonyms are cited. All specimens have been identified by the author with the exception of the lichens (M. Hale and J. Thomson), bryophytes (H. Crum), Polypodiaceae (R. & A. Tryon), Isoetes (C. Reed) and Betula (J. Dugle). Other groups were verified by specialists: Carex (J. Calder or F. Hermann), Juncus (F. Hermann), Compositae (A. Cronquist), Gramineae (W. Dore), Pinus (R. Shoenike) and miscellaneous specimens (A. E. Porsild). A complete set of specimens is deposited in the W. P. Fraser Herbarium, University of Saskatchewan. Abbreviations used in catalogue are: H. L., Hasbala Lake; P. L., Patterson Lake; W. L., Warren Lake. Vascular Plants EQUISETACEAE EQUISETUM ARVENSE L. Infrequent on lake shores, sandy beaches, and rocky shores; on mineral soil in Picea mariana burns, and in Betula glandulosa scrub vegetation. H. L. 259-63; P. L. 439-63. E. rruviatite L. Emergent aquatic on lake margins, infrequent in a wet Menyanthes- Scirpus fen. An extensive E. fluviatile marsh occurs at the south end of Hasbala Lake. H. L. 881-62, 178-63. E. pacustre L. In wet Picea mariana woods. H. L. 234-63, 285-63. A northward extension of the Saskatchewan range of this species (see map 89, Hultén, 1964). E. scrrpowes Michx. Frequent on compact moss hummocks in Picea mariana muskegs and in P. mariana burns, on rocky lake shores, and on mineral soil in tundra vegeta- tion. H. L. 852-62, 1029-62, 225-63, 236-63. E. sytvaticum L. In Picea mariana muskeg. H. L. 981-62, 216-63. LYCOPODIACEAE LycoroptuM ANNOTINUM L. var. PUNGENS (La Pylaie) Desv. In dry, open Picea mariana — Betula glandulosa — lichen woods The collection numbers are the author’s. on esker and on mineral soil in Picea mariana burns. H. L. 929-62, 260-63. L. cravatum L. In Picea mariana—lichen woods. H. L. 1042-62, 263-63. L. comptanatum L. Common in Picea mariana—lichen woods, dry lichen slopes on eskers, and on dry sandy slopes in Picea mariana burns. H. L. 104-63, 145-63. L. saBinaEFoLIuM Willd. ssp. sITCHENSE (Rupr.) Calder & Taylor. Common on eskers in Picea mariana—lichen woods, on dry sandy slopes, and in Picea mariana—Larix laricina—Pinus banksiana woods. H. L. 928-62, 193-63, 485-63. This is the second Saskatchewan record for this rarely collected species. It was pre- viously collected by Raup (1936) on Lake Athabasca at the mouth of the William River. It resembles L. alpinum L. in its habit and the short sessile strobili (ca. 0.5-0.8 cm long), but differs from that species in lacking flattened dorsiventral branches and trowel- shaped leaves. L. seraco L. Infrequent, but occurring in a variety of habitats from Picea mariana— Larix laricina woods on the edge of an esker in association with L. sabinaefolium ssp. sitchense and Loiseleuria procumbens, to a Scirpus caespitosus—Vaccimum uliginosum 130 Tue CanapiANn FIecp-NaTUuRALIST fen on a pond margin in association with Pinguicula vulgaris, Salix reticulata and S. arctophila; and in a wet stream margin woods. H. L. 191-63, 194-63, 316-63. This is the second report of this arctic species for Saskatchewan. It was previously collected on the shores of Lake Athabasca (Raup, 1936). Wherever this species was collected it was in association with other arctic species. SELAGINELLACEAE SELAGINELLA SELAGINOIDES (L.) Link. Rare, in moss on a rocky lake margin growing under Salix planifolia and Betula glandulosa in association with Coptis trifolia var. groen- landica, Parnassia kotzebuei and Primula mustassinica. P. L. 404-63. POLY PODIACEAE GYMNOCARPIUM ROBERTIANUM (Hoffm.) Newm. In mature streamside Picea mariana —Betula “papyrifera” woods, and _ locally abundant with mosses in crevices on granitic and metamorphic cliffs. H. L. 895-62, 227-63; P. L. 361-63, 456-63. PoLYPoDIUM VULGARE L. var. VIRGINIANUM (L.) Eaton. Seen only as a large colony growing in a Cladonia rangiferina, C. cornuta mat on a granite block at the base of a cliff. P. L. 464-63. Woobsta GLABELLA R. Br. In crevices on an outcrop in Picea mariana woods, and in crevices on a metamorphic cliff. H. L. 226-63, 239-63. ISOETACEAE IsoETES MURICATA Dur. var. BRAUNU (Dm.) Reed. Rarely collected but widely distri- buted in lakes in northeastern Saskatchewan. Usually growing in sand in water 7-30 cm deep. H. L. 1044-62; P. L. 405-63, 432-63; W. L. 611-63. PINACEAE JUNIPERUS comMmuNIS L. var. DEPRESSA Pursh. Occasional in dry Picea mariana— lichen woods and in blowouts in Pinus banksiana—Picea mariana woods on sandy eskers. Most commonly seen on dry south- facing outcrops. H. L. 1013-62, 237-63. Larix Laricina (Du Roi) K. Koch. A rela- tively uncommon species, collected from the margin of a Sphagnum bog and on the mar- gin of an island in Hasbala Lake. This species has been observed in the transitional area between Picea mariana muskvg and P. Vol. 80 mariana—feather moss woods. H. L. 1051-62, 235-63. Picza eLauca (Moench) Voss. The least common conifer in northeastern Saskatch- ewan. Only two stands observed, one con- sisting of a single tree, 15 feet tall, growing on a patch of turf in a blowout in a Picea mariana woods on a sandy esker (H. L. 199- 63) and the other a small stand in a wet Picea glauca—P. mariana — Larix laricina woods. Picka MARIANA (Mill.) BSP. The dominant conifer in the study area, occupying a wide variety of habitats from dry ridge tops and esker summits to wet muskegs and Sphagnum bogs. On very sandy sites it is often accom- panied by or replaced by Pius banksiana. H. L. 995-62, 996-62, 1039-62; W. L. 607-63. Pinus BANKSIANA Lamb. A relatively com- mon tree species on sandy sites where it may form almost monodominant stands (H. L. 1004-62, 303-63A). It also occurs in open Picea mariana—lichen woods on summits and sandy parts of eskers (H. L. 822-62, 932-62). Some individuals referrable to P. bank- siana (cf., population sample 1004-62, speci- men 303-63A and other collections from northern Saskatchewan) show some P. con- torta-like characteristics including umbos with prominent and persistent spines, diver- gent cone axes and longer than average needles. Pinus contorta does not now occur in boreal Saskatchewan (known in Saskat- chewan only from Cypress Hills) and the problem of explaining the presence of these characters in northeastern Saskatchewan 1s an interesting one. The evidence for intro- gression between P. banksiana and P. con- torta in Saskatchewan is being assembled and it will appear in a separate paper. SPARGANIACEAE SPARGANIUM ANGUSTIFOLIUM Michx. Seen only once floating in a sluggish stream. H. L. 920-62. S. MINIMUM (Hartm.) Fries. In shallow, sluggish water at edge of small lake and in very wet Carex—Menyanthes fens. H. L. 883-62, 134-63; P. L. 429-63. POTAMOGETON ACEAE PoTAMOGETON ALPINUS Balbis var. TENUI- FoLius (Raf.) Ogden. Floating in fast-flowing streams and in shallow water on lake margins. H. L. 884-62, 246-63; P. L. 420-63. 1966 ARGUS: P. rmirormis Pers. var. BOREALIS (Raf.) St. John. Growing in shallow water at lake edge in sandy-gravel substrate. H. L. 1045-62. This report is an extension of the range of this species into northern Sakatchewan. P. ricHaRpsoni (Benn.) Rydb. Occurs in fast-flowing streams and lakes in water 0.3 to 2 m deep. H. L. 885-62, 247-63, 350-63. JUNCAGIN ACEAE TricLocHIn MaritiMa L. On wet pond margins in a Scirpus—Menyanthes fen, and in Carex aquatilis—C. livida—Scirpus fens. H. L. 135-63, 180-63, 184-63, P. L. 482-63. GRAMINEAE AGROPYRON TRACHYCAULUM (Link.) Malte var. NOVAE-ANGLIAE (Scribner.) Fern. A rare species in this area. Encountered only twice, once on the south-facing sandy slope of an esker associated with Populus balsmifera and again in a wet drainage area in a Picea mariana muskeg. H. L. 320-63, P. L. 445-63. AGROSTIS BOREALIS Hartm. Common in the tundra on the moist boulder field, in Salix thickets, and on rocky lake shores. H. L. 1027-62, 1028-62, 340-63, 358-63; P. L. 396-63. A. scasra Willd. Common in dry habitats including blowouts in Pinus banksiana—Picea mariana woods, dry depressions on eskers, on a beaver house, and on sand in partly burned Pinus banksiana woods. A meadow domi- nated by this species associated with dwarfed Picea mariana was observed on a sandy esker at Warren Lake. H. L. 915-62, 926-62, 1008- 62, 304-63A; W. L. 602-63. CALAMAGROSTIS CANADENSIS (Michx.) Beauv. Occupies a wide variety of habitats from Picea mariana—lichen woods to _ Picea mariana muskeg, sand blowouts in Pinus banksiana woods, granitic cliffs, rich grami- noid—Salix thickets and the moist boulder field and dry rock field tundra. H. L. 949-62, 819-62, 1010-62, 863-62, 220-63; P. L. 377-63, 379-63A, 422-63, 428-63, 431-63, 450-63. Two specimens have been referred to var. langsdorfii (Link.) Hult., 422-63, 949-62. The variation in this species is confusing and the two specimens from the dry rock field tundra on Arctic Butte, 377-63 and 379-63A, have been apparently so modified by their en- vironment that they are not readily dis- tinguishable as the species. C. rNexpansaA Gray. Occurs in Picea mariana—lichen woods on eskers, in Picea mariana muskegs, among boulders on stream BoranicaL INVESTIGATIONS 131 margins, and in an Agrostis scabra meadow. H. L. 820-62, 848-62, 871-62; P. L. 427-63, 446-63; W. L. 603-63. C. purpurascens R. Br. On sandy eskers, blowouts in Pinus banksiana—Picea mariana woods and in P. mariana burns on sandy soils. H. L. 1000-62, 1009-62, 105-63; W. L. 591-63. FESTUCA SAXIMONTANA Rydb. Apparently restricted to eskers where it occurs on open sandy-gravel slopes, sand blowouts, and in an Agrostis scabra meadow. H. L. 1005-62, 302-63A; W. L. 598-63, 606-63. Oryzopsis PUNGENS (JTorr.) Hitchc. In Picea mariana—lichen woods and dry depres- sions on eskers. H. L. 927-62, 970-62, 484-63. Poa axrpina L. Seen only in the tundra vegetation on the moist boulder field south of Hasbala Lake in sand on and between boulders. H. L. 1025-62, 330-63. This is the second report of this species for Saskatchewan. It was previously collected by Raup (1936) on the north shore of Lake Athabasca. P. eLauca Vahl. Frequent in dry habitats including sandy eskers, mineral soil in Picea mariana burns, granitic and metamorphic cliffs, and open Picea mariana—lichen woods on eskers. H. L. 125-63, 202-63, 229-63, 233-63, 305-63, 833-63; P. L. 362-63, 457-63; W. L. 593-63, 596-63. TriseETUM sPicatumM (L.) Richter ssp. MOLLE (Michx.) Hult. In dry habitats on sandy eskers and in a Picea mariana burn. H. L. 925-62, 305-63A, 143-63. CYPERACEAE Carex appita Bickn. A pioneer on sand blowouts in Pinus banksiana—Picea mariana esker woods, and on open sand in Picea mariana burns. H. L. 1006-62, 1014-62, 160-63, 306-63. New to the flora of Saskatchewan and representing a considerable northward ex- tension of the range of this transcontinental temperate species. Reported by Ritchie (1956) from a similar habitat at Tod Lake, Manitoba about 400 km south of Hasbala Lake. Some of this material was first identified as the closely related cordilleran species C. brevipes. However, it is probably best to refer this material to the transcontinental C. abdita, as suggested by Dr. J. Calder (per- sonal communication). The taxonomy of this and the related taxa, C. rossii, C. umbellata, C. tonsa, C. deflexa, and C. brevipes, is in need of revision. 132 Tue CanapiAN FIeLp-NaATURALIST C. aeENEA Fern. In Picea mariana—Pinus banksiana burn regeneration on a till ridge. H. L. 106-63. C. aguatmis Wahl. Dominant in Carex— Scirpus fens and present on lake shores in wet drainage ways in Picea mariana woods. H. L. 174-63, 244-63; P. L. 392-63, 444-63 (the latter specimen is immature but near C. aquatilis) . C. sicotor All. Seen only once on a hard silt frost boil in a Picea mariana muskeg. H. L. 269-63. A rarely collected arctic—subarctic species new to the flora of Saskatchewan. It is prin- cipally a coastal species known, to the east, from Churchill (Scoggan, 1957) and, to the northwest, from Great Bear Lake and Bathurst Inlet (Porsild, 1957, Map. 83). C. sigeELowut Torr. Infrequent in the tundra on the moist boulder field and on the dry rock field, and a member of the pioneer, sand-stabilizing communities on sand blow- outs. H. L. 1026-62, 325-63, 342-63, 286-63; P. L. 374-63, 379-63; W. L. 608- 63. New to the flora SE Saskatchewan but pre- viously reported from several arctic (Scog- gan, 1957) and subarctic (Ritchie, 1959) localities in Manitoba. C. BRUNNESCENS (Pers.) Poir. A member of moist streamside and rocky lake margin com- munities. Seen also on Sphagnum in a wet muskeg meadow. H. L. 977-62, 108-63, 250-63; P. L. 397-63. C. suxsauMut Wahl. In wet Carex—Scirpus fens. H. L. 176-63. C. canescens L. Seen only once in a Carex fen associated with Eriophorum angusti- folium. H. L. 865-62. C. capitiaris L. ssp. CHLOROSTACHYS (Ste- vens) Love. Infrequent on lake and stream margins, in wet drainage ways in Picea mariana muskegs and in tundra on the moist boulder field. H. L. 859-62, 356-63; P. L. 393-63, 447-63. C. capirata L. Common in the tundra on the dry rock field. P. L. 372-63. C. cHorporruizA Ehrh. ex L. f. Seen only in a Carex—Scirpus fen. P. L. 481-63. C. perLtexA Hornem. In a rich Salix— Carex Calamagrostis thicket at the edge of a Picea mariana muskeg and in a P. mariana burn on a sandy esker. H. L. 979-62, 197-63. C. pianpRa Schrank. Occurs on the margin of a wet depression in a Picea mariana muskeg and in the tundra on the moist boulder field. H. L. 322-63; P. L. 477-63. Vol. 80 C. pioica L. ssp. GyNocraTes (Wormskj.) Hult. In Picea mariana muskegs and asso- ciated with Vaccinium uliginosum, Betula glandulosa and Potentilla fruticosa on the moist boulder field. H. L. 853-62, 346-63. C. roenea Willd. Common in dry sandy habitats, sand blowouts, Picea mariana— lichen woods, lichen-covered depressions on eskers, dry slopes in Picea mariana burns, and in an Agrostis meadow on an esker. H. L. 831-62, 931-62, 935-62, 1007-62; W. L. 601-63. C. Garpert Fern. (C. hassei in Breitung, 1957). Seen only once in moss on a rocky lake shore, associated with Parnassia kotze- buei. P. L. 394-63. C. evactatis Mack. In the tundra on the dry rock field growing on the mineral soil in a frost boil. Also seen as a pioneer on open sandy gravel on an esker associated with C. supina. P. L. 378-63, 382-63; W. L. 595-63. An uncommon species in Saskatchewan reported previously by Raup (1936) from a dolomitic ledge on the north shore of Lake Athabasca. This usually calcicolous species (Gjaervoll, 1958; Raup, 1936) was collected from a granite outcrop. C. inTeRIoR Bailey. Seen only once grow- ing on an outcrop in “Quillwort” Lake. H. L. 892-62. C. LepTALEA Wahl. In wet depressions and drainage ways in Picea mariana muskegs and on stream margins. H. L. 845-62, 847-62, 357-63; P. L. 419-63. C. trmosa L. One of the mat-forming: species in Sphagnum bogs, muskeg pools, and Carex aquatilis—Scirpus fens. H. L. 1050-62, 256-63; P. L. 478-63. C. tiviwa (Wahl.) Willd. Collected only once in a Carex—Scirpus fen. H. L. 181-63 C. Lotiacea L. Scattered in Hylocomium splendens in a wet drainage way in a Picea mariana muskeg. P. L. 418-63. C. MAGELLANICA Lam. (C. paupercula Michx.) In wet Sphagnum-filled depressions in Picea mariana muskegs and in a Sphagnum, Carex meadow on a stream margin. H. L. 876-62, 256-63A, 295-63. In using this name I am following Hulten (1942) and Calder (personal communication) who maintain that the North American C. paupercula cannot be clearly distinguished from the Southern Hemisphere C. magel- lanica. C. norvecicA Retz. On frost hummocks and on sand between boulders in shrubby tundra on the moist boulder field. Also scattered in Hylocomium splendens in a wet 1966 ARGUS: drainage way in a Picea mariana muskeg and in dry Picea mariana—lichen woods on a granite outcrop. H. L. 862-62, 213-63, 329-63, 347-63; P. L. 417-63. C. rostrata Stokes. A common species, dominant in large meadows in shallow water on lake margins. H. L. 919-62; P. L. 440-63. C. saxatiuis L. ssp. taxa Kalela (C. physo- carpa Presl., C. saxatilis var. major Olney). Found in lake margin habitats including a Picea mariana muskeg, a Carex rostrata fen, a Salix, Carex, Calamagrostis fen, between rocks in shallow water and on a sandy beach. H. L. 867-62, 918-62, 973-62, 112-63, 245-63. For a discussion of Carex physocarpa and its relationship to C. saxatilis see Gjaervoll, 1958, Hultén, 1964 and Scoggan, 1957. These taxa are apparently confluent and the former is distinguished from the latter only by its more robust habit and the dropping pistillate spikes. I am following Hulten in treating C. physocarpa as C. saxatilis ssp. laxa. C. saxatinis L. var. miviaris (Michx.) Bailey. On sand among boulders in the tundra on the moist boulder field, and on a sandy beach at the edge of Picea mariana—lichen woods. H. L. 328-63, 341-63; P. L. 435-63. C. scirpowea Michx. In tundra on the moist boulder field and in wet depressions and drainage ways in Picea mariana muskegs. H. L. 842-62, 843-62, 327-63, 339-63, 172-63; P. L. 443-63. C. supina Willd. ex Wahl. ssp. SPANIOCARPA (Steud.) Hult. Seen only as a pioneer on open sand and sandy-gravel slopes on an esker, associated with C. glacialis and C. bigelowii. W. L. 594-63, 609-63. C. vacinata Tauscher. In wet drainage ways in Picea mariana muskegs. H. L. 169-63, 309-63; P. L. 444-63A. EriopHoRUM ALPINUM L. (Scirpus hud- sonianus (Michx.) Fern.). Associated with Scirpus caespitosus on margins of muskeg pools and in Carex—Scirpus fens. A dominant in a Carex meadow on a bog island. H. L. 891-62, 192-63A; P. L. 476-63. E. ancustiroL1uM Honck. ssp. SUBARCTICUM (Vassil.) Hult. (var. szajus Schultz). In wet Carex meadow, Carex Sphagnum depres- sions in Picea mariana muskegs, and at stream edge in tundra on the moist boulder field. H. L. 864-62, 978-62, 248-63, 332-63. E. BRACHYANTHERUM ‘Trautv. Seen only twice, once in tundra on the dry rock field west of Patterson Lake and again, in a Picea mariana muskeg. H. L. 117-63; P. L. 370-63. - BoranicaL INVESTIGATIONS 133 E. cHamissonis Mey. Collected in a Carex rostrata fen on a lake margin and in a Sphagnum bog. H. L. 916-62, 1047-62. E. vacinatum L. Forming tussocks in wet Sphagnum depressions in a Picea mariana muskeg. H. L. 298-63. E. viripicaRinatum (Engelm.) Fern. In a Carex—Scirpus fen. H. L. 177-63. Scirpus caeEspitosus L. var. caLLosus Bigel. Dominant in Carex—Scirpus fens, common on the margins of muskeg pools, and in the tundra on the moist boulder field. H. L. 840-62; P. L. 434-63. ARACEAE ~Catta patustris L. Local in Carex meadows and on the wet margin of a beaver pond. H. L. 882-62; P. L. 470-63. JUNCACEAE Juncus tTrRicLumis L. ssp. ALBESCENS (Lange) Hult. (J. albescens (Lange) Fern.). A pioneer species on hard silt frost boils in drainage channels in Picea mariana muskegs and in the tundra on the moist boulder field. H. L. 846-62, 348-63, 220-63A, 433-63. New to the flora of Saskatchewan. This record represents a southern extension of the range of this arctic-circumpolar taxon. It has been reported as rare and restricted to frost-disturbed habitats in northern Mani- toba by Ritchie (1959) and Scoggan (1957). The taxonomic relationship of Juncus albescens and J. triglumis has been discussed by several authors. Scandinavian taxonomists (Hultén, 1943; Gyjaervoll, 1958) generally regard them as conspecific, whereas, North American taxonomists (Fernald, 1924; Por- sild, 1939; Scoggan, 1957) regard them as dis- tinct species. There is no doubt that these taxa are closely related and Hultén’s decision to treat them as subspecies (1964) seems to be appropriate. He proposes the taxon ssp. albescens, for the “Greenland-American eastern Asiatic type, characterized by shorter capsules . . .”, and also paler bracts and perianth, and taller culms. J. castaneus J. E. Sm. Collected once on a hard silt frost boil in a Picea mariana mus- keg. H. L. 121-63. New to the flora of Saskatchewan but not unexpected in view of its occurrence in Manitoba (Scoggan, 1957), Alberta (Moss, 1959), and the Northwest Territories (Thieret, 1963). 134 Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST J. rurormis L. Locally abundant in sand between rocks on a lake shore and on a sandy beach. H. L. 113-63; P. L. 389-63. Tuzuta conrusa Lindb. Rare, but locally abundant in the tundra on the dry rock field on Arctic Butte. P. L. 373-63. An arctic circumpolar taxon new to the flora of Saskatchewan. Known from heath and barrens communities in northern Mani- toba (Ritchie, 1959) and the Northwest Territories (Porsild, 1950). It is character- ized by a single compact head and channeled, subulate-tipped leaves which are purplish at the base. L. parvirtora (Ehrh.) Desv. Local in Picea mariana muskegs and with Salix spp. on moist slopes along lake edge. H. L. 824-62, 940-62, 118-63, 151-63. L. nivatis (Laest.) Beurl. Rare in moss on a rocky lake margin, and in a Picea mariana muskeg. P. L. 388-63, 395-63. This report of Luzula nivalis for north- eastern Saskatchewan is not only a new species for the Province but a remarkable southward extension of the range of this high-arctic species. It was seen twice, once on a rocky lake margin growing in associa- tion with other rare or uncommon species which reach the arctic, including Parnassia kotzebuei, Selaginella selaginoides, Polygo- num viviparum and Primula mistassinica, all growing in the shade of Salix planifolia and Betula glandulosa, and a second time as a single individual in a Picea mariana muskeg. These specimens compare favorably with material of Luzula nivalis from Banks Island and Southampton Island. The inflorescence is a single compact head with a bract equal- ing but not exceeding the inflorescence. The leaves are flat, 2-2.5 mm broad, with blunt callus tips and the basal leaves are brown at the base. LILIACEAE SMILACINA TRIFOLIA (L.) Desf. On Sphag- num hammocks and in wet depressions in Picea mariana muskegs. H. L. 871-62, 893-62, 251-63; P. L. 407-63. ‘TorretpiA pusitta (Michx.) Pers. In Picea mariana muskegs on hard silt frost boils and in wet drainage ways and in a Scirpus caespitosus—Vaccinium uliginosum fen. H. L. 873-62, 120-63, 182-63; P. L. 448-63. New to the flora of Saskatchewan but noted by Breitung (1957), (as T. palustris Huds.), to be expected in “. . . the extreme northern part of Saskatchewan.” It has pre- Vol. 80 viously been reported by Raup (1936) from northeastern Alberta (Sand Pt.,; Lake Atha- basca), by Porsild (1950) and Baldwin (1953) from Nueltin Lake, N.W.T., and from Kasmere Lake (Scotter, 1965) and Seal River (Ritchie, 1959) in northern Manitoba. ORCHIDACEAE CoRALLORHIZA TRIFIDA Chat. Rare, seen only once in a Picea mariana muskeg. P. L. 424-63. CYPRIPEDIUM PASSERINUM Richards. Col- lected once in a Picea mariana muskeg with Spiranthes and Habenaria. H. L. 218-63. HaABENARIA HYPERBOREA (L.) R. Br. Un- common in Picea mariana muskegs and in Carex—Scirpus fens. H. L. 179-63, 217-63A. OrcHIS ROTUNDIFOLIA Banks. Encountered only once scattered in mosses in a mixed Picea glauca—P. mariana—Larix laricina woods. H. L. 170-63. SPIRANTHES ROMANZOFFIANA Cham. Local in Picea mariana muskegs. H. L. 855-62, 217-63. SALICACEAE PopuLUS BALSAMIFERA L. Seen only on a sandy, dry, south-facing esker slope. Several individuals were present but all had been cut to the base by beavers and were regenerating by suckering. H. L. 319-63. Observed here near the northern limit of the species. P. tREMuLOWwES Michx. Seen only once forming a low thicket around the margin of a sand blowout on an esker at Warren Lake. There were no shoots taller than 1 m and all shoots were vegetative. W. L. 600-63. Occurring here near its northern limit. Observations concerning the shrubby habit of aspen near the northern edge of its range have been made by Tyrrell (1898) and Ritchie (1959). SALIX ARBUSCULOIDES Anderss. Infrequent in Picea mariana muskegs, streamside woods, Picea mariana—lichen woods and in tundra communities. H. L. 870-62, 900-62, 1033-62, 124-63, 311-63; P. L. 365-63, 386-63. A widely distributed species occurring as individuals rather than in stands. Shrub height varies from 3 to 7 m on wet stream- sides, and 0.3 to 1 m in dry or tundra situa- tions. S. ARCTOPHILA Cock. ex Heller. Common in the tundra and the Betula glandulosa— Vaccinium uliginosum scrub on the moist boulder field. Seen rarely in other habitats including a Scirpus—Vaccinium fen, a Carex 1966 ARGUS: fen, and in a wet drainage way in a Picea mariana muskeg. H. L. 837-62, 877-62, 1030-62, 1036-62, 1037-62, 189-63, 190-63, 323-63, 336-63; P. L. 442-63. New to the flora of Saskatchewan. Salix arctophila is an arctic taxon closely related to S. arctica Pall. neither of which has been known to occur in Saskatchewan. The ranges of these taxa overlap in northcentral North- west Territories (see Raup, 1959, Map 7) and their apparent intergradation in this area has led Drury (1962) to consider them as conspecific. My experience with both of these taxa in regions outside of the zone of overlap supports maintaining them as separate species until a comprehensive study can be made. Outside the zone of overlap these species can be distinguished as follows: S. arctophila 1. Branchlets green, slender and trailing. 2. Stems and leaves glabrous (except the proximal leaves). 3. Nectaries short, about 3 the length of the pedicels. 4. Ovaries clothed with flat trichomes which refract light into a spectrum. S. arctica 1. Branchlets and branches usually stout and prostrate, not conspicuously trailing. 2. Stems and leaves more or less pubescent, mature distal leaves “bearded” with a tuft of straight trichomes. Nectaries longer than the pedicels. 4. Ovaries densely clothed with terete, non- refractive trichomes. There is little doubt that these taxa do intergrade within the area of overlap and a thorough study may support Drury’s opinion, but the “typical” forms are distinct enough to be maintained until the necessary study is made. S. BEBBIANA Sarg. Common on dry esker slopes and in Picea mariana—Betula “papyri- fera” woods on thin soil overlying granitic outcrops. Infrequent on lake margins and in the tundra on the dry rock field. H. L. 937-62, 366-63; P. L. 468-63; W. L. 590-63. This is a minor northeastern extension of the range of this species. Map 21 in Raup (1959) should be amended accordingly. S. canpipaA Fluegge ex Willd. Rare. Ob- served only twice, once on a rocky lake shore, and a second time on a Sphagnum hummock in a very wet Carex meadow. H. L. 221-63, 283-63. w . Botanica INVESTIGATIONS 13)3) This species is usually confined to cal- careous or alkaline habitats (Argus, 1964b, Raup, 1959) and is uncommon on the Pre- cambrian Shield. This locality is near the northern limit of the range of the species. S. eLauca L. Frequent as individuals in Picea mariana muskegs, P. mariana—feather moss and summit woods on eskers, in stream- side and lake margin vegetation associated with Salix planifola, in dry Picea mariana— lichen woods on granitic outcrops, and in the tundra on the moist boulder field and the dry rock field. H. L. 854-62, 939-62, 997-62, 1031-62, 1034-62, 1035-62, 116-63, 152-63, 153-63, 155-63, 156-63, 307-63A, 331-63, 353-63; P. L. 363-63, 364-63, 371-63, 383-63, 384-63, 385-63, 423-63, 436-63, 437-63, 469-63. S. MyrTILLiroLiA Anderss. Infrequent in Picea mariana muskegs, in deep turf under Betula glandulosa on the moist boulder field, and on lake margins. H. L. 850-62, 150-63, 243-63. Only the “typical” form of the species with a decumbent, spreading habit was en- countered in this area. Northeastern Sas- katchewan is very near the northern edge of the range of this boreal forest species. S. PEDICELLARIS Pursh (including var. hypo- glauca Fern.). Uncommon, restricted to wet Carex fens, wet Sphagnum-filled depres- sions in Picea mariana woods, and Sphagnum bogs. H. L. 875-62, 1048-62, 131-63, 254-63; P. L. 472-63, 479-63. Near the northern limit of the range of this species. Map 23 Raup, 1959, should be amended to include northeastern Saskat- chewan. S. PEDICELLARIS Pursh X PLANIFOLIA Pursh. Specimens representing this hybrid, or per- haps S. glauca X planifolia have been col- lected in several habitats. This material will be considered in a separate paper. S. PLANIFOLIA Pursh. This is the most im- portant species of willow in northeastern Saskatchewan, and is often dominant in moist or wet habitats. It has been observed in Picea mariana muskegs, P. mariana—lichen woods, Scirpus fens, in streamside and lake- shore vegetation, and in the tundra on the moist boulder field and the dry rock field. It is frequently the dominant in Salix scrub communities on lake margins. H. L. 901-62, 944-62, 1032-62, 253-63, 282-63, 284-63, 352-63; P. L. 368-63, 438-63. S. pyrirotia Anderss. Uncommon in Picea mariana woods and in rubble at the base of granitic cliffs. It was a dominant in a willow 136 thicket on the margin of a Carex fen at Warren Lake, but not observed in similar habitats elsewhere. P. L. 360-63, 430-63; W. L. 610-63. S. reticutata L. Infrequent in Picea mariana muskegs, P. mariana mixed woods, Vaccinium uliginosum—Scirpus fens and on rocky lake shores. Common in the tundra on the moist boulder field. H. L. 823-62, 838-62, 1024-62, 149-63, 186-63, 276-63; P. L. 387-63. New to the flora of Saskatchewan and a marked southern extension of the range of this arctic-alpine species (Map 3, Raup, 1959, should be amended accordingly). In view of its relative importance in this region and the variety of habitats that it occupies it is expected to occur in similar subarctic habi- tats further southward and westward. S. seRissimMA (Bailey) Fern. Rare, but locally abundant in a thicket covering a boulder-choked stream. H. L. 860-62, 335-63. This species forms a dense thicket in association with Betula glandulosa and Salix planifolia over a stream flowing through the moist boulder field south of Hasbala Lake. This sterile, but vegetatively vigorous, popu- lation was observed for two years but no flowers or fruits were noted. This report represents a northeastward extension of the species range. Map 1 in Raup, 1959, should be amended to include this area. MYRICACEAE Myrica Gate L. Occurs in Carex—Scirpus fens, under Salix on rocky lake shores, and in the tundra on the moist boulder field. H. L. 835-62, 188-63. BETULACEAE* Anus crispa (Ait.) Pursh. Infrequent on lake shores and in Picea mariana burn re- generation on sandy eskers. H. L. 938-62, 1003-62, 157-63. BeTULA FONTINALIS Sarg. Collected only in the tundra on the dry rock field. P. L. 381-62. Several putative hybrids involving this species were collected on the eskers at Hasbala Lake and presumably this species could be expected there also. 1Betula was identified by Dr. Janet Dugle, Osborn Botanical Laboratory, Yale University, New Haven, Conn., and the names used here follow her nomenclature. The absence of B. papyrifera from this collection probably reflects the insufficient col- lection of the genus from northeastern Saskatche- wan. The genus Betula in northern Saskatchewan is very complex and deserves a thorough investi- gation. Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 80 Reported (as B. occidentalis) in a similar tundra habitat at Nueltin Lake by Porsild, 1950. B. FONTINALIS Sarg. X GLANDULOSA Michx. (B. X eastwoodae Sarg.). In Picea mariana— lichen woods on esker and in the tundra on the dry rock field. H. L. 1062-62, 122-63, 123-63; P. L. 367-63. B. GLanpuLosa Michx. Common in Picea mariana—lichen and feathermoss woods, dry lichen-covered slopes on eskers, P. mariana muskegs, Carex—Scirpus fens and tundra vegetation on the moist boulder field and on the dry rock field. H. L. 844-62, 1061-62, 1063-62. B. papyriFeERA Marsh X RESINIFERA Brit. ( B. X winteri Dugle). On a sandy esker. W.L. 589-63. B. ResINIFERA Brit. Collected in Picea mariana—lichen woods on eskers and from the base of a granite cliff. H. L. 1064-62; P. L. 463-63. POLYGONACEAE PoLyGoNUM vivipARUM L. Rare in a Betula glandulosa—Vaccinium uliginosum thicket on the moist boulder field and in mossy turf in a muskeg at lake edge. H. L. 851-62, 114-63, 345-63. _ Specimen 345-63 is floriferous at the apex and bulbiferous at the base, 851-62 is mixed and 114-63 is all bulbiferous. New to the flora of Saskatchewan. This by Raup (1936), as indicated by Breitung (1957), but from Great Slave Lake and Calumet, Alberta, on the Athabasca River. This arctic—alpine species occurred only as rare, scattered individuals in mosses. CARYOPHYLLACEAE ARENARIA MACROPHYLLA Hook. Seen once in a Picea mariana burn. H. L. 147-63. This species is apparently uncommon in northern Saskatchewan and has been pre- viously reported only from Lake Athabasca (Raup, 1936). A. stricta Michx. ssp. DAWSONENSIS (Britt.) Maguire. Occurs on dry slopes of sandy eskers and in the shrubby tundra on the moist boulder field. H. L. 1020-62, 1058-62, 198-63. CERASTIUM ALPINUM L. var. STRIGOSUM Hult. Seen only in a burned Picea mariana— lichen woods. H. L. 207-63. New to the flora of Saskatchewan and a southern extension of the range of this arctic taxon (see Hulten, 1956, Fig. 4). 1966 ARGUS: STELLARIA CALYCANTHA (Ledeb.) Bong. In Picea mariana muskegs and in rich Salix— Calamagrostis vegetation along a stream. H. L. 948-62, 219-63. S. tonerrotia Muhl. ex Willd. In Picea mariana muskegs and Salix planifolia thickets on stream margins. H. L. 115-63, 257-63, 354-63. NYMPHAEACEAE NupHaR vARIEGATUM Englem. Locally _ abundant in shallow lakes and_ sluggish streams. H. L. 921-62, 922-62. RANUNCULACEAE AcTaAEA RUBRA (Ait.) Willd. Rare. Col- lected in a rich Salix—Calamagrostis com- munity on a stream margin. H. L. 947-62. ANEMONE MULTIFIDA Poir. Rare, known _ only from dry lichen covered depressions on an esker. H. L. 826-62, 827-62. A. PaRvIFLoRA Michx. Uncommon, in a burned Picea mariana—lichen woods, and in the tundra on the moist boulder field where it was growing in sand between boulders. H. L. 1017-62, 209-63, 326-63. Rare in northern Saskatchewan; previously reported in Saskatchewan from wet limestone cliffs at Carswell Lake (Argus, 1964a). Coptis TRIFOLIA (L.) Salisb. var. GROEN- LaNpIcA (Oeder) Fassett. Rare. Seen only on rocky lake margins in association with Parnassia kotzebuei, Primula mistassinica, Selaginella selaginoides and other rare species. P. L. 403-63. RANUNCULUS AQuaTILis L. var. CAPILLACEUS (Thuill.) DC. An infrequent aquatic in shallow lakes and streams. H. L. 887-62, 349-63. R. rapponicus L. Rare. Seen only once in a Hylocomium splendens mat in a wet drainage way in a Picea mariana woods. P. L. 410-63. R. reptans L. (R. flammula L. var. ovalis (Bigel.) Benson). On sandy beaches and in Sphagnum in wet Picea mariana muskegs. H. L. 110-63, 258-63. PAPAVERACEAE CorRYDALIS SEMPERVIRENS (L.) Pers. Col- lected only in a Picea mariana burn. H. L. 144-63. CRUCIFERAE Drapa CINEREA Adams. Seen only on a dry metamorphic cliff. H. L. 231-63. An arctic—circumpolar species rarely col- lected this far south. Represented in this BoraNIcAL INVESTIGATIONS 137 general region by collections from Lake Athabasca (Raup, 1936) and Churchill (Ritchie, 1956). Rorripa ICELANDICA (Oeder) Barbas var. FERNALDIANA Butt. & Abbe. On sandy beaches and in wet moss on lake edges. H. L. 111-63, 166-63. DROSERACEAE Drosera ANGLICA Huds. Infrequent in Sphagnum bogs, and Carex—Scirpus fens. H. L. 1046-62, 175-63; P. L. 480-63. SAXIFRAGACEAE Mirerta Nupa L. Uncommon, in mixed Picea glauca—P. mariana—Larix laricina woods, Picea mariana—Betula “papyrifera” woods and in moss on rocky lake shores. H. L. 898-62, 172-63; P. L. 400-63. PARNASSIA KOTZEBUEI Cham. Rare, seen only in moss on a rocky lake shore with other rare species including Primula mistassinica, Carex garberi, Luzula nivalis, Selginella selaginoides, et al. P. L. 401-63. P. muttiseta (Ledeb.) Fern. (P. palustris L. ssp. neogaea). In Picea mariana muskeg and the tundra on the moist boulder field. H. L. 879-62, 1019-62; P. L. 402-63. Rises GLANDULOSUM Grauer. In Pinus bank- siana burns, Salix—Calamagrostis vegetation on a creek margin and on a granite cliff. H. L. 946-62, 1002-62, 303-63; P. L. 451-63. R. wupsonranuM Richards. In _ Picea mariana woods on eskers and in wet muskegs. H. L. 943-62, 242-63; P. L. 486-63. R. LacustreE (Pers.) Poir. In Picea mariana —Salix planifolia woods. H. L. 312-63. Speci- men vegetative. R. oxyacantHowes L. In burned Picea mariana—lichen woods on bedrock outcrop. H. L. 210-63. Speciment vegetative. R. triste Pall. In Picea mariana—Salix planifolia woods and on a granite cliff. H. L. 308-63; P. L. 458-63. SAXIFRAGA TRICUSPIDATA Rottb. In dry habi- tats including lichen-covered depressions on eskers, Picea mariana—lichen woods and as a pioneer species on sandy-gravel ridges. H. L. 829-62, 100-63, 205-63. ROSACEAE PorenTILLA FRUITICOSA L. On lake margins, in Picea mariana muskegs and in a Betula glandulosa—Vaccinium uliginosum thicket on the moist boulder field where it is a co- dominant. H. L. 200-63, 344-63. 138 Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST P. nivea L. Seen only on a metamorphic cliff. H. L. 230-63. The second report of this arctic—circum- polar species reported previously from Lake Athabasca (Raup, 1936). P. norvecica L. Rare, in mossy drainage area in a Picea mariana woods, and on a bank beaver house. H. L. 913-62; P. L. 408-63. P. patustris (L.) Scop. Occurs in wet muskegs and in very wet Carex fens. H. L. 240-63, 252-63. P. rripenTata Ait. A pioneer species in sandy blowouts on eskers and on mineral soil in burns. H. L. 832-62, 1011-62, 163-63. Rusus acautis Michx. Frequent in moist Picea mariana woods, mixed P. glauca—P. mariana—Larix laricina woods, Salix thickets and in the tundra on the moist boulder field. H. L. 974-62, 1023-62, 167-63; P. L. 409-63. R. cHamMaemMorus L. On Sphagnum in Picea mariana muskegs and in wet mossy streamside woods. H. L. 896-62, 241-63. R. warus L. var. strigosus (Michx.) Maxim. In mossy streamside woods, burned Picea mariana—lichen woods on dry outcrop ridges, and on granite cliffs. H. L. 894-62, 203-63, 306-63A; P. L. 449-63. LEGU MINOSAE ASTRAGALUS ALPINUS L. Rare, in Picea mariana muskegs and in the tundra on the moist boulder field. H. L. 223-63, 268-63, 321-63. A. americanus (Hook.) M. E. Jones. Rare, collected only in a Picea mariana burn. H. L. 224-63. A. rucosmus Robins. Rare, collected only on a metamorphic cliff. H. L. 232-63. EMPETRACEAE EMPETRUM HERMAPHRODITUM (Lge.) Hage- rup (E. nigrum L.). A pioneer on sandy blowouts and dry, lichen covered depressions on eskers; common in Picea mariana—lichen woods and abundant in the tundra on the dry rock field. H. L. 966-62, 1012-62, 288-63; P. L. 369-63. VIOLACEAE Vio_a paLustris L. In streamside woods and in the tundra on the moist boulder field where it is growing in sand between boulders. H. L. 902-62, 1021-62, 34-63, 337-63, 474-63. ELAEAGN ACEAE SHEPHERDIA CANADENSIS (L.) Nutt. Seen only once in a burned Picea mariana woods on a granite outcrop ridge. H. L. 206-63. Vol. 80 | ONAGRACEAE EpmosiuM ANGusTIFOLIUM L. Common in | burns and in upland Picea mariana woods. | H. L. 1040-62, 158-63. E. patustre L. In Sphagnum in wet mus- kegs, in the tundra on the moist boulder field | and on a bank beaver house. H. L. 914-62, | 1018-62, 255-63, 338-63. HALORAGIDACEAE Hippuris vurearis L. Aquatic on lake margins. H. L. 889-62. MyRI0OPHYLLUM SPICATUM L. ssp. EXAL- BESCENS (Fern.) Hult. Aquatic in fast-flow- ing streams. H. L. 886-62. UMBELLIFERAE CicUTA MACKENZIEANA Raup. Frequent in wet Carex fens and in Sphagnum in wet muskegs. H. L. 912-62, 249-63. CORNACEAE CorNuS CANADENSIS L. In Picea mariana muskegs and on rocky lake shores. H. L. 1041-62. PY ROLACEAE PyROLA ASARIFOLIA Michx. In Picea mariana muskegs and on sandy esker slopes. H. L. 215-63, 318-63. P. GRANDIFLORA Radius var. CANADENSIS (Andres) Porsild. In a Picea mariana— Betula “papyrifera” woods along a stream. H. L. 899-62. This variety, new to the flora of Saskat- chewan, was previously reported from Nueltin Lake, N.W.T., by Baldwin (1953). The species is uncommon in northern Sas- katchewan. P. minor L. In Salix thickets on stream margins and in Salix—Carex fens. H. L. SW 1 Ls Ie P. secunpa L. Infrequent, in Picea mariana muskegs where it usually occurs on Sphag- num hummocks. H. L. 872-62; P. L. 359-63, 391-63. ERICACEAE ANDROMEDA POLIFOLIA L. In wet Sphagnum depressions in Picea mariana muskegs and in Betula glandulosa—Vaccinium uliginosum thickets. H. L. 841-62, 279-63. ARCTOSTAPHYLOS ALPINA (L.) Spreng. ssp. RUBRA (Rehd. & Wils.) Hult. Common in Picea mariana muskegs and in P. glauca—P. 1966 ArGus: mariana—Larix laricina woods. H. L. 1038-62. 7263, 277-63. A. uva-ursi (L.) Spreng. var. COACTILIS Fern. & Macbr. In dry Picea mariana—lichen woods and in lichen-covered depressions on eskers. H. L. 238-63. CHAMAEDAPHNE CALYCULATA (L.) Moench. Locally abundant in Sphagnum bogs and on the margins of Carex fens. H. L. 1049-62; P. L. 473-63. Katmia poLiFoLIA Wang. Scattered in Picea mariana muskegs and in Scirpus— Vaccinium uliginosum fens. H. L. 869-62, _ 159-63, 187-63, 296-63. LEDUM GROENLANDICUM Oeder. Frequent, in Picea mariana—lichen woods and P. mariana muskegs. H. L. 909-62, 126-63. L. patustre L. var. DECUMBENS Ait. In Picea mariana—lichen woods, P. mariana muskegs and in the tundra on the dry rock field. H. L. 910-62, 130-63; P. L. 380-63. LoISEULERIA PROCUMBENS (L.) Desv. Fre- quent in Picea mariana—lichen and feather moss woods on eskers and abundant in the tundra on the dry rock field. H. L. 821-62, 195-63; P. L. 375-63. This is the second report of this arctic— circumpolar for Saskatchewan, previously reported from Little Faroud Lake (Scotter, 1961). This species apparently becomes more important to the eastward for Ritchie (1959) reports that it dominates the summits of drift hills in the vicinity of Seal River, Manitoba, and Scotter (1965) has collected it at Kasmere Lake, Manitoba. Oxycoccus microcarpus Turcz. Trailing on Sphagnum in Picea mariana muskegs. H. L. 101-63, 119-63. VACCINIUM MyRTILLOIDES Michx. Found only in dry Picea mariana—lichen woods and in Pinus banksiana woods on sandy soil. H. L. 969-62, 307-63. V. vu.icinosum L. Frequent in Picea mariana—lichen woods and P. mariana mus- kegs, co-dominant in Betula glandulosa thickets on the moist boulder field, common on lake margins, granite cliffs and in Carex fens. H. L. 967-62, 343-63. V. vitis-IDAEA L. var. minus Lodd. Fre- quent in Picea mariana—lichen and feather moss woods, and muskegs and occurs on dry lichen slopes on eskers. H. L. 127-63. PRIMULACEAE PrimuLa miustassinica Michx. Rare, oc- curring as individuals in mosses on rocky lake Botanica INVESTIGATIONS 139 shores. H. L. 1043-62; P. L. 398-63. The latter collection may be referred to forma leucantha Fern. GENTIANACEAE GENTIANELLA AMARELLA (L.) Borner ssp. acuta (Michx.) J. M. Gillett. Occasional on dry slopes in Picea mariana burns. H. L. 936-62, 999-62, 212-63. MENYANTHES TRIFOLIATA L. On_ stream margins and in very wet Carex fens. H. L. 874-62, 133-63. HYDROPHY LLACEAE PHACELIA FRANKLINIT (R. Br.) Gray. In burned Picea mariana—lichen woods on dry slopes. H. L. 146-63, 204-63. LABIATAE SCUTELLARIA GALERICULATA L. var. EPILO- BUFOLIA (Hamilt.) Jordal. Seen only under a dense thicket of Salix serissima, S. planifolia and Betula glandulosa on the moist boulder field. H. L. 333-63. SCROPHULARIACEAE PEDICULARIS LABRADORICA Wirsing. Occa- sional in Picea mariana—lichen woods on eskers, pond margins in Vaccinium uligino- sum—S cirpus fens, and frequent in the tundra on the dry rock field. H. L. 816-62, 107-63, 129-63, 185-63; P. L. 376-63. This is the second report of this species for Saskatchewan; previously known from McKeever L. (Scotter, 1961). VERONICA SCUTELLATA L. Seen only in a Salix—Calamagrostis fen on a lake margin. H. L. 972-62. LENTIBULARIACEAE Pineuicuta vutearis L. Locally abundant in a Vaccinium uliginosum—Scirpus fen on a pond margin but not seen elsewhere. H. L. 183-63. This record is a northward extension of the Saskatchewan range of this arctic (sub- arctic)—circumpolar species. It was pre- viously known from isolated southern popu- lations at Prince Albert where it occurs in a Carex fen (calcareous bog) and at Straw- berry Lakes, a remarkable record well within the prairie 42 miles east of Regina, Saskat- chewan (Jones, 1964). UrricuLaRIA INTERMEDIA Hayne. Frequent as an aquatic in sluggish streams and in pools 140 in Picea mariana muskegs and Sphagnum bogs. H. L. 888-62, 1052-62; P. L. 483-63. U. vutearis L. var. AMERICANA Gray. Fre- quent in sluggish streams and very wet Carex fens. H. L. 890-62, 923-62, 132-63. RUBIACEAE GatiuM TRIFIDUM L. Of scattered occur- rence, trailing in wet mosses on lake margins, in Carex fens and in the tundra on the moist boulder field. H. L. 917-62, 1022-62, 165-63, 324-63. CAPRIFOLIACEAE LINNAEA BOREALIS L. ssp. AMERICANUM (Forbes) Hult. Infrequent in mixed woods on stream margins and in Picea mariana— Pinus banksiana burn regeneration. H. L. 897-62, 103-63. VIBURNUM EDULE (Michx.) Raf. Uncom- mon in Picea mariana muskegs and in burned P. mariana—lichen woods. H. L. 868-62, 208-63. SANTALACEAE GEOCAULON LivibUM (Richards.) Fern. In Picea mariana—lichen woods on esker. H. L. 968-62, 128-63. COMPOSITAE ANTENNARIA NEGLECTA Greene. On dry slopes in Picea mariana burn regeneration. H. L. 933-62. A. PULCHERRIMA (Hook.) Greene. In a Picea mariana burn on a boulder field. H. L. 222-63. A. rosEA (D. C. Eat.) Greene. On a dry slope in Picea mariana burn regeneration. H. L. 934-63. A. UMBRINELLA Rydb. (A. isolepis Greene). In a lichen covered depression on an esker. JAlo Lg G2Gai2, ARNICA LONCHOPHYLLA Greene. On mineral soil in Picea mariana burns, and in P. mariana —lichen woods. H. L. 817-62, 998-62, 162-63. ARTEMISIA CAMPESTRIS L,. ssp. BOREALIS (Pall.) Hall & Clements. A pioneer species in sand blowouts and open sandy-gravel slopes on eskers. H. L. 834-62, 317-63; W. L. 599-63, 605-63. ERIGERON AcRIS L. var. ASTEROIDES (Andrez) Bess. On dry esker slopes, lichen-covered depressions and in Picea mariana burns. H. L. 825-62, 148-63, 196-63. E. nyssopirotius Michx. In Sphagnum in Picea mariana muskegs and in P. glauca— P. mariana—Larix laricina woods. H. L. 941-62, 168-63. THe CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 80 i, Apparently only the second collection of | this species for Saskatchewan; previously | collected by J. Hudson at Amisk Lake | | (Breitung, 1957). E. toncHopHytius Hook. In Picea mariana | muskegs and in Salix—Betula glandulosa | thickets on lake margins. H. L. 856-62, | 314-63; P. L. 399-63. PETASITES FRIGIDUS (L.) Fries var. PALMA- | tus (Ait.) Crong. Common in Picea mariana muskegs and in moist, mossy woods along streams. H. L. 942-62, 214-63, 310-63, 313-63. P. sacirratus (Pursh) Gray. Seen only once in a Picea mariana muskeg. H. L. 878-62. SENECIO PAUPERCULUS Michx. Common in Picea mariana muskegs and on moist slopes. H. L. 866-62. 1016-62, 154-63, 201-63. SOLIDAGO SPATHULATA DC. ssp. SPATHULATA var. NEOMEXICANA (Gray) Crong. Frequent on eskers in Picea mariana—lichen woods, dry lichen-covered slopes, and in an Agrostis scabra meadow. H. L. 818-62, 830-62, 930-62; W. L. 604-63. A specimen (H. L. 164-63) collected on a till ridge growing in mineral soil is very similar to the above specimens but may repre- sent ssp. randii var. racemosa (Greene) Cronq. (Cronquist, personal communica- tion). TARAXACUM CERATOPHORUM (Ledeb.) DC. Rare in Picea mariana muskegs, wet mossy woods along streams and on a metamorphic cliff. H. L. 1015-62, 315-63, 228-63. This is the second report of this species for Saskatchewan; previously reported from Lake Athabasca (Raup, 1936). Bryophyta HEPATICAE LopuHoziA WENZELI (Nees) Steph. In Picea mariana muskegs and Salix—Calamagrostis thickets. H. L. 980-62, 987-62. New to the flora of Saskatchewan. Priniptum cimiaRE (L.) Nees. In Picea mariana—lichen woods on eskers and in mixed woods on stream margins. H. L. 903-62, 959-62, 960-62. Musci SPHAGNALES SPHAGNUM CAPILLACEUM (Weiss) Schrank. Muskegs. H. L. 986-62. S. CAPILLACEUM var. TENELLUM (Schimp.) Andr. Muskegs. H. L. 911-62, 992-62. 1966 Arcus: S. cuspwatum Ehrh. In standing water in muskeg. H. L. 266-63. New to the flora of Saskatchewan; known also from Manitoba (Ritchie, 1959). S. Fuscum (Schimp.) Klinggr. Muskegs and Sphagnum bogs. H. L. 1053-62, 275-63, 278-63. S. GIRGENSOHNIT Russ. Muskegs. H. L. 984-62. S. LINDBERG Schimp. Muskegs. H. L. 302-63B. New to the flora of Saskatchewan; known also from Manitoba (Ritchie, 1959). S. REcURVUM P. Beauv. var. PARVIFOLIUM Sendt. ex Warnst. Sphagnum bogs. H. L. 1056-62, 1057-62. This is the first report of this variety from Saskatchewan; the species was pre- vously reported by Macoun (1892). S. sguarRosuM Crom. In Picea mariana— Betula “papyrifera” woods along a stream. Associated with Drepanocladus uncinatus and Hylocomium splendens. H. L. 905-62. S. WARNSTORFIANUM Du Rietz. Muskegs. H. L. 279-63, 281-63. S. WULFIANUM Girg. Muskegs H. L. 267-63. This is the second Saskatchewan record of this species previously reported by Macoun (1892). EUBRYA AULACOMNIUM PALUSTRE (Hedw.) Schwaegr. In muskegs, bogs, and wet drainage areas in Picea mariana woods. H. L. 982-62, 1055-62; P. L. 411-63B, 415-63. BRYUM PSEUDOTRIQUETRUM (Hedw.) Schwaegr. Muskegs. H. L. 274-63. CALLIERGON GIGANTEUM (Schimp.) Kindb. Aquatic moss in lake. H. L. 102-63. New to the flora of Saskatchewan. CINCLIDIUM sTYGIUM Sw. Wet drainage area in Picea mariana woods. P. L. 412-63. CYNODONTIUM STRUMIFERUM (Hedw.) Lindb. On a lichen—covered boulder. H. L. 961-62. C. tenettumM (BSG) Limpr. On dripping wet granite cliff. P. L. 465-63, 467-63A. New to the flora of Saskatchewan. DicranuM ANGustuM Lindb. Muskegs. H. L. 273-63. New to the flora of Saskatchewan. D. sercert Bland. Muskegs. H. L. 271-63. D. ELoncatuM Schleich. In mossy stream- side woods and on dripping wet granite cliffs. H. L. 906-62, 907-62; P. L. 466-63. DREPANOCLADUS EXANNULATUS (BSG) Warnst. Sphagnum Bog. H. L. 1054-62. BotraANIcAL INVESTIGATIONS 141 New to the flora of Saskatchewan. D. REvoLvVENS (Turn.) Warnst. var. INTER- Mepius (Lindb.) Richs. & Wall. Muskeg H. L. 302-63A. New to the flora of Saskatchewan. D. uncinatus (Hedw.) Warnst. Muskegs. H. L. 274-63. D. verNnicosus (Lindb.) Warnst. Wet drainage area in Picea mariana woods. P. L. 413-63, 416-63. New to the flora of Saskatchewan. HyLocoMIuM SPLENDENS (Hedw.) BSG. In muskegs, -Picea mariana—feathermoss woods and in mixed woods along streams. H. L. 908-62, 983-62D, 988-62, 265-63; P. L. 411-63. HYPNUM CUPRESSIFORME Hedw. On a rock outcrop in a muskeg. H. L. 1059-62. Meesta uLicinosA Hedw. Muskegs. H. L. 272-63, 274-63. New to the flora of Saskatchewan. MNIUM ANDREWSIANUM Steere. Muskegs. H. L. 274-63. PALUDELLA SQUARROSA (Hedw.) Brid. Mus- kegs. H. L. 270-63. PLEUROZIUM SCHREBERI (Brid.) Mitt. Picea mariana—lichen woods, muskegs, and mixed woods on stream margins. H. L. 904-62 959-62, 993-62, 300-63. Pouiia crupA (Hedw.) Lindb. On rock outcrop in muskeg. H. L. 272-63. P. nutans (Hedw.) Lindb. In mixed woods on stream margin. H. L. 906-62. PoLytRIcHUM COMMUNE Hedw. Muskegs. H. L. 990-62A. P. JUNIPERINUM Hedw. In a Picea mariana burn on esker. H. L. 1001-62. P. pumeruM Hedw. In Picea mariana— lichen woods. H. L. 290-63. PTILIUM CRISTA-CASTRENSIS (Hedw.) De- Not. In muskegs and Picea mariana—feather moss woods. H. L. 990-62B, 991-62, 264-63. RHACOMITRIUM CANESCENS (Hedw.) Brid. On a lichen—covered boulder in Picea mariana—lichen woods. H. L. 962-62. New to the flora of Saskatchewan. R. canescens f. ERicoies (Brid.) Monk. On open sandy-gravel on esker. W. L. 597-63. New to the flora of Saskatchewan. SPLACHNUM LUTEUM Hedw. In _ Picea mariana woods. P. L. 421-63. New to the flora of Saskatchewan. TAYLORIA LINGULATA (Dicks.) Lindb. Mus- kegs. H. L. 274-63. TETRAPLODON MNIOWES (Hedw.) BSG. In muskeg, on bone chips and other animal remains in substrate. H. L. 924-62, 989-62. 142 Tue CANADIAN Fie_p-NaATURALIST ToMENTHYPNUM NITENS (Hedw.) Loeske. Muskegs. H. L. 280-63. Uxora crispa (Hedw.) Brid. On dripping wet granite cliffs. P. L. 465-63A, 467-63B. New to the flora of Saskatchewan. Lichens ACTINOGYRA MUHLENBERGI (Ach.) Schol. On a granite cliff. P. L. 461-63. ALECTORIA NADVORNIKIANA Gyel. On dead branches of Picea mariana. H. L. 953-62. CETRARIA NivaLis (L.) Ach. In Picea mariana—lichen woods on esker. H. L. 952-62. CLADONIA ALPESTRIS (L.) Rabh. On a granite cliff. P. L. 454-63. ; C. arpico.a (Flot.) Vainio. On a granite cliff. P. L. 455-63. C. amaurocrea (Flk.) Schaer. In muskegs and on a granite cliff. H. L. 985-62, 299-63; P. L. 453-63. C. cornuta (L.) Schaer. On granite cliffs. P. L. 459-63. C. perormis (L.) Hoffm. In a muskeg. H. L. 983-62C. C. mitis Sandst. In upland Picea mariana— lichen woods and in muskegs. H. L. 951-62, 983-62A, 291-63. C. preurota (FIk.) Schaer. In Picea mariana—lichen woods on esker. H. L. 964-62. C. RANGIFERINA (L.) Web. In Picea mariana muskegs, feathermoss woods and on a granite cliff. H. L. 983-62B, 262-63, 301-63; P. L. 460-63. C. unctALis (L.) Web. In Picea mariana— lichen woods on a granitic outcrop. Mixed with C. amaurocraea, C. alpestris and C. mitis. H. L. 293-63. IcCMADOPHILA ERICETORUM (L.) Zahlbr. On mineral soil in Picea mariana—lichen woods on an esker. H. L. 955-62. LEcANORA DISPERSA (Pers.) Rohl. On a boulder in a Picea mariana—lichen woods. H. L. 965-62A. New to the flora of Saskatchewan. L. potytrropa (Ehrh.) Rabenk. On a boulder in a Picea mariana—lichen woods. H. L. 965-62A. Lecipea LaPicipa Ach. On rock outcrop in | muskeg. H. L. 1060-62. NEpPHROMA ARCTICUM (L.) Torss. In Picea mariana—lichen woods. H. L. 958-62, 261-63. PaRMELIA PHysopEs (L.) Ach. On dead branches of Picea mariana. H. L. 954-62. PELTIGERA APHTHOSA (L.) Willd. In a Picea mariana muskeg. H. L. 944-62. P. matacea (Ach.) Funck. On a granite cliff. P. L. 452-63. RHIzOcARPON DISPORUM (Naeg.) Mill. Arg. On a boulder in a Picea mariana—lichen woods. H. L. 965-62. R. GeocrapHicum (L.) DC. On a boulder in Picea mariana—lichen woods on an esker. H. L. 965-62A. STEREOCAULON PASCHALE (L.) Hoffm. Com- mon in Picea mariana—lichen woods on eskers. H. L. 950-62, 289-63, 292-63. REFERENCES Arcus, G. W. 1964a. Plant collections from Carswell Lake and Beartooth Island, Northwestern Saskatchewan, Canada. Can- adian Field-Naturalist 78:139-149. 1964b. Preliminary reports on the flora of Wisconsin. No. 51. Salicaceae. The genus Salix-The willows. Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters 53:217-272. Batpwin, W. K. W. 1953. Botanical inves- tigations in the Reindeer - Nueltin Lakes area, Manitoba. National Museum of Canada Bulletin 128:110-142. Breitune, A. 1957. Annotated catalogue of the vascular flora of Saskatchewan. Ameri- can Midland Naturalist 58:1-72. Drury, W. H. Jr. 1962. Patterned ground and vegetation on southern Bylot Island, Northwest Territories, Canada. Contribu- tions Gray Herbarium 190:3-111. Fernatp, M.L. 1924. Juncus trighumis and its American representative. Rhodora 26: 201-203. GyaeRvoLL, O. 1958. Botanical investiga- tions in central Alaska, especially in the White Mountains. Pt. I. Pteridophytes and Monocotyledones. Det Kongelige Norske Videnskabers Selskabs Skrifter 1958 (5): 3-74. Hutten, E. 1942. Flora of Alaska and the adjacent Yukon. Pt. II. Lunds Universitets Arsskrift. N. F. Afd. 2. 38:131-412. 1943. Flora of Alaska and the adjacent Yukon. Prt. II. Lunds Universitets Arsskrift. N. F. Afd. 2. 39:415-567. 1966 ARGUS: 1964. The circumpolar plants. I. Vascular cryptogams, conifers, mono- cotyledons. Kungliga Svenska Vetenskap- sakademiens Handlingar. III. 8 (5) :3-275. Jones, G. N. 1964. Pinguicula vulgaris in southern Saskatchewan. The Blue Jay 22: 117-118. Larsen, J. A. 1965. The vegetation of the Ennadai Lake area, N.W.T.: Studies in subarctic and arctic bioclimatology. Eco- logical Monographs 35:37-59. Lez, H. A. 1959. Surficial geology from southern District of Keewatin and the Keewatin Ice Divide. Northwest Terri- tories. Geological Survey of Canada Bul- letin 51, 42 pp. Macowun, J. 1892. Catalogue of Canadian Plants. VI Musci. Montreal. Moss, E. H. 1959. Flora of Alberta. Uni- versity of Toronto Press. Porsitp, A. E. 1930. Contributions to the - flora of Alaska. Rhodora 41:199-254. 1950. Vascular plants of Nueltin Lake, Northwest Territories. National Museum of Canada Bulletin 118:72-83. 1957. Illustrated flora of the Canadian Arctic Archipelago. National Museum of Canada Bulletin 146. 1958. Geographical distribution of some elements in the flora of Canada. Geographical Bulletin 11:57-77. Raup, H. 1936. Phytogeographic studies in the Athabaska- Great Slave Lake region. I. Catalogue of the vascular plants. Journal Arnold Arboretum 17:180-315. 1959. The willows of boreal western America. Contributions Gray Her- barium 185:3-95. Rircute, J. C. 1956. Additions and exten- sions to the flora of Manitoba. Rhodora 58:321-325. 1959. The vegetation of northern Manitoba. III. Studies in the subarctic. BoraNIcaL INVESTIGATIONS 143 Arctic Institute of North America Tech- nical Paper 3. 1962. A geobotanical survey of northern Manitoba. Arctic Institute of North America Technical Paper 9:5-47. Rowe, J.S. 1959. Forest regions of Canada. Canada Department of Northern Affairs and Natural Resources. Forestry Branch Bulletin 123:1-71. Scocean, H. J. 1957. Flora of Manitoba. National Museum of Canada Bulletin 140: 1-619. Scotter, G. 1961. Botanical collections in the Black Lake Region of northern Sas- katchewan, 1960. The Blue Jay 19:28-33. 1964. Effect of forest fires on the winter range of barren-ground caribou in northern Saskatchewan. Canadian Wild- life Service, Wildlife Management Bulletin, Series 1. 18:1-109. 1965. A plant collection from the Cochrane River region of northwestern Manitoba. The Blue Jay 23:96-100. Taytor, F. C. 1963. Snowbird Lake map - area, District of Mackenzie. Geological Survey of Canada, Memoir 333. Tumret, J. W. 1963. Botanical survey along the Yellowknife Highway, Northwest Ter- ritories, Canada. I. Catalogue of the flora. Sida 1:117-170. Tuomson, J. W. and G. W. Scotter. 1961. Lichens of northern Saskatchewan. Bryol- ogist 64:240-247. Tremsiay, L. P. 1959. Map 5-1960, Geolo- gy, Phelps Lake, Saskatchewan. Geological Survey of Canada, Preliminary series, Sheet 64M. TyrreLt, J. B. 1898. Report on Doobaunt, Kazan and Ferguson rivers and the north- west coast of Hudson Bay. Geological Survey of Canada, Annual Report 9(1896). Rept. F. 218 pp. Received for publication 27 January 1966 Vs EXTRALIMITAL OCCURRENCES OF RACCOONS IN ONTARIO DonaLp W. SIMKIN Ontario Department of Lands and Forests, Southern Research Station, Maple, Ontario Tue raccoon, Procyon lotor, is a common mammal in southern and central Ontario but becomes rare as one proceeds north and west in the province. Anderson (1946) stated that casual records were made at Parry Sound, Nipigon and Attawapiskat Lake. Downing (1948) described the northwestern distribu- tion and status of this species are rare in the Rainy River District with occasional individuals wandering farther north, and he mentions a report of the species from Lake Nipigon. Elsey (1950) reported a raccoon which was caught in the fall of 1946 north of Long Lac. Hall and Kelson (1959 : 885) show no record of raccoons in northwestern Ontario. Sutton (1964) has reported a recent northward extension of the range of this species in adjacent Manitoba. In that province individuals have been taken from as far north as 55°N latitude. The author was employed from 1957-61 as District Biologist by the Ontario Department of Lands and Forests in the Sioux Lookout Forest District. This District encompasses the northwestern 140,000 square miles of the province. While stationed there, two raccoon specimens were received from TABLE 1.—Extralimital Occurrences of Raccoons in Northwestern Ontario, 1927 to 1960 Record Number Date Location Latitude | Longitude |How Killed 1 1927 Cordingly Lake 50° 15’N_ | 86° 40’W | Trapped 2 1935 Berry Lake 52° 35'N | 91° 10’W | Trapped 3 1937--42 Sasaginiga Lake 52° 21’N | 91° 01’W | Trapped 4 1942 Goldpines 50° 40’N__ | 93° 10’W | Trapped 5 1946-47 Pickle Lake Area 51° 30’N_ | 90° 13’W | Trapped 6 1948-49 Birch Lake 51° 25’N_ | 92° 20’W | Trapped a 1949-50 Sandy Lake 53°N 93°W Trapped 8 June, 1949-52 Caribou Lake 50° 30’N_ | 89°W Trapped 9 November, 1952 Windigo Lake 52° 35'N_ | 91° 30’W | Dogs 10 November, 1952 Cemetery Lake 52° 53’N_ | 90° 50’W | Trapped 11 1952-53 Schist Lake 50° 10’N_ | 91° 30’W | Trapped 12 1953 Uchi 51°N 92° 30’W | Trapped 13 November, 1956 Big Trout Lake 53° 45’N_ | 90°W Trapped 14* November, 1957 Junction Severn & 55° 09’N_ | 88° 28’W | Trapped Rocksand Rivers 15* January, 1960 Collins 50° 15’N_ | 89° 28’W Heung ea *Specimens located in the collection of the Royal Ontario Museum. 14 — accession No. 28104, 15 — accession No. 31298. 144 1966 SIMKIN: ExtTRALIMITAL RACCOONS 145 & = Ialands ae) ee ; § 4 C Hannetts Bs Figure 1. Map of northern Ontario showing locations of raccoons reported in Table 1. Indian trappers. A search of the District files and a series of interviews with trappers throughout the District resulted in an additional 13 records. Most of these came from old records in the files and were a result of trappers catching an animal strange to them and either sending it to Sioux Lookout or presenting the pelt to officials for identification at one of the annual trappers’ meetings. This paper includes 15 records of raccoons from areas which are north or northwest of any included in the literature relating to the species’ distribution in Ontario. ‘They are listed in Table 1 and plotted in Figure 1. Some of the dates are not for a specific year, (reports number 3, 5, 6, 7, 8 and 11) since 146 THe CanapiAN Fiectp-NaTurRALIST Vol. 80 when questioned, the trapper could not remember the exact year that he caught the animal. It does not appear that there has been a large scale invasion of raccoons to the north during any one year, rather, there have been sporadic occurrences of single individuals over a long period of time. ‘There is also no evidence available to indicate that there is an established population anywhere 1 in north- western Ontario at the present time except in the Rainy River region. Likely any animals, which manage to get so far north of their normal range, perish during the unusually severe winters characteristic of the area here discussed. Evidence to indicate that such is the case is that four of the six animals, for which we know the month in which they were trapped, were killed in November and another was found dead in January. The fact that these animals were caught in traps at this time of year, when ordinarily they would be denned-up and inactive, indicates that they were probably not well enough prepared for winters as severe as they encountered. Another limiting factor for pioneering raccoons in northwestern Ontario must be the scarcity of large, hollow deciduous trees so often used as dens i in their normal range. The increasing number of occurrences of raccoons in northwestern Ontario in the last twenty years may be the result of a warming trend in the climate. However, it does not appear that climatic conditions are yet suitable for a population to become established. The Fish and Wildlife Branch staff of the Ontario Department of Lands and Forests at Sioux Lookout was responsible for the pre-1957 collection of records and assisted in the collections of additional records at the trappers’ meetings. REFERENCES ANbERSON, R. M. 1946. Catalogue of Can- Ontario. Canadian Field-Naturalist 64(5): adian recent mammals. National Museum 153-163. of Canada, Bulletin 102, 238 pp. Hatt, E. R. and K. R. Ketson. 1959. The Downing, S. C. 1948. A provisional check mammals of North America. Vol. 2, list of the mammals of Ontario. Royal Ronald Press Co., New York. Ontario Museum of Zoology, Miscellaneous Sutron, R. W. 1964. Range extension of Publication No. 3, 11 pp. raccoon in Manitoba. Journal of Mam- Evsey, C. A. 1950. Abundance of certain malogy 45 (2) 311-312. mammals of the Geraldton Forest District, Received for publication 13 May 1965 WZ OBSERVATIONS ON CANADIAN BIRCH (BETULA) COLLECTIONS AT THE MORGAN ARBORETUM WE B PARYRIPERA OF BRIVISH COLUMBIA W. H. Britrrain and W. F. Grant’ The Morgan Arboretum, Macdonald College, P.Q. THE OBSERVATIONS recorded in this paper are based on specimens collected in British Columbia in the autumn of 1962, as part of a survey undertaken to secure seed of Betula papyrifera Marsh., for the purpose of establishing in the Morgan Arboretum at Macdonald College a representative living collection of this species. [his objective has been achieved and the seedling progeny of all specimens collected will now serve, not only as a basis for a study of intraspecific variation within this species, but also as a reservoir for controlled hybridization studies. The belief that the two bark colors composing the white birch complex in British Columbia, a larger tree called the “Western White Birch” and a much smaller one called the “Northwestern White Birch”, represent two distinct varieties has been generally accepted (Sargent, 1922, Rehder, 1940). The first of these is recognized by its smooth, close, dark brown bark, and such individuals are included under the varietal name B. papyrifera var. commutata (Regel) Fern. However, Fernald (1945), who proposed the foregoing combination, rightly points out that, “In the East trees, otherwise inseparable from B. papyrifera, may have the bark permanently quite as dark as in the trees of Puget Sound and the lower Fraser River”, but later (1950) the same author uses this character only to separate B. papyrifera var. commutata from B. papyrifera typica. “Trees belonging to the second color form, charac- terized by light colored bark, either white, grey or silvery and often tinged with purple, pink or bronzy coloration, have been classified as B. papyrifera var. subcordata (Rydb.) Sarg. The range of the latter has been given as “Alberta and British Columbia, and from eastern Washington and northeastern Oregon (Wallowa Mountains) east to northern Idaho and western Montana” (Little, 1953). The majority of our collections are from the Lower Fraser Valley and from the West and South Central areas of British Columbia. In addition, we have included in our study two trees from the Arnold Arboretum, one labelled var. commutata (Acc. No. 90) and another labelled var. swbcordata (Acc. No. 86). For further comparison, we have also included a specimen (Acc. No. 320) from the Haines Road in the Alaska Panhandle. In collecting from sites in which both color forms occurred, as was commonly the case in the Southern Coastal and West Central regions, a definite attempt was made to secure a collection from a comparable tree for each of the two color forms. The morphological and cytological techniques employed have been previously 1§cientific Advisor, The Morgan Arboretum, and Associate Professor, Department of Genetics, respectively. 147 148 Tue CANADIAN Fretp-NATURALIST Vol. 80 described (Brittain and Grant, 1965). From observations made during the collection of this material, from a study of herbarium specimens from these collections and from the Gary Herbarium of Harvard University and the National Museum of Canada, Ottawa, together with studies of the seedlings grown from the collections, certain significant facts have emerged which form the subject of this paper. OBSERVATIONS Table 1 summarizes the more outstanding characters from the technical description prepared for each specimen. The fruiting and folial characters may be observed in the figures of selected specimens (Figures 1, 2 and 3), in which the numbers correspond to the accession numbers given in Table 1. In Table 1 the designation “white” bark is taken to include all trees with light colored bark, which include grey and silvery forms. In considering these data, it should be borne in mind, as pointed out elsewhere (Brittain and Grant 1965), that the form of the fertile bracts and that of the basal leaf area are highly variable in B. papyrifera sensu stricta and have little or no varietal significance within the species. It will be noted, also, that the somatic chromosome numbers 56, 70 and 84, as determined from eastern material, are likewise characteristic of these British Columbia specimens. One of the facts to emerge early in our study was that, apart from the normal variation to be expected in such a polymorphic species, no significant or constant character between the two color forms could be detected, other than the single character of bark color. From Table 1 it is readily apparent that individuals of either form might have a somatic chromosome complement of 56, 70 or 84. A comparison between two apparently authentic specimens of B. papyrifera var. commutata, namely, the Arnold Arboretum tree (Acc. No. 90) grown from seed obtained from Kaslo, British Columbia in 1906 and our tree, Acc. No. 124 from the Arboretum of the University of British Columbia, is of special interest. These two trees were nearly alike in ever measurable character except for color and size. The Arnold Arboretum specimen has completely white bark, whereas the University of British Columbia tree is dark below, lightish above, as commonly occurs in coastal trees that have not attained their complete growth. The somatic chromosome number 70 is the same for both. It is to be assumed that the parent tree of the Arnold Arboretum specimen also had dark bark, since, otherwise the specimen would not have been labelled var. commutata. It would appear that the dark color simply failed to develop in the new environment. This would suggest that some environmental factor may be correlated with bark color. Regarding “close bark” so frequently mentioned in descriptions of var. commutata, it may be noted that the degree of exfoliation is a highly variable character in B. papyrifera, and trees with light bark, showing little or no sign of exfoliation, have been observed on many sites throughout the range of the species. It may also be noted that our Acc. No. 86 from the Arnold Arboretum attributed to var. subcordata, not only agrees with our British Columbia material in all essentials, but our description of this specimen might equally well be applied to specimens collected in eastern Canada with little or no change. 1966 BritTAIN AND GRANT: CANADIAN BircH CoLiections III 149 320-5 120 90 144-S 320 Ficure 1. Representative illustrations of bracts and samaras (x ca. 6) and leaves (reduced ca. 3/5). The numbers refer to accession numbers as given in Table 1. b = bract; S = samara. 150 Tue CANnapIAN FIeLp-NATURALIST Vol. 80 Although trees of this collection fitted the description for this variety as given by Sargent, the leaves were not subcordate. Likewise, the majority of the other specimens in our collections did not have subcordate leaves, though this character occurs as a folial variation in both eastern and western specimens. One of our most interesting collections was made in a small isolated interior valley, situated 12 miles northwest of Summerland along the Fish Lake Road (Acc. Nos. 119, 120, 329). Here was found a stand of trees of similar age all with very dark brown bark which composed by far the most uniform population hitherto encountered. No other Betula species were observed in the near vicinity. The similarity between individuals extended to folial and fruiting characters (Figure 1, number 120). The smaller branchlets were decidely sticky, as were the buds, and the branchlets were also glandular. These characters occasionally occur in other forms, but were apparently universal in the members of this group. Moreover, seedlings from the three collections proved equally uniform in growth habits and in details of structure. Young seedlings were noticeably less densely pubescent than in most B. papyrifera seedlings, but glandular and sticky in all cases. The trees growing on this site in the dry interior may be compared to those from a far different environment, namely Brier Island, Nova Scotia, a small windswept island projecting into the Bay of Fundy, where all the trees observed had very dark brown bark. Aside from their dwarfish size, due to unfavourable conditions for growth, the individuals of this group differed from those of the Fish Lake Road population in several respects. First, the chromo- some number proved to be 70 or 84 and never 56. The branchlets of mature trees were pubescent, rarely glandular. ‘The seedlings were densely pubescent as in most B. papyrifera in distinction to those from Fish Lake Road. The styles borne by the achenes on the Brier Island specimens were in all cases very short and stubby as compared with the latter and there were other minor but consistent differences, including the growth rate, which was markedly faster in the British Columbia trees, registering an average linear growth of 1.9 meters in four years of growth as compared with only 1.4 meters in five years for seedlings from Brier Island (Acc. No. 51). It appears, therefore, that the Fish Lake Road population exhibits, at least in some respects, certain consistent differences from both British Columbia specimens, and also those from other areas. It should be noted that plants of var. commutata are found near the coast in eastern Canada (Roland, 1945) in contrast to the British Columbia collections reported on here. A very different situation was uncovered at a site on the Forest Experiment Station at Aleza Lake near Prince George, British Columbia. Here a group of trees closely resembling each other in general appearance differed widely in bark color. For example, Acc. Nos. 35-1, 35-4, 35-5 and 140 had very dark brown, close bark, whereas those of Acc. Nos. 35, 35-2 and 35-3 had white or greyish bark. The bracts of number 35 were characteristic of most of the trees in this area, being very long and narrow with reduced lateral lobes (Figure 3). On the other hand, the bracts in No. 140 had a very short peduncle with sharply recurved, well developed lobes, closely resembling those found in collections from other locations, namely, Acc. Nos. 130, 131 and 132. Chromo- 1966 BritTAIN AND GRANT: CAaANapIAN Bircu Coxvections III 151 131°S 133 130 132 131 134 Figure 2. Representative illustrations of bracts and samaras (x ca. 6) and leaves (reduced ca. 3/5). The numbers refer to accession numbers as given in Table 1. b = bract; S = samara. 152 Tue CANapIAN FieLtp-NaATURALIST Vol. 80 some number determinations from seedlings showed that the three chromosome numbers 56, 70 and 84 were present in this population (Table 1). In comparing juvenile characters it was observed that, as elsewhere throughout the entire range of B. papyrifera, young seedlings, except as noted, were densely pubescent. This pubescence tends to disappear with age, but patches persist on the underside of the leaves, in the axils of the larger veins, and for a greater or lesser period on young shoots, particularly below the buds. Warty twigs are sometimes present on young seedlings, at least up to five years old, though this character is wanting or, if present, is less, or only slightly, developed in most mature specimens. Data presented in Table 1 indicate that measurements of stomatal guard cells are of little value in distinguishing between plants possessing the higher chromosome numbers. While certain accessions could be selected to illustrate a trend of increasing size in guard cell with an increase in chromosome number, there is too great an overlap in stomatal measurements between these higher polyploid numbers and lower ones to be of value for classifying plants into tetraploids, pentaploids or hexaploids without resort to the determination of chromosome numbers. DIscussIon It is relevant to point out that the collections which form the basis of this paper cover a wide geographical area and include several floral zones. “They are comprised of individuals from varying age groups and, finally, they were necessarily confined to the accessible seed-bearing trees available in a poor seed year. Nevertheless, an examination of the data presented reveals a number of significant facts. As noted in Table 1, somatic chromosome number determinations for seven accessions had a chromosome number of 56 (19 seedlings), 11 had 70, and 13 had 84. In addition, two seedlings of one accession had different somatic chromosome numbers, one with 56 and one with 70, although the seeds originated from a single parent tree, and likewise, in three accessions there were seedlings in a collection with 70 chromosomes and others with 84. No correlation could be determined between chromosome number and bark color and no consistent character could be detected to separate the two color forms. These particular collections, therefore, present no evidence to justify the retention of the varietal names commutata and subcordata as applied to British Columbia specimens. It is clear, therefore, that bark color alone is not necessarily a proof of varietal identity. “This was emphasized by the case of the tree labelled var. commutata in the Arnold Arboretum, which presumably originated from a parent tree with “warm, dark brown bark”, but which, growing in its present site, has white bark. However, we have already discussed the significance of bark color (Brittain and Grant, 1965) in birches and Dugle (1964) who has recently completed a most detailed and authoritative study of the genus Betula in Western Canada, also concludes that “there is no recognizable distinction between white-barked and dark-barked Betula papyri- fera, and these are considered color forms”. 1966 BritTaAIN AND GRANT: CanapIAN Bircu CoL.ections III 153 137 139 140 143 Figure 3. Representative illustrations of bracts and samaras (x ca. 6) and leaves (reduced ca. 3/5). The numbers refer to accession numbers as given in Table 1. b = bract; S= samara. Vol. 80 Tue CanapiaAn Fretp-NATURALIST JOOS y1eq JO} }d9ox9 /Z] ‘ON SaTqutesoy {Gl ONT SENET SdAvI] a} epJOIGNS su1o0s seP{ *1OJOS yseq ' Jo} 3d9ox9 JZ] ‘ON SeTqurasoy qusosoqnd sjayyoueig ‘PTL (ON Ue? Jomojs yonu YIMOIS BuUI[psdg “JUsoseqnd AJasusp pur Ayouy sjoyyoursg *“IO[OO yseq JO} JdIOX9 IG ‘ON SoTqussoy ORISON OPES ETE ON Oe ek CaS) “AXONS spnq ‘AYyONsS ‘reynpurys sjyoyyouesq ‘sjyoriq oNsiiejoRreyo AoA SONG eS SO Nee eS SEE ONT OP SEES ‘ajounped jusssoqnd ya dunyd juowe ayewiay ‘Suo]T wu ¢P'Q setAISg JORIG IIJ1oJ JO WAOJ UT SIOPIC SemONGC Pues SE “ON 0} ALTIUS CE ‘ON OF IRIS Ge ON OF IVINS SE ON OF JPPTUNIG ‘qeynpurys Ap ysis qusosoqnd $991} Jop[o jo sja]youeiqg pue ssuljpess sunox SHIPUIY] aso]o ‘yep Ara/\, OHM ovTUM uMOIq 41eC ystumo1g IYM 0} BUIQeITOJXA ‘UMOIG 1431] Joddn ‘uUMOIG Yep Jared JaMOT uMOIG Ye uMOIG 4IeC uUMOIG YIeC SuLMoys ovIYM Ou ‘UMOIG YIP STIG Azuojg ‘ayy M “NG AWPdID ‘OITA asoyo ‘UMOIG Ye uMOIg ovTUM oy uMOIG UMOIG BUT LOFXS “OUYAA peg Sc CL OST OS” 6S" 9S" v8" 8e IV 9¢ Le Te 6¢ nGe Sv 29S 29S OL t8 OL T8 6V8: OL 9S 9S 90L:96 1¥8 10L OL (1) ozs yeyeuiojs ‘ou aWOsOwWo1Yo ITPRULOG 88° CC CO €e ptojszoqqy Tel $9 FI v9 OT ptojstoqqy Oct cc St 9g°Se STOUT], UdIIIe) 6cl 8L 91 87 OF Sstoquity, Us01t) Lol 7S'8 79° L Ag] suey 971 OTOL PLIOJIT A, Sol Of 8T CL TL JIANOIUB A, Tcl peoy 941e7T YSty 6CE T8 97 0c OL peoy oe] Ysty OCI OL ST CL SY peoy ee'T Ysty oll ST 6 ZO L Aoype A AULT SIT 06° TT ol Cl Age A AUT, LIT 89° OT cr it way WOW]eS OTT 06° TT I! BuOT SWAY SIT OV VC OL Cl aYeT CZ OFT te vl OL Cl ae] PZIV cs¢ te vl OL cl aYeT ZIV TSE Fe vl OL Cl aYeT ZIV e—Se te Tl OL Cl deT &ZIV CSS Fe Fl OLSGP IYeT LZIV T-se Fe Tl OL Cl aye] CZIV ce (Sud) (ur) 14 s10y JYSIOFY | WPIq 7e JoJOWIRIC] ‘ou ne AV]RIO'T ‘DOV OZIS 991], SUOTJ9][OI erquinyo-) ysnotig uo SUOT}PATISG() —— | cae slL CANADIAN Bircw Cotections III 5S BritTAIN AND GRANT: 1966 OL YIM OM} : pouTUTeXxe SsuI[ps—as 99014 T, OS YIM OM} !pouTWeXa SSUT[P9eS 991Y [9 SIIGUINU IWOSOWOIYS JUIIOYIP YIM SSUI[p3as OM T¢ SSUI[P99sS XIS WO1] UOT] PUTUIII}9(]; SSUI[P9VS DATJ WOT] UOT CUTUII}9(]¢ SSUI[p9es INO} WOIJ UOT eUTUIIDIAC], SSUI[P9eS OM} WOI] UOTPPUILUIEI9C] VG ONL OV cA VOONS) AVES SG ONT WAN SERCIS EN / ploury {O° ‘o[sey wio1y pases LSS OL RONG Cum 20 CANE RIOOIN feuejuoy ‘Jedsijesy WII} pass IOJOO y1eq JO} }d9ox9 EF] “ON SeTquiasory JOJOO y.1eq IO} 1ddox9 FH] ‘ON SoTquiasoy JOJOO y1eq JO} 1d99X9 (6 ‘ON So[quiasoy HSE SOND SeYGUISENS OFT (ON Se]qulasoyy JO]OO yseq 10; }daoxa OG ROE ROW ee ON ee cea 08 ‘ON SoTquiesayy SYIPUIDY] AZUOIG Se Te 88°Ss ory M OL ou M OL Suneyoyxe Apysys Ws] 69° OF OL 7 88°ss BUT} eL]O}xo ‘UMOIG YSIMOT]OA Lr 9¢ 9S €L et 8h OF ou v8 6S IT 91 O01 UMOIG YIVG 8 Lo CC pS 81 Azuoiq 0} dM T8 ST Le Sse ay sAoqe oyIYM ‘MOTE WIV LY 9¢ v8 96°17 SL LT SHAUNA 88 OT OL ve VI LG LN UMOIG Yep ‘3so[D ty IP OL 18°Cl ce OC SFT. TO 6¢ OL 98 ST ev LC SUITAN LV SV v8 ve vl Of 6l oud v8 ch €} IC 6¢ OTT v8 ve vl S061 Azuoiq 0} A018 [[Nq t8 eo°L OT OL Azuoiq 0} Ao18 [ING Ie ¢P LF8:0L 6c TT cO' LT (sud) (ww) WYsIOY 1YysIOY | WvoIq 1e (1) 9zIs ‘ou Jd} OWI yregq je}eul0}S | aWIOsoWO1YO DIMES | aZIS 91], BYSETV ‘peoy soulexyy OcE um jo10giy plouly 06 uInja10qiy plouly 98 AouepY gee yueqg Isa Oe? SJOYIWS trl SIOYTWIG eV Aeg uojJa[pudg Gal Aeg uoja]pusg sal 981005) 9OULIG 6¢T ye0IDQ poomuoy}0D sel Jouson(d) Let jouson(¢) eT VIPURXITV cel dye] SWI TET adoy FET aspliig PIPUCX3TY PIO CET “ou AVyeooT “IOV papnjyuoj— | aAIav |, 156 Tue CaANnapIAN Friecp-NaTuraList Vol. 80 However, the Fish Lake Road population (Acc. Nos. 119, 120 and 329) distinguished by a uniform somatic chromosome number of 56, very dark brown bark, and small but consistent differences in minor characters from other trees both from British Columbia as well as from other areas, represent a population which may be worthy of varietal status and will be studied further. Of particular interest is the comparison with the more variable aggregation on the Aleza Lake site, where on a relatively small area, all the different chromosome numbers and bark colors are represented. At the moment it is difficult to equate the members of these two groups with one another, with the large trees growing on the Lower Mainland, with the small white barked trees in the Northern Okanagan, or with the dwarfish, dark barked specimens on Brier Island, Nova Scotia. In attempting to interpret the significance of these observations, we are confronted with what appears to be a highly variable population, maintained in an unstable condition by considerable cross pollina- tion, affording no basis for the separating out of varieties. It may be possible to reach sounder conclusions with respect to the exact significance of the differences noted, by a careful study of trees grown from the seed of these specimens, now established on a common site in the Morgan Arboretum, and with duplicate material provided to the Forest Experiment Station, Chalk River, Ontario, and to the Harrington Forest Farm of the Canadian International Paper Company, Quebec. One interesting piece of information was given us by a former forest ranger, now a sawmill operator, living in West Central British Columbia, who stated that according to his own experience the “black one” had harder wood, suitable for making skis, tool handles or furniture, as compared with the “white one” which has soft, brittle wood suitable only for firewood. To obtain information on this point, tests for wood quality are to be included in future plans. Finally, it is hoped that the observations recorded in this paper may point up some of the problems which obviously require more concentrated study over a much longer period of time than could be accomplished by this brief and partial survey. In the meantime, the development of all this material on a common site with soil and climatic factors eliminated will be observed with interest. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS Dr. James Marshall, former head of the Entomological Laboratory, Canada Department of Agriculture, Summerland, called our attention to the Fish Lake Road site and greatly assisted in the collection of material in the Okanagan District. We are also indebted to the Canada Department of Forestry, and in particular to Mr. L. A. Smithers for arranging the British Columbia trip and assisting in the actual collection, also his assistant Mr. G. W. Hughes. Mr. P. R. Hellenius of the British Columbia Forest Service first sent us material from Aleza Lake and later helped us with our collections there. : 1966 BriTTAIN AND GRANT: CANADIAN Bircu Co.tections Il 157 SUMMARY A morphological and cytological study has been carried out on a collection of Betula papyrifera Marsh. from British Columbia in which an analysis has been made of the two varieties which have been distinguished by bark color, namely, B. papyrifera var. commutata (Regel) Fern. and B. papyrifera var. subcordata (Rydb.) Sarg. From a correlation of bark color with chromosome number and a consideration of morphological characters, no constant character could be detected between the two color forms other than the single character of bark color. There would appear to be no justification for the retention of the varietal names since there is no recognizable distinction between white- and dark-barked specimens other than color. It would appear appropriate to consider these two types as formae rather than as varietas, however, the authors feel that no useful purpose is served if it is recognized that, at present, the varietal names distinguish only color forms. Some evidence suggests that bark color may be influenced by environmental factors and the effect of environment on bark color is being investigated. With the exception of one population from Fish Lake Road, characterized by a somatic chromosome number of 56, the other populations were highly variable, presumably as a result of cross pollination, and possessed somatic chromosome numbers of 56, 70 and 84. REFERENCES Brirrain, W. H. and W. F. Grant. 1965. Lirme, E. D., Jr. 1953. Check list of Observations on Canadian birch (Betula) native and naturalized trees of the United collections at the Morgan Arboretum. I. States (including Alaska). Agriculture B. papyrifera in eastern Canada. Canadian Handbook No. 41. U.S. Forest Service, Field-Naturalist 79:189-197. Duets, Janet R. 1964. A taxonomic study of western Canadian species in the genus Betula. Ph.D. Thesis, University of Al- berta, Edmonton. Fernatp, M. L. 1945. Some North Amer- ican Corylaceae (Betulaceae). In: Notes Washington, D.C. Renper, A. 1940. Manual of cultivated trees and shrubs hardy in North America. MacMillan Co., New York. Rotanp, A. E. 1945. The flora of Nova Scotia. Proceedings of Nova Scotia Insti- tute of Science 21(3):1-552. on Betula in eastern North America. Sarcent, C. S. 1922. Manual of the trees Rhodora 47:303-329. of North America. Vol. I. Houghton Mif- Fernatp, M. L. 1950. Gray’s Manual of flin Co., New York. (Reprinted, 1961. Botany, 8th ed., American Book Co., New Dover Publications Inc., New York). York. Received for publication 15 January 1966 ADDENDUM Since the foregoing paper was prepared, further observations on the seedlings of certain specimens, including numbers 119, 120, 35-4, 35-5 and 329, indicate that the stems are unlike those of B. papyrifera seedlings in that they are thickly beset with glands, and both stems and buds are sticky. ‘These speci- mens definitely differ from B. papyrifera including the large brown-barked coastal forms. They most closely conform to the hybrid species B. x utahensis Britton as defined by Dugle (Canadian Journal of Botany 44: 929-1007, 1966). However, they are all large single-stemmed trees some of which exceed 15 meters in height as given by Dugle for the upper range in height of this hybrid. IRIS MISSOURIENSIS NUTT. IN SOUTHWESTERN ALBERTA AND IN CENTRAL AND NORTHERN BRITISH COLUMBIA B. pe VRIES Department of Biology, The University of Calgary, Calgary, Alberta* Iris missouriensis Nutt. was discovered at two separate locations in southwestern Alberta on June 30 and July 1, 1964. Well established populations occur at the margin of shallow depressions in open grassland at low elevations apparently uninfluenced by man. This would indicate that these are natural occurring populations, not a result of human introductions. The Alberta localities (Figure 1) are as follows: 4 miles north of Carway. 2/48, June 30, 1964; 1 mile west of Whiskey Gap. 2149, July 1, 1964. Specimens presented to the Plant Research Institute, Ottawa, were examined by Dr. B. Boivin who confirmed their identification and first recording for Alberta. Voucher speci- mens are also in the herbarium of the University of Calgary and in that of the author. This species ranges from southern California, east to Utah, Arizona and New Mexico, north to North Dakota, Montana and Washington, and occurs in central and northern British Columbia as widely disjunct populations. The known British Columbia collections (Figure 1) are as follows: Lake Atlin, Alice Eastwood, 648, July 14, 1914; Bennett Lake Shore. D. A. Mitchell, 147, July 13, 1949; Fraser Lake. Sills, 9227, July 1932; Quick Station, R. Ashford, 162 (766230), June 29, 1959; D. V. Saunders, 30987, June 23, 1959. The collection of Iris missouriensis by Eastwood in 1914 (Foster 1937) is the first for British Columbia. It is possibly the record on which Abrams (1923) and Rydberg (1917, 1932) based the range from “California . . . to British Columbia”. Henry (1915) did not know of this collection, but included the species in his “Flora of Southern British Columbia”, on the basis of Piper’s (1906) statement: “. . . a station near Coupville is the only one known in the Vancouver strip”. Coupville, however, is located on Whitbey Island in the state of Washington. The unusually wide disjunction between Washington and the central and northern British Columbia stations warrants consideration. The occurrences in central British Columbia: Fraser Lake, and Quick Station, are all contiguous along the railroad in the Endako-Hazelton area, and indicate clearly that the plants have been introduced by man. ‘The other stations at Lake Atlin and Bennett Lake near the Yukon border are also introduced, perhaps by gold miners or early settlers. “Tremendous quantities of rhizomes were used in the days of herbal remedies and quack medicines. ‘The colonies in southwestern Alberta, on the other hand, occur in undisturbed native grassland and appear to be northern outliers of the widespread populations in nearby Glacier County, Montana. For these reasons it is considered that they are naturally-ocurring colonies which are not a result of human introduction. °Present address: Fort Qu’Appelle, Saskatchewan. 158 1966 DE VRIES: cn > q “> VISBENNETT DAWSON» IRIS MISSOURIENSIS 159 Mc MURRAY CREEK PRINCE GEORGE m~ A % er BANFF o,' CALGARY Ficure 1. Locations of Iris missouriensis Nutt, in Southwestern Alberta: (1) Whiskey Gap, (2) Carway; and in Central and Northern British Columbia: (3) Fraser Lake, (4) Quick Station, (5) Lake Atlin, (6) Bennett Lake Shore. REFERENCES Aprams, L. 1923. Illustrated Flora of the Pacific States. Washington, Oregon, Cali- fornia. Fourth edition. Stanford University Press, Stanford, California 1:1-538. Foster, R. C. 1937. A Cyto-Taxonomic Survey of the North American Species of Iris. Contents Gray Herbarium, Harvard University, Cambridge, Massachusetts 119: 1-82. Henry, J. K. 1915. Flora of Southern British Columbia and Vancouver Island. W. J. Gage and Co. Ltd., Toronto, Ontario 1-363. Preer, Cu. V. 1906. Flora of the State of Washington. Contributions United States National Museum. Washington Govern- ment Printing Office 11:1-636. 160 Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 80 | Rypsere, P. A. 1917. Flora of the Rocky 1932. Flora of the Prairies and | Mountains and Adjacent Plains. New Plains of Central North America. New | York Botanical Garden 1-1110. York Botanical Garden 1-969. Received for publication 5 November 1965 ig THE NAMES OF YELLOW BIRCH AND TWO OF ITS VARIETIES T. C. BraysHaw Department of Forestry of Canada, Petawawa Forest Experiment Station, Chalk River, Ontario* Tue yellow birch was first described by F. A. Michaux (1812) who named it | Betula lutea. His description was thorough, and accompanied by a clear illustration. Unfortunately, he offended the rules of botanical nomenclature | (Lanjouw, 1956) by adding as a synonym, B. excelsa Aiton, (Aiton, W., 1789). | He thus rendered his own name for this species superfluous and illegitimate | from the start. This is true notwithstanding that the type specimen of | B. excelsa has been found, in fact, not to be our yellow birch. ‘The illegitimacy | of B. lutea passed unnoticed until Little (1953) drew attention to it by using | the more recently published B. alleghamiensis Britton as the correct name for this | birch, citing B. /utea Michx. f. as a synonym. N. L. Britton (1904) described what he believed to be another species of | yellow birch, differing, according to his description, by possessing fruiting | scales, or bracts, 4 to 6 millimetres long, and leaves mostly cordate at base; | while he distinguished B. Jutea as having bracts 7 to 8 millimetres long, and | leaves rarely cordate. He named his new species B. alleghaniensis. Fernald (1922) in reviewing these birches, revealed that Britton’s type material was in fact typical B. lutea Michx. f.; but he noted that a long-bracted variety does exist. Fernald accepted the older name for this species, and published a new variety, var. macrolepis, to include material with bracts 8 to 13 millimetres long. Although given a lower rank by its author, another variant more con- spicuous as a tree in the forest than var. macrolepis, is that described by Fassett (1932) as Betula lutea forma fallax. This epithet, meaning false or deceptive was given to it because its presence in Wisconsin had given rise to erroneous reports of sweet birch (B. Jenta L.) in that state. Forma fallax is distinguished from typical yellow birch by the possession of dark brown bark that typically does not exfoliate into shreds or curly flakes at the surface. The colour *Present address: 601, 1049 Chilco Street, Vancouver 5, B.C. 1966 BraysHAw: YELLOW BircH 161 difference is especially noticeable when the bark is wet, and the contrast between this dark bark and the light bronzy yellow, shreddy bark of typical yellow birch has misled many people in Canada, including botanists and foresters, to make the same error in identification that Fassett noted in Wisconsin. This has resulted in reports of sweet birch from many places in southern Quebec and Ontario far beyond the restricted range of this species in Canada (Fox and Soper, 1954). The bark of forma fallax may however, show some tendency to exfoliate. The bark of sweet birch in Canada is dark ashy grey to jet black, and remains close until it ultimately furrows into hard firm plates or ridges. The bracts of forma fallax are ciliate and pubescent, as in typical yellow birch, ‘while those of sweet birch are glabrous. Owing to the conspicuous nature of the well-named forma fallax, and the number of people that have been misled by it, it is thought that this variant » should be accorded varietal rank. Since the name for yellow birch given by Michaux is unuseable, the oldest ‘name applicable to it is B. alleghaniensis Britton, as noted by Little. Since neither of the variants mentioned above has been transferred to B. alleghaniensis, the revised combinations are here stated as follows: Betula alleghaniensis Britton, Bull. Torrey bot. Cl. 31: 166. 1904, varietas 'macrolepis (Fernald) comb. nov. (B. lutea Michx. f. var. macrolepis Fernald, | Rhodora 24: 170. 1922); and B. alleghaniensis Britton, varietas fallax (Fassett) stat. et comb. nov. (B. lutea Michx. f. forma fallax Fassett, Rhodora 34: 95-96. | 1932). REFERENCES ‘Arton, W. 1789. Hortus Kewensis Ed. 1, Transactions of the Royal Canadian Insti- 3:337. tute 30(2) :99-130. | Britton, N. L. 1904. Four new North Lanjouw, J., editor. 1956. International American birches. Bulletin of the Torrey Botanical Club 31:165-166. | Fassett, N. C. 1932. Notes from the her- barium of the University of Wisconsin— VIII. Rhodora 34:95-96. | Fernatp, M.L. 1922. Notes on the flora of Nova Scotia. Rhodora 24:165-180. [Fox, W. S. and J. H. Soper. 1954. The distribution of some trees and shrubs of the carolinian zone of southern Ontario—lIII. code of botanical nomenclature. Interna- tional Association for Plant Taxonomy. Utrecht, Netherlands. Lirtie, E. L. Jr. 1953. Check list of native and naturalized trees of the United States (including Alaska). U.S. Forest Service. Agriculture Handbook No. 41. Washing- ton. 472 pp. Micuaux, F. A. 1812. Histoire des arbres forestiers d’Amerique Septentionale 2: 152 and PI. 5. Received for publication 19 January 1966 Ws THE CIRRIPED STOMATOLEPRAS ELEGANS (COSiiay ON LEATHERBACK TURTLES FROM NOVA SCOTIAN WATERS* - Victor A. ZuLLo and J. SHERMAN BLEAKNEY Marine Biological Laboratory, Woods Hole, Massachusetts and Department of Biology, Acadia University, Wolfville, Nova Scotia DURING the investigaelan) of sea turtles occurring off the coast of Nova Scotia | specimens of the platylepadine barnacle Stomatolepas elegans (Costa). The) genus Stomatolepas has previously been reported only from tropical localitie:| in the American Antilles, the Mediterranean, Japan, and the Malaysian Archi-| pelago. This new occurrence marks not only the highest latitudinal recorc) for the genus, but also the highest latitude from which any platylepadine has) been reported. | Although many platylepadines are found exclusively on turtles, they are! more closely related to the whale barnacles Coronula and Cryptolepas than tc} the “true’ ’ turtle barnacle Chelonibia. Stomatolepas was first described from) caretta caretta) from Tortugas, Florida (Pilsbry, 1910). Subsequently, Stoma- | tolepas has been found in the skin of the neck and flippers of loggerheads, anc from between the plates of the plastron of the green turtle (Chelonia mydas). | The first Nova Scotian Stomatolepas were obtained from a 670 |b. male} leatherback harpooned off the town of Sambro, Halifax County, on August 21,} 1955. ‘The turtle had been retained in a freezing plant at Halifax until August} 1964 when one of us (JSB) discovered seven specimens in the skin over the) right humerus (Figure la). The excellent state of preservation of the internal) body structures of the barnacles indicates that the individuals were alive when the turtle was taken. | Four additional fresh specimens were obtained (JSB) from a 1240 Ib.| female leatherback netted at Seawall, Digby County, on July 20, 1965. Un-| fortunately , this turtle was held in a pond of low salinity for five days and most of its ectoparasites were either dead or destroyed. Three individuals were found intact in folds of skin on the dorsal surface of the left rear flipper. An additional 29 pits that could probably be attributed to Stomatolepas elegans were distributed on all four flippers near the dorsoposterior juncture of flipper and carapace, and another 15 scars were present on the ventral surface of the tail (Figures 1b-c). The barnacles were almost completely embedded in the skin of the hosts and difficult to excise without separating their fragile wall plates. The shells agree with those figured by Hiro (1936: figs. la-b) from a loggerhead (Caretta olivacea) taken at Seto, Japan, and Costa (after Pilsbry, 1916: pl. 68, fig. 2) *Contribution No. 57 of the Systematics-Ecology Program, Marine Biological Laboratory, Woods Hole, Massachusetts. 162 1966 ZULLO AND BLEAKNEY: CIRRIPED ON TURTLES 163 Figure 1. Diagrammatic sketches showing the distribution of Stomatolepas elegans (Costa) on leatherback turtles from Nova Scotia. A, dorsal view of male turtle, Sambro, Halifax County. B, dorsal view of female turtle, Seawall, Digby County. C, ventral view of same. Numbers indicate individuals, those in parentheses indicate pits or scars. from an unknown host at Taranto, Italy (Figure 2). From his study of the Japanese specimens Hiro synonymized Stomatolepas praegustator, which Pils- bry (1910) had described from Florida, with Costa’s older species S. elegans. The distribution of adult Stomatolepas is dependent upon the distribution -and migration of their hosts. Although marine turtles primarily frequent tropical and subtropical waters, they are not uncommon at higher latitudes (Bleakney, 1965). It is most likely that turtles found in temperate waters are migrants from tropical breeding populations, and there is some evidence for even longer-range movements, especially across the North Atlantic (Caldwell et al., 1959; Carr, 1956; Mowbray and Caldwell, 1958, Caldwell 7 lit., 1965). It seems possible that valuable information on the migr ation and dispersal of marine turtles might be obtained through a study of the barnacles which they host.. Although the systematics, biology and zoogeography of turtle barnacles are scarcely understood, present evidence indicates that such factors as breeding and survival tolerances are attuned to tropical and subtropical conditions. For 164 Tue CanapiAN Firtp-NATURALIST Vol. 80 | poMton £4 NOOO AAS = . ch Figure 2. Stomatolepas elegans (Costa) from male leatherback turtle, Sambro, Halifax County, Nova Scotia. A, top view of shell excised from turtle skin. B, detail of exterior ornamentation of one of the wall plates. example, turtle barnacles such as Chelonibia caretta (Spengler) and Platylepas hexastylos (Fabricius) found on loggerheads taken off Cape Cod, Massachu- setts, in summer months are often fouled by the balanid barnacles Balanus trigonus Darwin and B. calidus Pilsbry. These rock barnacles are common elements of tropical American faunas, and otherwise range northward only to Cape Hatteras in the northwest Atlantic. Hence, it can probably be assumed that the Stomatolepas on Nova Scotian leatherbacks also settled in warmer waters, perhaps of the Antillean-Caribbean region, and that subsequently the turtles migrated northward to the area of their capture. Many herpetologists would be particularly interested in knowing whether marine turtles captured off the coast of Europe are ever “tagged’ with Caribbean barnacles. We wish to acknowledge the aid of Dr. David K. Caldwell, Los Angeles County Museum, Los Angeles, California in providing information on the migrations of tropical American turtles; and the Ford Foundation for their support of the preparation of this paper through a grant to the Systematics- Ecology Program. REFERENCES BLEAKNEY, J. SHERMAN. 1965. Reports of Carr, A. 1956. The windward Road. Al- Marine Turtles from New England and fred A. Knopf, New York. pp. xvi + Eastern Canada. Canadian Field-Naturalist 258 + viii. 79 (2) :120-128. Hiro, F. 1936. Occurrence of the cirriped CaLpweELL, Davin K., Carr, A. and Ocrem, L.H. 1959. The Atlantic loggerhead sea Stomatolepas elegans on a loggerhead turtle turtle, Caretta ¢aretta caretta (L.) in found at Seto. Annotationes zoologicae America I. Nesting and migration of the japonenses 15 (3):312-320, text figs. 1-5. Atlantic loggerhead turtle. Bulletin of the Mowsray, L. S. and Carpwei1, D. K. 1958. Florida State Museum, Biological Sciences First record of the Ridley turtle from 4 (10) :293-308, figs. 1-19. Bermuda, with notes on other sea turtles 1966 and the turtle fishery in the islands. Copeia 1958 (2):147-148. Pussry, H. A. 1910. Stomatolepas, a barnacle commensal in the throat of the loggerhead turtle. American Naturalist 44:304-306, text fig. 1. ZULLO AND BLEAKNEY: CirRIPED ON TURTLES 165 . 1916. The sessile barnacles (Cirri- pedia) contained in the collection of the U.S. National Museum; including a mono- graph of the American species. United States National Museum Bulletin 93:xi, 1-366, text figs. 1-99, pls. 1-76. Received for publication 10 January 1966 Ws CORRECTION NOTE The following table was omitted from the article A study of waterfowl nesting on the Saskatchewan River delta by Gerald H. Townsend which ap- peared in The Canadian Field-Naturalist 80(2): 74-88. This table should have appeared on page 85. TABLE 6. — Mean distances of nests from large water compared with predation rates on nests. Confidence limits are at the 95% level. Species Nests Canvasback 8 Lesser Scaup 83 Ring-necked Duck 46 Mallard 12 Blue-winged Teal 27 Gadwall 6 Distance (feet) Predation rate 10 + 10 0 55 s= 30) 33 + 10 83 + 30 20 + 12 83 + 30 AD =>) 31 104 + 46 48 + 20 105 c= 0 33 + 49 VEGETATION OF COTTONWOOD FORESTS ON KODIAK ISLAND Epwarp W. Brats University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin Forests dominated by black cottonwood (Populus trichocarpa) occur in suitable localities around the coast of Kodiak Island, Alaska. Hanson (1961) described one such stand in northern Kodiak in his survey. Along the northern coast of Kodiak spruce (Picea sitchensis) forests occur, but farther south, cottonwoods form the only type of forest, a distinctive contrast to the grassy meadows and marshes around them. The work reported here was carried out in the summer of 1961 along the southeastern coast of Kodiak Island. Populus trichocarpa communities elsewhere in western North America have been described by Lynch (1955) for Montana and by Smith (1957) for British Columbia. THE ENVIRONMENT Kodiak Island receives considerable rainfall the year around; at the town of Kodiak, 40 miles north of the study area, average annual precipitation is over 60 inches, fairly evenly distributed throughout the year (averaging 3.6 inches for the driest month, July). July mean temperature is 54° F; that of January is 30°. The average dates of last and first killing frosts are May 5 and October 12. (Data from the U.S.D.A. 1941.) The forests are restricted to relatively protected sites, never where directly exposed to the open ocean. ‘They are thus protected somewhat from salt spray. They occur mostly on the northern and eastern shores of the bays and straits rather than on southern. “The montainous terrain therefore provides some protection from winter northerly winds. Most often the forests are found at the mouths of perennial streams, but some are located where there are only intermittent streams or even none at all. The streams characteristically flow rather steeply down the mountains and just before reaching the ocean form a small alluvial plain, where the forests are usually found. The alluvium is a gravelly, sandy silt, often covered with several inches of litter. Fretp MeruHops Five stands were sampled: SB: northwest side of Shearwater Bay, % mile west of Kadiak Fisheries; dry ravine. KB: north side of Kiliuda Bay at Shearwater Bay, 1 mile west of Kadiak Fisheries; south slope of hill (Figure 1). BP: Bush point, northern Sitkalidak Strait, alluvium. BB: head of Barling Bay; alluvium. TSB: head of north finger of Three Saints Bay, alluvium. 166 1966 Beats: VEGETATION OF CotroNnwoop Forests 167 Figure 1. View of a cottonwood forest on a drier site (stand KB). Note the density of herb and shrub layers, and the dark color of tree trunks due to epiphytic mosses. 168 Tue CANADIAN FiIeLp-NaATURALIST Vol. 80 TaBLE 1.—Relative density of trees and of tall shrubs Stands KB SB TSB BP BB Trees Populus trichocar pa 100% 95% 88% 93% 99% Alnus crispa == = 9 6 —_— Betula kenaica — 1 = — Salix barclayi = = 3 == 1 Salix glauca = 4 a 1 — Shrubs Alnus crispa — 1 43 19 1 Betula kenaica = 4 — — — Oplopanax horridus 3 = 13 1 — Populus trichocarpa 23 11 = 10 15 Rosa nutkana 3 26 — — — Rubus spectabilis 16 4 23 3 — Salix alanxensis = = = 1 6 Salix barclayt = 6 3 14 36 Salix glauca 3 26 9 8 — Sambucus racemosa 10 8 8 38 31 Viburnum edule 44 14 4 8 10 Density per acre Trees 136 142 262 93 104 Shrubs 132 174 1295 371 189 Basal Area sq ft/acre Populus trichocarpa 116 119 95 111 109 Twenty sampling points per stand were located 30 paces (about 70 feet) apart. ‘There was some bias in selecting the points due to the dense shrub layer and a consequent tendency to pace along bear trails. Trees ( 4 inches DBH or larger) were sampled by the quarter method (Cottam and Curtis 1956), as also were the tall shrubs (woody plants five feet or taller but smaller than trees). Quadrats of one square meter were laid out, and species of the smaller shrubs and of the herbs listed. Basal area of trees was estimated by the Bitterlich method, using a prism with BA factor 10 (Bruce 1955). Plant names in this paper follow Hulton (1940-1950). RESULTS Table 1 shows the data for the tree and shrub layers. All stands were dominated by cottonwood trees. Stand TSB differed from other stands in regard to its much higher shrub density and by the abundance of alder (Alnus crispa). Table 2 shows the frequency of all herb and shrub species occurring in at least five quadrats of the stands combined. ‘Three stands, BP, BB, TSB, were associated with permanent streams, while the stands KB and SB were not. The stands were divided into two groups (the two drier ones and the three with streams) and a x” test of homogeneity was applied to the more common species. Where an expected value was less than five but significance suspected, Fisher’s exact method (1958) was used to determine probability. On this basis the 1966 _. Beats: VEGETATION oF Cottronwoop Forests 169 TABLE 2.—Frequencies of common herbs and smaller woody plants Stands KB SB TSB BP BB Associated with drier sites Cerastium beeringianum 15 25 — = — Dryopteris austriaca 100 75 35 70 30 Equisetum arvense 5 20 = a — Pyrola asarifolia 40 50 — 10 25 Rubus spectabilis 60 15 30 5 10 Veratrum eschscholtzi 50 10 = == — Not significantly associated Angelica lucida 25 60 35 70 80 Calamagrostis canadensis 70 70 95 80 75 Cystopteris fragilis 15 5 = 5 10 Dryopteris linneana 35 90 85 45 50 Epilobium angustifolium 55 85 50 60 80 Galium boreale 5 10 — 25 5 Galium trifidum 5 35 = 50 65 Geranium erianthum — 15 5 10 15 Sangutsorba sitchensts = 15 5 = 20 Streptopus amplexifolius 1 — 10 = 10 Thalictrum sparsiflorum = 10 = = 25 Associated with wetter sites Chenopodium capitatum = — 40 = 5 Circaea alpina 40 25 85 80 40 Claytonia sibirica = 5 15 25 30 Geum macrophyllum — — 15 50 40 Heracleum lanatum 15 10 50 15 35 Ranunculus sp. — — 5 5 20 Solidago multiradiata — — — 5 40 Trientalis europaea — 15 30 15 30 Total No. Species in Quadrats 20 22 23 30 27 Ave . No. Species per Quadrat 5.8 6.7 6.4 pal 7.8 species were divided into three groups in Table 2: those significantly associated with drier sites, those not significantly associated with either, those significantly associated with wetter sites. A larger sample might have reduced the number of species in the middle group, although some would very likely have still shown little preference. Of the shrubs, Alnus, Salix alaxensis and S. barclayi prefer wetter sites, while Rosa, Salix glauca and Viburnum prefer drier sites. Discussion The luxuriant growth of these forests is remarkable in view of the very cool temperatures that persist throughout the growing season. The reason lies in the favorable rainfall — adequate moisture at almost all times. This is reflected also in the heavy epiphytic vegetation of mosses that often completely covers the trunks and larger branches of the cottonwoods (Figure 1), and the not uncommon occurrence of vascular plants, especially the fern Dryopteris austriaca, as an epiphyte in the crotch of a tree. Mosses on the ground are not abundant because of the density of shrub and herb layers, and the heavy leaf litter. 170 Tue CANADIAN FieLp-NATURALIST Voi. 80 The climate is likely favorable enough to support more kinds_of forests. The usual explanation for the tall-grass meadows, characteristic of undisturbed areas at lower altitudes on Kodiak and the Alaska Peninsula, is that of time-lag between change in climate and migration of forest trees. The forests of Picea sitchensis on northern Kodiak have been advancing into this grassland (Griggs 1934), and personal observations in 1961 suggest that the advance continues. Since the seeds of spruce have a relatively low rate of dispersal, and since pioneer spruce seedlings in the open are somewhat retarded by their exposure, it may be that the change in climate since glacial times has occurred more rapidly than the expansion of spruce forest could occur. The cottonwoods, whose seeds are very widely dispersed by the wind, have succeeded in establishing themselves over the island in favorable sites. The cottonwood stand studied by Hanson (1951) on northern Kodiak had in the shrub layer saplings of Picea sitchensis. It is possible then that, given a seed source, spruce might eventually replace the cottonwoods on the higher, better-drained sites or as soil is built up on the alluvial sites. Elsewhere in southern Alaska cottonwoods are more restricted to the vicinity of river valleys than here, and their presence here on the drier sites may be due to lack of competition with spruce. From the data, cottonwood reproduction seemed adequate in all the stands except TSB. This stand differed from others in its high density of trees and especially of shrubs, with Alnus predominating. On the other hand it had the lowest basal area per acre, indicating that the trees were much smaller than those in other stands. It was very likely a much younger stand, in which the pioneer shrubs were still very conspicuous. Although no cottonwood saplings were recorded at the sample points, there were some in the forest. (By the nature of the quarter method, the very high density of Alnus and Rubus made the lower density of Populus more impressive.) In a mature forest a large proportion of saplings probably comes from root sprouts (as reported in British Columbia by Smith, 1957). In a young forest, where trees are them- selves still growing rapidly, such sprouts would probably be less frequent. As the stand matures, Populus reproduction will most likely increase and be adequate to replace dying trees. In conclusion, several further points can be made: These forests consist of two well developed woody layers, a tree layer 30-60 feet high and a tall-shrub layer 5-10 feet. In addition, two predominantly herbaceaus layers occur. Prominent in the upper one (3-6 feet) are Angelica, Calamagrostis, Epilobium, Heracleum, Veratrum; in the lower one (1 foot or less), Circaea alpina, Dryopteris spp., Galium spp., Pyrola. There is a negative correlation between basal area and shrub density. As basal area is closely correlated with canopy, this relationship would be expected. Except for the young stand discussed above, the wetter stands have lower density of trees and higher density of shrubs than do the drier stands. There is an increase in species diversity from dry to wet sites, both as expressed in total number of species in each stand and in the average number of species in each quadrat (Table 2, bottom). 1966 Beats: VEGETATION OF CotroNwoop Forests 171 ACKNOWLEDGMENTS The trip to Kodiak was financed by the Departments of Anthropology and Zoology, University of Wisconsin, with National Science Foundation funds. Richard Nelson assisted with the field work for this study. SUMMARY Five stands dominated by Populus trichocarpa were sampled along the southeast coast of Kodiak Island, Alaska. The wetter sites generally had fewer trees, more shrubs, and greater species diversity than the drier. Some species of herbs and shrubs showed distinct moisture preferences, others did not. Well-distributed rainfall produces a very luxurious vegetation of four strata, with abundance of epiphytic mosses. REFERENCES Bruce, D. 1955. A new way to look at Hutten, E. 1940-1950. Flora of Alaska and trees. Journal of Forestry 53:163-167. Yukon, Parts I-X. Lunds Universitets, Cottam, G., and J. T. Curtis. 1956. The Lund. use of distance measures in phytosocio- Lyncu, D. 1955. Ecology of the aspen logical sampling. Ecology 37:451-460. Fisuer, R. A. 1958. Statistical methods for research workers, 13th edition. Oliver and Bovd, Edinburgh. Grices, R. F. 1934. The edge of the forest in Alaska and the reasons for its position. Ecology 15:80-96. Hanson, H. C. 1951. Characteristics of some grassland, marsh, and other plant communities in western Alaska. Ecological Monographs 21:317-378. groveland in Glacier County, Montana. Ecological Monographs 25:321-344. SmitH, J. H.G. 1957. Some factors indica- tive of site quality for black cottonwood (Populus trichocarpa Yorr. and Gray). Journal of Forestry 55:578-580. Unitep States DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE. 1941. Climate and man—yearbook of agri- culture. Washington. Received for publication 18 October 1965 Vs CORRECTION NOTE In the article by A. H. Macpherson in The Canadian Field-Naturalist 80 (2): 89-94, the figures above the legends reading Figure 2 (p. 92) and Figure 3 (p. 94) were reversed. This transposition was corrected in reprints issued of this article.—Epiror REVIEWS Arachnida By Tueopore Savory. Academic Press, Lon- don and New York, 1964. viii + 291 pages; 109 figures. Price about $9.50 Canadian. The book is divided into 40 chapters and treats in one way or another, almost all aspects of Arachnology. The chapters are arranged into six groups. The first is a short discussion on arthropods in general. The second dis- cusses the class Arachnida, and includes morphology, physiology, embryology, ontogeny, bionomics, ethology, ecology, phylogeny and taxonomy. The third discusses all the orders of Arachnida, including the fossil orders. Mr. Savory considers that there are 16 arachnid orders, five of which are represented only by fossils. The fourth group mentions the doubt- ful Arachnida, namely Merostomata and Pycnogonida. The fifth group discusses historical, practical, chemical and scien- tific arachnology. And the sixth group is a heterogenous collection of subjects including the spider’s web, courtship, arachnophobia, arachnids in amber, ara- chnid venom, and “Disiecta Membra”. The book concludes with a list of gen- eral and selected references on arachnids for the interested reader. Upon reading the publisher’s an- nouncement for this book, one is given the impression that at last we have an English version of Tome 6 of Grassé’s Traite de Zoologie, or a completely re- vised and updated edition of Savory’s own The Arachnida, but the reader will be disappointed. This book contributes very little to Arachnology as it contains little informa- tion that cannot be found in any one of several books, including the two just mentioned above, and Barne’s Inverte- brate Zoology. In fact, there is very little difference between Arachnida and The Arachnida, which was published in 1935. Almost all the figures are the same, but all the photographs in the 1935 book have been excluded in this book. The proof reading for Arachmda was poorly done, as is evident by the many typographical errors throughout the text, and the taxonomy is some 15 to 20 years out of date, especially in the Acari. — The real need in Arachnology is for a comprehensive text book that covers both generalities for the beginner and some detail for the specialist. Arachnida satisfies neither of these conditions. The quality of binding and printung is good, but the black and gold paint outlining the title on the spine comes off with little use of the book. It is this reviewer's opinion that the book is not worth its cost. Rosin LEEcH Entomology Research Institute Canada Department of Agriculture Ottawa, Ontario Physiology of Mollusca, Volume 1 Edited by Kart M. Wizpur and C. M. Yonce. Academic Press Inc., Publishers, 111 Fifth Avenue, New York, 1964. xiii + 473 pp., numerous plates, octavo. $16.00 (U.S.). Assembled together in this impressive volume are thirteen superbly written, thoroughly documented, review articles, by fourteen of the world’s most highly regarded experts, summarizing the pre- sent state of scientific knowledge con- cerning many of the most important aspects of molluscan physiology. This volume is a landmark in its field and, of course, it will be indispensable to alli students of molluscan physiology. But in addition to physiology in the usual sense, a number of topics are discussed which are not customarily included as ports of the subject matter of that W72 1966 science. Because of this broad scope the book will also be of vital concern to all who are interested in the evolution, ecology, reproduction, growth, or cul- ture of mollusks. And this includes near- ly everyone with an amateur interest in malacology or with an academic interest in molluscan biology. The subjects covered in Volume 1 are as follows: classification and structure of the Mollusca, physiological aspects of the ecology of intertidal molluscs, phy- siological aspects of the ecology of non- marine molluscs, reproduction, develop- ment, the culture of marine bivalve lar- vae, growth, shell formation and regen- eration, osmotic and ionic regulation, muscle and neuromuscular physiology, and special effectors (luminous organs, chromatophores, pigments, and poison glands). Contributing authors include such well-known scholars as Vera Fret- ter, Alistair Graham, W. Russell Hunter, J. E. Morton, Gareth Owen, C. P. Raven, C. M. Yonge, and others. For a researcher working on molluscan ecology, zoogeography, or evolution, or on economic mollusks, this book is of tremendous value because it summarizes in succinct form (with references) so much specialized information, largely from the European literature, with which he is probably not familiar. The zoogeography of Canadian mollusks, for example, is bound up not only with glacial and postglacial geological and climatic events but also with innumerable physiological aspects of ecology, repro- duction, development, etc. which must be considered in depth. Numerous other examples of the well-known interdepen- dence of supposedly separate branches of science could be cited. It is clear, how- ever, that physiology in all of its aspects is fundamental to an understanding of all other branches of biology; and since this volume is by far the most authorita- tive and complete source of information available on molluscan physiology no interested student should be without ac- cess to it. REVIEWS 173 Volume 2, which will complete the set, will include sections on feeding, digestion, metabolism, blood circulation, excretion, and the nervous system of mollusks, all written by a distinguished group of specialists. Three sections will deal specifically with cephalopods which, because they are phylogenetically the most advanced group, are the most com- plex physiologically. All workers in malacology owe a debt of gratitude to the editors for making such a wealth of information available in such easily available form. Let us hope that Volume 2 will appear soon. A. H. Crarke, Jr. National Museum of Canada Ottawa, Ontario Fishes of the Western North Atlantic, Part 5, Order Iniomi and Order Lyomeri. Order Iniomi, characters and synopsis of families by W. A. Gosting, N. B. MarsHac and G. W. Mean; Aulopidae — G. W. Meap; Synodontidae — W. W. ANDERSON, J. W. Genrincer and F. H. Berry; Bathy- sauridae, Bathypteroidae, Ipnopidae and Chlorophthalmidae — G. W. Mean; Myto- phidae and Neoscopelidae Gateann ac- counts) —R. L. Botty; Scopelosauridae — N. B. Marsuatt; Paralepididae, Omosudi- dae, Anotopteridae, Evermannellidae, Scopelarchidae — R. R. Roren; Alepisau- ridae —R. H. Gusss, Jr.; Order Lyomeri —J. E. Bourke. Memoir Sears Foundation for Marine Research, (1), part 5:1-647, 220 fig., New Haven, 1966. Bizarre bathypelagic fishes finely figured, distribution maps and depth range graphs and a wealth of informa- tion brought together on iniomous fishes and deep-sea gulpers make this a parti- cularly exciting volume. The text match- es the fine quality of the format. Some comments on individual sections may be noted. A noteworthy inclusion is the excellent discussion defining the Iniomi. The reviewer agrees that they form a natural group and are worthy of 174 ordinal recognition. To the definition of this order might be added the possession of 4 branchiostegals on the external face of the hyoid arch with the rest ventral or internal (reviewer, ms) and the pos- session of retractores arcuum branchia- lium muscles (Holstvoogd, 1965; see Koninkl. Nederlandsche Akademie Van Wetenschappen, Amsterdam, Proceed- ings 68: 209). These two characters, plus the fusion of the inner pelvic ray to the pterygiophore, indicate that this order has affinities with the spiny-rayed fishes. The suborders Myctophoidei and Alepisauroidei, usually recognized, are rejected in this treatment. Especially noteworthy are the accounts of families by Mead and by Rofen. Some, praise- worthy systematically, fall short in life history aspects. For example, although the study material of a species, in one case, included 98 specimens, not one was opened to discover its feeding habits. It is unfortunate that Bohlke did not have the opportunity of adding to his account on the Lyomeri after the publication of Orton’s (1963) findings. The date of publication of Paralepis (—Notolepis) rissoi is given as 1841, but Salvadori (1888, see National Museum of Canada Bulletin 168: 14) indicates that it was 1840. Taxonomic changes are made in all the paralepids known from the At- lantic coast of Canada. Bathypterois viri- densis is reported for the first time in Canadian waters. The most recent re- ference appears to be 1963; an indication of the date of submission of the papers would protect the author and inform the reader. Some general observations on_ the volume may be noted. The accounts attain a high level of scholarship in this volume. The editing has been thorough, only a single misspelling was noted. The addition of spot distribution maps to most accounts is very worthwhile and one hopes that this will become stand- ard. Small touches such as including pagination in the keys and capitalizing key words like GAS BLADDER in the Tue CanapiAN FrIeLp-NaTurRALIst Vol. 80 text are commendable. Out of keeping with the high standard is the failure to cite the titles of papers in the list of references. Authors in this volume, un- like some of those in previous ones, have studied large series of specimens. As usual Canadian literature is not well cov- ered (e.g. Paralepididae, Anotopteridae, Eurypharyngidae). Family descriptions are not standard- ized. This makes it difficult to compare characters in different families. Perhaps, in the future, an editor could recom- mend a format for family descriptions, at least for the larger orders. Fossil groups are ignored in most accounts. Two recommendations of the Interna- tional Code of Zoological Nomenclature are not followed. Firstly, that in citing a binomen a comma separate the author’s name and the date of publication. Se- condly, that in synonymies the author’s name follow the binomen uninterrupted by punctuation only when it is the original description, otherwise it be separated by a punctuation mark (other than a comma), such as a colon. The latter is a useful practice distinguishing original descriptions from subsequent identifications. The first part of the series is now out of print. As the reviewer suggested pre- viously, consideration should be given to a quality reprint of reduced size (as has been done with Bent’s life histories of North American birds). A reprint of the sturgeon section by the Quebec De- partment of Tourism, Fish and Game Branch, shows that this can be done without great loss of quality in the figures. Consideration might also be given to printing separately full-sized prints of some of the finer figures. These would be suitable for framing and might help avoid mutilation of the volumes by print collectors. Some, such as figure 200 of Evermannella indica by Eva Maria Soule, are well-worthy of framing. D. E. McALLIsTER National Museum of Canada Ottawa 4, Ontario 1966 Catalogue Systématique des Noms de Genres de Poissons Actuels By Yves-J. Gotvan. Masson et Cie, Editeurs, Paris. 1965. 227 pp. This catalogue attempts to summarize all the subgeneric and generic names applied to living species of fishes, from 1758 to the end of 1959. The genera are listed alphabetically under family; the families are arranged according to the classification in the Traité de Zoologie. The author(s) and date of publication are given for each genus. Genera believed to be valid are printed in boldface, while genera which are junior synonyms, homonyms, or emendations are printed in italics, and are followed by the valid name. At the end of the volume is an index to the genera included in the volume. Three new names are published: Paraclinidae (p. 129), Scytaliscidae (p. 133), and Aeschynichthyidae (p. 173). The volume includes about 9000 gen- eric names for living fishes, valid and invalid. This represents a considerable increase over the about 7000 generic names for both living and fossil fishes, valid and invalid, in Jordan’s The classi- fication of fishes, published in 1923 (Lin- naeus used only about 50 genera). It also represents a considerable portion of the generic names applied to all the vertebrates — about 17,000 (Y. J. Golvan, 1965, Répertoire des noms de genres de vertébrés). A sampling of 11 half pages of Golvan shows 205 out of 297 genera, or 69% to be valid. If this sample was representative, there would have been about 6,200 valid generic names for fishes in 1959. The value of the volume is readily apparent. If one wishes to know who published a generic name at what time, where a genus is placed or how it is properly spelled, the answer can readily be found in Golvan. Criticisms are that the classification is oversplit, there are omissions (Pomadasys, Plectobranchus, etc.) and archaisms (Uranidia is not synonymized with Cottus). Many errors REVIEWS 175 could have been avoided had taxonomic ichthyologists been involved. On the other hand we are indebted to a para- sitologist, Golvan, for a valuable hand- book that no recent ichthyologist has been brave enough to prepare. D. E. McALListTER National Museum of Canada Ottawa, Ontario Raccoons and Eagles By Potty Reprorp. E. P. Dutton and Co. Inc., New York, 1965. Clarke, Irwin and Com- pany Limited, Toronto. 254 pp. $5.50. In his foreword Carl Buchheister, President of the National Audubon Society points out that raccoons and eagles are uniquely American, which is the reason they are included in one book. The two species are separately treated in the book with more than 100 pages devoted to each one. In the last few pages the two are brought together as part of a forceful message on conserva- tion. The author has combined up-to-date biological information, which has rather surprising gaps, with the history, politics, symbolism and folklore in which the two species are involved. Her story ranges from her personal experiences in raccoon raising and eagle watching, through the vagaries of the fur industry, to the decline in eagle numbers through pesticide poisoning. There are warnings of future problems of species decline and true stories of wildlife research by earnest professionals and eager amateurs. Through it all the book is uniformly well written and at- tractive to read. Mrs. Redford’s closing paragraph de- serves our careful attention. “Long ago it was said that not even a sparrow was too small or too worth- less to fall unnoticed. No living thing is worthless just because we happen to 176 have no use for it at the moment. Now an eagle is falling. And unlike those other symbols of dying wildlife — the condor, the ivory-billed woodpecker, and the famous whooping crane — bald eagles are not specialized crea- tures of restricted range. They are (or were) strong, hardy birds that range throughout North America. When they die, it will be because this con- tinent is no longer fit for a wild, free- moving thing to live. In this, our threatened eagle symbolizes America in a way it never has before. If we lose him we shall have lost more than a bird.” V.E. F. Sopman Canadian Wildlife Service Ottawa, Ontario A Monograph of Lemnaceae By Epwin H. Dauss. Illinois Biological Monographs 34, University of Illinois Press, Urbana. 31 December, 1965. 118 pp., 21 plates of line drawings and maps. $3.50, in cloth $4.50. This world-wide work reviews, in a technical and most competent manner, the taxonomy of the 28 species com- posing this family of minute and struc- turally simple aquatic plants, the smallest flowering plants known. Most species are tropical and become prolific on warm stagnant waters by rapid vegetative bud- ding. Five of the wide-ranging species extend into southern Canada: the three common duckweeds, Lemma minor, L. trisulca and Spirodela polyrhiza, and two less conspicuous watermeals, W olf- fia columbiana and W. punctata. Their distribution as given on the world-scale maps cannot show the details of occur- rence and only a few specimens are cited for Canada out of the many thousands that the author has examined. A separate listing 1s made of the specimens in flower or fruit, a very rare condition not yet known for some species. Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 80 An extensive bibliography includes titles on morphology, physiology and local geography, as well as on taxonomy, and this compilation will prove most useful to those whose interests lie more in the natural history and wildlife as- pects of water scums. The plants are being used more and more in laboratory experiments, so easily can they be handled, cultured and counted. W. G. Dore Plant Research Institute Department of Agriculture, Ottawa OTHER NEW TITLES Northern Foxe Basin, an area economic survey, 1965 By G. Anoers. Industrial Division, Northern Administration Branch, Department of Northern Affairs and National Resources. Mimeographed. 1966. 139 pp. Banks Island, an area economic study, 1965 By P. J. Usuer. Industrial Division, Northern Administration Branch, Department of Northern Affairs and National Resources. Mimeographed. 1966. 125 pp. These reports are published in their present form primarily for use within the Department, for distribution to other interested Government agencies, and for limited distribution to universities, or- ganizations and individuals actively inter- ested in northern affairs. Each contains an account of the utilization of the wild- life present in the area. Annuals and Biennials By Roy Hay. An Ilford Colour Book of Flower Identification. Edbury Press in association with George Rainbird. 1966. 112 pp. In Canada: Thomas Nelson & Sons (Canada) Ltd., Toronto. $3.00. 1966 Flowering Bulbs, Corms and Tubers By Frances Perry. An Ilford Colour Book of Flower Identification. Edbury Pressin association with George Rainbird. 1966. 112 pp. In Canada: Thomas Nelson & Sons (Canada) Ltd., Toronto. $3.00. These slender volumes with a mini- mum of text description and gardening directions are lavishly illustrated with _ 96 plant portraits each — all in full glos- sy colour. A modest delight for any gardner or anyone who appreciates flower photography. Audubon in the West ‘Compiled, edited and with an Introduction by Jon Francis McDermott. University of Oklahoma Press, Norman. 1965. 131 pp. In Canada: Burns & MacEachern Ltd., Don Mills, Ontario. $6.00. A collection of twenty letters by Audubon to his family and friends on his last lengthy journey — in 1843 into the interior of North America to the Upper Missouri country to collect and paint mammals for his “Viviparous Quadrupeds of North America”. The letters cover the period from Wheeling, Virginia, March 16 to Fort Union, Up- per Missouri, June 17. Eighteen plates are included with the text — mostly of scenes by painters of the period, although a portrait of Audubon, facsimile of his signature and a couple of his drawings are included in the selection. Children as Naturalists By Marcaretr M. Hutcuinson. Allen & Unwin Ltd., London. Second Edition. 1966. 190 pp. In Canada: Thomas Nelson & Sons (Canada) Ltd., Toronto. $5.00. This fine little British book, written by a teacher for teachers, contains much of value to anyone trying to spark an interest in and appreciation of natural history in children. Although the exam- ples are drawn from the English coun- REVIEWS 177 tryside, a North American reader should have no difficulty in finding the equiva- lents for use in the same types of pro- jects and problems in this continent. The Primates By SareLt Ermert and IrveN De Vore and Tue Epritors or Lire. Life Nature Library, Time Inc., N.Y., 1965. 199 pp. Animal Behavior By Niko TinperceN and Tue Epitors oF Lire. Life Nature Library, Time Inc., N.Y., 1965. 199 pp. Early Man By F. Crark Howe and Tue Epirors oF Lire. Life Nature Library, Time Inc., 1965. 200 pp. A Guide to the Natural World and Index to the Life Nature Library By Tue Eprtors or Lire. Time Inc., N.Y., 1965. 210 pp. These volumes should require no com- ment so well received and popular has this fine series proven. The’ final volume is a condensed classification of one-celled creatures (Monerans and Protistans), ani- mals, plants and minerals as well as an index to the entire series. Tree Flowers of Forest, Park and Street By Watter E. Rocers with drawings by Orca A. SmitH. Dover Publications, re- print 1965 of 1935 edition. In Canada: General Publishing Co. Ltd., Don Mills, Ontario. $3.45. One hundred and twenty-one arboreal species are depicted by full-page sil- hcuettes of winter outline, sketches of leaf form and tree flowers, and magni- fied photographs of the flower. A brief account of special features of each plant illustrated is included. Thirty-three famit- lies are represented. NOTES Additional Bird Observations at Bathurst Inlet, N.W.T. From May 14 to September 6, 1950, E. H. McEwen and I recorded the birds seen during our stay at Bathurst Inlet, Northwest Territories, and those records later were published (McEwen, 1957). Subsequently, I spent two additional periods there during which trips were made through the high, rough country (up to 2,000 ft. elevation above sea-level ) on both sides of the Inlet. Those visits were from June 2 to July 2, 1951, and from June 2 to June 27, 1954. Field assistance was provided by N. G. Perret in 1951 and A. Radvanyi in 1954, both now of the Canadian Wildlife Service. McEwen recorded 50 species of birds seen or reported, 20 species nesting, and 14 species probably nesting. All birds recorded by McEwen were seen again in 1951 and 1954 with the exception of Greater Scaup (Aythya marila), Buffle- head (Bucephala albeola) and American Robin (Turdus migratorius). McEwen’s remarks regarding numerical and nesting status of most species were confirmed, although a few, notably the Red-breast- ed Merganser (Mergus serrator), Geld- en Eagle (Aquila chrysaétos), Ruddy Turnstone (Arenaria interpres) and Snow Bunting (Plectrophenax nivalis) were seen in greater abundance, or more frequently, in the later years. This seem- ed entirely due to their being more abundant in the high inland country not visited in 1950. Ravens (Corvus corax) were much more abundant in high country occupied by calving caribou, among which they were doubtless scavenging, than in coastal areas. Several flocks were seen, the largest being 24 birds on June 14, 1951, suggesting a considerable population of non-breeding birds following the caribou. At Bathurst Inlet young Ravens were not flying until 178 the last few days of June. The 1951 and 1954 records include five new species seen, authentication by residents of Bathurst Inlet of a species reported by Snyder (1957), and one species seen in 1950 but omitted by McEwen. Also in- cluded are one new nesting record, and a listing of spring arrival dates earlier than those observed in 1950. YELLOW-BILLED Loon Gavia adamisii. First seen June 6, 1951, and June 4, 1954. (McEwen, June 15, 1950). Paciric Loon Gavia arctica. First seen June 6, 1951, and June 11, 1954. (Mc- Ewen, June 13, 1950). ReED-THROATED Loon Gavia stellata. First seen on June 5, 1951, and June 17, 1954. (McEwen, June 19, 1950). A nest with two eggs was found June 27, 1951, on the Burnside River delta. Gyrratcon Falco rusticolus. New spe- cies. One bird defending a nesting ter- ritory on an inaccessible cliff was seen 10 miles inland from Burnside Harbour, June 14, 1951. Wittow Prarmican Lagopus lagopus. New species. McEwen recorded only the Rock Ptarmigan (Lagopus mutus), but a Willow Ptarmigan was shot at Burnside Harbour in June, 1951. Several of the many ptarmigan seen in 1951 and 1954 were believed to be of the latter species. WuoppinG Crane Grus americana. New species. A bird was seen June 13, 1954, flying northward in a river valley about eight miles west of Bathurst Inlet and could scarcely have been any other 1966 species. It was studied by Radvanyi and the author, through 7 x 50 binoculars, and was obviously a large white crane with black wing tips. SEMIPALMATED PLover Charadrius semi- palmatus. Apparently nesting when first observed on June 5, 1951. (McEwen, first observed June 9, 1950; first evidence of nesting July 4, 1950). Hupsonian Gonwir Limosa haemastica. New species. Although not recorded by McEwen, a single bird was seen on the Burnside River delta June 26, 1950. NortTHerRN Puararope Lobipes lobatus. First seen on June 4, 1954 (McEwen, June 15, 1950). Rep Puararope Phalaropus fulicarius. New species. A single female was ob- served and photographed on the Burn- side River delta June 24, 1954. Parasitic JAEGER Stercorarius parasiticus. New species. Single birds were seen June 9 and 19, 1954, both being in the light phase. Unidentified jaegers were seen several times in each year of observation, most frequently flying northward up Bathurst Inlet at some distance from land. Several did not appear to be bulky enough to be Pomarine Jaegers (Ster- corarius pomarinus), the most common species in the region. SNowy Ow. Nyctea scandiaca. \denti- fied in 1950 only from the remains of a single bird. Live individuals were seen June 5 and 13, 1951. Eastern Kinepirp Tyrannus tyrannus. New species. A single bird, obviously a stray, was collected in June, 1953 on the Burnside River flats and is now deposited in the Royal Ontario Museum (Snyder, 1957). Notes 179 GREY-CHEEKED THRUsH Hylocichla min- ima. First seen June 11, 1951, and June 9, 1954. (McEwen, about June 13, 1950). REFERENCES McEwen, E. H. 1957. Birds observed at Bathurst Inlet, Northwest Territories. Canadian Field-Naturalist 71 (3) :109-115. Snyper, L.L. 1957. Arctic birds of Canada. U. of Toronto Press, Toronto. 290 pp. Joun P. KesaLy Canadian Wildlife Service, Edmonton, Alberta 28 October 1965 Incubation Periods of Some Subarctic Birds SINcE 1930, the Churchill, Manitoba, re- gion has received much attention from ornithologists. However, despite the great amount of field work that has been carried out there, basic aspects of the breeding biology of many Churchill birds are still poorly known. During field stud- ies in this area, Jehl in 1964 and 1965, Hussell in 1965, we gathered some data on the incubation periods of 15 species, which we present here. Although we have not made a complete search of the literature, it appears that for at least six of these species there are no previously reported incubation periods, and for sev- eral other species the available data are sparse or imprecise. Eggs were code marked with indelible ink in order of their appearance in the nest. Unless other- wise noted, all incubation periods are cal- culated from the laying to the hatching of the last egg in the clutch. We gratefully acknowledge the field assistance given us by Charles G. Yar- brough, and David F. Parmelee and party, in 1964; and by Robert W. Stamp in 1965. W. Earl Godfrey kindly in- formed us of data regarding the incu- bation periods of several species. Field work was supported by grants from the Frank M. Chapman Memorial Fund and from the National Science Foundation. 180 Semipalmated Plover, Charadrius sem- palmatus — Incubation periods of 23 and 25 days. Whimbrel, Nwmenius phaeopus—Peri- ods of 22 and 233 days recorded, another nest was incubated at least 223 days. There are apparently no previous data for the New World population of this species (W. E. Godfrey, im litt.). Common Snipe, Capella gallinago — One nest, 19 days. Short-billed Dowitcher, Limnodromus griseus — Incubation period at a nest dis- covered by Parmelee was 21 days (maxi- mum error, 6 hours). This is the first reported incubation period for this species. Least Sandpiper, Erolia minutilla — Periods of 193, 203, 203, 214 days noted. It is extremely surprising to us that the incubation time of this common sand- piper seems previously unreported. Stilt Sandpiper, Micropalama himanto- pus — A minimum incubation period, 21 days, determined at a nest thought to have been found on day when last egg was laid. There is no previous report of an incubation period for this species. Hudsonian Godwit, Limosa haemas- tica. — One period of 233 days + 5 hours. Ellis (1948. Northwood bound for godwits. Audubon Magazine 50: 154- 159) reported an incubation period of approximately 22 days, but the eggs were not marked at this nest, and one disap- peared early in incubation. Northern Phalarope, Lobipes lobatus — One record, 223 days. Bonapart’s Gull, Larus philadelphia — Not previously reported, the incubation period at one nest was 24 days. Gray -cheeked Thrush, Hylocichla minima — One period of 12 days. Savannah Sparrow, Passerculus sand- wichensis — Two periods, both 12 days. Harris’ Sparrow, Zonotrichia querula — Minimum incubation period for one nest 132 days, computed from laying of fourth to hatching of third egg; the Tue CaAnapiaAn FrieLtp-NaTuRALIST Vol. 80 fourth egg did not hatch. This nest was shown to us by R. Kontak. Common Redpoll, Acanthis flammea — One record, 13 days. Lapland Longspur, Calcarius lapponi- cus — Two incubation periods, both 13 days, recorded. Two other clutches in- cubated at least 13 days. Smith’s Longspur, Calcarius pictus — Previously unknown, the periods at three nests were 113, 113, and 12 days. JosepH R. JEHL, Jr. D. J. T. Hussey University of Michigan Museum of Zoology Ann Arbor, Michigan, 1 November 1965 Sighting of a Hudsonian Godwit (Limosa haemastica) near Vancouver, B.C. Tue bird was first seen on the afternoon of September 13, 1964. It was standing at the water’s edge, at half tide, on a muddy salt-water beach near the Van- couver city sewage plant at Iona Island, B.C. It was with a group of 20 Greater Yellowlegs (Totanus melanoleucus) and 5 Lesser Yellowlegs (Totanus flavipes), and was immediately seen to be a god- wit by its bill (upturned, black with a light buff colour at the base) and its relative size. My wife and I approached to within 100 feet of the bird, and viewed it with a 25x telescope. The white rump, and the broad black tail band with its white- tipped feathers were all clearly seen as the bird preened. A Pigeon Hawk put it up and the godwit showed its striking wing plumage well: the black axillars, generally dark under plumage, and the white stripe on the upper surface were all easily recognizable. A white super- ciliary line was noted; the legs were steel grey. The bird was in fall plumage: it was uniform grey (including the wings) shaded darker above and on the wings 1966 than underneath. No call was heard. The bird did not feed. On the following day, in the early evening, the bird was again observed by Mr. and Mrs. W. H. Hesse, of Vancou- ver. It allowed them to view it at leisure from a distance of about 15 feet. They both corroborated our identification. The only records of this species for British Columbia given by the A.O.U. Check-list (fifth edition, 1957) are from the north of the province: “Casual in... British Columbia (Cariboo District, Peace River Parklands, Atlin) .. .” This apparently is the first record for the species in southwestern British Columbia. Frep W. Dosson Institute of Oceanography University of British Columbia Vancouver, Canada 19 December 1964 Mass Movements by Snowshoe Rabbits, Lepus americanus During the night of 27-28 March 1963, a mass movement of snowshoe rabbits occurred about 5 miles southwest of Kobuk village in northwestern Alaska. Tracks of an estimated 800-1000 animals were found which indicated a north- westerly movement over a front of about 2 miles within the white spruce (Picea glauca) — willow (Salix sp.) community bordering the Kobuk river. A tenuous investigation has revealed evidence of only two similar events. Curiously, one of these occurred on the night following that of the Kobuk river movement. Hufman (personal communi- cation, 1963) reported that a group of from 100 to 150 snowshoe rabbits travel- led in a westerly direction over Paxson Lake in central Alaska on the night of 28-29 March 1963. The other event was observed near and on Red Lake, Min- nesota on 1 March 1912 (Cox, 1936, Journal of Mammalogy 17: 216-221). Notes 181 Cox came upon the tracks of many snowshoe rabbits, all of which pointed in a northwesterly direction. Cox over- took the travelling animals and estimated their density as 20-50 per acre. Climatological records show that weather sequences for the periods of the movements were remarkably similar in each case (U.S. Department of Com- merce, 1963, Climatological Data, Alaska, 49: 34-47 and U.S. Department of Agri- culture, 1912, Cooperative Observers Meteorological Records, Northern Min- nesota). Nine days prior to each instance of mass movement the weather in north- ern Minnesota, central and northwestern Alaska was fine and calm with tempera- tures in the order of 0°F. There follow- ed several days of rising temperatures and increasing air movement, culmina- ting in temperatures about 32°F., preci- pitating snow and winds of about 35 m.p-h. Two days prior to the events the weather became calm with temperatures falling to between -10 and -20°F. at the time of each movement. I recorded the mass movement of snowshoe rabbits in northwestern Alaska toward the end of my second winter of field studies of caribou (Rangifer taran- dus arcticus) ecology. The subjective impressions that I gained of snowshoe rabbit behaviour during these winters support the possible existence of an as- sociation between activity and weather patterns. As was the case with caribou (Henshaw, 1964, University Microfilms, Ann Arbor, publication: M-746, 154 pp-), there appeared to be very little movement of snowshoe rabbits during periods of stormy weather, especially when snow was precipitating and the surface was being hardened by winds. Movement and feeding of snowshoe rabbits (as well as of caribou) were particularly in evidence during the calm, cold periods that followed storms. Joun HenNsHaw Box 593 College, Alaska, 99701 31 December 1965 182 Tue CaAnapbiAN FreLtp-NaATURALIST Breeding Records of the Ring- necked Duck (A ythya collaris) in Riviére-du-Loup and Rimouski Counties, Quebec PRELIMINARY investigations on water- fowl populations on inland waters on the south shore of the St. Lawrence Estuary have revealed the presence of a prev iously unreported population of breeding Ring-necked Ducks (Aythya collaris). As the breeding distribution of this species in Quebec is not well known (see: Mendall, Howard L. 1958. The ring-necked duck in the Northeast. University of Maine Bulletin 60 (16): 317 p.), I felt it worthwhile to publish these notes. These investigations were carried out mainly in Rimouski County although a few areas in Riviere-du-Loup County also were covered. In 1964 several brood counts were conducted in this area. Despite the low intensity of these searches, five Ring- necked Duck broods were located, four in Rimouski County and one in Riviere- du-Loup County. In 1965 brood counts were not made but on June 20 a nest containing seven eggs was found (Ri- mouski County). An eighth egg was added, presumably the following day, but the nest was abandoned several days later. During the course of investigations many pairs of Ring-necked Ducks, whose behaviour suggested breeding, were ob- served. Our observations suggest that this species is the third most common breed- ing duck on the inland waters of these counties. Only the Black Duck (Anas rubripes) and the Common Goldeneye Vol. 80 (Bucephala clangula), in that order, sur- pass it in numbers. Austin REED Quebec Wildlife Service Parliament Buildings Quebec, P.Q. 13 January 1966 Record of Utricularia purpurea in Newfoundland Tue writer wishes to report the finding on August 11, 1965, of several specimens of Utricularia purpurea Walt. near Col- inet in the Avalon Peninsula of New- foundland. The plants, in sterile condi- tion, were growing in a large pond (47° 16’ 00” N., 53° 32’ 20” W.) three miles north of Colinet on Route 22, amongst a dense growth of the two other bladder- worts, U. vulgaris L. and U. intermedia Hayne. Specimens bearing collection number 320(c) are deposited in the herbarium of Memorial University of Newfound- land in St. John’s and in the Marie- Victorin Herbarium of l'Institut Botani- que de Université de Montréal. This is the first record of U. purpurea in Newfoundland, and extends the known range beyond Nova Scotia and New Brunswick. The writer thanks Dr. Ernest Rouleau, Curator of the Marie-Victorin Herbar- ium, for his advice, and for confirmation of the identification. Hirpa E. Smita Biology Department Memorial University of Newfoundland St. John’s : 4 January 1966 _ The CANADIAN FIELD. ‘NATURALIST Published by THE OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS’ CLUB, Ottawa, Ontario ris of the Wood Ibis, the Fulvous Tree Duck and the Wheatear in Ontario ia : Jon C. Bartow 183 What are the Blue Birches? T. C. Braysnaw 187 ‘A Wet Prairie Community at Windsor, Ontario C. M. Rogers 195 Benthos of Four Lake Superior Bays M. L. H. Tuomas 200 A alysis of the Movement and Growth of Juvenile Brook Trout (Salvelinus fontinalis) from Rotenone Collections taken in the Nabisipi River and Vicinity, Quebec | G. Power 213 ‘Observations on the Behaviour of Nesting Three-toed Woodpeckers, Picoides __ tridactylus, in Central New Brunswick Rosert S. GipBon 223 : Numerical Taxonomy and the Smelt Family, Osmeridae D. E. McAuusrer 227 Sieve Mesh Size as Related to Volumetric and Gravimetric Analysis of — Caribou Rumen Contents Grorce W. Scorrer 238 ‘Studies of the Byron Bog in Southwestern Ontario XX VII. Insects Associated ae oe Flowering Blueberry, Vaccinium atrococcum (Gray) Heller a WitiiamM W. Jupp 242 ‘Reviews 245 Marine Mammals of. Galton — The Lily Family (Liliaceae) of British. Galamhia — Bugs or People? — Vascular Flora of British Columbia: Preliminary Check List - Our Natural World — Wildlife Biology — Other New Titles — Journals Received N Notes ite History Notes on the Goldeye, Hiodon alsoides (Rafinesque), in the North Saskatchewan River in Alberta Coin G. Paterson 250 ; First Canadian Record of the Brackish Water Anthozoan Nematostella vectensis Stephenson ae Kaniautono Baitey and J. SHERMAN BLEAKNEY 251 We iachirds | in New Brunswick Miss H. Witta MacCouprey 252 pide Sparrows in New Brunswick Miss H. Witta MacCousrey = 253 Redfish, Sebastes marinus var. mentella, from the Kennebecasis River, N.B. 2 W. A. Sourres and S. W. Gornam 253 A ‘Summer Tanager in Manitoba W. Eart Goprrey 254 ‘The Western Painted Turtle near Gilbert Plains, Manitoba James L. Parker 254 eats Sparrow Nesting at Ottawa, aoe W. Eart Goprrey 255 4 Index to Volume 80 Compiled by Mrs. G. R. Hanes | 257 Can. Field Nat. | Vol. 80 | No. 4 | p- 183-270 | Ottawa, October-December 1966 =a A ae Ph a PVA Si NGAI NM tee es Dae ra M i ' FOUNDED IN 1879 4 THE OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS’ CLUB . — Patrons — Tuer Excettencies THE GovERNOR GENERAL AND MADAME Vanied ia | The objects of the club are to foster an acquaintance with and a love of nature, to encourage investigation and to publish the results of original research and observations — in all branches of natural history. | The club is a corporate member of the Federation of Ontario Naturalists and is. affiliated with the American Association for the Advancement of Science. ae iS MEMBERS OF COUNCIL President; Grorce H. McGer, 2052 Woodcrest Road, Ottawa 8, Ontario First Vice-President: H. N. MacKenzie Second Vice-President: Francis R. Cook Secretary: A. W. RaTHWELL, Canadian Wildlife Service, 400 Laurier Ave. W., Ottawa Ay Ontario. ya Treasurer: Mrs. Roy D. Wainwricut, 263 Sherwood Dr., Ottawa 3, Grane i 4 Additional Members of Council: Miss A. BANNING, Miss V. Humpurirs, Miss L. Kincston, | | Miss M. Stuart, Mrs. H. A. THomson, Fatuer F. E. Banim, FATHER R. LEGAULT, MEssRs. W. K. W. Batpwin, A. W. F. Puen cy. E. L. BousFiexp, W. J. Copy, R. Pann, jJ. M. Gittett, H. Grou, i W. Groves, D. D. Hociern. W. J. TeiMane H. Lrovn, W. W. Mane 4 a Mosoutn, A E. Porsitp, J. S. Rowe, F. H. SCHULTZ, D. A. Smire, Vv. = F, SoLMAN, G. Tessier, J. C. Thee ‘ ooh AUDITORS: J. M. Gitiert and R. J. Moore THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Editor: Francis R. Cook Business Manager: W. if Conve National Museum of Canada, Ottawa, Ontario Central Experimental Farm, Ottawa, Ont. Associate Editors: a J. Atcock (Geology), Joun W. ARNoLD Hausen W.A. Bee (Paleontology), J. SHERMAN BieaKNEy (Herpetology), ARTHUR Cuarke, Jr. 4 (Malacology), Witu1am G. Dore (Botany), W. Eart Goprrey (Ona A. G. : Huntsman (Marine Biology), D. E. are tee (Ichthyology), Pamir M. Youneman | (Mammalogy). The Canadian Field-Naturalist is published quarterly by the Ottawa Field’Nawuralees é Club with assistance of the affiliated societies listed on the outside back cover. Manuscripts ‘e representing personal observations or the results of original research in any branch of na- — tural history are invited. In the preparation of papers authors should consult the most i recent issue and the information for contributors on the inside back cover. Advertising — rates and prices of back numbers of this journal and its predecessors, TRANSACTIONS ~ ‘ OF THE OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS’ CLUB, 1879-1886, and the OTTAWA NATURALIST, 1887-1919, are obtainable from the business manager. Authorized as second-class mail by the Post Office Department of Ottawa, and for payment of postage in Cash. SS ae Bie Sk ete SS The Canadian Field-Naturalist VOLUME 80 OCTOBER-DECEMBER 1966 NuMBER 4 STATUS OF THE WOOD IBIS, THE FULVOUS TREE DUCK AND THE WHEATEAR IN ONTARIO Jon C. Bartow Royal Ontario Museum, University of Toronto, Toronto, Ontario SPECIMENS of the Wood Ibis, Mycteria americana, the Fulvous Tree Duck, Dendrocy gna bicolor, and the Wheatear, Oenanthe oenanthe, recently obtained in Ontario make necessary a re-evaluation of the status of these birds in the Province. Extant records of the occurrence of each suggest that these species are better regarded as rare, but irregular, non-breeding visitants rather than as vagrants in Ontario. The new specimens, reported herein, are housed in the collection of the Department of Ornithology of the Royal Ontario Museum. The distribution of the known records in the Province is shown on the accom- panying map (Figure 1). The dessicated carcass of a Wood Ibis (ROM 95204, saved as a skeleton) recently donated to the Museum constitutes the second preserved specimen of this species for Ontario. The bird was found by Dr. Keith Quirk on August 4, 1965, at (1) Dorcas Bay, Bruce County. The other extant specimen (ROM 76069) was taken on August 2, 1948, at (2) Apple Hill in Charlottenburgh Township, Glengarry County, by A. Strang (Snyder, 1949). Four other records of varying credibility are as follows: a bird sketched in death, but not subsequently saved, shot near (3) Simcoe, Norfolk County, in November of 1892 (Fleming, 1913); some time prior to 1912, probably in August, an individual, first wounded near Port Huron, Michigan, then seen to fly across the St. Clair River into adjacent Ontario, (4) near Sarnia, Lambton County (Barrows, 1912); one observed by Dr. W. E. Hurlburt on November 9, 1950, near (5) Hamilton, Wentworth County (Baillie, 1951); and a single individual observed between September 1 and September 12, 1954, at (6) Old Squaw Point, Cataraqui Creek, near Kingston, Frontenac County (Quilliam and Stewart, 1954). The age and sex of none of these birds is known with certainty. However, wing (461 mm.) and bill (from fronto-nasal hinge, 236 mm.) measurements of the present specimen are comparable to those of (adult) males in the Museum collection. Likewise on the basis of the nakedness of the crown and upper neck our bird is thought to be an adult. A photograph of the other extant Ontario specimen (now preserved as a skeleton) shows that it was a juvenile, as the upper parts of the neck and the crown were feathered. Thus it appears that the northward post-breeding dispersal characteristic of this species involves both juveniles and adults. MUS, COMP, ZOOL Mailing date of this number: 19th January, 1967 Rees A : LIBRARY 183 FIBA PPE NW ELINT ATID | 184 Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 80 A mounted specimen of a Fulvous Tree Duck (ROM 95559), presented to the Museum through W. H. Carrick, proves to be the first individual of this species from Ontario. The bird was shot on December 8, 1960, by L. E. Roberts at (7) the Big Point Club, south of Mitchell’s Bay, Lake St. Clair, Kent County. In addition ROM 95559 is the first known individual to be taken in eastern Canada, predating specimens taken in November of 1961 in New Brunswick (Squires, 1962) and constitutes the second record from the entire country, the first being a mounted bird in the provincial museum at Victoria, British Columbia — one of five birds shot from a flock of 11 seen near New Alberni, Vancouver Island, in September of 1905 (Macoun and Macoun, 1909). Thus a specimen (ROM 93291) secured on November 27, 1962, one of three seen at (8) Frenchman’s Bay, Ontario County, and previously reported as the first specimen from Ontario (Woodford, 1963; Baillie, 1964) is in fact the second one. Additional records from Ontario include: two birds photographed at (9) Yacht Harbour, Welland County, on August 20, 1962; and one seen regularly between April 7 and early May, 1963 at (10) Fanshawe Lake, Middlesex County (Baillie, 1964). The Lake St. Clair specimen was apparently the harbinger of the con- spicuous influx into eastern and east-central Canada and adjacent parts of the United States, first noted in New Brunswick (Squires, 1962) and subsequently in Ontario (Baillie, 1964) and neighboring Michigan (Hunt, 1963). Baird (1963), discussing the northward spread of this species had suggested that the birds found in the Great Lakes region in 1962 reached there either by flying from the Gulf coast up the Mississippi River and then along one of its tribu- taries or they may have headed inland from the east coast build-up which had been detected as early as 1955. Our specimen indicates that inland movement from one of the above sources was underway as early as 1960. A female Wheatear (ROM 95565) was obtained on September 28, 1965, by Dr. A. E. Allin at (11) Fort William, Thunder Bay District, as it foraged alone near the shore of Thunder Bay on Lake Superior. This specimen had a completely ossified skull, only a light accumulation of fat, weighed 39 grams, and measured as follows: wing (chord), 106.6 mm.; tail, 57.1 mm.; tarsus, 28.1 mm.; bill (from the anterior edge of the external nares), 9.4 mm. On the basis of comparison with available Museum material the new specimen is referable to the Greenland race, O. oenanthe leucorhoa. The above-mentioned is the fourth Wheatear collected in Ontario and the first from the Province housed in a Canadian museum. Other records from the Province include: an adult male shot along (12) the Albany River, Kenora District — probably near Martin’s Falls (Baillie, MS) — prior to 1840 by George Barnston (Seebohm, 1881) now in the British Museum (Nat. Hist.); one (sex unknown) taken at (13) Chatham, Kent County, in 1889 by J. A. Jermyn (W. E. Saunders, unpublished field notes for 1901) —the whereabouts of this specimen is at present unknown; a male shot at (14) Beaumaris, Lake Muskoka, Muskoka District, on September 25, 1894, by P. A. Taverner (in Webb, 1895) — number 135063 in the collection of the United States National Museum (personal communication, L. L. Short to A. E. Allin); one seen by Dr. D. Derry (ROM unpublished field notes) on (15) the Ontario side of Island Lake, 1966 Bartow: Woop Isis, FuLvous TREE Duck AND WHEATEAR 185 Fort Willia Wood Ibis @ specimen O sight record Futvous Tree Duck, m specimen Tak igh a sight record 10 Greenland Wheatear A spéciinen a sight record Figure 1. Records of the Wood Ibis, the Fulvous Tree Duck and the Wheatear in Ontario. Numbers refer to localities mentioned in the text. 186 Tue Canapian Frevcp-NATuRALIsT Vol. 80 West Kenora District, in the autumn of 1930; one seen at (16) Ferland, 25 miles west of Ombabika, Thunder Bay District on June 6, 1941 (personal communication, G. A. Scott to J. L. Baillie); one seen (17) 2 miles west of Ridgeway, Welland County on September 24, 1949 (Wright, 1950); one seen at (18) Hainsville, Dundas County on September 25, 1952 (Baillie, 1953); and one seen at (19) Mindemoya, Manitoulin Island, Manitoulin District on September 25, 1963 (Goodwin, 1964). With the exception of the June observation mentioned above all the records for which there are exact dates, are from early autumn and suggest that the Ontario birds are fall migrants displaced from their traditional trans-Atlantic and western European route. In fact the late September dates, most prevalent for the discovery of the Wheatear in Ontario, roughly correspond to dates of normal migration in the British Isles (Witherby, et al., 1940). ACKNOWLEDGMENTS Mr. James L. Baillie, Dr. R. L. Peterson, and Dr. G. B. Wiggins gave consultation during preparation of the manuscript. Dr. A. E. Allin supplied additional information on specimens of the Wheatear and Mr. Paul Geraghty prepared the map. REFERENCES Banu, J. L. 1951. Region reports: On- Quriiam, H. B. and R. B. Stewart. 1954. tario-western New York region. Audubon Field Notes 5:12-14. 1953. Region reports: Ontario - western New York region. Audubon Field Notes 7:13-15. . 1964. Ontario’s newest Ontario Field Biologist 18:1-13. Bairp, J. 1963. The changing seasons—a summary of fall migration. Audubon Field Notes 17:4-8. Barrows, W. B. 1912. Michigan bird life. Michigan Agricultural College, Special Bulletin. 822 pp. Fremine, J. H. 1913. Auk 30:225-228. Goopwin, C. 1964. Worth noting. Ontario Naturalist 2:25-30. Hunt, G. S. 1963. Fulvous Tree Ducks in Michigan. Wilson Bulletin 75:198. Macovun, J. and J. M. Macoun. 1909. Cata- logue of Canadian birds. Department of Mines, Geological Survey Branch, Ottawa. 761 pp. birds. Ontario bird notes. The Wood Ibis. Bluebill (mimeographed) 1:6-7. SEEBOHM, H. 1881. Catalogue of the birds in the British Museum. Vol. 5, 393 pp. Snyper, L. L. 1949. The Wood Ibis in Ontario. Auk 66:79. Sguires, W. A. 1962. Fulvous Tree Duck in New Brunswick. Canadian Field-Na- turalist 76:120. Wess, W. F. 2:16-17. Wirnersy, H. F. et al. 1940. Handbook of British birds. Witherby, London. Vol. 2, 368 pp. Wooprorp, J. 1963. Region reports: On- tario-western New York region. Audubon Field Notes 17:29-30. Wricut, A. J. 1950. Greenland Wheatear in southern Ontario. The Wood Duck (mimeographed) 3:5:1. 1895. Notes. The Museum Received for publication 5 February 1966 WHAT ARE THE BLUE BIRCHES? T. C. BraysHaw Department of Forestry of Canada, Petawawa Forest Experiment Station, Chalk River, Ontario* REVIEW OF LITERATURE Tuere has long been a divergence of opinion among botanists regarding the identity and actual status of the eastern North American trees known as the blue birch and the big blue birch (or blueleaf birch). W. H. Blanchard, writing in Betala, Volume one, Number one (May 7, 1904), described two newly discovered species of birch, which he called the blue birch (Betzwzla caerulea) and the large blue birch (B. caerulea-grandis). He described the leaves of both as having long slender petioles, as being bluish, long-pointed, thin, somewhat cuneate at base, glabrous on both sides, and usually with no tufts of tomentum. The bark is separable into sheets. B. caerulea was distinguished as being a small tree, though larger than the grey birch (B. populifolia Marsh.), with its leaves somewhat cuneate at base, and strobiles, or catkins, cylindric, and one inch by three eighths. B. caerulea- grandis was distinguished from the other species by its large size, being fully as large as the canoe or white birch (B. papyrifera Marsh.), with larger and often nearly truncate leaves, and much larger fruiting catkins. For both species, Blanchard mentioned that the fruiting bracts were very distinctive in shape, but in neither case did he describe them. In Volume one, Number two (May 13, 1904) of Betula, Blanchard wrote a second paper entitled: “A New White Birch”. In this paper the two birches were named respectively, Betwla caerulea and B. caerulea variety grandis. Both the title and the inserted word “variety” indicate that he had by then had second thoughts about the identity of the large blue birch, and was recognizing only one species. However, in one copy of this paper, in the possession of the Gray Herbarium of Harvard University, he had added a handwritten note at the end: “I believe these are two good species”, suggesting a return to his original opinion. He said he had found these species at Stratton and Windham, Vermont. Sargent at first (1905: p. 202) accepted B. caerulea, but renamed the large blue birch, variety Blanchard (of B. caerulea). In 1922 (pp. 211-212), however, he indicated that he suspected both these forms had originated as hybrids between B. papyrifera and B. populifolia. Fernald (1922) believed that B. caerulea-grandis was a good species, and B. caerulea a hybrid between it and B. populifolia. Woodworth (1929) agreed with Fernald’s interpretation, considering Sargent’s to be impossible, because in counting chromosomes in specimen trees growing in the Arnold Arboretum, he found the following haploid values: *Present address: 601, 1049 Chilco Street, Vancouver 5, British Columbia. 187 188 Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 80 B. caerulea~ 14 ‘ B. caerulea-grandis 14 B. populifolia 14 B. papyrifera 35 “meiosis almost normal’ B. papyrifera var. cordifolia 28 ‘meiosis slightly abnormal’ In more recent work on the genetics of Betula, Johnsson (1949) described a number of experimental crosses between several species, including a B. papyrifera with a diploid chromosome count of 84, but no other North American species. He counted the chromosomes in large samples of seedlings grown from seed of wild trees, and found that the commonest diploid value for B. papyrifera was 84, but he also found nearly all values between the figure and 70. He crossed the 84-chromosome B. papyrifera with two European species, B. verrucosa with 28 chromosomes, and B. pubescens with 56. Despite the differences in chromosome number, he obtained hybrid offspring from both crosses. The B. papyrifera X verrucosa hybrids showed generally normal meiosis and produced many viable seeds, while the B. papyrifera X pubescens hybrids had very abnormal meiosis and produced very few viable seeds. In this genus, difference in chromosome numbers between species is evidently not by itself a fully effective barrier to crossing. Hybrids between species with different chromosome numbers could be expected to possess intermediate chromosome numbers, and this is what Johnsson found for the first generation hybrids. The incidence of irregularities at meiosis may lead to later generations that show various numbers not necessarily representing integral genomes. That such individuals may survive is shown by the variety of chromosome numbers in the wild B. papyrifera. This species may be interpreted as one with a normal somatic complement of 84 chromosomes but which due to introgression by other species of lower chromosome number has come to include in its overall population a proportion of individuals with chromosome numbers lower than the normal number but which nevertheless are at least partially fertile. THE PropLeEM Since their original descriptions were published, blue birches of one form or another, have been found at a number of places in the New England States, and in Quebec and the Maritime Provinces. It is noteworthy that the region over which they have been found coincides with the overlap in the ranges of the white and gray birches. Blue birch trees, however, are found in groups in scattered localities in this area, often on abandoned farmland or other sites of disturbance. There is still uncertainty regarding the actual status and relationship of these birches. The blue birch and the large blue birch (or blueleaf birch, as it is also called in Canada) may be good species in their own right; they may be varieties of the white or grey birches; or they may constitute a hybrid swarm between the latter species as parents. If they are distinct species, there should be clear-cut arrays of character- istics by which their populations can be distinguished from those of the white 1966 BraysHaw: WHAT ARE THE BLUE BiRCHEs? 189 and grey birches. If they are varieties of either of the other species, a less clear-cut array of distinguishing characteristics should in each case be associated with several characteristics shared with the species to which it belongs and with intermediate expressions of some characters bridging the gap between the variety and the species to which it belongs. There should also be clear distinctions between the expressions of some characters in each variety and the expressions of the same characters in the unrelated species. If the blue birches are a hybrid swarm between the white and grey birches, their populations can be expected to show diverse sharing of some of the characteristics that distinguish the parent species, with variously intermediate expressions of other specific characters. The only characteristic mentioned in Blanchard’s descriptions by which the blue birches differ from both the white and grey birches is the blue colour of the foliage. ‘This feature is not preserved reliably in herbartum specimens, and living trees identified as blue birches that the author has seen have been little if any bluer in foliage than healthy specimens of white birch. It may be that the impression of colour gained by the eye is affected by some inherited difference in the lustre of the fresh leaf surface not preserved in dried material. In other described characteristics, the blue birches are either similar to white or grey birches, or intermediate between them. EXAMINATION OF MATERIAL To arrive at a more definite conclusion as to the true status of the blue birches, the author examined herbarium specimens at the Plant Research Institute and the National Museum in Ottawa, at the Petawawa Forest Experi- ment Station at Chalk River, Ontario, and in the Gray Herbarium of Harvard University at Cambridge, Massachusetts. Among the specimens seen at Harvard were several collected by Blanchard, including isotypes of his B. caerulea and B. caerulea-grandis. Specimens from six trees of the latter species grown at the Arnold Arboretum, Jamaica Plain, Massachusetts from seed provided by Blanchard, were also examined. In addition to the material of the blue birches, specimens of white birch and grey birch were examined, the white birch drawn from areas both within and without its area of overlap with grey birch. For the purpose of initial segregation of the specimens, the names as determined by their collectors were accepted. Living trees of these birches were sampled during a trip to the Maritime Provinces and Quebec in 1960. A number of morphological differences between the species, and the distribution of characteristics among the species, were noted. For a variety of reasons, several characters of the living trees were unusable: e.g. growth habit, attitude of leaf and catkin, and colour and surface lustre of leaf, characters not preserved in herbarium specimens and seldom noted by collectors. Bark is seldom collected, and so was not used in this work. Foliage and fruit, however, provided several characters that could be compared; and of these, eight were sufficiently commonly represented and showed sufficiently clear distinctions between species, to be used in this investigation. 190 Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 80 SYMBOL ARMS AND _ HYBRID INDEX SCORES SYMBOL HYBRID ig ARM INDEX EAR Attenuation Factor a/m. 1.0 or less O Between 1.0 & 1.7 | I.7 Or more 2 BRACT Length More than 4.5mm. O 4.0 -45 | Less than 4.0 Zz LEAF MARGIN Not sinuate C O Slightly sinuate - | Strongly sinuate — z VEINS, (beneath) Pubescent . O. Glabrous t | CATKIN Length 28mm. or more s O 2/mm. or less ? | BRACT Lateral lobes Ascending ° O Spreading ‘» - | Reflexed ‘> — 2 BRACT Terminal lobe Gbieng lanceolate ci, : O With flaring base -&, 1 | SAMARA Body surface Pubescent ° O Glabrous ‘ | \deal & populifolia: Scattergram symbol & Index score Hy l2 IDENTIFICATION of BLANCHARD’S Collections © 8. caerulea - grandis 8. coerulea Is Isotype Cl Isotype T Marked ‘TYPICAL’ CB Other Blanchard collections B Other Blanchard collections C Other collections S Grown from seed provided by Blanchard Other collections not identified for this species *Components of ATTENUATION FACTOR —a/m Apical Segment mid point of Be (distal from apical segment widest point Figure 1. Key to the symbols for character expressions in the scatter diagram, the identity of significant specimens, and the allocation of hybrid index values. Records of character expressions were made in a way that allowed them to be plotted in scatter diagrams modified after the manner of Anderson (1949). By assigning hybrid index values to the expressions, the total value for the 1966 BraysHAW: WHat ARE THE BLUE BiRcHEs? 191 o B.papyritera sae ey + RE + +44 BRACT LENGTH: Millimetres oO f Bpopulifolia SS Ss SS SS SS SS HS SS SS SS SS SS ie) 20 ATTENUATION FACTOR: a/m Figure 2. Modified scatter diagram of the populations of Betula caerulea and B. caerulea- grandis, showing their relation to those of B. papyrifera and B. populifolia (outlined). expression of a species in each specimen could be summed (ibid.). As indicated in Figure 1, the ideal pure specimen of B. papyrifera should have an index value of 0 or 1 and the ideal pure specimen of B. populifolia should score 12. Deviations of up to two or three points from these ideals can be expected as an expression of the natural range of individual variation within either species. In the scatter diagram, a pure B. papyrifera specimen should be represented as an unappendaged spot in the upper left hand portion of the diagram, while 192 Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 80 a pure B. populifolia specimen should appear as a star-like figure in the lower right hand corner. The areas occupied by these species are outlined in the scatter diagram (Figure 2). RESULTS AND CONCLUSIONS Examination of the symbols and their distribution on the scatter diagram reveals four interesting points: (a) The area of the diagram occupied by the blue birch population completely bridges the gap between the white and grey birches. (b) The range of leaf attenuation in the blue birches is relatively narrow, and for the majority of specimens lies between the ranges for the white and erey birches. This observation suggests that the specimens had been identified as blue birches by their collectors mainly on the basis of leaf shape. (c) The range in bract length in the blue birches is relatively wide, over- lapping considerably those of the other two species. ‘This suggests that less attention has been paid to this character, no doubt in part at least as a result of the lack of description of the bracts in Blanchard’s original publications. (d) The distribution of other character expressions is extremely diverse, even among the specimens collected by Blanchard, a fact that adds weight to the suspicion stated in (b) above. It can be seen in Figure 2 that various specimens of B. caerulea-grandis share various characteristics with either white or grey birch, or show inter- mediate expressions, with little apparent consistency, even when observation is confined to Blanchard’s collections. It is possible to find several pairs of specimens that, apart from their positions in the diagram, possess none of the distinguishing characteristics of any other species in common. Only a few usable specimens specifically identified by their collectors as B. caerulea were seen. Compared with those marked B. caerulea-grandis, they appear, on the average, to be a little more consistent with the description, and to resemble grey birch more, as shown by their index values (Table 1). Even so, there is enough diversity among them to suggest that if B. caerulea is regarded as a good species, it must have suffered much introgression from the others. The hybrid index summarizes the score of the character expressions for each specimen (Table 1). A comparison between the distributions of index values of the two white birch populations reveals a significant fact. The spread of the scores in the population of those specimens from beyond the range of grey birch is narrow and concentrated at the lowest values, 27 of the 36 specimens examined having a score of 0 or 1, the mean being 0.9. On the other hand, the range for white birch specimens from within the range of grey birch is much wider, extending to 7, more than half way along the scale toward the grey birch end, with a mean of 2.5. Scatter diagrams of these populations (not presented here) show that they have practically the same range of leaf attenuation values, but specimens from within the range of grey birch tend on the average to have rather shorter bracts. Diverse occurrences of other grey birch characteristics account for the frequently higher index values and the higher mean in the latter group. ‘This observation again suggests the strong 1966 BraysHaw: WHat ARE THE BLUE BiRCHES? 193 TaBLeE 1. — Distributions of hybrid index values in the populations examined Populations Hybrid Index Values ON el 2a Se aS Onl ipo or pelOs healeliniel2 oa ean Betula papyrifera beyond range of B. populifolia| 14} 13} 4 | 3 | 2 0.9 within range of B. populifolia| 2| 9|}9|)4/1)1/)/11}1 259 B. caerulea-grandis Isotype 1 6.0 marked ‘Typical’ by Blanchard 1 1 7.0 other collections by Blanchard Hol 1 6.3 grown from Blanchard’s seeds | 1 al bei 4.8 other collections BW DNS AN AE Os tel al 6.0 Total (B. caerulea-grandis) 1 Pew Sy ASS 2 5.9 B. caerulea Isotype 1 9.0 other Blanchard collections IL ede 9.0 other collections 1 1 1 6.0 Total (B. caerulea) 1 1 ey Sy il 7.7 B. populifolia Loy ee pale ea ye iil, a influence of leaf shape on the identification of a specimen by its collector. The difference in range of index values between these two populations, and the diversification of characteristics of those associated with the grey birch indicate that introgression of white birch by grey or blue birches has occurred. These birches are apparently interfertile, despite differences in chromosome number. Of the three possible explanations of the status of the blue birches mentioned above, the only one that fits the observed distribution of charac- teristics is the third: that the blue birches constitute a hybrid swarm between the white and grey birches. A natural hybrid between the white and grey birches could be expected to show characteristics that would lead to its being called a blue birch or a large blue birch if its hybrid origin were not suspected. If the hybrid enjoyed even a moderate degree of fertility, and crossing among hybrids or backcrossing to the parent stocks continued through further generations, the result would be a population with diverse combinations of parental characteristics, and intermediate forms of expression of those characters determined by multiple genes, as leaf shape appears to be. This situation is just what has been found in this appraisal of the blue birches. It appears that the blue birches, in their diverse forms, are morphologically indistinguishable from a hybrid swarm between white and grey birches. Sargent’s (1922) suspicion thus seems to have been justified. Actual breeding experiments and more cytological work, however are still needed to test this interpretation more stringently. Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 80 194 The very spotty distribution of the blue birches suggests that they have originated separately at a number of places. This may occur where dis- turbance creates new habitats differing from those to which the parent species are naturally adapted, and in which hybrid seedlings may become established free from competition by established parent populations. Such habitats favourable for seedling establishment are found in pastures, cleared roadsides, clearings persisting on abandoned farms, and other sites of human activity. The disjointed distribution of the blue birches, and their recent discovery in a region with a long history of botanical exploration suggests that this swarm has arisen in response to human disturbance of the natural habitats of the parent species, and that it may be of quite recent origin historically. According to the rules of botanical nomenclature, all hybrids of like parentage should be designated by the same name. In this instance, of the two names given by Blanchard, the choice falls on B. caerulea, since it was the first mentioned by him, and was applied by him to the entity of which he evidently had the more, consistent opinion regarding its distinctness from other birches. Members of this hybrid swarm are thus designated as Betula X caerulea Blanchard (pro sp.). SUMMARY Herbarium specimens of the blue birch (Betzla caerulea Blanchard) and the big blue birch (B. caerulea-grandis Blanchard), including material collected by Blanchard, are examined. This material is compared with specimens of grey birch (B. populifolia Marsh.) and two populations of white birch (B. papyrifera Marsh.). From the diverse ways in which the distinctive charac- ter-expressions of the white and grey birches are distributed among the specimens of the blue birches, it is concluded that the latter constitute a hybrid swarm between the white and grey birches, as was originally suspected by Sargent. REFERENCES ANDERSON, E. 1949. Introgressive hybrid- ization. Missouri Botanical Garden. J. Wiley & Sons Inc., New York. BiancHarp, W. H. 1904a. New white birches. Betula 1(1). 1904b. A new white birch. Betula NPs Fernatp, M. L. 1922. Notes on the flora of Nova Scotia. Rhodora 24:165-180. Jounsson, Hetce 1949. Studies on birch species hybrids: 1, Betula verrucosa X B. japonica, B. verrucosa < B. papyrifera, and B. pubescens < B. papyrifera. Hereditas XXXV:115-135. SarGENT, C.S. 1905. Manual of the trees of North America. Ed. 1, Houghton Mifflin Co., Boston. 1922. Manual of the trees of North America. Ed. 2, reprinted 1961. Dover Publications Inc., New York. Woopwortn, R. H. 1929. Cytological stu- dies in Betulaceae: I, Betula. Botanical Gazette 87:331-363. Received for publication 16 March 1966 A WET PRAIRIE COMMUNITY AT WINDSOR, ONTARIO’ C. M. Rocers Department of Biology, Wayne State University, Detroit, Michigan On the southern outskirts of Windsor, Essex County, Ontario, there has developed a plant community which most closely resembles Curtis’ description (J. IT. Curtis, 1959) of a wet prairie or wet-mesic prairie. It is, however, surrounded by deciduous forest, and some of the area itself would be better described as open woodland, savanna or oak opening (Figure 1). “Though most of the species found there grow in other parts of southern Canada, the total assemblage of plants is sufficiently distinctive to warrant a brief note OE its existence. [he fact that the expanding city will surely shortly obliterate it also makes it seem worthwhile to describe this community now. The location and extent of the community is shown on the accompanying map (Figure 2). It occupies about two square miles, its boundary coincides fairly closely with that of the Granby Sand soil type. The exact history of the area is not known, but it is probable that at various times forest trees were more prevalent than now. The retreat of the glacier and the post-glacial xerothermic period doubtless provided the oppor- tunity for plants with predominantly more southerly ranges to immigrate to this general area. Though the present climate favors the development of a deciduous forest, it is likely that disturbance through the years has favored the invasion and persistence of herbaceous species characteristic of the prairie community. Certainly, the early burning of the vegetation by the Indians and the clearing and more or less regular burning by white settlers have contributed to the establishment of many of the perennial herbs of the wet rairie. Curtis points out that in Wisconsin such prairies as these are fire- controlled, and it is apparent here that if the land were left undisturbed, it would in time return to a forest community. Some land is currently under cultivation; other parts have not been tilled within the memory of the present inhabitants. Cultivation by white man’was probably never sufficiently intense to destroy this herbaceous vegetation : ‘but no’ doubt helped ° prevent the full development of the forest. ii The high water table and slow run-off, prodbeing very wet conditions in the spring, contribute to the selection against certain kinds of trees and favors the more shallowly rooted herbs. Partial draining of the area during the last 35 to 40 years has no doubt changed the densities of many of the species and aided in the invasion of shrubs which are becoming established. Though the area is generally level, it has been found that slight variations in topography have considerable effect upon the local distribution of plants. 1Contribution No. 157 from the Department of Biology, Wayne State University, Detroit, Michigan. 195 196 Tue CANADIAN FIELp-NATURALIST Vol. 80 Figure 1. A portion of the wet prairie area showing Spartina pectinata with scattered individuals of Quercus. Certainly the type of soil must be significant in the development of this kind of plant community, since the other factors described above appear to apply equally well to all of the adjoining lands. In summary, therefore, it appears that post-glacial xerothermic conditions, high water table and soil type, combined with man’s activities, particularly intermittent burning and tilling, have provided a combination of factors which have allowed the establishment of a comparatively large number of species which have ranges extending southward and westward, and which in their aggregate, may be considered a type of wet prairie. _ Because of the effect of slight elevation differences and the erratic patterns of burning, farming, and partial draining, there are no species which can be described as dominants over the whole area. In parts, trees, principally Quercus velutina and Q. borealis, provide an upper story, while, in the more open areas, Q. palustris and colonies of Cornus racemosa and Corylus americana are conspicuous. In addition there are found occasional individuals of Acer 1966 Rocers: Wer Prairie AT WINDSOR 197 1 mile Tl GRANBY SAND De Figure 2. Location and extent of the Grandby Sand soil type which corresponds approxi- mately with those of the prairie community. ROAD rubrum, Ulmus americana, Prunus serotina, Quercus bicolor, and Fraxinus americana which are characteristic of the more or less undisturbed forest. Weedy species such as Crataegus spp; Populus spp. and Rhus spp. also contribute to the woody vegetation. Over much of the moist portion the grasses 198 Tue CANADIAN FieLp-NaATURALIST Vol. 80 Calamagrostis canadensis and Spartina pectinata are common species. Andro- pogon gerardi, Panicum virgatum, and Sorghastrum nutans, prevalent grasses in the tall-grass prairie, may all be found here, though none are common. In quadrat studies the following herbs were found to be best represented: Baptisia tinctoria, Solidago canadensis, S. graminifolia, Aster ericoides, A. azureus, A. laevis, Desmodium canadense, Pycnanthemum virginianum, Fragaria vir- giniana, Liatris spicata, Rubus villosus, Panicum spp., Amphicarpa bracteata, Carex spp., Pteridium aquilinum, Viola sagittata, and Achillea millefolium. Nearly 300 species of vascular plants have been collected from the area. A number of them are cosmopolitan weeds, in excessively disturbed places; others are clearly dependent upon the woody upper story and are not of particular significance insofar as the prairie community is concerned. Because of their relative abundance or their apparent affinity for this type of plant community, the following species may be considered representative. Species prevalent or reaching their greatest abundance in wet prairies or wet- mesic prairies fide Curtis are indicated by an asterisk. Specimens of each species are in the herbarium of Wayne State University. Equisetum arvense* Dryopteris thelypteris* Pteridium aquilinum Puccinellia distans Calamagrostis canadensis* Sporobolus cryptandrus Spartina pectinata* Hierochloe odorata* Panicum spp. Panicum virgatum Andropogon gerardi* Andropogon scoparius* Sorghastrum nutans* Carex spp. Scleria triglomerata* Tradescantia ohiensis* Juncus torreyi Lilium michiganense Aletris farinosa Hypoxis hirsuta* Salix bhumilis* Comandra richardsiana* Polygonum tenue Atriplex patula Thalictrum dasycarpum* Anemone cylindrica A. canadensis* Spiraea alba* S. tomentosa Rubus villosa Pyrus coronaria Fragaria virginiana* Baptisia tinctoria Desmodium canadense* Lespedeza capitata* Apios americana Strophostyles helveola Amphicarpa bracteata Lathyrus palustris* Linum medium Polygala sanguinea P. verticillata Euphorbia dentata E. corollata* E. vermiculata Hypericum gentianoides H. majus Helianthemum canadense H. bicknellu Lechea villosa Viola sagittata Lythrum alatum* Gaura biennis Taenidia integerrima Oxy polis rigidior* Lysimachia quadriflora L. thyrsiflora Gentiana crinita* G. andrewsii* Apocynum androsaemifolium A. cannabinum* Asclepias tuberosa A. syriaca* A. sullivantii A. viridiflora Phlox pilosa* Lithospermum canescens* Verbena simplex V. stricta Lycopus virginicus 1966 Rocers: Wer Prairie aT WINDSOR 199 Pycnanthemum virginianum* Teucrium occidentale Stachys palustris Monarda fistulosa* Solanum carolinense Mimulus ringens Veronicastrum virginicum* Penstemon hirsutus Gerardia purpurea G. tenuifolia G. flava Pedicularis lanceolata* Galium tinctorium* Lobelia spicata* Liatris spicata Eupatorium maculatum* Solidago canadensis S. graminifolia* Curtis, J. T. S. rigida* S. riddelli S. bicolor Aster ericoides* . azureus* . laevis* . subulatus . novae-angliae* . umbellatus Erigeron strigosus* Achillea millefolium* Silphium terebinthinaceum* Ratibida pinnata* Rudbeckia hirta* Coreopsis tripteris Helenium autumnale* Krigia biflora Prenanthes racemosa* mA AA A REFERENCE 1959. The vegetation of Wis- consin. University of Wisconsin Press. 657 pp. Received for publication 22 March 1966 BENTHOS OF FOUR LAKE SUPERIOR BAYS M. L. H. THomMas Fisheries Research Board of Canada, Biological Sub-Station, Ellerslie, P.E.L. INTRODUCTION Exptorations for larval lamprey in four bays in Canadian Lake Superior during 1959 to 1961 produced large collections of benthos and bottom living fishes. Benthic fauna of this area is little known and therefore every effort was made to identify that which was collected. ‘This information is presented below. The location of the four bays sampled is shown in Figure 1. METHODS AND EQuIPMENT Sampling along shores in water to 1 m deep was carried out using an A.C, electro-fishing technique similar to that described by Tibbles (1959). This method caused larval lamprey to leave their burrows, to die and to be collected with other fish in the water. Other fauna was collected with a net. The method was efficient for the collection of fish and epi-fauna;, although infaunal animals were missed. Deep water collecting was mostly done with a modified anchor dredge (Thomas, 1960). This is an efficient qualitative sampler of fossorial and surface-living benthos and also takes many active animals such as fish and crayfish. But it does not retain fauna smaller than 3 mm. Some sampling at 2 to 10 m depth was carried out using rotenone poison in 0.9 m square, 20 cm deep metal trays set opening-down on the bottom. Poison was applied through a port and left for 24 hours. The fauna killed was collected by S.C.U.B.A. equipped divers. SurvVEY LOCATIONS The four bays explored are widely separated as shown in Figure 1 and present diverse habitats. The most easterly locations, Goulais Bay and Batchawana Bay, are generally similar. Batchawana Bay was the site of the most intensive collecting. The two bays are relatively shallow bodies of water, much of their area lying in less than 6 m of water, with extensive sand flats off river mouths averaging about 3 m. The deepest sounding in Batchawana Bay is 40 m. Bottom deposits in deep water are mainly mud. Prevailing south-west winds accumu- late warm surface water in the bays and normal summer water temperatures range from 18°-22°C. Both bays are productive and support some commercial and extensive sport fisheries. Mountain Bay is part of Nipigon Bay, a large shallow bay forming the northernmost part of Lake Superior. Most of Mountain Bay lies in about 18 m of water with bottoms of mixed clay, mud and fine sand but there are extensive sand flats off river mouths. The bay is warm in summer attaining temperatures similar to Batchawana Bay. 200 1966 Tuomas: Bentuos oF Lake SupPERIOR Bays 201 |- BATCHAWANA BAY 2-GOULAIS BAY 3- MOUNTAIN BAY 4- PIGEON BAY Ficure 1. Lake Superior showing the location of the four bays in which collections were made. Pigeon Bay at the Canadian-United States border at the west end of Lake Superior is cold, deep and narrow. Much of the bay is over 30 m deep but sampling was mainly confined to shallower parts. Water temperatures are low, only the upper few meters ever rising above 10°C. Bottom deposits are mainly soft brown mud but granite outcroppings occur. THe FAuNA COLLECTED Most of the fauna collected was identified. Table 1 lists all species or groups determined and shows the number of stations in each general locality at which they were taken. Where the total number of specimens of each species for each locality was recorded this is also presented. As sampling was not quantitative numbers indicate only relative abundance. Complete details of sampling stations and specimens collected are reported elsewhere (Thomas, 1965). Table 1 is self-explanatory; the following notes are limited to ecological information and special situations. ANNELIDA : HIRUDINEA Among the annelids only the Hirudinea have been identified; oligochaetes were frequent in many of the collections. Distribution of some leeches was correlated with depth. All species were most common in relatively shallow water, none being taken at deeper than 30 m. Erpobdella punctata was taken only in shore collections in the eastern bays. Haemopis grandis was not found in over 9 m, and most frequently taken Tue CANapDIAN FIELD-NATURALIST CO) aa: (G)) 4? (i) 1 (19T) 9T (90T) LT (snoJouN yy ) 02 (snorsuin jy ) CV (LT) L (sno1owny ) 7 CE) 1 (Su) é (PST) LZ CG) aS (1) ail (FOF) 6F (UO). G (GS) II (1) ¥ Ch) % (eae (Sl) 1 (9) ¢ (89) 9T (€Z) TT (861) 92 (¢) T (€Z) 6 GD) (LT) 6 (Oo) G (i) i (SI) ¥ (QE (Dy S (SQ) (6) 9 (a) (De. ot (GS) 8 (07) 9 (G)- G (FL) 61 (aD) 2 (4S) 2, "1S SZ ‘B1S OF "e1S 1 "BIS ETT "B1S 86 "B1S OZ I1IOYS-JO dIOYS-YO SoTOYS dIOYS-]JO sa10YS é SdIOYS Aeg uoasig Arg Aeg Aeqg Aeg Aeg uTeJUNO TAL ureqUNofy PURPMEYO EG PURBMPEYIIE STe[Nnor) ‘ds uoj2aiGoryg1us ‘ds pasyang ‘ds piuaspxayyT YSNouUuN( II Vpis24 Diuaspxay JDAeM 0101NII0 DiuadpxayT JOYE M SUDINWMIS Diamayd a e103 do1smaydq (‘Aqeyy) 1u0}40q SnaApquiDgD (pres) snnburdosd saj2au0r4¢) (uoSe}{) $272110 $3J99U0IIGC) epodesaq YWUIS $2729D438 XKUOSUDAD Pleysnog snapumiopnasd snavmMuUDy AG SNYDIISD{ SNADMMDD aInssnes DIa}ZzD DIJa]DK woispury sip piasodojuog epodiyduy ‘ds snao4vT ‘ds snqyjas py epodos] (UdAOT) 0992J94 SISK BaepIsA JA] (IIA) Mouqime Djomasyg y(21OOJ]) DALDG DULG, x( IIA) Danasqgo sisdojaydany x([[E149A) Stpunss sidomanyy x([[EI9 A) DIDULO DIJapqorDIg x(9IOOJ) DéafyUoM DIJApqQoID] T «(T) SYDUusDIS D7119P90]2 x(T) DIDUDIG MoI DIMOY 185015 (Apteq) nypj2und ppyjapqod 4q eoUIpNITY dno 10 satveds *(syax9e1q ) suowitoeds jo JoquInuU [e}0O} YIM Pate YORI UT P2P}99][OI SPM setoeds yoeod YOIyM }e SUOT} EIS JO TOGUINKY sXeg Joilodng oye] INO}j UI paza]]JOo sooeds o1yJUaG—'] ATAV], 203 BENTHOs oF LAKE SuPERIOR Bays . THOMAS 1966 ai10ys-jO Aeg uoasig (9¢) OF ([B4aAoS)Z d10Ys-]O Aeg ureyUNO|y Sd10US Aeg ureyUNo (snoJowNN ) 6 ([et9A9S) Z Ci) (ZI) 6 a(99 €) ¢ ({BIaASS) T ([B419AVG) Z @) | ([e49A3S) ([et9AaS) ¢ (sno1swWNn\N ) FT (snotswinN ) TF (O21) ({e49AaG) | (Tex2Aag) ¢ ORG ([B419A9G) Z (Te49A2G) Z (9) ¢ i I (a)aat (Gy 1! (7) F (Oi (%) F (ii) 2 (0%) FT [e4aA3G "B1S ETT BIS 86 a10Y4s-YO SaIOYyS Aeg Aeg PUBMEYI} EG PUBMEYI} EG sa10yS Aeqg sreynoxy panuyuoy —"| aATavV] [PENG TAK JOOS ‘ds nwmojsopidaT oepiAwoyoAsg ‘ds snpryqgaumrT ‘ds ayoksqounk J seplyrydouunT ‘ds saposduyj py ‘ds s2439a(Q) (Joye M ) Saqp1yaind as saprapjsk ‘ds sapojay ‘ds p1j2901G aT deprlies0} da] ‘ds puunpoyy ‘ds ayaksqoouapzy ‘ds niudkis py aeprouesAiyg eio}doyoriy, PEM MOJO (Aes) vjpunl nuyrsanispg é UNAaBIYIDKI DUSDIDUA SA]38G a]/Dad0q DUS DIJDUT ‘ds sntuaspy SAAS SnjK4sin94g SniUuasD ET SA][3G DSdaasudd, SGomk pig prexpeg sisuauipu ‘yo snyduoso1yda SIO y (c) susdadsp snyqduoso1yg¢C SA]9S snpia1 snydumoy ussep] SiypIYs snyqdwmoy SAIS SYDINIDU JajsDBajnps0y7 YS[eM Sisuarouryye piMosrD e}eUOpO ‘ds piunauoi py e19}d099]q dno jo sarads Vol. 80 Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST ,UISSaT) wnpyru wniaDydy WNIDUIUNID “{ MNUYDIYS UnisaDYyds UNIDUIsADULa “{ WNUYDLYS WnLaDYyds (S°ZOT) OF (J) wnuyoiys mnisanydg ,OUILIG WNnaUrsnddaf UNLpISL UR YA, WNIDIUNAQNS WNLpISLT UISSI[D SNJUaAU0D MNLpISLT ARG MWNIQNp wnIpLst Ty ,suAual mnpIU mnIpIsig ROUT SUDEP Sich DUI Wnssaiqulon WnIpIs.T aSUaUDIpUL *f aSUaOYDpL WNIpIsSLT 410d OY ASUsOYDpPL WNIpIStg x( Od) Wnunjiaspa UNIpIsLg wnqojsi4a “f Wsogalyy mnrpisyg UISSa]D I40galyy wnipist aepiiiaeyds-epodAsajag ,(UOSUIVMS) Snsosnd snqrydo“s (Souleg) Dsort4juan DIDRO sYIsSqUDT (soureg) vapronbyis nypippa syisduvT (49purlos) snypunjdmos ond ipaq x(89T) SNUDLIDSSNAaf SapLloJuopoUu py A¥G SIpudds DJUOpOUPp aepruoru )-epodAsajog ,IIUIIA] SUaISaa1] Ssispgoruoy AIQS|Iq DI24JSN] DIONUM ~ (ABS) Dsomy DjooIUM JoIIng 181Ma] DIDAD A (APS) DIDULADILAY DIDAID A (ARS) Déa2UIs DIDAID A (Aes) wnsizap puLojaqup7 ‘ds pskyg (Aes) mnqojnundups pmosyaH (ayxUe]\) Sfaaun DuosyayT (pynosyy) sngnsary snpndakyH (Aes) snyoazfap snjndikH (Aes) snaiod sninpiky5 (APS) DSSNAQO DIADSSO (AtS) DIDUIBADUMA DIOIIUSDIS ACS SUUD[NaNE SYDUSDIS DADUMLT 5epodorsery (Sot) #1 (SOT) § (#2) €T (STP) £1 (9) 9 (2) 1! a(S’S¢) €T (Ss) F mM MN DN NANA HN “FAS SZ “EIS OF SEL WARS) 2] "BIS 86 NARS) ONG a10Ys-YO a1OYS-]O SaIOYs a1oys-JO solOYS SsoaIOYS dnoiyy jo sarsadg Avg uoasig Aeg Aeg Aeg Aeg Aeg uleJ UNO] ule\UNOL BURPMPEYI] eg eueMeYyoeg sTejnory panuyuod — "| ATaY ], 205 BeNTHOs oF LAKE Superior Bays THOMAS 1966 “AS SC a10Ys-HO Aeg uoostg ‘1OLIadng aye] 10j sp10de1 jeoryde13008 Mou sojotiap sowreu sytoeds saqjy , ‘SOATPA []AYS 9[SUIS 0} Jojo Siaquinu [euONoesy septiiseyds uy —*q “U01}e}S YICI OJ papsooa1 JOU 919M Sspodo1jse3 Jo siaquinNY — ‘Dd ‘aseo yednd Ajyduia sojouap ,.'9'9,, e1aq¥doyoy, Ul] — ‘gq ‘UON BOYHUSp! ay} SuIpseso1 yqnop a}eoIpul satoeds SuIMOT[OJ SYJeU UOT]SONG — “Vy :SALON (EG (€) 1 "FS OF 310YS-JO Aeg uIeVUNO| (FT) 9 (9) #F (@- 1 (Z) (81) (7) N mo (ce) F Gi) ear FAS L sa10ys Aeg uIe}UNO| — — — ~n tO (61) Z “—— \o < cOsHN TENS) E15 310Ys-JO Aeg eueMeYyoIeEg (#SZ) 19 (768) €S (917) 6F "BIS 86 saJoys Aeg euemeyoieg "BS 92 sal0ys Aeq stejnoyy papnjauo) — ‘| aATaV], (plese) ) Zepsrng snqjog (uospseyory ) snzpusoo snqyoD (pres) ajixa Dmojsoayr (anbsouyey) wnisiu Dimojsoayiy (anbsouyey ) sapoidns purs1agq (TJEYSUIAL) Suaosaany po4aq (anbsauyery) szaqsadns saquydojqup (apadace']) tnatmozop snaaidosnryy (‘q) snyisund sniyisung (PURITY) suDjsuodUur DYDINT (aAnange’]) susojnqau sninjpjDIT (J) 070] D10T (anbsouyery) snyojou sajpydamig ‘ds sudoajony (preity) snsovyap srgo.so ny (uoJUT[D) Ssn1uospny sidoony (TIFYSVIAL) Sugnusoa srdo.wony (souuetous]e A ) anj2DADIDI SKYIYIIULY (apedase]) 1u0s4ammosd snuL0js0jDD (UOS|IM ) SHSUaLDYOpNasd DSO] PV (puepiry) m2) diquey (TIEYOUIAL) XDpsoum snsauscE ‘ds uozkmokyzyaT (anengeT) tayjomn, DjadumvT "] SnULADU UOZKMO14aT ELC dno jo satsedg 206 Tue CANADIAN FieLD-NATURALIST Vol. 80 in less than 6 m. Glossiphonia complanata, the most common species, was most frequent between 6 and 9 m as were Helobdella stagnalis and Nephelopsis obscura. G. complanata and Dina parva were the only two species collected in over 15 m of water. Little has been published on the leech fauna of Lake Superior. Smith and Verrill (1871), whose records are also given by Meyer and Moore (1954), recorded three species of leeches for Lake Superior; only one of these, Erpobdella punctata was also present in these collections. It would appear that the other eight species taken are new records for the area. All but Dina parva were recorded by Ryerson (1915) for Georgian Bay, Lake Huron. D. parva has not been recorded previously from any of the Great Lakes. CRUSTACEA : MYSIDACEA Mysis relicta a species recorded from many deep Canadian lakes (Pennak, 1953) was collected at two stations in Pigeon Bay. CRUSTACEA : ISOPODA Isopoda were identified only to genera and were common only in Batchawana Bay; none were taken from greater than 30 m and they were most frequently collected between 6 and 15 m. Asellus sp. showed a tendency toward a somewhat deeper distribution than Lirceus sp.. CRUSTACEA : AMPHIPODA The amphipod Pontoporeia affinis was the most frequently collected. The species is common in large deep lakes and rivers in Canada and the northern United States (Pennak, 1953; Bousfield, 1958). Since it is small, many speci- mens were probably lost and its abundance underestimated. ‘The requirement of this species for cold water is reflected in its general and depth distribution. P. affinis was most abundant below 9 m in cold Pigeon Bay where it was present in 64 per cent of the hauls. In the warmer Mountain and Batchawana bays it was most frequent below 15 m but the species was less abundant, being present in 27 and 23 per cent of hauls respectively. Gammarus pseudolimnaeus showed a similar geographical distribution to P. affimis but was much less numerous. The other three species were taken only in Batchawana Bay, Gammarus fasciatus and Crangonyx gracilis down to only 6 m and Ayallella azteca down to 15 m. The absence of Gammarus limnaeus from the collections is curious since Lake Superior is the type locality for this species. CRUSTACEA : DECAPODA The crayfish which were taken only in Batchawana and Goulais bays attracted the special attention of the author. Although most collections were qualitative, those made on Batchawana Bay shores in 1960 were quantitative, enabling definite conclusions on abundance and ecology of the two most common species, Orconectes virilis and O. propinquus. The third species collected, Cambarus bartoni was collected at only one station in Goulais Bay. 1966 Tuomas: BENTHOsS oF LAKE SUPERIOR Bays 207 TABLE 2.—Sex distribution of crayfish catches from Batchawana Bay 1960 Orconectes virilts Orconectes propinquus Month $e Jl wll QB Q oan | oO °B Q May 16 = oa 1 2 —_ — — June 99 68 25 38 27 27 2 9 July 11 12 = 19 2 5 — — August 30 3 = 14 5 ~ 16 = 3 September — a = 2 18 10 - 13 Totals 156 83 29 74 54 58 2 25 239 103 112 27 342 139 Symbols used: oI _ — first form male o'IIl — second form male @B — female carrying eggs Q —female without eggs Sex ratios and the proportions of first and second form males were recorded; this data is presented in Table 2. Males of both species greatly outnumbered females, the ratios being 2.2:1 for O. wirilis and 4.5:1 for O. propinquus. It was notable however, that in the few collections from deep water females outnumbered males. Table 2 shows the seasonal variation of male forms and breeding females. The observed preponderance of male crayfish is unusual, but this probably reflects different habits of the sexes rather than real numerical differences. Scanty evidence from deeper water suggest that females outnumber males there. Creaser (1933) discussing O. propinquus found females more numerous than males and Crocker (1957) who studied the species in New York found 55 per cent males in a population. Both those authors also found a seasonal variation, males being most numerous in May. There is little data in the literature on sex ratios of O. virilis but data given by Crocker (1957) suggest a fairly even balance in his collections. Changes in the proportions of first and second form males found in Batchawana Bay are similar to those detailed by Crocker for New York except that changes in Lake Superior occurred a little later in the year. The distribution of the two species with regard to habitat was markedly different. O. virilis was commonest on sheltered shores where Scirpus sp. occurred. On wave-washed sandy shores with no cover, O. virilis was more numerous than O. propinquus, but neither was common. On exposed rock, boulder and gravel shores O. propinquus was the most abundant species and was also more common in local rivers even where these were slow and muddy. Descriptions of typical habitats for O. virilis vary, (Pennak, 1953; Crocker, 1957; Creaser, 1931; Meredith and Schwartz, 1960) but its preferred habitat in Batchawana Bay is not unusual. The species was collected down to 10 m but has been collected down to 31.5 m in Lake Michigan (Meredith and 208 Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 80 Schwartz, 1960). One population at between 6 and 9 m was observed living in short burrows on a clay-mud bottom. O. propinquus is normally found on stony bottoms and not on silt (Pennak, 1954; Crocker, 1957). Most specimens collected in Batchawana Bay occupied typical habitats but specimens were also collected on sand and mud. INSECTA : EPHEMEROPTERA Mayfly nymphs were extremely abundant at many off-shore stations in Batchawana and Mountain Bays. Two genera Ephemera and Hexagenia were collected off-shore. Ephemera was typical of water less than 6 m deep, whereas Hexagenia was most frequent at stations between 9 and 15 m. In cool deep water H. occulata was commoner than H. rigida, but neither species was found at below 15 m in Mountain Bay. Only one specimen, a Hexagenia sp. was collected in Pigeon Bay. INSECTA : ODONATA All dragonfly nymphs taken were in less than 10 m of water, only Macromia illinoiensis and Ophiogomphus cf. mainensis were collected from below 6 m. INSECTA : TRICHOPTERA Only Molanna sp. and members of the Leptoceridae were numerous enough to permit conclusions about their depth distribution. Molanna sp. were most frequent at shallow stations but occurred to 15 m in Batchawana Bay and 30 m in Mountain Bay. Leptoceridae were also restricted to reasonably shallow water but were most abundant between 6 and 9 m. INSECTA : DIPTERA Members of the dipteran sub-family Tedipedinae were abundant at muddy off-shore stations. Collections have not been identified. MOLLUSCA : GASTROPODA Gastropods were collected from all the areas sampled, however, as shown in Table 1, the number of species decreased towards the west. No gastropods were taken below 30 m and few were taken deeper than 15 m. Only one species, Valvata sincera, was collected in cold Pigeon Bay. It was notable that pulmonate mollusca Sich are considered to normally breathe atmospheric air were not confined to very shallow water. Sixteen species of gastropods were collected, and the specific names used for them are those given by La Rocque (1953). In Batchawana and Mountain Bays gastropods formed a major part of the benthic biomass. Many species were abundant enough for conclusions about depth distribu- tion to be made. Stagnicola emarginata and Goniobasis livescens were most abundant in less than 6 m. A second group comprising Gyraulus deflectus, Helisoma campanulatum, Physa sp., Campeloma decisum and Valvata lewist 1966 Tuomas: BentHOos oF LAKE SupERIOR Bays 209 was also common in shallow water but was frequent to 9 m. A third group extended from shallow locations down to 15 m, this comprised Limmnaea stagnalis, Gyraulus parvus, Helisoma anceps, Valvata tricarinata and Amnicola limosa. Fossaria obrussa, Valvata sincera and Amnicola lustrica were most frequently collected from 9 to 15 m, with the latter species showing a greater tendency toward deep water habitat. All the species collected with the exception of Goniobasis livescens had previously been recorded for Lake Superior (Goodrich, 1939, 1945; La Rocque, 1953). G. livescens appears to be a new record for the lake although Goodrich (1945) recorded it from a tributary river. Dr. A. H. Clarke who identified many of the specimens noted the fact that some of the specimens of Valvata sincera from Mountain and Pigeon Bays exhibited loosely coiled shells similar to specimens from the Hudson Bay drainage (Clarke, 1964, pers. comm.). MOLLUSCA : PELECYPODA : UNIONIDAE As shown in Table 1, six species of unionids were collected but only one of these, Anodontoides ferrussacianus, was collected in Mountain Bay and none was taken from Pigeon Bay. Elliptio complanatus was commonly found along shores of Batchawana and Goulais Bays, its frequency of occurrence decreasing with increasing depth. It was not taken below 11 m. Anodonta grandis and Lampsilis radiata siliquoidea were also common on shores but extended into somewhat deeper water, being frequent between 6 and 9 m and present down to 15 m. Other species collected were not common enough to permit con- clusions regarding distribution with depth. All the species collected with the exception of A. ferussacianus and Strophitus rugosus have previously been recorded from Lake Superior (Goodrich and van der Schalie, 1932 and 1939; La Rocque, 1953, Clarke and Berg, 1959). A. ferussacianus appears to be a new record but is not unexpected since it had previously been collected in Lakes Huron and Michigan. S. rugosus is normally an inhabitant of creeks and small streams, from which it has been collected in this general area (Goodrich and van der Schalie, 1939). Clarke and Berg (1959) gave its distribution in the Great Lakes system as “Lake Huron eastwards”. It would therefore appear to be a new record for Lake Superior. MOLLUSCA : PELECYPODA : SPHAERIIDAE Sphaeriids were encountered in all four bays and at all depths. They were abundant in many samples and in Pigeon Bay formed a majority of the benthic biomass at several stations. Seventeen species and forms were identified from the collections as shown in Table I. Of the thirteen species of Sphaeriidae collected, only five were previously recorded for Lake Superior (Heard, 1962b). The following eight species appear to be new records: Pisidium casertanum, P. idahoense, P. variabile, P. nitidum, P. subtruncatum, P. ferrugineum, Sphaerium nitidum, and S. lacustre. However, all these species, except S. Jacustre, have been collected in lakes in Isle Royale in Lake Superior and from either Lake Huron, Lake Michigan or 210 Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 80 both. S. Jacustre has apparently been recorded previously from only one of the Great Lakes, Lake Ontario (Heard, 1962a; Heard, 1962b,; Herrington, 1962). Several differences in depth and geographic distribution were noted. One group, comprising P. lilljeborgi, P. casertanum, P. compressum, P. nitidum, P. subtrunsatum, and S. nitidum, seemed to be characteristic of cold, deep water. Of this group, P. compressum was limited in its distribution to Mountain Bay and P. nitidum and P. subtruncatum, were restricted to Batchawana Bay towards the eastern end of Lake Superior. The typical species of warm shallow water and shores clearly was S. striatinum. No other species was abundant in this habitat, although the data suggest that P. variabile and P. dubium belong to this group. The status of P. idahoense is enigmatic since in relatively warm Batchawana Bay and relatively cold Pigeon Bay, it appeared typical of cold, deep water whereas in Mountain Bay it was most frequent at shallow water stations. Further confusion is added if the form indianense is considered separately. In Batchawana Bay the species (senso stricto) was found at shore stations and the form indianense only at stations below 6 m of water. In Pigeon Bay also, this form occurred only below 6 m, but in Mountain Bay the same form was most common at less than this depth. FISH Ammocoetes of the lampreys Petromyzon marinus, Entosphenus lamottei and Ichthyomyzon sp. were taken in fairly large numbers in the lake as shown in Table 1. Ammocoetes were formerly considered typical of lotic environ- ments but recently increased lamprey research has shown them to occur in lakes (Hansen and Hayne, 1962; Wagner and Stauffer 1962a, Wagner and Stauffer 1962b). In this study ammocoete populations were shown to extend over two miles into the lake from the Batchawana River mouth and to lesser distances from other rivers. “They were found in both shallow and deep water, one specimen of Ichthyomyzon sp. being taken in 23 m of water in Batchawana Bay. Ammocoetes must be considered to constitute a normal part of lentic, benthic situations where recruitment from spawning rivers is possible. Many of the other fish collected are not benthos in the strict sense of the term. However, most live in association with the bottom resulting in their incorporation in these collections. In general, as shown in Table 1, more fish were collected in shore shocking operations than with the anchor dredge and poisoning techniques, undoubtedly because all the species collected were active enough to escape those latter two methods. During shore surveys in Batchawana Bay in 1960, every effort was made to collect all the fish within the sample area. While collections were not complete enough to give quantitative results, they present evidence of the relative abundance and habitat of the more common species. Etheostoma migrum and Cottus bairdii were almost ubiquitous on shores, occurring at 88 and 93 per cent of stations respectively. Rhbinichthys cataractae was collected at 65 per cent of stations in rock, boulder or gravel covered shores and 28 per cent of stations on exposed sandy shores, but was absent in sheltered locations. Other species did not show such clear habitat preferences, but there were some 1966 Tuomas: BentHos oF LAKE SUPERIOR Bays 211 notable differences in distribution. Etheostoma nigrum was common in all locations, but was most abundant on the exposed sandy shores; it seems typical of such locations in the area. The common cypriniform fishes, Notropis hudsonius, Notropis deliciosus, and Pimephales notatus, all showed similar broad habitat preferences, being most common on sheltered shores with a growth of Scirpus sp. and least common on exposed sandy shores. Cottus bairdii was very common in all areas surveyed, but fewer specimens were collected on exposed sandy shores than elsewhere. None of the fish collected are new records for the general area, but the data provide evidence of relative abundance and habitat in an area where little intensive fish-collecting, particularly in lentic environments, has been carried out. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS I am deeply indebted to many workers in the U.S.A. and Canada who freely gave their skill and time to identify specimens in these collections. They are as follows: Dr. E. L. Bousfield, National Museum of Canada, identified all Amphipoda and Isopoda collected in 1959 and identified representative crayfish. Dr. F. P. Ide of the University of Toronto made determinations on Ephemeroptera collected in 1959. Dr. G. B. Wiggins, Royal Ontario Museum, identified all Trichoptera collected in 1959. Dr. J. B. Burch and Mr. N. J. Reigle of the Museum of Zoology, University of Michigan, identified most of the Gastropoda collected in 1959. Dr. Henry van der Schalie of the Museum of Zoology, University of Michigan, identified most of the Unionidae and Gastropoda of the genera Ammicola and Physa collected in 1959. Dr. W. Heard of the Museum of Zoology, University of Michigan, identified Gastropoda of the genus Valvata collected in 1959. Rev. H. B. Herrington of Westbrook, Ontario identified all Sphaeriidae collected and also gave encouragement and advice when needed. Dr. E. M. Walker of the Royal Ontario Museum identified all Odonata collected in 1959. Dr. P. S. Corbet, Experimental Biology Section, Canada Department of Agriculture, Central Experimental Farm, Ottawa, identified all Odonata collected in 1960. Dr. J. E. Moore of the University of Alberta identified all Hirudinea. Dr. A. H. Clarke, Jr., National Museum of Canada, identified all Gastro- poda and Pelecypoda : Unionidae collected in 1960. Dr. J. A. Oughton, Ontario Agricultural College, identified some Unionidae collected early in 1959. All identifications other than those detailed above were made by the author who accepts full responsibility for any errors. I would also like to express my gratitude to the following of my colleagues at the Fisheries Research Board of Canada, Biological Station, London, who gave unselfishly of their time, both within and outside the bounds of duty: 212 Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 80 Messrs. A. K. Lamsa, P. J. McPherson, W. M. Ransbury, L. R. Golden, B. Chisholme and J. A. Sholdice. The Fisheries Research Board of Canada and the Great Lakes Fishery Commission provided financial support for this project. REFERENCES Bousrietp, E, L. 1958. Fresh-water amphi- pod crustaceans of glaciated North Amer- ica. Canadian Field-Naturalist 72 (2) :55-113. Crarke, A. H., Jr. and C. O. Bere. 1959. The freshwater mussels of Central New York. New York State College of Agricul- ture Memoir No. 367, 79 pp. Creaser, E. P. 1931. The Michigan deca- pod crustaceans. Papers of the Michigan Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters 13:257-276. 1933. Age, growth, and sex ratios in the crayfish, Faxonius propinquus. Papers of the Michigan Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters 19:582-585. Crocker, D. W. 1957. The crayfishes of New York State. N.Y. State Museum and Science Service, Bulletin No. 355, 96 pp. GoopricH, Cavin. 1939. Pleuroceridae of the St. Lawrence River Basin. Occasional Papers of the Museum of Zoology, Univer- sity of Michigan, No. 404, 4 pp. 1945. Goniobasis livescens of Michigan. Miscellaneous Publications of the Museum of Zoology, University of Michigan, No. 64, 36 pp. GoopricH, C. and H van pDER ScHALIE. 1932. The Naiad fauna of the Great Lakes. Occasional Papers of the Museum of Zoology, University of Michigan, No. 238, 8-14. 1939. Aquatic Mollusks of the Upper Peninsula of Michigan. Miscel- laneous Publications of the Museum of Zoology, University of Michigan, No. 43, 45 pp. Hansen, M. J. and D. W. Hayne. 1962. Sea lamprey larvae in Ogontz Bay and Ogontz River, Mich. Journal of Wildlife Management 26 (3) :237-247. Hearp, W. H. 1962a. Distribution of Sphaeriidae (Pelecypoda) in Michigan. Malocologia 1(1):139-161. 1962b. The Sphaeriidae (Mol- lusca: Pelecypoda) of the North American Great Lakes. American Midland Naturalist 67 (1) :194-198. Herrineton, H. B. 1962. A revision of the Sphaeriidae of North America (Mollusca: Pelecypoda). Miscellaneous Publications of the Museum of Zoology, University of Michigan, No. 118, 74 pp. La Rocaqure, A. 1953. Catalogue of the re- cent mollusca of Canada. National Museum of Canada, Bulletin 129, 406 pp. MerenitH, F. J. and W. G. Scuwartz. 1960. Maryland crayfishes. Maryland Department of Resources and Education, Educational Series No. 44, 32 pp. Meyer, M. C. and J. E. Moore. 1954. Notes on Canadian leeches (Hirudinea) with a description of a new species. Wassman Journal of Biology 12 (1) :63-96. PENNAK, R. W. 1953. Fresh-water inverte- brates of the United States. Ronald Press, N.Y. 769 pp. Ryerson, C. G. S. 1915. Notes on the Hirudinea of Georgian Bay. Contributions to Canadian Biology 2:165-175. SmiTH, S. J. and A. E. Verritt. 1871. Notice of the invertebrates dredged in Lake Superior, etc. American Journal of Sciences and Arts 2:448-454. Tuomas, M.L.H. 1960. A modified anchor dredge for collecting burrowing animals. Journal of the Fisheries Research Board of Canada 17 (4) :591-594. 1965. Fauna collected during sur- veys for larval Lampreys in Lake Superior. Fisheries Research Board of Canada, M.S. Report (Biological), No. 803, 95 pp. Tissces, J. J. 1959. Preparations for lamp- rey control in Lake Huron. Fisheries Re- search Board of Canada, Progress Report of the Biological Station at London, No. 1, 22-27. Waener, W. C. and T. M. StauFFer. 1962a. The population of Sea Lamprey Larvae in East Bay, Alger’ County, Mich. Michigan Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters 47: 235-245. —_———— 1962. Sea lamprey larvae in len- tic environments. Transactions of the American Fisheries Society 91 (4): 384-387. Received for publication 4 April 1966 ANALYSIS OF THE MOVEMENT AND GROWTH OF JUVENILE BROOK TROUT (SALVELINUS FONTINALIS) FROM ROTENONE COLLECTIONS TAKEN IN THE NABISIPI RIVER AND VICINITY, QUEBEC G. PowErR Department of Biology, University of Waterloo, Waterloo, Ontario, and Ministry of Tourism, Fish and Game, Province of Quebec INTRODUCTION THE BROOK TROUT, Salvelinus fontinalis, has found its way into almost every body of water draining into the eastern part of the north shore of the Gulf of St. Lawrence. It occurs in all the large river systems, penetrating to the headwaters and inhabiting even the smallest tributary streams. Along the coast it is found in all streams, even those which appear hardly large enough to support a resident fish population. Many of these populations are com- pletely unexploited which adds considerably to their interest. ‘There is no doubt that it is the most abundant and successful species of freshwater fish inhabiting this area. In 1961 and 1962, while the author was working at the Quebec Government research station at Nabisipi River, collections of fish were made using rotenone both in Nabisipi River and in many small streams in the vicinity of the research station. ‘The fish fauna of the region has been described and details of the collecting stations given by Power (1965). In this paper information derived from a study of trout in the collections is reported. Two locations are dealt with in detail, Nabisipi River, 30 miles from the coast and Grand Ruisseau a small stream on the coast. These locations contrast, the former being an average to good trout habitat for this region, the latter being a poor habitat. Collections from other places provide data for comparison. MATERIAL AND Meruops Grand Ruisseau is a small stream seven miles long which enters the sea one mile east of Nabisipi River. The lower part of the valley is very uniform. The stream runs parallel to the coast in a steep-sided, flat-bottomed channel cut through raised sand beaches. It averages 25 feet wide and nine inches deep. The stream bottom is of sand and what little cover there is for fish is provided by a few partly buried decaying logs which provide anchorage for patches of filamentous algae. “The water is brownish and slightly cloudy especially after rain. ‘The sandy bottom of the stream is fairly easily disturbed and this adds to the turbidity of the water during sampling. Eleven collections of trout were made in this stream — the first on August 16, 1961, in the lower portion of the stream. Nine samples were obtained in 1962 from the same part of the stream. Beginning on June 7, successive sections of stream were rotenoned every two weeks until September 27. The first section began above the mean high tide mark and later sections began progressively farther upstream. “Iwo 213 214 Tue CANapiAN Fiectp- NATURALIST Vol. 80 persons were involved in each sampling operation. One added emulsified rotenone mixed with water to the top of the sample area over about a ten minute period. The second stood at the bottom of the sample area and attempted to pick up all the affected fish. He was later joined by the first person and the sample area was scoured until no more fish could be found. This generally took 14 hours and involved at least six traverses of the sample area. After this a second collection of fish was made in the part of the stream between the sample area and the coast. Again this area was scoured until no more fish could be found. Sampling was always done at low tide when the estuary provided a large very shallow settling basin for dead and dying fish and it was felt that few if any fish were washed to sea. After the first 4 samples were obtained this way, it became apparent that more fish were being collected below the sample area than in it. Different procedures of sampling were adopted on August 2 and 16 to find out if fish taken below the sample area had escaped from it during sampling or had in fact taken up residence in the areas cleared of fish during previous samples. On August 16 and 30 attempts to estimate the percentage recovery of killed fish were made by releasing marked fish in the sample area before sampling. The scheme of sampling in the lower part of Grand Ruisseau in 1962 is shown in Figure 1. One other sample was obtained from the headwaters of the western branch of Grand Ruisseau on August 1, 1962 (Station 10c in Power 1965) and this provides data for comparison with the downstream samples. Along with trout, insignificant numbers of eels, threespine and ninespine sticklebacks were taken in Grand Ruisseau. For obvious reasons Nabisipi River could not be sampled so intensively. Between July 16 and September 25, five samples were obtained using rotenone in a small branch of the river behind an island, just below Grande Chute, which is 30 miles from the sea. “There was much more cover for fish here than in Grand Ruisseau. The bottom was covered with a thin layer of gravel lying over grey clay. There were also some larger, flat stones. The current was slight, the maximum depth was 18 inches and the width varied greatly but probably averaged about 60 feet. Since the same area was killed in each sample, after the first sample, only new immigrants to the area were available. These presumably moved in from the main river in search of new territories. An additional large collection was made August 20, 1962, in a small branch of the river about five miles above Grande Chute. In these parts of Nabisipi River trout occur in about equal numbers with juvenile Atlantic salmon. A few threespine and ninespine sticklebacks also occur here. Other samples of trout were obtained in Nabisipi River but these were generally small collections. The water in the river is clear at all times making recovery of killed fish appear relatively easy. Other locations in the general vicinity from which samples of trout were obtained were described and given station numbers by Power (1965). They are: Tributary of Lac Saumur, July 9, 1962 (Station 8); Tributary of Lac Michaud, July 17, 1962 (Station 5); Tributary of Nabisipi River, August 4, 1961 (Station 11); Tributary of Aguanus River, August 9, 1961 (Station 9d); Small stream, 1.5 miles west of Nabisipi River, August 10, 1962 (Station 12). 1966 Power: MoveMENT AND GROWTH OF Brook TROUT 215 SEPT 27 1,102 SE Pil 1,353 AUG 2,050 AUG 4,400 110 AUG 6,600 88 JULY 11,250 JULY 5 8,255 JUNE 2! 11,084 248 Sa a a Es ee a JUNE 7 300 279 15,089 C= Figure 1. Sampling scheme, Grand Ruisseau 1962, giving date, area in square feet and number of trout fry collected in each section. All fish taken in rotenone collections were deposited immediately in 5 per cent formalin. They were examined either later the same day or the next day. Generally this only involved measuring the fork length to the nearest millimeter. RESULTS Before describing the collections in detail, information derived from the sampling in Grand Ruisseau in 1962 will be considered. This has some general 216 Tue CaNnapiAN FieLtp-NATURALIST Vol. 80 implications in regard to the use of rotenone for sampling trout populations in streams. Escape from the sample area and downstream movement In Grand Ruisseau conditions were such that it was felt unnecessary to employ a stop net below the sample area. Although the water was somewhat turbid during sampling, visibility was good and the current slight. In the lower reaches 96 per cent of the trout taken were fry and the following details refer only to the fry. On June 21, July 5 and July 19, more fry were collected below the sample area than in it. In addition, fry collected below the sample area were significantly larger than those taken in it. The pertinent figures are— June 21: sample area, 248 fry, mean length 32.22 + 0.37 (95 per cent confidence interval around mean); below sample area, 279 fry, mean length 33.19 + 0.36 mm; — July 5: sample area, 238 fry, mean length 34.25 + 0.41 mm; below sample area, 399 fry, mean length 37.83 + 0.33 mm; —July 19: sample area, 298 fry, mean length 36.53 + 0.38 mm, below sample area, 403 fry, mean length 38.40 + 0.35 mm. This result immediately raised the question, had fry taken below the sample area escaped downstream during sampling? If not they must have recently moved into the depopulated parts of the stream where, as a result of reduced competition, they grew faster. On August 2, sampling was arranged to find which of these alternatives was true. First, the section of stream below the July 19 sample area was killed. Only 15 fry were collected indicating quite definitely that any downstream movement that may have occurred in the two week interval between samples was slight. Second, the August 2 sample area was rotenoned and a stop net placed at the lower boundary to try to prevent fry escaping. The result was not quite satisfactory, the nature of the bottom being such that it was impossible to use a net effectively. In the sample area, 301 fry were obtained, mean length 37.62 + .43 mm, below the sample area, 189 fry, mean length 39.15 + .60 mm. These 189 fry must have originated from the area between the August 2 and July 19 sample areas or have escaped downstream from the August 2 sample area. It is suspected many of them had in fact escaped from above and this is confirmed to some extent by their greater average size. Rotenone works more slowly on bigger fish and these are perhaps more active and better able to escape detection when swimming downstream from the sample area. On August 16, two samples were again taken. The first was taken in the August 2 sample area with a stop net below. Eighty fry were taken in the August 2 sample area and 48 below. The majority of these fry had probably been living in the upper part of the August 2 sample area and had moved down a short distance from above to exploit the territory depopulated two weeks before. The second sample was taken in the August 16 sample area, no stop net was employed and many fish were picked up below the sample area. Confirmation of the relative immobility of the trout fry in Grand Ruisseau was obtained on the night of August 29, At night many of the trout fry move into the very shallow water at the edge of the stream and are easily visible by lantern light. No fry were encountered working up the stream until just 1966 Power: MoveMENT AND GrowTH oF Brook TROUT 217 below the August 16 sample area where one was seen. ‘The density of fry gradually increased towards the top of the August 16 sample area. It was concluded from these observations that under normal conditions little or no movement of trout fry would occur during the summer months in Grand Ruisseau and even under the unusual conditions provided by the sampling very little downstream movement occurred. The remaining samples covered the whole stream area, rotenone being added at the top of the sample area and fish being picked up dloswaeienn with no attempt to reconfirm the observations on lack of movement. In Nabisipi River, below Grande Chite, where the same area was poisoned in repeated samplings, some fry ced into the depopulated branch of the river in the interval between samples but the density never appeared to reach the initial level. Judging by the situation of the sampling area it would seem that trout fry were more mobile here than in Grand Ruisseau. Percentage of recovery If the rotenone sampling technique is to be useful for describing the structure of natural populations of stream fish it must provide the total population from a limited area or an unbiased sample of the population. Grand Ruisseau appeared to be perfect for obtaining almost complete recovery of all killed fish. Even fry were conspicuous against the rust coloured sand bottom and there were few hiding places. The initial experiment to measure the percentage recovery was not successful. “Twelve hours before sampling, 100 fish were caught and released with dorsal fin clips in the August 16 sample area. There were 98 fry and 2 older fish. During sampling 41 of the fry were taken giving a 42 per cent recovery. Both older trout were recovered but this was not unexpected since they are very obvious when affected by rotenone. What was surprising was the poor recovery of marked fry. Subsequently 12 others were recovered in later upstream samples but the total recovery rate of 54 per cent was unbelievably low. In a repeat of the experiment on August 30 the marked fry were released into the sample area immediately before sampling so that there was no chance of losses through mortality or movement. Twenty-five fry with the anal fin clipped were released and 13 recovered giving a recovery rate of 52 per cent. Forty fry with dorsal and anal clips were released and 28 recovered, a 70 per cent recovery rate. These figures were again surprisingly low. They emphasize the difficulty of obtaining an almost complete recovery of stream fish killed by rotenone. Grand Ruisseau was considered an ideal place for good recovery. In most streams the cover is better and recovery rates may be even lower. In view of the poor per- formance in Grand Ruisseau it was concluded that while rotenone samples may be useful in describing the growth of stream trout populations they are of little value for estimation of mortality rates of fry or for description of population density or structure during the first year of life unless combined with some technique for estimating recovery rates. A recent paper by Boccardy and Cooper (1963) on the use of rotenone and electro-fishing in surveying small streams confirms this conclusion. In a number of trout streams examined by 218 Tue Canapian Fietp-NaTuRALIsT Vol. 80 TABLE 1.—Sizes of trout fry during first summer Ne Ose an esas Number | Observed Location Date ae SIE al in range deviation ( ) ae see Grand Ruisseau (1) (lower part) Aug. 16, 1961 42.24 + 0.43 (4.57) 442 30 — 59 June 7, 1962 28.14 + 0.29 (2.58) 300 21 — 36 June 21, 1962 32.73 + 0.23 (2.68) 527 22-45 July 5, 1962 36.49 + 0.32 (4.13) 637 24 — 49 July 19, 1962 37.61 + 0.27 (3.60) 701 26 — 49 Aug. 2, 1962 38.18 + 0.36 (4.08) 505 24 — 52 Aug. 16, 1962 39.51 + 0.54 (5.32) 376 24 — 53 Aug. 30, 1962 39.74 + 0.59 (5.35) 327 24 — 53 Sept. 13, 1962 40.25 + 1.19 (5.64) 88 28 — 53 Sept. 27, 1962 40.55 + 0.96 (5.09) 110 28 — 51 (headwaters) (10c) Aug. 1, 1962 39.80 + 0.94 (4.83) 101 28 — 50 Nabisipi River (Grande Chite) July 16, 1962 44.89 + 0.72 (4.72) 167 30 — 55 Aug. 3, 1962 49.89 + 1.07 (4.79) 79 38 — 60 Aug. 20, 1962 54.00 + 0.99 (4.98) 98 44 — 67 Sept. 7, 1962 57.35 + 1.11 (4.71) 71 49 — 70 Sept. 25, 1962 57.08 + 3.84 (6.11) 12 50 — 72 (Above G. Chiite) (2) July 16, 1962 46.40 + 2.94 (4.11) 10 38 — 54 (3) Aug. 20, 1962 57.08 + 0.52 (5.16) 390 47 — 70 15 miles above sea (6) July 18, 1962 41.79 + 1.92 (5.04) 29 32 — 50 (7) July 30, 1962 45.35 + 1.37 (5.47) 65 33 — 61 5 miles above sea (10) Aug. 8, 1961 47.29 + 2.05 (4.52) 21 37 — 58 (13) July 24, 1962 51.29 + 2.00 (4.73) 24 44-61 Tributary of Lac Saumur (8) July 9, 1962 31.50 + 0.41 (3.36) 68 23 — 38 Tributary of Lac Michaud (5) July 17, 1962 39.22 + 0.63 (3.51) 128 29-51 Stream 11% miles W. Nabisipi (12) Aug. 10, 1962 48.50 + 1.66 (5.05) 38 37 — 58 Stream 14 mile W. Nabisipi (11) Aug. 7, 1961 56.00 + 4.85 (8.10) 13 41 — 70 Tributary of Nabisipi River (4) Aug. 4, 1961 52.86 + 3.71 (4.15) 7 47 — 60 Tributary of Aguanus River (9d) Aug. 9, 1961 52.00 + 3.46 (3.46) 6 47 — 57 these authors they found recovery rates in rotenone collections which varied from 64 to 90 per cent. They felt there was no means of judging the efficiency of the collecting method from an appraisal of stream characteristics in the sample area. Growth In rotenone samples, taken during the summer, fry can easily be separated from older fish. In a few cases it is possible to recognize trout in their second (1+-) and third (2+) summer. Overlapping of lengths between age groups makes it impossible to go beyond this. In Table 1 data on the growth of fry is summarized. For each location the date of the sample, the number of fry, the mean fork length with 95 per cent confidence intervals, the standard 1966 Power: MoveMentT AND GRowTH OF Brook Trout 219 x NABISIPI RIVER 70 e OTHER LOCATIONS 60 mm LENGTH 5044 FORK 40 30 eons JUNE JULY AUG SIEPal 20 Figure 2. Growth curves for trout fry in Grand Ruisseau and Nabisipi River, Grande Chute. The mean lengths of trout fry in other collections are shown and identified by number as in Table 1. The unshaded area includes the largest and smallest trout fry taken in any of the samples and indicates extremes in the growth spectrum of trout fry in the Nabisipi region of Quebec. deviation and the observed range is given. In figure 2 the data is presented graphically. The growth curves for Grand Ruisseau and Nabisipi River, Grande Chute, are given and mean lengths of trout fry in the other samples indicated and identified by number. The growth spectrum for trout fry in the region is shown by the unshaded area. This area includes the largest and smallest fry observed in any of the samples taken and indicates the range of growth rates encountered amongst trout fry in the region. In Grand Ruisseau June and early July is the important period for growth. The trout fry grow about 2 mm per week during this interval. Later in the summer growth 1s slow. During the latter half of July, August and September only 4 mm is Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 80 i) i) i=) TABLE 2.—Estimated sizes of yearling trout in some rotenone samples ~ Mean fork length mm. L : Dat + 95% confidence eee Observed EEN Oe ats interval and standard n 1 ng deviation ( ) aaron SaaS Tributary of Lac Saumur July 9, 1962 72.73 + 2.55 (12.63) 97 48 — 101 Nabisipi River Grande Chiite July 16, 1962 87.50 + 3.01 (6.80) 22 72 — 96 Grand Ruisseau Headwaters Aug. 1, 1962 81.30 + 3.51 (13.83) 61 56 — 116 Nabisipi River Above G. Chiite Aug. 20, 1962 | 105.69 + 2.05 (10.09) 96 81 — 130 Grand Ruisseau June 7 to Lower reaches July 19, 1962 58.05 + 1.22 (4.78) 61 48 — 69 added to the length. Nabisipi River trout fry attain much larger sizes by the end of summer because they maintain their initial rate of growth for a much longer period. It is not until the end of August that their growth begins to slacken obviously. The length- frequency distributions of some of the samples where it is possible to recognize trout in their second summer, are shown in Figure 3. All these samples come from habitats where the cover was moderately good and reasonable numbers of yearling trout were taken. It is easy to divide fry from older trout, but to separate yearlings from older fish is much more difficult and in fact, without using some independent method of age determination, it can at best only be considered tentative. In Table 2 the data derived from the distributions shown in Figure 3 are given, together with some data on the size of yearling trout in the lower reaches of Grand Ruisseau. It was felt unwise to estimate the sizes of older trout from the samples, although numbers of trout in their third summer were present in some of the samples. The problem is that larger and more successful older trout have probably left the streams and backwaters in which rotenone collections can be made so that estimates of size of older trout are likely to be biased downwards. In addition the separation of age groups becomes too tenuous beyond the yearling stage. DIscUSSION The results indicate the variability in growth of trout fry and in some cases older trout in Nabisipi River and streams in the vicinity. Nabisipi River is felt to represent an average to good habitat for trout in this region and fry attain a mean length of 58 mm in September. This is poor growth compared with the size attained by trout fry in other parts of the species’ Tange. In Lawrence Creek, Wisconsin, McFadden (1961) found the average size of trout fry to be 101 mm in September. In Mud Lick Run, an infertile headwater tributary of the Allegheny River, Pennsylvania, trout fry had attained a mean length of 22h MoveEMENT AND GrRowTH oF Brook Trout Power: 1966 ‘sofdures asoya ur ofqissod st inom Suyread pue Ary Jo uontusosxy ‘poo8 Ajawsiopour sem JaA09 oy) 704M syeaiqey wory sajdiues 9u0ua}0I 9UIOS UT JnOs) Jo suOTNGEsIp Aousnbarg-yaSuey “¢ sAADIY Wu HIOIN SD 4YO4d 0O| 3LNHD'9 JAO8V ‘'Y IdISIGVN 1 9nV NV3A3SSINY GNVYSN 9I°ATNe JLNHD°9 “UY IdISIGVN 6 AINC YNWNVS IV1 z e = Oo m a Tue CANADIAN Firtp- NATURALIST Vol. 80 hm hr ie) 61 mm by August 8. (Cooper, Boccardy and Anderson 1962). Even in the Ungava region of Quebec, Power (1966) reported the average size of trout fry at the end of the summer to be 60 mm. By contrast, in the lower parts of Grand Ruisseau trout fry attain an average length of only about 41 mm by the end of September. The slow growth in this stream represents an extreme adaption in the life cycle of the brook trout to marginal conditions. What causes slow growth in small streams like Grand Ruisseau is uncertain. The most obvious difference between it and Nabisipi River is in the amount of cover and the temperature regime. The amount of cover is not likely to be important. Fry in the sample obtained in the headwaters of Grand Ruisseau on August 1 were almost identical in size with those in the lower part of the stream but the amount of cover was vastly different in the two locations. Grand Ruisseau is a cold stream fed to a considerable extent by cold seepage water which throughout the summer remains at about 3°C. This cold water percolates in through the banks of the stream and flows along the edges. At night particularly, many trout fry live in this water. Temperatures in the middle of the stream depend on the day. The highest temperature recorded was 15°C. inthe estuary. In the sample areas 12°C. was the highest temperature but 9°C. the average during June to September. On cold overcast days the temperature fell as low as 5°C. Nabisipi River, on the other hand, had mean monthly temperatures of 12.5°C. June, 16.5°C. July, 17.5°C August and 14.0°C. September. Not withstanding these differences in temperature it seems hardly possible that low temperatures alone can explain the poor growth of fry in Grand Ruisseau. During June they grew well enough in cold water. Stunting of the population was caused by an early end of the initial period of relatively rapid spring growth. Fry densities in Grand Ruisseau after the end of June varied from 1 fry per 4.5 square feet to 1 fry per 11 square feet (calculated from the data in Figure 1 with adjustment for a 70 per cent recovery rate in sampling). Lower densities perhaps occurred in June when the stream was swollen, but the apparent difference is more likely to be due to a lower recovery rate of very small fry and the downstream location of the June sample areas. It is not known whether overcrowding and lack of sufficient suitable food was responsible for retarding the growth of trout fry in Grand Ruisseau during most of the summer. Cooper et al. (1962) in their study of the trout in Mud Lick Run were of the opinion that the slow growth of trout in that stream was not caused entirely by competition for food and space. A severe reduction in the trout population in this stream was not followed by a substantial increase in trout growth. It would seem then that factors other than temperature, food, space and cover may operate to limit the growth of speckled trout in small streams. A more detailed analysis of the situation is required. REFERENCES Boccarpy, JosepH A., and Epwin L. Cooper. Cooper, Epwin L., JosepH A. Boccarpy, and 1963. The use of rotenone and electro- Joun K. ANperRson. 1962. Growth rate fishing in surveying small streams. Trans- of brook trout at different population actions of the American Fisheries Society densities in a small infertile stream. Pro- 92 (3): 307-310. gressive Fish-Culturist 24 (2): 74-80. 1966 Power: MovEMENT AND GROWTH OF Brook Trout 223 McFappven, James T. 1961. A population region, county Duplessis, Quebec. Cana- study of the brook trout, Salvelinus fon- dian Field-Naturalist, 79 (1): 49-64. tinalis, Wildlife Monographs, No. 7, Power, G. 1966. Observations on_ the November 1961, 73 pages. speckled trout (Salvelinus fontinalis) in Power, G. 1965. Notes on the _ cold- Ungava. Naturaliste Canadien, 93: 187-198. blooded vertebrates of the Nabisipi River Received for publication 20 April 1966 Be OBSERVATIONS ON THE BEHAVIOUR OF NESTING THREE-TOED WOODPECKERS, PICOIDES TRIDACTYLUS, IN CENTRAL NEW BRUNSWICK Rosert S. GipBon Stewiacke, Nova Scotia On May 16, 1965, the nesting site of a pair of Northern Three-toed Wood- peckers, Picoides tridactylus, was discovered some twelve miles southeast of Boiestown, New Brunswick, by P. A. Pearce and M. Jackson. During the summer of 1965 Pearce, Jackson, and the writer were employed with the Canadian Wildlife Service on a project to determine the effects on birds of the pesticides used in the control of spruce budworm, Choristoneura fumiferana, and were doing a post-spray survey when the nest was found. I was not in the immediate vicinity at the time and did not see the nest until nearly an hour later. Being particularly interested in woodpeckers, I was, however, given an opportunity to carry out some observations on the nesting behaviour of these birds. The nest was located sixteen feet up in the trunk of a dead trembling aspen, Populus tremuloides, with a somewhat N shaped curve near its base. Because of the peculiar shape and decayed condition of the trunk, it was felt unwise to climb the tree and, therefore, the number of eggs and later young was never actually determined. Three smaller trees formed a crude semicircle at a distance of about thirty feet from the front of the nesting tree. “These were numbered from left to right as trees nos. 1, 2, and 3 and will be referred to frequently in the text. Behind the nesting tree were several acres of slashings, and to the front, some seventy-five feet away, was a well used logging road, which the entrance faced. The area on the opposite side of the road was composed of mature conifers only sparsely culled. 224 Tue CANADIAN FIe_Lp-NATURALIST Vol. 80 When the nest was discovered both the male and female were present. However, when Pearce first observed the site on the mornings of May 17 and 19, no bird was in sight, but the male, which was apparently brooding, was brought to the entrance when the tree was tapped at the base with a small stick. After each tapping he would appear but would soon withdraw and remain inside. On May 26, I flushed the male three times by first tapping the trunk and then moving the stick to within a few feet of the entrance. He would fly to trees nos. | or 2, sit quietly and preen himself for a few minutes and then fly back to the nesting tree. Upon his return he would alight slightly below the entrance, make a short hop and enter the cavity where he would remain until the process was repeated. A similar experience was encountered with the female on May 27. From these observations it is seen that these birds were not particularly restless or wary in close proximity to their nest. This is some- what contradictory to the observations of Brewster (in Bent 1939) who found them extremely alert around their nesting site. On the evening of June 8, the feeding cries of young were audible as a low but excited rattling hum and resembled those of young Black-backed Three- toed Woodpeckers, Picoides arcticus (Erskine 1959, Gibbon 1964). The male was seen returning to the nest at 1827 hrs. (The time given here and elsewhere in the text is Atlantic Standard Time.) He first alighted on tree no. 2, and then flew and landed about two feet below and slightly to the left of the entrance. By moving in a clockwise direction around the back of the tree he proceeded to the entrance. He then paused momentarily, entered the hole and fed the young. This approach method had been described (Roberts 77 Bent 1939 and Erskine 1959) in regard to nesting P. arcticus; therefore, to determine if a similar method was used frequently by P. tridactylus, a small sketch was made of a section of this nesting tree and all subsequent observations of the adults approaching the entrance were marked. Out of a total of eighty-nine approaches noted, eighty-six were made by the birds alighting a few inches below the entrance and entering it directly; one was by the spiral method mentioned above; and the other two were made by the birds alighting some two feet below the entrance and approaching it by making several short hops. This method, also described previously (Brewster im Bent 1939), did not appear to be utilized frequently by this pair. To determine the rate of feeding and general activity around the nest during the early portion of the day, I set up a blind on June 18, which was at a distance of some thirty feet from the nest and in which I stayed from 0320 to 1240 hrs. The male left the nest at 0405 and the young began to chatter at 0429 hrs. The male returned at 0435 and fed the young. When he left the nest a few minutes later he was carrying a fecal sac in his bill. In regard to this it should be mentioned that during the time I observed the nest, feces were removed a total of sixteen times, and at all times this was done by the male. The number of feedings per hour appeared to fluctuate considerably (Figure 1) and the male fed the young more frequently than did the female by a ratio of 2.36:1. A considerable amount of vocal communication appeared to exist between the male and the female. Generally this consisted of excited chattering sounds 1966 GisBon: NeEsTING THREE-TOED WoopPECKERS DDS es en MAES ee REM ASE OF FEEDINGS NO. 0430 ©0530 0630 0730 0830 0930 1/030 '}/30 1230 TIME (HOURS) Figure 1. Fluctuation in the number of times the young were fed per hour during the morning of June 18. emitted by both parents if they happened to approach the nest consecutively. However, several times it was noted that after the female fed the young she would fly to the top of the nesting tree, alight on one particular dead limb, give two or three drumming sounds and then sit quietly preening herself for several minutes before flying. These drummings were characterized by being short in duration (one to two seconds) and starting with a few slow taps and gradually increasing in tempo toward the end. The actual significance of this was not determined although after the drumming it was the male who returned, usually within three minutes, and each time feces were removed by him. Tue CaNnapiAN Frecp-NaATuRALIST Vol. 80 i) i) n The adults paid little attention to any other species of birds that approached the nesting site except for other members of the family Picidae. On these occasions three combats were noted. The first of these occurred on June 15 and involved the female P. tridactylus and a female Yellow-bellied Sapsucker, Sphyrapicus varius. The second and third occurred during the morning of June 18. Both of these struggles involved the male P. tridactylus, the first being with a female Hairy Woodpecker, Dendrocopos villosus, and the second a male P. arcticus. These combats consisted chiefly of the birds dashing at each other, followed by vigorous wing-flappings and chatterings and terminat- ing with short scuffles on the ground. The nest was visited on the afternoon of June 21. The young were present and resting in the entrance. This was a hot afternoon (about 85°F.) with high humidity and a strong wind blowing. The adults were observed several times clinging to the shady side of trees nos. | and 3. This may have been done to keep out of the sun or to keep out of the wind for both were coming from the same general direction. Pearce visited the site on June 24 and found the nest void of life except for a Tree Swallow, Iridoprocne bicolor, flying around the entrance. He felled the tree and collected the section containing the nest. From this the following dimensions were taken (in inches): outside dimension of the entrance, 1.7; outside vertical dimension of entrance, 1.8; inside diameter of entrance, 1.7; depth of cavity below entrance, 11.0; diameter of tree at entrance, 4.8. The approximate height of the tree was 28 feet. The entrance was facing in a southeasterly direction. This is apparently the first authentic published breeding record for this species for the Maritime Provinces. It should be noted, however, that Baxter (in Squires 1952) stated that it had been found nesting in New Brunswick, but he established no definite record. REFERENCES Bent, ArTHUR CLEVELAND. 1939. Life His- 1965 Season. Sackville, N.B. 9 pp. tories of North American Woodpeckers. Grsson, Ropert S. 1964. Studies and Ob- U.S. National Museum Bulletin. 174: 106- servations of the Black-backed ‘Three- 126. toed Woodpecker near Stewiacke. Nova ERSKINE, ANTHONY J. 1959. Picoides arc- Scotia Bird Society Newsletter. 6(3): 5- ticus Nesting in the Cariboo, British 10. Columbia. The Canadian Field-Naturalist Sourres, W. Austin. 1952. The Birds of 73 (4): 205. New Brunswick. New Brunswick Mono- ERSKINE, ANTHONY J. 1966. Maritime Nest graphic Series No. 4. 84 pp. Records Scheme. Sixth Annual Report — Received for publication 30 March 1966 ne NUMERICAL TAXONOMY AND THE SMELT FAMILY, OSMERIDAE D. E. McALLISTER National Museum of Canada, Ottawa, Ontario INTRODUCTION BeroreE the methods and principles of numerical taxonomy are accepted in their entirety or in part, it is necessary to compare their results with those of con- ventional taxonomy and to evaluate the differences. Using some of the methods of numerical taxonomy this paper makes a re-analysis of a recent conventional revision of the smelt family, Osmeridae (McAllister, 1963) and compares the results of the two studies. The source of the methods of numerical taxonomy used herein is Sokal and Sneath (1963). For further background material see the symposium Phenetic and phylogenetic classification of the Systematics Association (1964) and discussions in the pages of Systematic Zoology of recent years. According to the principles of numerical taxonomy the selection of characters should be random; a minimum of 60 characters would seem advisable and never less than 40 should be used. It should be made clear that the data for the numerical taxonomic portions of this paper are drawn from a previous taxonomic study in which only 48 characters were analyzed. The data are, therefore, not ideal, though adequate for a numerical taxonomic study. But by using the same basic data for the two studies, the differences may more easily be attributable to the methods, rather than to the characters selected. MetuHops The methods used in this similarity study are among those outlined in Sokal and Sneath (1963) (to which the following page references refer). The characters were coded by a simple present (+) or absent (0) scheme (p. 76). Every character was known and applicable so NC entries were not necessary (p. 74). The characters were arranged along one axis of the table, the taxa (or operational taxonomic units) along the other. For example, four axinosts were present (scored +) in all forms except Mallotus (scored 0), in which there are six. Subspecies were not included in this study since their differences, of a partially overlapping nature, were not amenable to + or 0 scoring. The following characters were coded; the alternative to each is “not”, e.g. proethmoids double (proethmoids mot double). Which of the alternatives is indicated by + or 0 is of no significance (in this method). The characters are: glossohyal teeth canine, maxillary extends past mid-eye; proethmoid double; otic bulla wide anteriorly; posterior myodome opening narrow; with parasphenoid wing joining prootic; mandible shallow; palatine dumbbell- shaped; dorsal edge of pterygoid straight; metapterygoid with dorsal vane over 222i. 228 Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 80 TABLE 1.—Two by Two Table for Computation of Coefficients of Association Sede S. t: Sus: O.e. | T.p. | A.e. | H.p. | H.t. | H.o. | M. v. 1 x Sat Sl al x Vesna 5 Sas S Opler es Oma! x D'S) 2 15 O.e Me Vee Wak ab) DA | x 8 12 8 12 9 11 Dep DONO a 2S Sane al OMe As seri x L GAO. [OS shar 2 A.e BE AG DS BOG, BEE GS | DA x 6 10 7 9 5 11 4 12 7 9 lal, fo WD NAS GP WR By te a 910/10 9 x QO O19 MORO MOF Ges 22 rics 22 7 1Ble te VATE NAD sei Ae yl) & 6 9 LS | MS Oo sx QOM OA ZO MSH ZOMG MAUS 1S S25 eS i2 Sars 4 29 H.o 1 4) 12-3 AO S105 6 9 UN US Oe gb il 3K PNM | AO) es A SS PSB, AS. 7 4 29 1 32 M.v 12 14 | 12 14 | 11 14 | 12 14 | 14 12 | 13 13 | 14 12 | 10 16} 10 16 x AOD NA 2 | Al BAG. OI le SH ls SS ily 5 17 Bly hyomandibular head; dorsal fork of posttemporal long; frontal with lateral wings over orbit; vomerine teeth small; palatine teeth small; subopercle and/or opercle with striae; snout to dorsal length equals or exceeds dorsal to caudal; midlateral ridge in males; elongate midlateral scales; gill rakers 25 or more; pyloric caeca never more than 8(9); with blind stomach sac; midlateral scales always above 70; anal rays up to 23; pectoral rays 16-23; neal line complete; length of adipose base never mreeede orbit; orbit 2/3 or less of caudal peduncle depth; mesethmoid simple; parietals not at all separated; pterosphenoid reaches parasphenoid wing anteriorly; no slit between hyomandibular and preopercle; actinosts +, ventrals 8; dorsal 10-14; vertebrae 64 or more; branchiostegals 8-10; head 4.7 or less in standard length; pectoral always 70 per cent or more of distance to pelvic; pelvic origin anterior to dorsal; peritoneum silvery; marine; pyloric caeca obsolescent,; ductus pneumaticus attaches to anteriormost end of gas bladder; gill rakers long; standard length exceeds 200 mm, mouth horizontal, range attains or exceeds 60° N. Lat. In plus or minus coding some information is lost because the finer variations are excluded. ‘This can be avoided to some extent by double coding. Note above the pyloric caeca are coded as 8(9) or less (or not) and obsolescent (or not). 1966 McALLIsTER: NUMERICAL TAXONOMY 229 TABLE 2.—Coefficients of Association (SM) Site S. t. S.s. Oe eh S pan|i paces Blo jo5 || Nelo tes | dale @, |) IMIG a7 Set: x Sst .96 x S.s 94 94 X O.e 75 75 69 x Wa 75 .65 58 77 x A.e 75 71 U0 U5 69 x H. p 44 48 46 52 33 35 x H.t 44 52 .50 oy 29 Sil 91 x H.o 48 52 46 30 29 29 91 96 x M. v. .29 .29 29, 38 40 133 .65 .56 .56 x | S.1. — Spirinchus lanceolatus A. e. — Allosmerus elongatus S. t. — Spirinchus thaleichthys H. p. — Hypomesus pretiosus S. s. — Spirinchus starkst H. t. — Hypomesus transpacificus O. e. — Osmerus eperlanus H. 0. — Hypomesus olidus T. p. — Thaleichthys pacificus M. v. — Mallotus villosus After the coding basis is set up the different characters are recorded as + or 0 for the different species in a table (not shown, but above characters for all the species are recorded in McAllister, 1963). From this a two by two table for computation of coefficients of association is compiled, Table 1. This table compares, for all the possible different pairs of taxa (or operational taxonomic units), the number of characters which were + + (positive in both taxa), +0 (positive in the first, negative in the second taxon), 0+ (negative in the first, positive in the second taxon) and 00 (negative in both taxa). The simple matching coefficient used in this study is calculated by Ssu = m/n=m/ (m-+u), where Ssy is the simple matching coefficient, 7 1s the number of characters in “matched” cells (+-+ or 00) and uw is the number of characters in “unmatched” cells (=0 or 0+) and 7 is the total number of characters. In other words the simple matching coefficient is the number of characters which the two taxa share divided by the total number of characters. The simple matching coefficients for all the pairs of taxa are calculated from the two by two table (Table 1) and presented in Table 2. The coefficient is a measure of how close the two taxa are (i.e. how many characters they share). The higher the coefficient is, up to 1.00, the closer the two taxa. The lower the coefficient is, down to 0.00, the more distant the two taxa. In order to more easily understand how the different genera are related to one another a further table is provided, Table 3. The pairs of genera are listed 230 Tue CANADIAN FIELD- NATURALIST Vol. 80 with the most closely related pairs at the top of the table. When a genus is polyty pic the coefficient given is the mean of the coefficients between each of its species and the other genus. Tas_E 3 — Coefficients of Association Between Pairs of Genera Arranged in Order of Magnitude (closest genera first) Osmerus-T haleichthys Vil Osmerus-Allosmerus a) Allosmerus-Spirinchus 74 Osmerus-S pirinchus 73 Thaleichthys-Allosmerus 69 Thaleichthys-Spirinchus 66 Mallotus-Hypomesus 59 Osmerus-H ypomesus 52 Spirinchus-H ypomesus 48 Thaleichthys-Mallotus 40 Osmerus-Mallotus 38 Allosmerus-Mallotus 33 Allosmerus-H ypomesus 32 Thaleichthys-H ypomesus 30 Spirinchus-Mallotus 29 PRIMITIVENESS The lack of fossil smelts different from extant species' forces use of other measures of primitiveness. Gosline (1960) suggests that the superfamily Salmonoidea gave rise to the Osmeroidea and the author agrees that this may be so. Of the Salmonidae, the Salmoninae appear to be closest to the required ancestor of the osmeroids, the Thymallinae and Coregoninae having various specializations which would bar them from ancestry. ‘The paired proethmoids are Clearly primitive, being paired in the esocoids. If the Salmoninae (see Norden, 1961 for some characters) are close to the ancestors of the smelts then certain characters may be regarded as primitive. The following character states may be regarded as primitive relative to the family Osmeridae: (1) branchiostegals numerous, more than 8; (2) mouth horizontal; (3) adipose fin oval; (4) scales numerous, more than 100; (5) mandible shallow; (6) glossohyal teeth not villiform; (7) peritoneum not black; (8) lateral line complete, (9) pyloric caeca numerous, (10) stomach without blind sac; (11) ventral rays numerous; (12) no opercular striae; (13) spawn in freshwater; (14) midlateral scales not elongate in male; (15) no anal shelf in male; (16) no midlateral ridge in male; (17) four simple axinosts; (18) parietals separated by supraoccipital; (19) vomerine teeth equal in size to palatines, (20) large adult size, more than 300 mm; (21) maxillary extending to mid-pupil or past; (22) proethmoids double, not fused. Using the data in McAllister (1963) the number of primitive characters which are found in the different genera is given in Table 4. Then, according to this method, Thaleichthys would be the most primitive genus and Mallotus the most advanced. 1See Appendix regarding Thauwmaturus, and fossil otolith of Hypomesus. 1966 McALuisteER: NUMERICAL TAXONOMY 231 Tasre 4— Number of primitive characters in different genera Thaleichthys 16 Osmerus 15 Spirinchus 12 Allosmerus 12 Hypomesus 10 Mallotus 8 Discussion OF RESULTS Comparison with Previous Studies Classification involves categorization, erection of hierarchies and recogni- tion of phylogeny (although some proponents of numerical taxonomy would not admit the latter). The distinctness of the taxonomic categories previously recognized is confirmed by the present study. The results of the last two operations in the two studies are compared below. Hierarchies: The coefficients of association may be used to assess or establish the status of categories. “The lower taxa will be more closely related, that is have higher coefficients of association. In this regard the level of the taxa recognized in the last revision of the family appears to have been correctly assessed, relative to one another in the hierarchy. The species within a genus (in Spirinchus and Hypomesus) are more closely related, coefficients of 91-97, than the genera within a sub-family, 59-77, or than the genera between different subfamilies, 29-52. Could other taxa have been recognized? In the foregoing study none of the species of the polytypic genera, Spirinchus and Hy pomesus, were considered so highly distinguished as to warrant superspecific or subgeneric categories, nor with so few species was a need felt for such categories. The calculated coeffi- cients agree with the conclusions from the previous study that the species of Spirinchus were very close, 94-96. So subgeneric categories do not seem to be indicated. In the genus Hypomesus the coefficient of association would indi- cate that H. pretiosus was more distinct, 91, than the other two species, 96. On this basis it might be possible to recognize a superspecies for H. pretiosus. It may be pointed out here that in the previous conventional study H. olidus was considered the most distinctive species in the genus (as indicated in the key, p. 27). The reasons for this are twofold. First, in coding, information was lost in differences in pyloric caeca. Secondly the point of juncture of the ductus Ppneumaticus, notably behind the anterior end of the gas bladder in H. olidus, is a feature unique in the family and was considered of more significance than the other characters (such as number of vertebrae which was found to vary within subspecies). However, the exact level of distinctness which might be recognized for superspecies is basically an arbitrary decision, as would be more readily apparent in a larger genus where a spectrum of differences would be found. It seems superfluous to recognize slightly marked species by super- species when utility is not served. Minor degrees of affinity are best indicated in phylogenetic dendrograms (i.e. the author does not adhere to the cladistic 232 Tue CANADIAN FIeELD-NATURALIST Vol. 80 point of view — see Mayr, 1965, p. 167). Supertaxa are useful when they help divide speciose groups. This is not to say that monotypic taxa should not be recognized when they are sufficiently distinctive. A case might be made for the recognition of separate subfamilies for Mallotus and Hypomesus. The differences between genera of the two sub- families presently recognized range from 29 to 52. The genera Mallotus and Hypomesus are only slightly less different, differing by a coefficient of 57. Deciding the level of coefficient at which to recognize subfamilies appears to be more arbitrary (in this family) than that between species and genera. Phylogeny: Certain proponents of numerical taxonomy do not believe that phylogenies can be erected solely on the results of study of living species. These persons may regard the following discussions and figures as referring simply to the similarity of living species, not to their phylogeny. In constructing a phylogeny of the subfamily Osmerinae tables 3 and 4 may be referred to. From the coefficients of association one may conclude that Osmerus and Thaleichthys are the most closely related genera and that Allosmerus is quite close to Osmerus. Allosmerus and Spirinchus are the next most closely related pair. The number of characters considered primitive would indicate that Thaleichthys is the most primitive, being closely followed by Osmerus. Allosmerus and Spirinchus are the most advanced and have achieved the same degree of advancement. The two sets of results appear compatable and are easily translated into a phylogenetic tree, with Thaleichthys at the bottom and Allosmerus and Spirinchus at the top, and with Osmerus in an intermediate position (see Figure 2). ; Hypomesus and Mallotus obviously branch from a common stalk. As the most advanced genus, Mallotus must take the most distant position. Computing the mean coefficient of association for the subfamily Hypomesinae (average of its two genera) with each of the osmerin genera gives the following results: with Osmerus 45, Spirinchus 38.5, Thaleichthys 35 and Allosmerus 32.5. From these figures one would conclude that the Hypomesinae branched off from the Osmerinae close to Osmerus on the stem which gave rise to Spirinchus. The major features of all these relationships are depicted in the dendrogram given in Figure 2. (Although the relative positions can be indicated easily on a two dimensional figure, it does not appear practical to indicate the exact distances between all taxa without using three dimensions). The major differences between the phylogenies suggested may be seen by comparing Figures 1 and 2. The first difference is that the positions of the genera Spirinchus and Thaleichthys are reversed, the latter being indicated as the most primitive by the numerical taxonomic study. Secondly the numerical taxonomic study suggests that the Hypomesinae are closer to Osmerus than to Spirinchus. Otherwise the generic relationships suggested by the two studies are similar. A proper evaluation of the results of the two methods will only come when a knowledge of fossils will enable one to delineate the phylogenies on factual instead of theoretical bases. An evaluation might also be made when further taxonomic data are available, the author might suggest the worthiness of chro- 1966 McALLIsTER: NUMERICAL JT AXONOMY 233 mosome, blood and muscle protein’ electrophoritic and serum studies. It is not suggested that any one of these will provide the answer but that each will contribute to a more certain phylogeny. The present author’s personal sub- jective evaluation is that the new numerical analysis has contributed to the understanding of generic relationships. He is not sure that numerical analysis has correctly assessed the relationships within the genus Hy pomesus. CoMMENTS ON NUMERICAL TAXONOMY The following are some general critical comments on numerical taxonomy. They are not intended to comprise a complete critique. For further comments one may refer to the pages of Systematic Zoology. Numerical taxonomy has criticised conventional taxonomy on a number of scores. Some of its charges have been valid, but others apply only to certain workers in conventional taxonomy and enould not be made against the field of conventional taxonomy. ‘Take for example the number of characters employed. Many poor conventional studies do employ too few characters. However there are many conventional studies which have employed the minimum number of characters or well above the minimum which numerical taxonomists consider necessary. To cite a few examples in the field of ichthyology: Briggs (1955) used a least 50 in his revision of the Order Gobiesociformes; Norman (1934) used at least 60 characters in his revision of the flatfishes,; Katayama (1960) in his revision of the Japanese Serranidae used at least 75 characters. Moreover, the minimum suggested by Sokal and Sneath, perhaps valid for their groups, may not be valid for other groups. My colleague, Dr. Arthur H. Clarke, Jr., informs me that for the freshwater molluscs on which he is working at the moment it would be difficult to find 30 meaningful taxonomic characters, let alone the suggested absolute minimum of 40. At present the coding of data in numerical taxonomy does not seem wholly capable of absorbing all data available. For example body part ratios of different species may be discrete at any one size, but the ratios over the whole size range (which would be used for coding) overlap. A series of overlapping ranges of meristic or proportional characters for different forms would be quite difficult to code, but can be dealt with in conventional studies. However, these difficulties in coding may not prove insurmountable and could be dealt with now by setting these characters aside for special handling, at least in smaller groups. The non-weighting of characters has been one of the most difficult of principles of numerical taxonomy for others to accept. The present author can see certain cases where he might consider that characters are of approxi- mately equal value, e.g. where in certain groups the dorsal and anal fin ray counts might be equivalent, and they to a scale count differences, or perhaps to a colour or even a behavior pattern. In higher classification it would be difficult to weight certain of the more important characters such as protrusi- bility of the jaws, presence of maxilla in gape of the jaws, presence of true 1Dr. Hiroshi Tsuyuki and the author are engaged in a joint study using muscle proteins in the Osmeridae to help determine relationships. 234 Tue CanapiANn Fietp-NatTurRAList Vol. 86 ALLOSMERUS HY POMESUS elongatus olidus THALEICHTHYS transpacificus MALLOTUS pacificus pretiosus villosus ~OSMERUS eperlanus SPIRINCHUS lanceolatus thaleichthys starksi Figure 1. Phylogenetic dendrogram derived from a_ conventional taxonomic study (McAllister, 1963). fin spines, physostomous or physoclistic gas bladder, etc. But other characters are Clearly of different worth, e.g. the principal caudal rays as opposed to the variability in anal rays in many groups, or of a trenchant osteological character as opposed to a colour pattern. This would make one less willing to equate all characters with one another. It must be admitted that there would be some difficulty in deciding how much to weight characters. However it would 1966 McALLisTER: NUMERICAL TAXONOMY 235 MALLOTUS villosus HY POMESUS pretiosus olidus transpacificus SPIRINCHUS lanceolatus thaleichthys starksi ALLOSMERUS elongatus OSMERUS eperlanus THALEICHTHYS pacificus Figure 2. Phylogenetic dendrogram based on the present study using methods of numerical taxonomy. be relatively easy to make a rule of the thumb ratio, 2:1, 3:1 or other simple ratio, after preliminary study of a group, for weighting — before any systematic decisions had been made. Nor is it difficult to conceive of some basis for a less subjective weighting formula. This would weight characters more strongly when they displayed constancy within taxa and showed correlation with other independent characters. By weighting some characters the loss of valuable information might thereby be avoided. In this regard taxonomists might be reminded that they need not accept all the precepts of numerical taxonomy. The suggestion to separate phylogeny and classification is probably a century too late. The simple consideration of the number of diagnostic characters will not permit deciding whether a form is a species or subspecies. Here must be 2Ignoring taxonomically spurious correlations such as those due to large size in the close parts because of a common growth centre, those resulting solely from inhabiting the same ecological niche, etc. 236 Tue CANADIAN FieLp-NATURALIST Vol. 80 evaluated factors such as percentage separation, degree of interbreeding, sympatry, information on behaviour and ecology, etc. Information may be incomplete for any one factor. The geographical distribution of intermediates between two types will influence interpretation of status. Sibling species may differ little morphologically’. Here it will be difficult for numerical taxonomy to supplant the experienced systematist. It is probably in the establishing of comparable taxa above the species level that numerical taxonomy will have its greatest use. Also in the use of many characters to establish relationships in morphologically complex groups; here it is difficult for the systematist to hold all the characters in his mind in analyzing affinities. There are a number of features of value in numerical taxonomy. It provides a standard approach which may be taken for all groups. It provides a rational series of steps and bases on which to proceed. These assist toward attaining repeatability and objectivity. The use of numerous characters, which it advocates, should raise the quality of classification. While all of the tenets of numerical taxonomy may not be acceptable, these and the restating of the bases of taxonomy will challenge zoologists to rethink the philosophy of systematics. The quality of taxonomy will still depend to a large degree on the care and accuracy of the taxonomists, the adequacy of the series of specimens he studied in terms of number, geographic representation, sex, etc., and his thoroughness in studying even the less accessable characters. While numerical taxonomy will probably not supplant conven- tional taxonomy it will perhaps help make and rejuvenate it, and lead the way to a new and superior systematics. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS The author wishes to express his appreciation for criticizing the manuscript to Dr. C. C. Lindsey and Dr J. S. Nelson then of the Institute of Fisheries, University of British Columbia, now respectively of the University of Mani- toba and the University of Indiana, and Dr. S. U. Qadri of the University of Ottawa. SUMMARY The data of a conventional taxonomic study of the smelt family (Mc- Allister, 1963), Osmeridae, was re-analyzed using some of the methods of numerical taxonomy as propounded by Sokal and Sneath (1963). A primitive- ness score was introduced. The results of the two studies were then compared. The allotment of species to genera, and status of the various taxa in the studies agreed closely. The (phylogenetic) relationships shown were close, but not identical, differing in reversal of positions of Thaleichthys and Spirinchus (the former now being considered primitive, the latter advanced) and in the deriva- tion of the subfamily Hypomesinae from the stem closer to Osmerus than to Spirinchus. The use of classical and numerical methods have resulted in very 8A student at the University of Ottawa, Claude Delisle, has discovered two populations of Osmerus eperlanus mordax in a lake in the Gatineau area, Quebec, one composed of giant-, the other of normal- sized individuals. Brief examination of a series of these by the author showed several differences, the most significant of which was the number of gill rakers. However, the number of gill rakers did overlap. Data like this is difficult to handle with numerical taxonomy. See also Svardson (1961) who reports morphologically similar populations spawning at different times. 1966 similar taxonomic pictures. and its future. McA.uistER: NUMERICAL TAXONOMY 237 Comments are made about numerical taxonomy REFERENCES Bere, L. S. 1947. Classification of fishes both recent and fossil. Travaux de I’Insti- tute Zoologique de |’Academie des Sci- ences de l’URSS 5 (2) :85-517. Lithoprinted, Ann Arbor, Michigan. Bicetow, H. W. 1964. Family Osmeridae, pp. 553-597, fig. 131-139. Fishes of the Western North Atlantic. Memoir Sears Foundation for Marine Research (1), part 3, (1963) 1964. Brices, J. C. 1955. A monograph of the cling fishes (Order Xenopterygii). Stan- ford Iichthyological Bulletin 6:1-224, 114 fig., 15 maps. Cuapman, W.M. 1941. The osteology and relationships of the osmerid fishes. Journal of Morphology 69(2):279-301, 15 fig., 1 diagram. Gostine, W. A. 1960. Contribution towards a classification of modern Isospondylous fishes. Bulletin of the British Museum (Na- tural History) Zoology 6(6):327-365, 15 fig., 3 diagr. Mayr, E. 1965. Classification and phylo- geny. American Zoologist 5:165-174. McA.tuister, D. E. 1963. A revision of the smelt family, Osmeridae. Bulletin of the particular reference to the grayling (Thy- mallus arcticus) and its phylogeny. Journal of the Fisheries Research Board of Canada 18(5):679-791, 16 pl., 2 text-fig. Norman, J. R. 1934. A systematic mono- graph of the flatfishes (Heterosomata). Vol. 1, London, 459 pp. Rempiszewski, Jan Maciej. 1964. Skull osteology of Osmerus eperlanus eperlanus (L.) of the Miedwie Lake. Annales Zoo- logici, Polska Akad. Nauk, Inst. Zoolog. 22 (14) :263-284; 11 fig. SoxaL, R. R. and Sneatu, P. H. A. 1963. Principles of numerical taxonomy. W. H. Freeman Co., San Francisco and London, 359 pp. StinToN, F. C. 1963. Further studies of the Tertiary otoliths of Victoria, Australia. Proceedings of the Royal Society of Vic- toria 76 (1-2) :13-22, 3 fig. Svarpson, G. 1961. Young sibling fish in northwestern Europe. pp. 498-513, 3 fig. In Vertebrate speciation, University of Texas Symposium. Systematics AssociaTION. 1964. Phenetic and phylogenetic classification. Systematics Association Publication (6) :1-164, illus. National Museum of Canada (191):1-53, Vorer, E. 1934. Die Fische der mittleeoza- 14 fig. nen Braunkohle des Geiseltales. Nova Acta Norpen, C.R. 1961. Comparative osteology Leopoldina 2 (1/2) :21-146, 14 pl., 23 fig. of representative salmonid fishes, with APPENDIX The Miocene fossil genus Thawmaturus was first placed in the family Salmonidae. Later it was accorded familial distinction close to the Salmonidae by Voigt (1934) and Berg (1947). Norden (1961) in his study of the osteology of the Salmonidae considered the Thaumaturidae were likely allied to the Argentinidae or Osmeridae, judging by a description and figure of a single caudal vertebral centrum. However Voigt (1934) figures a specimen with 2 or three upturned caudal vertebrae which would distinguish Thaumaturus from even the superfamily Osmeroidae. Other characters of Voigt’s material also distinguish it from the Osmeridae: 40 instead of 51-78 vertebrae; lack of flanges on the posterior neural spines; posterior position of the dorsal fin partly overlying the anal base; body deep instead of slender, presence of intermuscular bones; shallowly forked caudal; lack of dermethmoids; premaxillary bordering 2/3 of gape (instead of 1/3) presence of teeth on the shaft of the vomer; lack of supramaxillary. Further differences may be seen in comparing Chapman 238 Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 80 (1941) and Rembiszewski (1964) with Voigt (1934). These characters to- gether indicate a rather distant relationship of Thaumaturus to Osmeridae. In agreement with McAllister (1963), Bigelow (1964) reduces the Atlantic American form of smelt to a subspecies, Osmerus eperlanus mordax. He reduced the Pacific capelin (considered consubspecific by McAllister, 1963) to a subspecies of the Atlantic form but realized that Arctic specimens might change the conclusions. Stinton (1963) has described a new species, Hypomesus glaber from oto- liths in Miocene deposits, Victoria, Australia. Zoogeographically this would be an interesting find, as all previously-known living and fossil osmerids were in the northern hemisphere. One wonders if the otoliths might actually belong to one of the southern hemisphere families closely related to the Osmeridae — the Galaxiidae, Retropinnidae or Aplochitonidae. However an otolith from a New Zealand specimen of Galaxias and from one of Retropinna were quite different. Received for publication 20 May 1966 Vs SIEVE MESH SIZE AS RELATED TO VOLUMETRIC AND GRAVIMETRIC ANALYSIS OF CARIBOU RUMEN CONTENTS GrorGe W. SCOTTER Canadian Wildlife Service, Edmonton, Alberta ANALysis of rumen content is probably the most common method employed to determine the food habits of ruminants. The method offers obvious advantages when dealing with a highly mobile species, such as barren-ground caribou (Rangifer tarandus groenlandicus), which may move several miles per day. Other methods, such as direct observation of feeding, require long hours of field work and cause many problems in logistics. In contrast, rumen analysis can be completed in the laboratory. Buechner (1950) listed some of the limitations of feeding minute studies as applied to pronghorn antelope (Antilocapra americana). Most of the limitations also would apply to a study of the feeding activities of barren-ground caribou. The present study was undertaken to determine which sieve mesh size, if any, would separate the forage into portions representative of that within the rumen of barren-ground caribou during the winter months. A second purpose was to compare results obtained using wet volume and air-dry weight as methods of measurement. 1966 ScotTeR: CariBou RUMEN CONTENTS 239 TaBLE 1. — Percentage composition by volume and weight of forage from the rumens of six barren-ground caribou, as determined by different sieve mesh sizes Food Item Percent by volume Percent by weight Screen mesh size: 4 7 10 4 7 10 Cladonia spp. 45.5 47.7 52.3 43.1 43.4 46.4 Cladonia spp.? 3.4 Soil Bo ff 3.2 2.9 24 Peltigera spp. 2.9 858) 352 1.9 Bin 2.6 Cetraria spp. 1.2 9 8 1.0 8 aif Stereocaulon spp. 8 13 1.8 1.8 1.8 D sil Usnea sp. tr tr tr oll tr tr Lichens 53.8 56.3 60.8 50.6 51.4 54.8 Grasses and sedges 10.9 8.3 6.6 6.5 Sal 4.1 Equisetum spp. Dy), al sil ay), wl wl Grass and grass-like plants Hiei 8.4 6.7 6.7 522 4.2 Vaccinium vitis-idaea v. minus Soil God 2.8 3E9 4.1 3.4 Vaccinium myrtilloides 1.3 1.0 sf 3 1.0 stl Vaccinium uliginosum 1.8 48) 1.0 2.0 1.5 1.1 Ledum groenlandicum and L. decumbens 4.7 4.5 3.8 4.4 4.3 3.6 Salix spp. .1 ail tr 52 1 1 Empetrum nigrum tr tr tr tr tr 1 Andromeda polifolia 6 58) 4 6 a) 4 Chamaedaphne calyculata tr tr tr (Sr tr tr Betula glandulosa tr tr tr 5 Il 5 ll sil Picea spp. 4.1 5), 11 558) 6.7 8.5 9.4 Larix laricina tr tr tr 1 oll sil Pinus banksiana 1.6 1.6 1.6 3.0 3.1 3.1 Woody plants NO oS) 17.4 15.8 DD 23.3 DRA Bryophytes 3.4 3.4 Spall D3 Dies Bs ih Fungi 4 A 3 3 aS DP Others Sho 3.8 3.4 2.6 2.6 78) Unidentifiable material 14.0 14.1 13.3 17.8 17.5 16.6 Total 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 | 100.0 1This group included the “‘reindeer’’ lichens such as Cladonia alpestris, C. mitis, C. rangiferina, and C. uncialis. 2This group included the so-called cup and horn lichens such as Cladonia cornuta and C. gracilis. PROCEDURE Rumen samples were obtained from Manitoba during December, 1960, and frozen until used in the study. In the laboratory, the rumen contents were thawed, thoroughly mixed, and 250 ml was selected as a sample. Each rumen sample was washed through a gang of three sieves with the following mesh openings: 240 Tue CaNnapian Frevp-NatTurRAList Vol. 80 (1) 4.76 mm (sieve series mesh No. 4) (2) 2.83 mm (sieve series mesh No. 7) (3) 2.00 mm (sieve series mesh No. 10) After sufficient washing and agitation to assure that only proper sized particles were retained on the mesh, the particles from each sieve were placed in shallow pans of water, and the particles of each plant species were separated with tweezers. Magnification was used as an aid in separating the particles from the smallest size mesh. The volume of the separated material was measured by water displacement to the closest 0.1 ml, after excess surface moisture was removed, by blotting lightly. The material was then air-dried at room temperature for approximately 72 hours, and weighed to 1 mg accuracy on a Mettler, Type HS, balance. RESULTS AND CONCLUSIONS The volumetric data obtained from the largest mesh size and the cumulative, weighted percentages for the other two mesh sizes, for six rumen samples, are presented 1 in Table 1. Corresponding gravimetric data are tabulated in Table 1, also. It is evident that data obtained from the larger mesh sizes could He inaccurate and misleading. ‘The proportion of lichens generally increased as the mesh size became smaller. The proportion of lichens in the sieve with the largest mesh, therefore, was generally less than if the smaller plant particles were analyzed. On the other hand there were more plants of the graminoid group in the large meshed screen. While it cannot be assumed that forage particles of any one size have the same species composition, the particles from these three screens were probably reasonably representative of the recently ingested forage. ‘Therefore, the data from the three screens for each sample were combined to give a cumulative percentage composition. Cumulative, weighted percentages were obtained by totalling the weight or volume of each forage species from the screens and that figure was divided by the total of all the forage found within those screens. Cumulative, weighted percentages were also desirable since the weight or volume of forage retained on the meshes was variable among sieves and among samples. Because lichens are easily fragmented and pass through the smallest mesh there is a tendency for the percentage of lichen composition to be underestimated. Conversely, woody tissues, such as pine needles, and graminoid tissues are more resistant to fragmentation and their percentage composition may be overestimated. These results are in contrast to those of Dirschl, who studied sieve mesh size in relation to the food habits of pronghorn antelope. Diurschl (1962, p. 327-328) concluded “It is apparent that there is very little difference in the mean compositions found by means of these meshes. ‘Thus the choice of any of these three mesh sizes for quantitative analysis of rumen contents does not affect the results to any extent.” The present tests demonstrate that in analyzing barren-ground caribou rumen contents there can be differences in the composition of food species determined by the use of different mesh sizes. The diversity of plant material eaten by the two species might be the reason for the differing results obtained in the studies. In particular, the ease with 1966 ScorTteR: CariBou RUMEN CONTENTS 241 which lichens are fragmented may account for the smaller mesh size required to give reliable results when analyzing the forage composition from caribou rumens. Of the three meshes tested in the present study, the 2.00 mm mesh size would appear to give the best estimate. Use of mesh sizes smaller than that would make separation of species much more time consuming and their identification difficult. A comparison of volumetric data and gravimetric data (Table 1) from the same samples indicates that volume tends to provide higher percentage com- position figures for lichens and lower figures for woody plants. ‘This indicates that lichens have a slightly lower weight per unit volume than the woody tissues. The only lichen group, in the weighted averages of the six samples, for which volume measurements did not provide a higher figure was Stereocaulon. ‘This was anticipated since production studies had previously indicated that Stero- caulon was more dense than the other major forage lichens. Comparison of species present in small quantities is not warranted since volumetric analyses were less sensitive than weight when measuring very small amounts. Gravimetric methods had several advantages over volumetric procedures in this food habit study. In addition to being more rapid, weight values are more easily related to forage production studies, utilization studies, and nutritive values obtained by chemical analysis of forage. These are usually expressed in terms of air-dry weights. Volumetric procedures also have mechanical disadvantages, such as surface tension between small fragments and the water surface, and the need for blotting to remove excess water from the tissues to be measured. In light of the advantages offered by gravimetric methods, it is surprising that many rumen analyses found in recent literature are based on volumetric analysis. SUMMARY A study was undertaken to determine which of three sieve mesh sizes could best be employed to determine the percentage composition of forage samples from the rumens of six barren-ground caribou. ‘The second purpose was to compare the results obtained using wet volume and air-dry weight as methods of measurement. Of the meshes tested the smallest, with openings of 2.00 mm, appeared to provide the best results.. Gravimetric procedures offered advantages over volumetric ones. REFERENCES Buecuner, H. K. 1950. Life history, ecol- ogy, and range use of the pronghorn antelope in Trans-Pecos, Texas. American Midland Naturalist 43 (2) :257-354. Dirscut, H. J. 1962. Sieve mesh size re- lated to analysis of antelope rumen con- tents. Journal of Wildlife Management 26 (3) :327-328. Received for publication 20 June 1966 STUDIES OF THE BYRON BOG IN SOUTHWESTERN ONTARIO. XXVII. INSECTS ASSOCIATED WITH FLOWERING BLUEBERRY, VACCINIUM ATROCOCCUM (GRAY) HELLER WitiiaAmM W. Jupp Department of Zoology, University of Western Ontario, London, Ontario Tue Byron Boe has been described by Judd (1957). In 1956 a study was made of the succession and duration of blooming of plants (Judd, 1958) including the Black High-bush Blueberry, Vaccinium atrococcum (Gray) Heller, in which blooming occurred from May 26 to June 8. In 1965 a study was conducted to determine the period of blooming of this plant in that year and the seasonal distribution of the insects visiting the flowers while they were in bloom. A feature of V. atrococcum is that the flowers open before the leaves expand (Fernald, 1950). Beginning about May 9 in 1965 clusters of flower buds swelled noticeably. On May 15 flower buds on bushes in deep shade were still short, buds on bushes in partial shade had achieved their full length, one-quarter inch, and buds on bushes in full sun were of their full length with one or two corollas in bloom in each cluster. On succeeding days blooming was vigorous and on May 27 mature corollas were blown off many bushes during a storm. On June | most flowers had lost their corollas, and green berries, one-eighth inch in diameter, had formed below the calyxes. By June 6 only a few buds were still unopened, these being on bushes in deep shade. By June 8 all blooming was completed. ‘Thus flowers in bloom were present on the shrubs for 24 days, from May 15 to June 7. During the period of blooming the plants were examined for insects visiting the flowers in the early afternoon. The only insects collected were those actually seen feeding at the flowers or gathering pollen. They were captured either by netting with a net or by clapping them between the lid and jar of a poison jar. All insects captured were dusted with pollen, especially the bees in which the pollen baskets were filled. ‘Thus all the species collected were either potential or actual pollenizers of the flowers. The insects were pinned and labelled and were identified by M. Ivanochko (Vespidae) and H. E. Milliron (other Hymenoptera) of the Entomology Research Institute, Depart- ment of Agriculture, Ottawa. All specimens are deposited in the collection of the Department of Zoology, University of Western Ontario except those noted as “kept” in the Canadian National Collection. Account oF Insects CoLLECTED The following list shows the numbers of each species collected and the dates of collection. ‘These dates extend from May 18, three days after blooming began, to June 5, two days before blooming ended. 242 1966 Jupp: Byron Boe 243 HYMENOPTERA VESPIDAE Vespula arenaria (Fab.) —4: May 18, 20, 24. Vespula vulgaris (L.) —1: May 22. These two species were previously taken in a baited trap in 1956 (Judd, 1962) onthe bog. V. vulgaris is a widespread Nearctic species and V. arenaria is found in the Boreal region (Miller, 1961). Ancistrocerus spp. — May 22, 24. ANDRENIDAE Andrena bradleyi Vier. — 2: May 22, 24 (kept). Andrena carlini Ckll. — 1: June 4. Andrena ? carolina Vier. — 5: May 19 (3 kept), May 31. Andrena fragilis Sm. — 1: May 20 (kept). Andrena vicina Sm. — 9: May 18 (kept), 22, 24 (kept), 26, 30 (1 kept). HALIcrTIpAE Dialictus spp. — 5: May 18, 20, 22, 27. All species collected in Andrenidae and several species of Dialictus have been previously reported as visiting a wide range of flowers in Ontario (Knerer and Atwood, 1962, 1964). Amndrena bradleyi, A. carlin, A. carolina and A. vicina have been recorded from Vaccinium in particular (Knerer and Atwood, 1964). MEGACHILIDAE Osmua atriventris Cr. — 1: May 19. Osmuia coerulescens L.—1: May 27 (kept). These species are recorded as widely distributed in eastern North America by Muesebeck et al. (1951). APIDAE Nomada sp.—1: May 22. Ceratina dupla Say —1: May 26. Bombus affinis Cr.— 3: May 26 (1 kept), 27. Bombus bimaculatus Cr.—7: May 19, 20 (kept), 22, 27, 28 (kept), June 1 (kept), 3. Bombus griseocollis (DeG) — 1: May 24. Bombus impatiens Cr. — 2: May 27, June 5. Bombus perplexus Cr. — 2: May 18, June 1. Bombus sandersoni Fk\n. — 1: May 26 (kept). Bombus vagans Sm. — 1: May 28. Psithyrus citrinus (Sm.) — 1: May 30. All species collected in this family are recorded as being visitors at flowers (Muesebeck et al., 1951). Ceratina dupla was collected previously from marsh marigold at London by Judd (1964). All species of Bombus collected are recorded as being widespread in eastern North America by Muesebeck ez al. 244 Tue CANADIAN FieLp-NaATURALIST Vol. 80 (1951). Psithyrus citrinus is an obligate social parasite on bees of the genus Bombus and is recorded from northeastern North America (Muesebeck et al., OSI)’: REFERENCES Knerer, G., and C. E. Arwoop. 1962. An Fernatp, M. L. 1950. Gray’s Manual of Botany. Eighth edition. American Book Co., New York. 1932 pp. Jupp, W. W. 1957. Studies of the Byron Bog in southwestern Ontario I. Descrip- tion of the bog. Canadian Entomologist 89 (5) :235-238. 1958. Studies of the Byron Bog in southwestern Ontario II. The succes- sion and duration of blooming of plants. Canadian Field-Naturalist 72(3):119-121. 1962. Studies of the Byron Bog in southwestern Ontario XIII. Seasonal distribution of wasps (Hymenoptera: Ves- pidae). Entomological News 73 (3) :79-81. 1964. Insects associated with flowering marsh marigold, Caltha palustris L., at London, Ontario. Canadian Ento- mologist 96(11):1472-1476. annotated check list of the non-parasitic Halictidae (Hymenoptera) of Ontarie. Proceedings of the Entomological Society of Ontario 92:160-176. 1964. An annotated check list of the genus Andrena in Ontario (Hy- menoptera : Andrenidae). Proceedings of the Entomological Society of Ontario 94: 41-56. Mier, C. D. F. 1961. Taxonomy and distribution of Nearctic Vespidae. Cana- dian Entomologist 93 (Supplement 22). Sian PRs Mueseseck, C. F. W., K. V. Kromsein, H. K. Townes, et al. 1951. Hymenoptera of America north of Mexico—synoptic catalog. U.S. Department of Agriculture, Agricultural Monograph, No. 2. 1420 pp. Received for publication 9 June 1966 REVIEWS Marine Mammals of California By Anita E. Daucuerty. California Dept. Fish and Game, Sacramento. 1965. 87 pp. illus. $0.50 (U.S.). While there is a wide array of tech- nical literature dealing with seals, otters, porpoises and other marine mammals of the North Pacific Ocean, there is a not- able lack of accurate, illustrated volumes comprehensive enough to be of use to the field naturalist. A small paperbound booklet by Miss Daugherty, a Fish and Game biologist, meets these qualifica- tions. This is not simply a faunal enumera- tion of species found only off California as Miss Daugherty implies in her title, because few animal species, especially whales, respect political boundaries. The association of the grey whale, Pacific striped dolphin, northern right-whale dolphin, harbour porpoise, Dall porpoise, Baird beaked whale, perhaps Hubbs beaked whale, northern fur seal, Steller and Californian sea lions, harbour seal and the sea otter, along with more wide ranging whales and seals, is distinctive. This fauna is found not only off Cali- fornia but through much of the transi- tional water mass from central Baja California northward to American and Canadian waters and beyond. Some species are found in other parts of the Pacific, but in the Transitional Domain all of these animals are commonly found together. The waters off the coast of British Columbia are part of this same water mass, therefore Miss Daugherty’s account will be of use to Canadian naturalists. Published by the State of California im a convenient format, this handbook fills a large void for it is the ideal ship- board companion for those who wish a pictorial guide to whales, dolphins and seals. One of the positive features is the well-executed set of drawings by Mr. 245 Phil Schuyler. The text gives enough information to satisfy those who ask most of the general questions. There are introductory chapters that give background on the biology of marine mammals, a detailed drawing of each species as it appears in life, and a statement of size, coloration, food, dis- tribution, abundance and other informa- tion. Twenty-five species of cetaceans, seven species of pinnipeds and the sea otter are thus covered. A special section deals with “the sea lion controversy”: Do sea lions eat significant amounts of commercially important fishes? The answer is not forthcoming but Miss Daugherty points out that they also eat lampreys, serious predators of salmon. The drawings are supplemented by six photographs of typical species, two skull drawings and a key to tooth counts of skulls as an aid to identification. The lay reader will find a list of the meanings of scientific names and twenty-two re- ferences for further study. A few grammatical lapses, some mis- spellings and mistakes mar the booklet. Admittedly for the nonspecialist, this guidebook is not the place to introduce new information without factual verifi- cation and reference. The specialist will recognize new data on the distribution of Cuvier’s beaked whale, pygmy sperm whale and others but will bemoan the lack of documentation. Herein the shipboard observer work- ing off the Canadian west coast will find diagrams of whale spouts (borrowed from a similar booklet by Gordon Pike) and illustrations of each species and in- formation to verify his identification. The beachcomber will find useful data for identifying skulls and live animals. And the answers to a number of ques- tions are available by simply flipping the pages (there is a table of contents but no index). One of the biggest attributes 246 of this little book is its size: only 5 by 63 inches, it easily slips into a pocket. There should be no excuse for not hav- ing it at hand when next you sight a porpoise. Epwarp MitrcHELL Fisheries Research Board of Canada Arctic Biological Station Ste. Anne de Bellevue, Quebec The Lily Family (Liliaceae) of British Columbia By T. M. C. Tayror. Handbook No. 25 of the British Columbia Provincial Museum, Dept. of Recreation and Conservation, Victoria, B.C., 1966. 109 pp., 44 fig., 42 maps. $0.50. To the series of handbooks on the flora and fauna of British Columbia, Dr. Taylor has contributed this excellent volume on the Liliaceae. The twenty- four genera and forty-six species recog- nized are treated alphabetically. There are short generic descriptions, short species descriptions and notes on habitat, season, overall range, distribution in British Columbia and pertinent com- ments for each species. All but two are illustrated by full-page line drawings. Two-thirds of these illustrations are very striking, white on a black background. One wonders why they were not all done in this manner. Some accuracy is lost however, in the use of cross-hatch- ing in place of shading in these draw- ings. It is perhaps unfortunate that Calochortus lyallii is not illustrated. Al- though this species has only been col- lected but once, and that fifty years ago, this does not eliminate the possibility of its turning up again. Zygadenus gramin- eus is noted as being doubtfully distinct from Z. venenosus. Again it is unfortun- ate that the latter is not illustrated so that the reader can distinguish the two taxa for himself. Distribution maps depicting the range of each species in British Columbia are conveniently arranged alphabetically Tue CANADIAN FIeELD-NATURALIST Vol. 80 following the descriptive part of the text. These are followed by a short glos- sary of technical terms, which will make the book more useful to the beginner, an abbreviated list of literature refer- ences which would be useful to a student of the flora of the province and indexes to latin and colloquial names. Other volumes in the series, with prices, are listed on the inside back cover. W. J. Copy Plant Research Institute Central Experimental Farm Ottawa, Ontario Bugs or People By Wueever McMitian, Appleton-Century, New York, 1965. 228 pp. In Canada: General Publishing Co. Ltd., 30 Lesmill Road, Don Mills, Ontario. $5.95. The author gives a good historical review of the progress of modern agri- culture and of the problems that would ensue if pesticides were not used — with- out mentioning how commercial crops were grown in the past without the present level of heavy use. Even an experienced agricultural writer can get into trouble when he tries to deal with the pesticide problem. The author discusses careful agricultural use of chemicals and freedom from wildlife losses. He cites gulls as unharmed scaven- gers, apparently unaware of gull losses on the Great Lakes in 1963 and 1964 caused by pesticides from agricultural use building up in the food chains. He repeats the statistics of how many more people are killed by automobiles than by pesticides but carefully avoids mention- ing that use of autos is optional while use of food is not, so the pesticide victim does not have the option of avoiding damage. His comparison of reaction against pesticide use with acceptance of unsafe cars makes surprising reading when declining sales of autos are attri- buted to their inability to meet public demand for safety. 1966 No one objects to pesticides or their proper use but thinking persons would like to see them more specific in action so they will do the required job with fewer side effects on other parts of the fauna. The book is not an answer to Silent Spring or Pesticides and the Living Landscape. V.E. F. Somman Canadian Wildlife Service Ottawa, Ontario Vascular Flora of British Columbia — preliminary check list By T. M. C. Taytor, Dept. of Botany, Uni- versity of British Columbia, Vancouver 8, B.C., 1966. 31 pp. processed. There is a great need for a modern flora of British Columbia. Students of botany in that province have only the now sadly out-of-date Flora of southern British Columbia published in 1915 by J. K. Henry, to which J. W. Eastham added his “Supplement” in 1947, or the floras of adjacent areas of Alberta, Alaska and northwestern United States. A decisive step towards a new flora is the publication of the present list and Dr. Taylor is to be commended for it. In the list a total of 112 families, 623 genera and 2216 species are recognized. Of the latter 340 marked by an asterisk are adventives that appear to be estab- lished. The list is divided into three sections: Pteridophyta, Gymnospermae and Angiospermae. Within each of these, the families, genera and species are listed alphabetically. To one familiar with the Englerian system, it is somewhat dis- concerting to find the Cyperaceae next to the Cucurbitaceae but for students using the book for quick reference, the alphabetical sequence might be said to be more convenient. No subspecific taxa are recognized, but at least some entities are treated at the specific level which by other writers are considered to be of lesser rank e.g. Polypodium glycyrrhiza (P. vulgare ssp. occidentale) and Poly- REvIEWws 247 podium hesperium (P. vulgare ssp. col- umbianum). Where are some errors in spelling and in a few cases the authori- ties are omitted but these do not greatly lessen the value of the catalogue. W. J. Copy Plant Research Institute Ottawa, Ontario Our Natural World Compiled and edited with comments by Har Bortanp. Doubleday and Company, Inc., Garden City, New York, 1965. 843 pp. Jn Canada: Doubleday Publishers, 105 Bond Street, Toronto 2. $11.50. Naturalists, their likes and dislikes are all different. Hal Borland has made such a wide choice of the natural history literature of America in the hundred odd selections grouped in this book that whatever your interest may be, you will find it included. Because of his own long experience in the field and his ability as a writer he has chosen the best from the works of some 90 authors. The familiar passages from well-known writers like Thoreau, Teale and Leopold are interspersed with writings by many less well-known natu- ralists. There are also works by a group of authors including David Crockett, Mark Twain and Washington Irving who are not commonly regarded as nature writers. The quotations are grouped under headings —the woodlands, the watery places, the plains and deserts, the moun- tains, animals, birds, insects and plants and trees. They include historical ma- terial, carefully recorded observations and fictional treatments. A number of line drawings by Rachel Horne add to the reader’s pleasure. All naturalists, amateur and _profes- sional alike will find here things of enjoyment and interest. They will thank Hal Borland for the care and wisdom shown in his selections. V. E. F. Sopman Canadian Wildlife Service Ottawa, Ontario 248 Wildlife Biology By Raymonp F. Dasman. John Wiley and Sons Inc., New York. 1964. 231 pp. $5.95 Wes: This book is in the tradition of Aldo Leopold’s Game Management of 1933 and Durward Allen’s Our Wiaildlife Legacy of 1954. It is a university-level text in ecology that is, like the other two, well enough written to be read for enjoyment. After tracing two hundred years of wildlife history in California, from wild abundance to scarcity and finally to managed abundance, the author deals with the more general subjects of thabi- tat, migration, population dynamics, re- gulation of wild populations, land use and its impact, and methods of studying wildlife. Population discussion includes the human population problem as well as the way we mis-manage various wild populations we try to control. Every thinking citizen of North America could profit from reading this book. It is a pleasure to review a book in which the author says so well so much that needs to be said. V. E. F. SoLMan Canadian Wildlife Service Ottawa, Ontario OTHER NEW TITLES Hurry Spring! By Srertinc Nortu. Drawings by Carl Burger. E. P. Dutton & Co., Inc., N.Y. 1966. 58 pp. In Canada: Clarke, Irwin & Co., Ltd. $4.65. Those who enjoyed the warm, often nostalgic, prose of Rascle will find the same hand at work here. Although the publisher claims an audience from “nine to ninety”, some of the text is more ob- viously appealing to younger readers while other parts — such as the author’s remembered feelings at age seven on the death of his mother — are a bit poignant Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 80 for them. The book could have been, more aptly, titled “fragments of North” as this selection of random comments on nature, the coming of spring, and per- sonal boyhood reminiscences makes a slender volume (58 pages) for the price ($4.65). One can not help but wish for longer contributions from Mr. North’s pen — a full length account of his boy- hood and family is certainly due his readers now. The Sense of Wonder By Racuet Carson. Photographs by Charles Pratt and others. Harper and Row, Publishers, New York and Evanston. 1965. 95 pp. (In Canada: Longmans Canada, Ltd., Don Mills, Ontario. $6.25). Miss Carson intended, the publishers tell us, to expand the brief text that ac- companies these photographs of nature in black-and-white and in colour, but time ran out for her. It remains a simple yet effective tribute to her own appre- ciation of the natural world. Nature and the Camper: A Guide to Safety and Enjoyment for Campers, Hikers, and Fishermen on the Pacific Slope and the Southwest Deserts By Mary V. and Wit11am Hoop. The Ward Ritchie Press. 1966. 157 pp. (In Canada: General Publishing Co. Ltd., Don Mills, Ontario). Although most of the text applies specifically to the southwestern United States, the general information included will be of interest and value for the intended audience anywhere. A quick review of the essentials of such topics as rabid and poisonous animals—recognition and what to do if bitten—are among the many pertinent topics competently covered. The Evolution of the Mammals of the Queen Charlotte Islands, British Columbia By J. Bristor Fostor. Occasional Papers of the British Columbia Provincial Museum No. 14. 1965. 130 pp. 1966 Marine Algae of British Columbia and Northern Washington, Part I: Chlorophyceae (Green Algae). By Rosert F. Scace. Queens Printer. Ot- tawa. 1966. National Museum of Canada Bulletin 207, 257 pp. A Preliminary Report on the Effects of Phosphamidon on Bird Populations in Central New Brunswick. By C. Davin Fowte. Canadian Wildlife Ser- vice Occasional Papers No. 7. Queens Printer, Ottawa. 1965. 54 pp. Plants of the Mackenzie River Delta and Reindeer Grazing Preserve By W. J. Copy. Plant Research Institute, Research Branch, Canada Department of Agriculture, Ottawa. 1965. 56 pp. (Copies available from W. J. Cody, Plant Research Institute. ) A Survey of the Vascular Plants of Lambton County, Ontario By Luto O. Gatser, compiled by Raymonp J. Moore. Plant Research Institute, Re- search Branch, Canada Department of Agriculture, Ottawa. 1966. 122 pp. (Copies available from R. J. Moore, Plant Research Institute. ) REVIEWS 249 JOURNALS RECEIVED Boissiera. Volume 11. Conservatoire et Jardin botaniques, Ville de Genéve. 1965. Biota. Volume V, No. 42. Lima, Peru. March 1965. Candollea. Volume 20. Organe des Conservatoire et Jardin botaniques de la Ville de Genéve. 1965. Biologica. Fasciculo XXXVI. Instituto de Biolo- gica “Juan Noe” de la Facultad de Medicina de la Universidad de Chile. July 1964. Revista del Museo de Historia Natural de Mendoza. Volumen XVII. Mendozo, Argentina. August 1965. Biologica. Fasciculo XX XVII. Instituto de Biolo- gica “Juan Noe” de la Facultad de Medi- cina de la Universidad de Chile. July 1965. 94 pp. Candollea. Organe des Conservatoire et Jar- din Botaniques de la Ville de Geneve. VoLUME 21/1. Genéve, 1966. NOTES Life History Notes on the Goldeye, Hiodon alosoides (Rafinesque), in the North Saskatchewan River in Alberta As part of a study of the limnology of the North Saskatchewan River in the vicinity of Edmonton, Alberta, the fish fauna was examined during 1964 and 1965. This brought to light certain as- pects of the ecology of the goldeye which warrant attention. The goldeye was often captured by anglers when still-fishing using worms or insects for bait. Adults of the species were the most abundant fish in gill net catches, out- numbering all other species combined. The North Saskatchewan River is very swift. It is nearly impossible to set a gill net in the current, so nets were set in the mouths of two tributaries and in one blind channel of the river. When the river is high, as during the spring and summer, these sites contain what is es- sentially river water and fish are attrac- ted to them because of the reduced cur- rent. In 1964 nets were not set until June 19, when goldeye were found to be abundant. In mid-July they were very common, but from August 1 onwards they were absent. In 1965, the goldeye was not taken in nets set on June 4, but were present during mid-July. Anglers were rarely observed to capture the species before the last week in May. The movement into the river near Edmonton might be partially temperature depen- dent as they are not found until the water warms rapidly to 10 or 12°C. Of 76 goldeye taken in the nets, the age range was 4-8 years, with a fork length range of 30.6 — 39.2 cm. The age- length relationships of some of the speci- mens is shown below. 250 Number of Length Age range in cm Mean specimens 4 male 30.6—33.8 32.4 4 female = — 0 5 male 31.1—35.1 32.8 20 female = = 0 6 male 32.2—36.3 34.2 13 female 33.0—38.1 34.9 5 7 male 34.5—35.2 34.7 3 female 34.7—39.2 37.3 3 8 male = = 0 female = 38.8 1 At any given age the females seem to be somewhat larger than the males. Many goldeye taken by anglers were examined, but only one specimen younger than four years was observed. This was esti- mated to be three years old. It is thought unlikely that the younger age classes were missing because of differential cap- ture technique, as the nets varied in size from # inch to 43 inches stretched mesh. When goldeye were first examined in the spring the gonads were small. They increased in size throughout the summer, but when the first fish were taken the next spring there was again no evidence of spawning. Sprules (1947) found that the goldeye in the Saskatchewan River in Manitoba entered marshy areas and spawned immediately after breakup in the spring. By August young goldeye, 6.3 cm in length, were abundant in the river. There are no marshy regions con- nected to the river near Edmonton and the adults do not seem to be present in the area until one month after breakup. In the present study more than 15,000 fish were captured with a commonsense seine. Seining was done in all habitats found in the area. It seems unlikely that young goldeye, if present, would be missed. This leads to the conclusion that the adult fish do not spawn in the area, and in fact do not frequent this stretch of the river until they are three or four years old. Reed (1962) has shown that $$ —- 5 fae tel 1966 there is a yearly upstream migration in the North Saskatchewan River in the spring and a corresponding downstream migration in the fall. It seems likely that the fish found near Edmonton spawn further downstream and then move into this region during the summer. This 1s of interest, as it is unusual for a fish species to continue what was initiated as a spawning migration for the express purpose of feeding. Of 64 specimens in which the sex was determined it was found that the ratio of males to females was 51/13, which suggests that more males move upstream than do females. Sprutes, W. M. 1947. A management program for goldeye (Amphiodon alo- soides) in Manitoba’s marsh regions. Canadian Fish Culturist 2(1):9-12. Reep, E. B. 1962. Limnology and fisheries of the Saskatchewan River in Saskat- chewan. Department of Natural Resources, Government of Saskatchewan, Fisheries Report No. 6. 48 pp. Cotin G. PATERSON Department of Zoology University of Alberta Edmonton, Alberta 18 February 1966 First Canadian Record of the Brackish Water Anthozoan Nematostella vectensis Stephenson Nematostella vectensis is a small (10-20 mm) anthozoan that was discovered on the Isle of Wight, England, and first described in 1935 by Stephenson (British sea anemones, The Ray Society, Lon- don). Subsequently it was reported by Crowell (1946, Journal Washington Aca- demy of Sciences 36(2): 57-60) from a brackish pond at Woods Hole, Mas- sachusetts, and more recently by Hand (1957, Journal Washington Academy of Sciences 46(12): 411-414) from a marsh pond in San Francisco Bay, California. In the intervening years it has been found in shallow brackish pools over Notes 251 much of the British Isles and along the West Coast of North America from Southern California to Puget Sound (Cadet Hand, personal communication, November 1965). On October 14, 1965, this unusual anemone was discovered quite by accident in two brackish ponds on the shores of the Minas Basin near Canning, Kings County, Nova Scotia. This is the first Canadian report and apparently the second locality record for the Atlantic Seaboard of North America. (Sears Crowell, personal communication, December 1965). The two small ponds from which specimens were collected are located in Spartina marshes that border the south side of the Canning River one mile east of the town of Canning. Associated with the tremendous local tidal range of near- ly thirty feet are the steep sided gullies which deeply dissect and thoroughly drain most of these salt marshes. Brack- ish ponds are rather the exception in this habitat. Of the two ponds in ques- tion, one contained masses of Cladophora and Chaetomorpha algae and the other was dominated by the pondweed Ruppia sp. [he anemone was found in mats of both plants as well as in the pond bottom ooze. Newmatostella vectensis does not attach to firm substrata but rather lies buried with only a short portion of the body exposed with its whorl of sixteen transparent tentacles spread out. At the time of our local discovery, the authors were searching for marine gastropods and in disturbing the algae and the sub- stratum many tiny white symmetrical “blobs” were noticed drifting in the water. Upon closer examination these objects appeared to be minute anemones. Fortunately the “Keys to the Marine Invertebrates of the Woods Hole Re- gion” (R. I. Smith, Editor, 1964) was at hand and tentative identification to Nematostella was later confirmed from specimens sent to Dr. Cadet Hand. It may well be that Nezzatostella oc- curs in other salt marshes of eastern 252 Tue CANADIAN FrieLp-NATURALIST Canada and should be looked for. When expanded it has the appearance of a typical sea anemone and possesses 16 tentacles and 8 mesenteries, but it is nearly transparent and even in an aquarium it is inconspicuous. However, when disturbed it contracts and becomes a conspicuous squat, pale grey mass. Examination under a dissection micro- scope will reveal the presence of hun- dreds of nematosomes which are known only from this genus. (For illustrations of the anatomy the reader is referred to Crowell 1946). Each nematosome is a found mass (30 microns) of flagellated cells bearing nematocysts and can be found swimming about the enteron and out into the cavities of the tentacles. The function of these bodies has not been determined. The authors successfully preserved specimens by allowing them to expand in a petri dish of seawater and then anaesthetizing by adding a generous amount of magnesium sulphate crystals. In three or four hours the anemones no longer responded to touch, and were then flooded with 5% neutral formalin. Our best expanded specimens were pre- pared by gently injecting the preserva- tive into the enteron of the relaxed Nematostella by a fine hypodermic in- serted through the pharnyx. The result is a ballooned transparent specimen with eight well defined mesenteries. Permission to use the unpublished dis- tributional data supplied in correspon- dence with Dr. Cadet Hand, University of California, Berkeley, for the West Coast area; and from Dr. Sears Crowell, Indiana University for the East Coast, is gratefully acknowledged. This investi- gation was financed in part by Canadian National Research Council Grant A- 2009. KANIAULONO BAILEY J. SHERMAN BLEAKNEY Department of Biology Acadia University Wolfville, Nova Scotia 24 January 1966 Vol. 80 Mockingbirds in New Brunswick RECENT notes on sightings of Mocking- birds, Mimus polyglottos, in Alberta and of breeding Mockingbirds in Newfound- land (Canadian Field-Naturalist 79(3): 208-209) have prompted me to submit these observations. Over the last several years the Mock- ingbird has been reported more and more frequently in New Brunswick—usually in southern parts though it has been re- ported as far north as Fredericton. A total of four were reported in the 1965 New Brunswick Christmas Bird count (Nature News, New Brunswick Museum, January 1966) and my own records go back to 1961. I had seen this species several years ago at Point Pelee, Ontario, and about Mon- treal, P.Q.; so I recognized it in 1961 at first sighting at St. Andrews, N.B., on December 2. This single bird remained here for the winter and was last seen about mid-May, 1962 by Dr. Neil Bourne, then on the staff of the Fisheries Re- search Board’s Biological Station. In this interval I saw it myself eight to ten times as did a number of other people. It spent a good deal of time about the garden property of Dr. John Hart here in St. Andrews. It was noticed feeding on small rose hips and on frozen apples. In his note referred to above MacGillivray mentioned apples as a favourite item in the Mockingbird’s diet. It is not known whether our 1961-62 visitor fell victim to a cat or some other predator or simply went elsewhere. In 1964 a single Mockingbird was seen at St. Andrews by Dr. Bourne, September 30. Another one was seen at St. John, October 17-18 and still another at Sack- ville, October 24-25 (Nature News, N.B. Museum, November 1964). In 1965 I first saw a Mockingbird a few blocks from my home on November 10. It was eating small rose hips in a hedge. On November 14 two birds flew to the same hedge. Later one bird came at inter- vals to a small apple tree near my back 1966 door and both birds were seen together close to my house four times. The last time, November 28, after flying about, they finally alighted on the lawn about four or five feet apart, facing each other and with their tails cocked up—quite a pugilistic attitude. A single bird came six times during December, the last date December 24. During December and until January 20, 1966, one bird quite regularly visited the apple tree and feeder of Miss Jacqueline Davis, who lives eight blocks from my home. There was no evidence to show whether both birds were still about. No song was heard but more than once a bird was heard to give a series of em- phatic calls or scolding notes quite similar to those of the Brown Thrasher. Three Sharp-shinned Hawks, two adults and one immature, have been seen about St. Andrews this winter. These predators may well be responsible for the disappearance of our mockingbirds since January 20. Miss H. Witta MacCousrey 78 Mary Street St. Andrews, N.B. 28 February 1966 Seaside Sparrows in New Brunswick Tue collection of a Seaside Sparrow (Ammospiza maritima) in the Cole Harbour-Chezzetcook, N.S., area (Can- adian Field-Naturalist 79(3): 211-212) has finally and firmly established the oc- currence of this species in our area. I was surprised to learn that this was the first for Canada because I have two sight records (see below) and feel sure there must be others with similar or better information that might be pooled now to give a fuller knowledge of this interest- ing species. On September 16, 1951, at the St. Andrews town dump, which is on the Notes 253 edge of a small salt-water marsh, I saw a bird which I am quite satisfied was a Seaside Sparrow. It sat in full view on a pile of brush, and allowed me to study it with binoculars for about 10 minutes at approximately 40 feet. The two face markings were clearly defined against the otherwise dark head. It agreed in all particulars with the bird shown in Peter- son’s Field Guide, and was easy to dis- tinguish from the Sharp-tailed Sparrows with which I am familiar. Unfortunately I had nobody with me to corroborate my identification. On October 13, 1965, I again saw a Seaside Sparrow. This one was about the rocks of a sea-wall, at the landward end of the beach road, which at low tide gives access to Minister’s Island, about a mile outside St. Andrews. On this occa- sion I immediately but vainly tried to contact Dr. John Rigby of St. Andrews, who is a competent “birder”, in hopes of establishing a corroborated sighting re- cord. Finally, when we did team up for the search, we could not find the bird again. I am fully convinced that both these birds were Seaside Sparrows, though realizing that uncorroborated sightings cannot be accepted as official records. Miss H. Wirtta MacCousrey 78 Mary Street St. Andrews, N.B. 28 February 1966 Redfish, Sebastes marinus var. mentella, from the Kennebecasis River, N.B. On January 15, 1966, a fish was brought to the New Brunswick Museum for identification by Mr. Arthur Wright who had caught it on January 8 in the Kennebecasis River about one-half mile from Millidgeville. The fish, caught on a hake line through the ice in 90 feet of water, was 254 deep red in color and proved to be a redfish, Sebastes marinus var. mentella; considered by some ichthyologists as a full species, Sebastes mentella (see Templeman 1959). The specimen measured (standard length) 305 mm; the diameter of the eye 29 mm; from the eye to tip of snout 25 mm; color of eye reddish; chin sharp; the peritoneum black. The larger eye, the red color of the body and head and the protruding chin would place this specimen in the mentella variety. The mentella variety is usually taken at greater depths than the sarinus variety, so the capture of the mentella specimen in 90 feet of water and several miles from the open Atlantic proves interesting. The Kennebecass River is part of the Saint John River system and Millidge- ville lies several miles above the Rever- sing Falls where the Saint John River empties into the Atlantic. The lower reaches of the Kennebecasis occupy a sunken river valley, separated from the sea by a sill, with extreme depths in excess of 200 feet. Although surface waters are only brackish the salinity at greater depths is about 22 per cent and hake, lumpfish and other marine species are caught through the ice in winter. Sebastes marinus was listed by Perley (1852) as taken in the Bay of Fundy at Saint John in June 1851, long before varieties were recognized. Trites (1960) reported one redfish taken here 1957-58 but identified it only as Sebastes marinus. The specimen obtained by Mr. Wright is now preserved in the New Brunswick Museum fish collection. REFERENCES Pertey, M. H. 1852. Reports on the sea and river fisheries of New Brunswick. TEMPLEMAN, W. 1959. Redfish distribu- tion in the North Atlantic. Bulletin of the Fisheries Research Board of Canada 120: 1-173. Trites, R. W. 1960. An oceanographical and biological reconnaissance of Kenne- becasis Bay and the Saint John Estuary. Tue CaNapIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 80 Journal of the Fisheries Research Board of Canada 17:377-408. W. A. Sourres S. W. GorHam New Brunswick Museum Saint John, N.B. 15 March 1966 A Summer Tanager in Manitoba A Summer Tanager, Piranga rubra rubra (Linnaeus), was found dead on the Saskatchewan River shore of Rahl’s Island, adjacent to The Pas, Manitoba, on May 25, 1966, by Mr. Harvey Ander- son. The specimen was made into a study skin by Mr. Sam Waller and is in Mr. Waller’s collection. Through the kindness of Mr. Waller I have been able to examine the speci- men. It is an immature male assuming first nuptial plumage and is referable to the nominate race. Mr. Waller noted that it appeared to be in breeding condi- tion. There seems to be no previous valid record of this tanager in Canada west of southern Ontario. W. Ear GoprrRey National Museum of Canada Ottawa, Ontario 8 July 1966 The Western Painted Turtle near Gilbert Plains, Manitoba In 1958 the distribution of the Western Painted Turtle, Chrysemys picta bellit, in Manitoba was summarized by C. D. Bird (Canadian Field-Naturalist 72(1): 28-31). Concerning the central and west- ern part of the province Bird reported it as “restricted to the Red River and its tributaries, the Rat, the Seine, the Assi- niboine, the Souris, the Minnedosa and the Qu’Appelle rivers.” I had once seen a Western Painted Turtle on the bank of the Wilson River, about eight miles east of Gilbert Plains, 1966 and had several reports of sightings in the Valley River. Francis R. Cook, to whom I reported these observations, advised me that Gilbert Plains was outside the known range of this species and requested fur- ther information and, if possible, a con- firming specimen. Accordingly I col- lected a number of reports of sightings in the Valley River, the most valuable of which (from Mrs. Joe Gallant) was that of several juveniles sunning themselves on a boulder. I then arranged with some of the Brickburn school pupils to collect specimens. In the late summer of 1966 I acquired two specimens which had been captured by David Kulchyski in the Valley River near the village of Gilbert Plains. These were sent to Francis R. Cook of the National Museum of Canada where they are catalogued as NMC 9514 (female) and NMC 9524 (male). The Valley River rises in the Duck Mountain and discharges into Lake Dauphin, receiving in its course the waters of Pleasant Valley Creek from the Riding Mountain. Its elevation at the village of Gilbert Plains is approximately 1300 feet. The nearest previous locality reports for this turtle appear to be the Onanole and Riding mountain sites re- ported by Bird. Onanole, about 50 miles south of Gilbert Plains, is in the portion of the Riding Mountain drained by the Minnedosa River into the Assiniboine. Bird does not indicate the specific site of the Riding Mountain specimen except that it was in the Assiniboine drainage basin. The principal streams rising in the Riding Mountain are the Birdtail Creek and the Minnedosa River, both discharg- ing into the Assiniboine; the Whitemud River discharging into Lake Manitoba; and the Wilson, Vermilion, Valley, Ochre and Turtle rivers discharging into Lake Dauphin. There are numerous places where turtles could cross the height of land between the Assiniboine River and the Lake Dauphin drainage basins. Notes 255 I have a further relevant report from Harold Kroll of Roblin, Manitoba, who saw one specimen in the Shell River about nine miles southeast of the town of Roblin, and three specimens together where Manitoba Highway No. 83 skirts Goose Lake just south of Roblin. These specimens were in the Assiniboine drainage basin but a considerable distance northwest of any previous reports. James L. Parker Gilbert Plains, Manitoba 24 August 1966 Clay-colored Sparrow Nesting at Ottawa, Ontario As Snyder (1957) has pointed out, the Clay-colored Sparrow, Spizella pallida, is a western bird that is expanding its range eastward. Snyder (1942) recorded its first known breeding in Ontario east of Lake Superior, a small colony nesting at Little Rapids, near Thessalon, in 1931. Baillie (1957) summarized its nesting in southern Ontario: Halton County in 1950; Grey and Simcoe counties in 1952; and in Waterloo and Wentworth coun- ties in 1955. In the Ottawa region, the Clay- colored Sparrow was first recorded on May 20, 1954, when a singing individual was observed by several persons, includ- ing the writer. This was recorded by Mills (1957). Since that time the writer has noted single singing individuals in the region on July 1, 1961, and again on May 31, 1964. Farther east, the species has been recorded by Montgomery (1961) near Phillipsburg and Ste. Anne de Bellevue, Quebec, in spring, 1960; and by Cayouette (1962) who recorded an individual at Ste. Catherine, west of Quebec City, June 17 to July 5, 1962. South of Ottawa at Merrickville, a sing- ing male was observed from July 1 to 10, 1951, by Terrill (1952). Some 250 miles 256 north of Ottawa, the writer collected a silent male near Amos, Quebec, on July 5, 1965. Turning again to the Ottawa region: On May 22, 1966, Kenyon Ross and Paul Frigon observed three, possibly four, Clay-colored Sparrows near Uplands air- port in Ottawa and secured good photo- graphs. When I visited the airport vicinity on May 28, I quickly located at least three individuals there. Two singing males had established territories and one of them seemed paired with a third individual. Suspicious that they were breeding, I returned there on June 4. Eventually I flushed a Clay-colored Sparrow, apparently a female, from a six-foot-tall Scots pine, Pinus sylvestris, and in the thick branches located a well- hidden nest which contained four eggs. The male alternately fussed and sang near by. The female returned to the nest some fifteen minutes later. A hundred yards away, also in a young, low, pine plantation, another male sang regularly. Also in 1966, the writer observed two additional singing Clay-colored Spar- rows in the Ottawa region, one in Gati- neau Park, Quebec, on May 28, and one near Blossom Park, Ottawa, on June 5. The latter was still present on June 12. The writer was absent from Ottawa for the remainder of June and by early July neither the Blossom Park nor the Gati- neau Park birds could be found. When I visited the Uplands airport nesting site on July 1, I was unable to re-locate the nest. Both parents, however, Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 80 were very much in evidence. One carried a small caterpillar in its beak and both remained greatly agitated throughout the duration of my stay. On July 10 both males were singing but no further ob- servations were possible due to my absence from Ottawa throughout the following five weeks. REFERENCES Baur, J. L. 1957. Changes in Ontario’s Birdlife in the past 36 years. Toronto Field-Naturalists’ Club Newsletter 145: 1-7. CaYOuETTE, RayMoNpD. 1962. Observations Ornithologiques Eté 1962. Bulletin Orni- thologique 7(4): 2-7. Mus, Eric L. 1957. Some Ottawa Bird Observations. Canadian Field-Naturalist 71(3): 155. Montcomery, GeorceE H. 1961. Clay- colored Sparrow in southern Quebec. Canadian Field-Naturalist 75 (4): 263-264. Snyper, L. L. 1957. Changes in the Avi- fauna of Ontario. Jn F. A. Urquhart, edi- tor, Changes in the Fauna of Ontario. University of Toronto Press, 75 pp. . Snyper, L. L. 1942. Summer birds of the Sault Ste. Marie Region, Ontario, pp. 121- 153. In L. L. Snyder, E. B. S. Logier and T. B. Kurata. A Faunal Investigation of the Sault Ste. Marie Region, Ontario. Transactions of the Royal Canadian Insti- tute 24(1): 99-165. Territt, Lewis MclI. 1952. The Clay- colored Sparrow in Southeastern Ontario. Canadian Field-Naturalist 66(5): 145-147. W. Eart GopFrey National Museum of Canada Ottawa, Ontario 28 September 1966 Ws INDEX TO VOLUME 80 Compiled by Mrs. G. R. Hanes Abies balsamifera, 71 Abundance of lemmings at Aberdeen Lake, District of Keewatin, 1959-63, by A. H. Macpherson, 89 Acanthis flammea, 180 Accipiter cooperii, 99 Acer niger, 70; rubrum, 196; saccharum, 70 Achillea, 30; lanulosa, 16, 29; millefolium, 30, 199; sibirica, 16 Acroneuria, 203 Actaea rubra, 137 Actinogyra muhlenbergii, 142 Additional bird observations at Bathurst In- let, N.W.T., by J. P. Kelsall, 178 Agastache anthiodora, 29 Agoseris glauca, 29 Agropyron, 24; smithii, 29, subsecundum, 6, trachycaulum, 6, 29, 71, 131 Agrostis borealis, 131; scabra, 6, 29, 131 Agrypnia, 203 Alberta, Life history notes on the goldeye in North Saskatchewan River, by C. G. Paterson, 250. Alberta and the Mackenzie District, N.W.T., Food habits of the lynx in, by C. G. van Zyll de Jong, 18 Alberta, The Mammals of, reviewed by A. W. F. Banfield, 110 Alberta, southwestern, Iris muissouriensis in, etc., by B. de Vries, 158 Alberta, Summer food habits of Red-tailed Hawks near Rochester, by E. C. Meslow and L. B. Keith, 98 Alces alces, 21. 110 Alectoria nadvornikiana, 142 Aletris farinosa, 198 Allium canadense, 72: schoenoprasum, 10 Allosmerus, 230; elongatus, 229 Alnus crispa, 10, 136, 168; tenuifolia, 10 Alopecurus aequalis, 6 Alopex lagopus, 89 Alosa pseudoharengus, 205 Amelanchier alnifolia, 12, 26, 29 Ammospiza maritima, 253 Amnicola limosa, 204; lustrica, 204 Amphicarpa bracteata, 198 Analysis of the movement and growth of juvenile brook trout (Salvelinus fonti- nalis) from rotenone collections taken in the Nabisipi River and vicinity, Quebec, by G. Power, 213 Anas acuta, 76, 99; carolinensis, 76; discors, 76; platyrhynchos, 20, 76; rossii, 116; ru- bripes, 182; strepera, 76 Ancistrocerus, 243 Andrena bradleyi, 243; carlini, 243; carolina, 243; fragilis, 243; vicina, 243 Andrews, C. W. Landlocked Atlantic salmon (Salmo salar L.) in the Terra Nova River system, Newfoundland, 101 Andromeda polifolia, 16, 138, 239 Andropogon gerardi, 198; scoparius, 24, 198 Androsace septentrionalis, 16 Anemone canadensis, 29, 198; cylindrica, 198; multifida, 11, 137; parviflora, 137; patens, 11, 30; richardsonii, 11 Angelica lucida, 169 Anodonta grandis, 204 Anodontoides ferussacianus, 204 Antelope, pronghorn, 238 Antennaria campestris, 17; canescens, 17, microphylla, 30; neglecta, 140; pulcher- rima, 140; rosea, 17, 140, umbrinella, 140 Anthus spinoletta, 117 Antilocapra americana, 238 Apios americana, 198 Apocynum androsaemifolium, 198; canna- binum, 198 Aquila chrysaétos, 178 Aquilegia brevistyla, 11 Arabis retrofracta, 12 Arachnida, reviewed by Robin Leech, 172 Arctostaphylos alpina, 120, 138; arctica, 120; rubra, 16; uva-ursi, 13, 16, 29, 31, 139 Arenaria dawsonensis, 11; macrophylla, 11, 136; stricta, 136 Arenaria interpres, 178 Argus, George W. Botanical investigations in northeastern Saskatchewan: The subarctic Patter- son-Hasbala Lakes region, 119 Arnica alpina, 17; lonchophylla, 17, 140 Artemisia campestris, 140; caudata, 17; fri- gida, 30; gnaphaloides, 29 Asclepias sullivantii, 198, syriaca, 198, tube- rosa, 198; viridiflora, 198 Asellus, 202 Asio flammeus, 61 Aster azureus, 199; ericoides, 199; laevis, 29, 30, 199; novae-angliae, 199; subulatus, 199; umbellatus, 199 257 rN al co Astragalus alpinus, 138, americanus, 138, eucosmus, 138, yuRonis, 12 Athripsodes, 203 Atriplex patula, 198 Aulocomnium palustre, 141 Aythya affinis, 76, americana, 76, collaris, 76, 182: marila, 114, 178; valisneria, 76 Baetisca, 202 Bailey, Kaniaulono, and J. Sherman Bleakney First Canadian record of the brackish water anthozoan Nematostella vec- tensis Stephenson, 251 Ba'anus calidus, 164; trigonus, 164 Banfield, A. W. F. Review of: The Continents We Live On: Europe: A Natural History, 55 Review of: The Mammals of Alberta, 101 Review of: Tuktu: A Question of Sur- vival, 113 Baptisia tinctoria, 198 Barbarea orthoceras, 12 Barlow, Jon C. Status of the Wood Ibis, the Fulvous Tree Duck and the Wheatear in On- tario, 183 Basiaeschna janata, 203 Beals, Edward W. Vegetation of cottonwood forests on Kodiak Island, 166 Bendell, J. F. An unusual number of dead Ring-billed Gulls, 62 Benthos of four Lake Superior bays, by M. L. H. Thomas, 200 Beryx decadactylus, 58 Betula alleghaniensis, 160, caerulea, 187, caerulea-grandis, 187; excelsa, 160; fonti- nalis, 136; glandulosa, 10, 26, 136, 239, kenaica, 168, lenta, 160; lutea, 160; occi- dentalis, 10; papyrifera, 4, 10, 136, 147-157, 187; populifolia, 187; pubescens, 188; pu- mula, 10; resinifera, 136; verrucosa, 188 Bird observations, Additional, at Bathurst In- let, N.W.T., by J. P. Kelsall, 178 Bird records from the Peace River district, Some unusual, by W. Ray Salt, 114 Birds, Incubation periods of some subarctic, by J. R. Jehl, Jr., and D. J. T. Hussell, 179 Birds, A New Dictionary of, reviewed by W. E. Godfrey, 111 Birds in the Perry River area, N.W.T., New nesting records and clarification of breed- ing status, by S. G. Sealy, 116 Birds of Prey of the World, reviewed by W. E. Godfrey, 57 Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 80 Bison bison, 31 Blackbird, Reg-winged, 46 Black Swift nest in British Columbia, by James Grant, 60 Bleakney, J. Sherman An unexplained mass mortality of turtles, 115 Blood, Donald A. The Festuca scabrella association in Rid- ing Mountain National Park, Mani- toba, 24 Review of: The Great Arc of the Wild Sheep, 55 Bluebird, Western, 46 Bombus affinis, 243; bimaculatus, 243; grise- ocollis, 243; impatiens, 243; perplexus, 243; sandersoni, 243; vagans, 243 Bonasa umbellus, 20, 38, 99 Botanical investigations in northeastern Sas- katchewan: the subarctic Paterson-Has- bala Lakes region, by G. W. Argus, 119 Bouteloua gracilis, 24 Branta canadensis leucopareia, 63; c. moffitti, 63; c. parvipes, 63 Brayshaw, T. C. The names of yellow birch and two of its varieties, 160 What are the blue birches?, 187 Breeding records of the Ring-necked Duck (Aythya collaris) in Riviere-du-Loup and Rimouski Counties, Quebec, by Austin Reed, 182 British Columbia, Betula papyrifera of, Ob- servations on Canadian birch collections at the Morgan Arboretum, by W. H. Brittain, and W. F. Grant, 147 British Columbia, A Black Swift nest in, by James Grant, 60 British Columbia, central and northern, /ris missouriensis in, etc. by B. de Vries, 158 British Columbia, Sighting of a Hudsonian Godwit near Vancouver, by F. W. Dob- son, 180 Brittain, W. H., and W. F. Grant Observations on Canadian birch (Betula) collections at the Morgan Arboretum. ll. B. papyrifera of British Columbia, 147 Bromus inermis, 29 Bryum pseudotriquetrum, 141 Bucephala albeola, 76, 178; clangula, 76, 182 Bufflehead, 76 Bugs or People, reviewed by V. E. F. Solman, 246 Bunting, Snow, 117 Buteo jamaicensis, 98 1966 Calamagrostis canadensis, 6, 131, 169, 198; in- expansa, 6, 131; neglecta, 6; purpurascens, 6, 131 Calcarius lapponicus, 180; pictus, 180 Calla palustris, 133 Calliergon giganteum, 141 Callitriche verna, 14 Calochortus lyalli, 246 Cambarus bartoni, 202 Campanula rotundifolia, 29 Campeloma decisum, 204 Canis latrans, 82 Canvasback, 76, 77, 165 Capella gallinago, 180 Capreolus capreolus, 22 Caretta caretta caretta, 162; olivacea, 162 Carex abdita, 131; aenea, 6, 132; aquatilis, 6, 85, 132; atherodes, 85; bicolor, 132; bige- lowii, 132; brunnescens, 6, 132; buxbaumit, 6, 132; canescens, 6, 132; capillaris, 8, 132; capitata, 8, 132; chordorrhiza, 132; deflexa, 8, 132; diandra, 85, 132; dioica, 132; dis- perma, 8; foenea, 8, 132; garberi, 8, 132; glacialis, 8, 132; gynocrates, 8; interior, 132; lacustris, 85; lanuginosa, 85; lenticu- laris, 8; leptalea, 8, 132; limosa, 8, 132; livida, 132; loliacea, 8, 132; magellanica, 132; media, 8, norvegica, 132; paupercula, 8; physocarpa, 8; rostrata, 8, 85, 133; rotundata, 8; saxitilis, 133; scirpoidea, 133; stans, 9; supina, 9, 133; tenuiflora, 9; vaginata, 9, 133; viridula, 9 Cardamine douglasii, 70; parviflora, 12 Caribou, barren-ground, 1, 110; woodland, 110 Castanea dentata, 72 Castilleja raupii, 16 Castor canadensis, 19 Catalogue Systématique des Noms de Genres de Poissons Actuels, reviewed by D. E. McAllister, 175 Catostomus commersoni, 205 Cerastium alpinum, 11, 136; arvense, 29, 30, beeringianum, 169 Ceratina dupla, 243 Cervus canadensis, 27, 38 Cetraria 239; nivalis, 142 Chaetomorpha, 251 Chamaedaphne calyculata, 16, 139, 239 Charadrius semipalmatus, 179, 180 Checklist of Canadian Atlantic Fishes with Keys for Identification, reviewed by D. E. McAllister, 57 Chelonia mydas, 162 Chelonibia, 162; caretta, 164 Chenopodium capitatum, 11, 169 Chipmunk, least, 99 INDEx TO VOLUME 80 259) Choristoneura fumuferana, 223 Chrysemys picta bellii, 254; p. marginata, 115 Cicuta mackenzieana, 14, 138 Cinclidium stygium, 141 Circaea alpina, 169 Cirripted Stomatolepas elegans (Costa) on leatherback turtles from Nova Scotian waters, by V. A. Zullo and J. S. Bleakney, 162 Citellus columbianus, 20; richardsoni, 20, 99 Cladonia alpestris, 142, 239; alpicoia, 142; amaurocrea, 142; cornuta, 142, 239, de- formis, 142; gracilis, 239; mitis, 142, 239; pleurota, 142; rangiferina, 142, 239; un- cialis, 142, 239 Cladophora, 251 Clarke AS Hiayr: Review of: Physiology of Mollusca, Volume 1, 172 Clay-colored Sparrow nesting at Ottawa, Ontario, by W. E. Godfrey, 255 Claytonia sibirica, 169 Cody, W. J. , Review of: The Lily Family (Liliaceae) of British Columbia, 246 Review of: Vascular Flora of British Columbia — preliminary check list, 247 Colaptes auratus, 99 Colinus virginianus, 38 Comandra pallida, 29; richardsiana, 198 Continents We Live On: Europe: A Natural History, reviewed by A. W. F. Banfield, 55 Contribution to the flora of the eastern arm of Great Slave Lake, N.W.T., by George W. Scotter, 1 Coot, 99 Coptis trifolia, 137 Corallorhiza trifida, 134 Cordulegaster maculatis, 203 Coreopsis tripteris, 199 Cormorant, Pelagic, 118 Cormorant, Brandt’s, The first breeding record of, in Canada, by D. Stirling and F. Buffam, 117 Cornus canadensis, 14, 138; racemosa, 196; stolonifera, 14, 26 Coronula, 162 Corvus brachyrhynchos, 82, 99; corax, 82, 178 Corydalis sempervirens, 11, 12, 137 Corylus americana, 196; cornuta, 26 Cottus bairdii, 205; cognatus, 205 Cowbird, Brown-headed, 46 Crane, Sandhill, 181; Whooping, 178 Crangonyx gracilis, 202 franklini, 99; 260 Crataegus oxyacantha, 46 Crow, Common, 99 Cryptogramma crispa, 4 Cryptolepas, 162 Cyanocitta cristata, 99 Cygnus buccinator, 38 Cynodontium strumiferum, 141; tenellum, 141 Cypripedium passerinum, 134 Cypseloides niger, 60 Cystopteris fragilis, 4, 169 Cytisus scoparius, 46 Danthenia intermedia, 28, 29 Dendrocopos villosus, 226 Dendrocygna bicolor, 183 Dendroica virens, 115 Dermochelys coriacea coriacea, 162 Deschampsia caespitosa, 6 Descurainia sophiodes, 12 Desmodium canadense, 198 Dialictus, 243 Dicranum angustum, 141; bergeri, 141; elon- gatum, 141 Dicrostonyx groenlandicus, 89, torquatus, 89 Didymops transversa, 203 Dina parva, 202 Dobson, Fred W. Sighting of a Hudsonian Godwit (Limosa haemastica) near Vancouver, B.C. 180 Dore, W. G. Review of: A Monograph of Lemnaceae, 176 Dove, Mourning, 46 Dowitcher, Short-billed, 180 Draba arabisans, 71; cinerea, 137 Dracocephalum parviflorum, 16 Drepanocladus exannulatus, 141; revolvens, 141; uncinatus, 141; vernicosus, 141 Drosera anglica, 137; rotundifolia, 12 Dryopteris austriaca, 169, fragrans, 4; lin- neana, 169; robertiana, 4, thelypteris, 198 Duck, Black, 182; Domestic, 99; Fulvous Tree, 183; Ring-necked, 76, 77, 165, 182; Ruddy, 76 Dunlin, 116 Eleocharis acicularis, 9; compressa, 71; palus- tris, 9 Elliptio complanatus, 204 Empetrum hermaphroditum, 138; nigrum, 13, 14, 120, 138, 239 Emydoidea blandingi, 115 Enallagma boreale, 203; cyathigerum, 203 Ephemera simulans, 202 Epilobium angustifolium, 11, 14, 138, 169; glandulosum, 14, palustre, 14, 138 Tue CanapiAN FIeLp-NaTURALIST Vol. 80 Equisetum, 239; arvense, 4, 129, 169, 198; fluviatile, 4, 129; palustre, 129; scirpoides, 5, 129; sylvaticum, 5, 129 Erigeron, 29; acris, 140; angulosus, 17; elatus, 17; byssopifolius, 140; lonchophyllus, 140; strigosus, 199 Eriophorum alpinum, 133; angustifolium, 9, 133; brachyantherum, 133; chamtissonis, 133; russeolum, 9, vaginatum, 9, 133; viri- dicarinatum, 133 Erolia alpina, 116; bairdii, 116; minutilla, 180 Erpobdella punctata, 201, 202 Etheostoma exile, 205; nigrum, 205 Eucalia inconstans, 205 Eumetopia jubata, 118 Eupatorium maculatum, 199 Euphorbia corollata, 198; dentata, 198; vermi- culata, 198 Eutamias minimus, 99 Extralimital occurrences of raccoons in On- tario, by D. W. Simkin, 144 Falco rusticolus, 178 Felis canadensis, 18 Festuca altaica, 28, brachyphylla, 6: ovina, 29; saximontana, 6, 131; scabrella, 24-32 Festuca scabrella association in Riding Moun- tain National Park, Manitoba, by D. A. Blood, 24 First breeding record of the Brandt's Cor- morant in Canada, by D. Stirling and F. Buffam, 117 First Canadian record of the brackish water anthozoan Nematostella vectensis Stephenson, by K. Bailey and J. S. Bleakney, 251 Fishes, Principles of Paleontology. Agnatha, reviewed by D. E. McAllister and D. L. Dineley, 112 Fishes of the Sea of Japan and neighbouring parts of the Okhotsk and Yellow Seas, reviewed by D. E. McAllister, 113 Fishes of the Western North Atlantic, Part 5, Order Iniomi and Order Lyomeri, re- viewed by D. E. McAllister, 173 Flicker, 99 Food habits of the lynx in Alberta and the Mackenzie District, N.W.T., by C. G. van Zyll de Jong, 18 Fossaria obrussa, 204 Fox, arctic, 89 Fragaria glauca, 12, 29; virginiana, 198 Fraxinus americana, 197 Fulica americana, 99 Further observations on large Canada Geese moulting on the Thelon River, N.W.T., by Ernie Kuyt, 63 1966 Gadwall, 76, 77, 165 Galium boreale, 29, 30, 169; tinctorium, 199, trifidum, 16, 140, 169 Gammarus fasciatus, 202; pseudolimnaeus, 202 Gaura biennis, 198 Gavia adamsii, 178; arctica, 178; stellata, 178 Geese, large Canada, moulting on the Thelon River, N.W.T., Further observations on, by Ernie Kuyt, 63 Gentiana andrewsii, 198; crinita, 198 Gentianella amarella, 139 Geocaulon lividum, 10, 140 Geranium bickneilii, 14, erianthum, 169 Gerardia flava, 199; purpurea, 199; tenuifolia, 199 Geum macrophyllum, 169; triflorum, 29 Gibbon, Robert S. Observations on the behaviour of nesting Three-toed Woodpeckers, Picoides tridactylus, in central New Brunswick, 223 Glossiphonia complanata, 202; heteroclita, 60 Glyceria borealis, 6 Godfrey, W. E. Clay-colored Sparrow nesting at Ottawa, Ontario, 255 A Summer Tanager in Manitoba, 254 The supposed nesting of the Slaty-backed Gull in Canada, 48 Review of: Birds of Prey of the World, 57 Review of: A New Dictionary of Birds, 111 Godwit, Hudsonian, 179, 180 Goldeneye, Common, 76, 77, 182 Goldfinch, American, 46 Gomphus lividus, 203, sticatus, 203 Goniobasis livescens, 204 Goose, Canada, 63-69; Ross’s, 116 Gopher, pocket, 99 Grant, James A Black Swift nest in British Columbia, 60 Great Arc of the Wild Sheep, The, reviewed by D. A. Blood, 55 Grouse, Ruffed, 99 Grus americana, 178 Gull, Bonaparte’s, 180; California, 118; Glau- cous-winged, 114, 118; Herring, 62; Ring- billed, 62 Gull, Slaty-backed, The supposed nesting of the, in Canada, by W. E. Godfrey, 48 Gymnocarpium robertianum, 130 Gyraulus deflectus, 204, hirsutus, 204, parvus, 204 Gyrfalcon, 178 INDEx TO VOLUME 80 261 Habenaria hyperborea, 134; obtusata, 10 Haemopis grandis, 201, 202 Hagenius brevistylus, 203 Hainault, Robert Some features of the flora of the islands of eastern Lake Ontario, 69 Hare, snowshoe, 99 Hawk, Cooper’s, 99; Red-tailed, 98-100 Hedeoma hispida, 71 Hedysarum alpinum, 12 Helentum autummnale, 199 Helianthemum bicknellii, 198, canadense, 198 Helicopsyche, 203 Helisoma anceps, 204; campanulatum, 204 Helobdella stagnalis, 202 Hemidactylium scutatum, 59 Henshaw, John Mass movements by snowshoe rabbits, Lepus americanus, 181 Heracleum lanatum, 169 Heuchera richardsonii, 29 Hexagenia occulata, 202; rigida, 202 Hibiscus palustris, 70 Hieracium canadense, 17 Hierochloe odorata, 6, 198 Hiodon alosoides, 250 Hippuris vulgaris, 14, 138 Hirundo rustica, 114 Hordeum jubatum, 6 Hyalella azteca, 202 Hyla versicolor, 115 Hylocomium splendens, 141 Hypericum gentianoides, 198, majus, 198 Hypnum cupressiforme, 141 Hypomesus, 230; olidus, 229; pretiosus, 229, transpacificus, 229 Hypoxis hirsuta, 198 Hummingbird, Rufous, 46 Hylocichla minima, 179, 180 Ibis, Wood, 183 Icatalurus nebulosus, 205 Ichthyomyzon, 205 Icmadophila ericetorum, 142 Ilex, 46 Incubation periods of some subarctic birds, by J. R. Jehl, Jr. and D. J. T. Hussel, 179 Iridoprocne bicolor, 226 Iris missouriensis Nutt. in southwestern Al- berta and in central and northern British Columbia, by B. de Vries, 158 Isanthus brachiatus, 71 Isoetes muricata, 130 Ixoreus naevius, 114 Jaeger, Parasitic, 179; Pomarine, 179 Jay, Blue, 99 262 Jehl, Joseph R., and D. J. T. Hussell Incubation periods of some subarctic birds, 179 Judd, William W. Studies of the Byron bog in southwestern Ontario XXVII. Insects associated with flowering blueberry, Vaccinium atrococcum (Gray) Heller, 242 Juncus alpinus, 9; balticus, 10; castaneus, 133, filiformis, 10, 134; torreyi, 198; triglumis, 133; vaseyi, 10 Juniperus communis, 5, 130; horizontalis, 5 Kalmia polifolia, 16, 139 Kelsall, John P. Additional bird observations at Bathurst Inlet, N.W.T., 178 Kingbird, Eastern, 179; Western, 114 Koeleria cristata, 29 Krigia biflora, 199 Kuyt, Ernie Further observations on large Canada Geese moulting on the Thelon River, N.W.T., 63 Lagopus lagopus lagopus, 178; 1. scoticus, 39, mutus, 178 Lampetra lamottei, 205 Lampsillis ovata ventricosa, 204, radiata sili- quoidea, 204 Landlocked Atlantic salmon in Terra Nova River system, Newfoundland, by C. W. Andrews, 101 Larix laricina, 4, 5, 26, 130, 239 Larus argentatus, 62; delawarensis, 62; glau- cescens, 114; philadelphia, 180; schistisa- gus, 48 Lathyrus palustris, 198, venosus, 29 Lecanora dispersa, 142; polytropa, 142 Lechea villosa, 198 Lecidea lapicida, 142 Ledum decumbens, 239; groenlandicum, 14, 16, 26, 139, 239; palustre, 16, 139 Leech, Robin Review of: Arachnida, 172 Lemmus sibiricus, 89; trimucronatus, 89 Lemna minor, 176; trisulca, 176 Lepidostoma, 203 Lepisosteus osseus, 58 Lepomis gibbosus, 141 Leptocella, 203 Lepus americanus, 19, 98, 99, 181; timidus, 22 Lespedeza capitata, 198 Leucobryum glaucum, 71 Liatris ligulistylis, 29; spicata, 199 Tue CanapDiAN FieLtp-NaTURALIST Vol. 80 | Life history notes on the goldeye in the North Saskatchewan River in Alberta, by | C. G. Paterson, 250 Lilium michiganense, 198 Lily Family (Liliaceae) of British Columbia, | The, reviewed by W. J. Cody, 246 Limnaea stagnalis jugularis, 204 Limnephilus, 203 Limnodromus griseus, 180 Limosa haemastica, 179, 180 Lindera benzoin, 70, 72 Lindsay, Robert V. Unexplained reptilian mortality, 59 Linnaea borealis, 16, 140 Linum medium, 198 Lirceus, 202 Lithospermum canescens, 29, 198 Lobelia spicata, 199 Lobipes lobatus, 116, 179, 180 Loiseleuria procumbens, 16, 139 Longspur, Lapland, 180; Smith’s, 180 Loon, Pacific, 178; Red-throated, 178; Yel- low-billed, 178 Lophozia wenzeli, 140 Lota lota, 205 Lotus corniculatus, 72 Lumsden, Harry G. The Prairie Chicken Ontario, 33 Luzula confusa, 10, 134, nivalis, 134, parvi- flora, 134, wahlenbergii, 10 Lycopodium annotinum, 5, 129, clavatum, 129; complanatum, 5, 129, obscurum, 5; sabinaef olium, 129; selago, 129 Lycopus uniflorus, 16, 17; virginicus, 198 Lynx canadensis, 18 Lyrurus tetrix, 39 Lysimachia quadriflora, 198; thyrsiflora, 16, 198 Lythrum alatum, 198 in southwestern MacCoubrey, H. Willa Mockingbirds in New Brunswick, 252 Seaside Sparrow in New Brunswick, 253 Macpherson, A. H. The abundance of lemmings at Aberdeen Lake, District of Keewatin, 1959-63, 89 Macrobdella decora, 60 Macromia illinoiensis, 203 Magpie, 99 Malacocephalus occidentalis, 58 Mallard, 76, 77, 165 Mallotus, 230; villosus, 229 Mammals of Alberta, The, reviewed by A. W. F. Banfield, 110 Mammonteus primigenius, 95-98 1966 Manitoba, The Festuca scabrella association in Riding Mountain National Park, by D. A. Blood, 24 Manitoba, Proboscidean molars from, by H. R. Young, 95 Manitoba, A Summer Tanager in, by W. E. Godfrey, 254 Manitoba, The western painted turtle near Gilbert Plains, by J. L. Parker, 254 Mareca americana, 76 Marine Mammals of California, reviewed by E. Mitchell, 245 Mass movements by snowshoe rabbits, Lepus americanus, by J. Henshaw, 181 McAllister, D. E. Numerical taxonomy and the smelt fami- ly, Osmeridae, 227 Review of: Catalogue Systématique des Noms de Genres de Poissons Actuels, 175 : Review of: A Checklist of Canadian Atlantic Fishes with Keys for Identi- fication, 57 Review of: Fishes of the Sea of Japan and neighbouring parts of the Okhotsk and Yellow Seas, 113 Review of: Fishes of the Western North Atlantic, Part 5, Order Iniomi and Order Lyomeri, 173 McAllister, D. E., and D. L. Dineley Review of: Principles of Paleontology. Agnatha, Fishes, 112 Mclanna, 203 McLaren, Ian A. Short-eared Owl in Island, 61 Meesia uliginosa, 141 Melanitta deglandi, 77 Mentha arvensis, 16 Menyanthes trifoliata, 16, 139 Mephitis mephitis, 82 Mergus serrator, 178 Meslow, E. C., and Lloyd B. Keith Summer food habits of Red-tailed Hawks near Rochester, Alberta, 98 Micropalama himantopus, 180 Micropterus dolomieui, 205 Microtus, 19, 21, 22 Mimulus ringens, 199 Mimus polyglottos, 252 Mitchell, Edward Review of: Marine Mammals of Cali- fornia, 245 Mitella nuda, 137 Mnium andrewsianum, 141 Mockingbirds in New Brunswick, by H. W. MacCoubrey, 252 southern Baffin INDEX TO VoLuME 80 263 Molds and Man, An Introduction to the Fungi, The, reviewed by L. K. Weresub, 56 Monarda fistulosa, 29, 199 Monograph of Lemnaceae, A, reviewed by W. G. Dore, 176 Moore, J. E. New records of leeches for Saskatchewan, 59 Moschus, 22 Muskrat, 74 Mustela, 82; erminea, 99; rixosa, 99; vison, 82 Mycteria americana, 183 Myosotis verna, 71 Myrica gale, 10, 136 Myriophyllum spicatum, 138 Mysis relicta, 202 Mystacides sepulchralis, 203 Names of yellow birch and two of its varie- ties, by T. C. Brayshaw, 160 Natrix sipedon sipedon, 59 Nephelopsis obscura, 202 Nephroma arcticum, 142 New Dictionary of Birds, A, reviewed by W. E. Godfrey, 111 New nesting records and clarification of breeding status of some birds in the Perry River area, N.W.T., by S. G. Sealy, 116 New records of leeches (Hirudinea) for Saskatchewan, by J. E. Moore, 59 New Brunswick, Mockingbirds in, by H. W. MacCoubrey, 252 New Brunswick, Observations on the be- haviour of nesting Three-toed Wood- peckers in, by R. S. Gibbon, 223 New Brunswick, Redfish, Sebastes marinus, from Kennebecasis River, by W. A. Squires and S. W. Gorham, 253 New Brunswick, Seaside Sparrows in, by H. W. MacCoubrey, 253 Newfoundland, Landlocked Atlantic salmon in Terra Nova River system, by C. W. Andrews, 101 Newfoundland, Record of Utricularia pur- purea in, by H. E. Smith, 182 Nomada, 243 Northwest Territories, Additional bird ob- servations at Bathurst Inlet, by J. P. Kel- sall, 178 N.W.T., A contribution to the flora of the eastern arm of Great Slave Lake, by G. W. Scotter, 1 N.W.T., Food habits of the lynx in Alberta and the Mackenzie District, by C. G. van Zyll de Jong, 18 264 N.W.T., Further observations on large Canada Geese moulting on the Thelon River, by Ernie Kuyt, 63 N.W.T., New nesting records and clarifica- tion of breeding status of some birds in the Perry River area, by S. G. Sealy, 116 Notoropis cornutus, 205; deliciosus, 205, hudsonius, 205 Numenius phaeopus, 180 Numerical taxonomy and the smelt family, Osmeridae, by D. E. McAllister, 227 Nuphar variegatum, 11, 137 Nyctea scandiaca, 179 Nyssa sylvatica, 72 Observations on the behaviour of nesting Three-toed Woodpeckers, Picoides tri- dactylus, in central New Brunswick, by R. S. Gibbon, 223 Observations on Canadian birch (Betula) collections at the Morgan Arboretum III. B. papyrifera of British Columbia, by W. H. Brittain and W. F. Grant, 147 Oculobdella lucida, 60 Odocoileus, 20, hemionus, 20, virginianus, 38 Oecetis, 203 Oenanthe oenanthe, 183 Ondatra zibethicus, 74 Ontario, Clay-colored Sparrow nesting at Ottawa, by W. E. Godfrey, 255 Ontario, Extralimital occurrences of rac- coons in, by D. W. Simkin, 144 Ontario, The Prairie Chicken in south- western, by H. G. Lumsden, 33 Ontario, southwestern, Studies of the Byron bog etc., by W. W. Judd, 242 Ontario, Status of the Wood Ibis, the Ful- vous Tree Duck and the Wheatear in, by J. C. Barlow, 183 Ontario, A wet prairie community at Wind- sor, by C. M. Rogers, 195 Ophiogomphus aspersus, 203, mainensis, 203 Oplopanax horridus, 168 Orchis rotundifolia, 10, 134 Orconectes propinquus, 202, virilis, 202 Oryzopsis pungens, 6, 131 Osmerus, 230; eperlanus, 229, mordax, 205 Osmia atriventris, 243; coerulescens, 243 Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club Financial Statement, 1965, 54 Report of Council, 87th Annual Meeting, 50 Our Natural World, reviewed by V. E. Solman, 247 Ovis, 55; ammon, 55; canadensis auduboni, 55; c. canadensis, 55; nivicola, 55 Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 80 Owl, Short-eared, 61; Snowy, 61, 179 Oxycoccus microcarpus, 139; quadripetalus, 16 Oxypolis rigidior, 198 Oxytropis splendens, 12; viscida, 14 Oxyura jamaicensis, 76 Oystercatcher, Black, 118 Paludella squarrosa, 141 Panicum virgatum, 198 Parelephas jeffersoni, 95-98 Parker, James L., The western painted turtle near Gilbert Plains, Manitoba, 254 Parmelia physodes, 142 Parnassia kotzebuei, 12, 137; multiseta, 137; palustris, 12 Partridge, Gray, 99 Passerculus sandwichensis, 180 Paterson, Colin G. Life history notes on the goldeye, Hiodon alosoides (Rafinesque), in the North Saskatchewan River in Alberta, 250 Pedicularis labradorica, 16, 139; lanceolata, 199 Peltandra virginica, 70-72 Peltigera, 239; aphthosa, 142; malacea, 142 Penstemon hirsutus, 199 Perca flavescens, 205 Percina caprodes, 205 Perdix perdix, 20, 99 Petasites frigidus, 140; palmatus, 17; sagitta- tuis, 17, 140 Petromyzon marinus, 205 Phacelia franklinii, 16, 139 Phalacrocorax penicillatus, 117 Phalarope, Northern, 116, 179, 180; Red, 179 Phalaropus fulicarius, 179 Phlox hoodii, 30; pilosa, 198 Phragmites commumis, 74 Phyllospadix torreyi, 118 Physa, 204 Physiology of Mollusca, Volume 1, reviewed by A. H. Clarke, Jr., 172 Pica pica, 99 Picea, 239; glauca, 4, 5, 26, 71, 122, 130, 181; mariana, 4, 6, 26, 122, 130; sitchensis, 166, 170 Picoides arcticus, 224; tridactylus, 223 Pigeon, Band-tailed, 46 Pimephales notatus, 205 Pinguicula villosa, 16, vulgaris, 16, 139 Rintails Gnu) 99 Pinus banksiana, 4, 6, 26, 122, 130, 239 Pipit, Water, 46, 117 Piranga rubra rubra, 254 1966 Piscicola milneri, 202 Pisidium casertanum, 204; compressum, 204; conventus, 204; dubium, 204, ferrugineum., 204; idahoense, 204; lilljeborgi, 204; niti- dum, 204; subtruncatum, 204; variabile, 204 Placobdella montifera, 202; ornata, 60, 202 Platylepas hexastylos, 164 Plectrophenax nivalis, 117, 178 Pleurozium schreberi, 141 Plover, Black-bellied, 116; Semipalmated, 179, 180 Poa alpigena, 6; alpina, 131; compressa, 70; glauca, 6, 131; interior, 6; pratensis, 29 Podophyllum peltatum, 70, 72 Pobhlia cruda, 141; nutans, 141 Polygala sanguinea, 198; senega, 29; verticil- lata, 198 Polyganum lapathifolium, 10; tenue, 198, viviparum, 136 Polypodium virginianum, 4, vulgare, 130 Polytrichum commune, 141; juniperinum, 141; piliferum, 141 Pontoporeia affinis, 202 Populus balsamifera, 10, 26, 74, 134; tremu- loides, 10, 24, 26, 134, 223; trichocarpa, 166-171 Porzana carolina, 99 Potamogeton alpinus, 6, 130; filiformis, 130; gramineus, 6; richardsonii, 6, 130 Potentilla arguta, 12, 29; fruticosa, 12, 28, 29, 31, 137; multifida, 12; nivea, 12, 138; nor- vegicd, 12, 138; palustris, 12, 138; triden- tata, 12, 138 Power, G. Analysis of the movement and growth of juvenile brook trout (Salvelinus fon- tinalis) from rotenone collections taken in the Nabisipi River and_ vicinity, Quebec, 213 Prairie Chicken in southwestern Ontario, by H. G. Lumsden, 33 Prenanthes racemosa, 199 Primula mistassinica, 139, stricta, 16 Principles of Paleontology. Agnatha, Fishes, reviewed by D. E. McAllister and D. L. Dineley, 112 Proboscidean molars from Manitoba, by H. R. Young, 95 Procyon lotor, 144 Prunus pennsylvanica, 12, 26; serotina, 197; virginiana, 26, 29 Pseudacris t. triseriata, 115 Psithyrus citrinus, 243 Ptarmigan, Willow, 178 Pteridium aquilinum, 198 Prilidium ciliare, 140 INDEx TO VOLUME 80 265 Ptilium crista-castrensis, 141 Puccinellia distans, 198 Pungitius pungitius, 205 Pycnanthemum virginianum, 199 Pycnopsyche, 203 Pyrola asarifolia, 138, 169; grandiflora, 14 138; minor, 14, 138; secunda, 16, 138 Pyrus coronaria, 198 ’ Quebec, Analysis of the movement and growth of juvenile brook trout, etc., on the Nabisipi River, by G. Power, 213 Quebec, Breeding records of the Ring- necked Duck (Aythya collaris) in Rivi- ére-du-Loup and Rimouski Counties, by Austin Reed, 182 Quercus bicolor, 197; borealis, 196; palustris, 196; velutina, 196 Raccoon, 144, 175 Raccoons and Eagles, reviewed by V. E. F. Solman, 175 Rail, Sora, 99 Rana clamitans, 115; pipiens, 115 Rangifer arcticus, 110; caribou, 110; forti- dans, 110; tarandus, 20; t. arcticus, 181; t. groenlandicus, 1, 238 Ranunculus, 169; aquatilis, 137; fascicularis, 71; flammula, 11; gmelinii, 11; lapponicus, 11, 137; reptans, 137; subrigidus, 11 Record of Utricularia purpurea in New- foundland, by H. E. Smith, 182 Redfish, Sebastes marinus var. mentella, from Kennebecasis River, N.B.. by W. A. Squires and S. W. Gorham, 253 Redhead, 76, 77 Redpoll, Common, 180 Reed, Austin Breeding records of the Ring-necked Duck (Aythya collaris) in Riviére-du- Loup and Rimouski Counties, Quebec, 182 Reseda lutea, 71 Rhacomitrium canescens, 141 Rhinichthys cataractae, 205 Rhizocarpon disporum, 142; geographicum, 142 Rhododendron lapponicum, 16 Rhus radicans, 70 Ribes glandulosum, 12, 137; hudsonianuma, 12, 137; lacustre, 137; oxyacanthoides, 12, 137; triste, 12, 137 Rogers, C. M. A wet prairie community at Windsor, Ontario, 195 Rorippa islandica, 12, 137 266 Rosa acicularis, 26, 29; bourgeauiana, 12, eglanteria, 72; nutkana, 168; tomentosa, 71 Rubus, 46; acaulis, 12, 138; chamaemorus, 12, 138; idaeus, 138; spectabilis, 168, 169; stri- gosus, 12; villosa, 198 Rudbeckia hirta, 199 Rumex occidentalis, 11 Ruppia, 251 Salix, 26, 74, 239; alanxensis, 168, 169; arbus- culoides, 10, 134; arctophila, 10, 134; athabascensis, 10; barclayi, 168; bebbiana, 10, 135; candida, 10, 85, 135; glauca, 10, 135, 168; humilis, 198; myrtillifolia, 10, 135; pedicellaris, 10, 85, 135; planifolia, 10, 135; pyrifolia, 10, 135; reticulata, 136; scouleriana, 10; serissinta, 10, 136 Salmo salar, 101 Salt, W. Ray Some unusual bird records Peace River district, 114 Salvelinus fontinalis, 213 Sambucus racemosa, 168 Sandpiper, Baird’s, 116, Least, 180; Stilt, 180 Sanguisorba sitchensis, 169 Sapsucker, Yellow-bellied, 226 Saskatchewan, New records of leeches for, by J. E. Moore, 59 Saskatchewan, northeastern, Botanical in- vestigations in,: The subarctic Patterson- Hasbala Lakes region, by G. W. Argus, 119 Sassafras albidum, 72 Satureja acinos, 71 Saxifraga tricuspidata, 12, 137 Scaup, Greater, 114; Lesser, 76, 77, 165 Scleria triglomerata, 198 Scirpus acutus, 76; caespitosus, 133; hudsoni- anus, 9 Scoter, White-winged, 77 Scotter, George W. A contribution to the flora of the eastern arm of Great Slave Lake, N.W.T., 1 Sieve mesh size as related to volumetric and gravimetric analysis of caribou rumen contents, 238 Scutellaria galericulata, 139, parvula, 71 Sealy, Spencer G. New nesting records and clarification of breeding status of some birds in the Perry River area, N.W.T., 116 Sebastes marinus, 253 Selaginella selaginoides, 130 Senecio cymbalarioides, 17; indecorus, 17; pauperculus, 140 Setodes, 203 from the Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 80 Shepherdia canadensis, 14, 138 ~ Short-eared Owl in southern Baffin Island, by I. A. McLaren, 61 Shoveler, 76 Sieve mesh size as related to volumetric and gravimetric analysis of caribou rumen contents, by G. W. Scotter, 238 Sighting of a Hudsonian Godwit (Limosa haemastica) near Vancouver, B.C., by F. W. Dobson, 180 Silphium terebinthinaceum, 199 Simkin, Donald W. Extralimital occurrences of raccoons in Ontario, 144 Siphloplectron, 202 Sisyrinchium montanum, 10 Smilacina longipes, 29; stellata, 29; trifolia, 10, 134 Smith, Hilda E. Record of Utricularia purpurea in New- foundland, 182 Snipe, Common, 180 Solanum carolinense, 199 Solidago bicolor, 199; canadensis, 199; de- cumbens, 17; glaberrima, 30; graminifolia, 199; missouriensis, 29, multiradiata, 169; riddellui, 199; rigida, 29, 199; spathulata, 140 Solman, V. E. F. Review of: Bugs or People, 246 Review of: Our Natural World, 247 Review of: Raccoons and Eagles, 175 Review of: Wildlife Biology, 248 Some features of the flora of the islands of eastern Lake Ontario, by Robert Hainault, 69 Some unusual bird records from the Peace River district, by W. Ray Salt, 114 Sorbus, 46 Sorex vagrans, 110 Sorghastrum nutans, 198 Sparganium angustifolium, 130; minimum, 6, 130; multipedunculatum, 6 Sparrow, Clay-colored, 255; Golden- crowned, 46; Harris’, 180, Savannah, 46, 180; Seaside, 253; White-crowned, 46 Spartina pectinata, 198 Spatula cly peata, 76 Sphaerium lacustre, 204; nitidum, 204; stria- tinum, 204 Sphagnum capillaceum, 140; cuspidatum, 141; fuscum, 141; girgensohnii, 141; lindbergit, 141; recurvum, 141; squarrosum, 141; warnstorfianum, 141; wulfianum, 141 Sphyrapicus varius, 226 Spiraea alba, 198; tomentosa, 198 Spiranthes romanzoffiana, 10, 134 1966 Spirinchus, 230; lanceolatus, 229; starksi, 229; thaleichthys, 229 Spirodela polyrhiza, 176 Spizella pallida, 255 Splachnum luteum, 141 Sporobolus cryptandrus, 198 Squatarola squataro!a, 116 Squires, W. A., and S. W. Gorham Redfish, Sebastes marinus var, mentella, from the Kennebacasis River, N.B., 253 Squirrel, Franklin ground, 99, Richardson ground, 99 Stachys palustris, 198 Stagnicola emarginata, 204 Status of the Wood Ibis, the Fulvous Tree Duck and the Wheatear in Ontario, by J. C. Barlow, 183 Stellaria calycantha, 11, 137; longifolia, 11, 137; longipes, 71; monantha, 11; sub- vestita, 11 Stercorarius parasiticus, 179; pomarinus, 179 Stereocaulon, 239; paschale, 142 Stipa comata, 24; richardsonit, 29, 30; spartea, 24, 29, 30 Stirling, David Summer birds wintering on southern Vancouver Island, 45 Stirling, David, and Frank Buffam First breeding record of the Brandt’s Cormorant in Canada, 117 Stomatolepas elegans, 162, praegustator, 163 Streptopus amplexifolius, 169 Strophitus rugosus, 204 Strophostyles helveola, 198 Studies of the Byron bog in southwestern Ontario. XXVII. Insects associated with flowering blueberry, Vaccinium atrococ- cum (Gray) Heller, by W. W. Judd, 242 Study of waterfowl nesting on the Saskat- chewan River delta, by G. H. Townsend, 74 Summer birds wintering on southern Van- couver Island, by David Stirling, 45 Summer food habits of Red-tailed Hawks near Rochester, Alberta, by E. C. Meslow and L. B. Keith, 98 Supposed nesting of the Slaty-backed Gull in Canada, by W. E. Godfrey, 48 Surfbird, 118 Swallow, Barn, 114; Tree, 226 Swift, Black, 60 Symphoricarpos albus, 26, 29 Taenidia integerrima, 198 Tamiasciurus hudsonicus, 19, 100 Tanager, Summer, 254 INDEx TO VOLUME 80 267 Taraxacum ceratophorum, 140; dumetorum, 17; lacerum, 17; officinale, 28, 29 Tattler, Wandering, 118 Tayloria lingulata, 141 Teal, Blue-winged, 76, 77, winged, 76, 77 Tetrao cupido, 42 Tetraplodon mnioides, 141 Teucrium occidentale, 199 Thaleichthys, 230, pacificus, 229 Thalictrum dasycarpum, 198, occidentale, 29; sparsiflorum, 169 Thomas, M. L. H. Benthos of four Lake Superior bays, 200 Thomomys talpoides, 99, 100 Thrush, Gray-cheeked, 179, 180, Hermit, 46, Varied, 114 Tofieldia pusilla, 10, 134 Tomenthypnum nitens, 142 Totanus flavipes, 180, melanoleucus, 180 Townsend, Gerald H. A study of waterfowl nesting on the Sas- katchewan River delta, 74 Tradescantia ohiensis, 198 Trientalis europaea, 169 Triglochin maritima, 6, 131 Triodanis perfoliata, 71 Trisetum spicatum, 6, 131 Tulktu: A Question of Survival, reviewed by A. W. F. Banfield, 113 Turdus migratorius, 178 Turnstone, Black, 118; Ruddy, 118 Turtle, western painted, 254 Tympanuchus cupido americanus, 33 Typha latifolia, 74 Tyrannus tyrannus, 179; verticals, 114 165; Green- U!mus americana, 197 Ulota crispa, 142 Umbra limi, 205 Unexplained mass mortality of turtles, by J. S. Bleakney, 115 Unexplained reptilian mortality, by R. V. Lindsay, 59 Unusual number of dead Ring-billed Gulls, by J. F. Bendell, 62 Ursus arctos, 110 Urtica gracilis, 10 Usnea, 239 Utricularia intermedia, 16, 139, 182; purpurea. 182; vulgaris, 16, 140, 182 Vaccinium atrococcum, 242; myrtilloides, 139, 239; uwliginosum, 16, 139, 239; vitis- idaea, 16, 120, 139, 239 Valeriqnella chenopodifolia, 70 268 Valvata lewisi, 204; sincera, 204, tricarinata, 204 Vascular Flora of British Columbia — pre- liminary check list, reviewed by W. J. Cody, 247 Vegetation of cottonwood forests on Kodiak Island, by E. W. Beals, 166 Veratrum eschscholtzii, 169 Verbena simplex, 198; stricta, 198 Veronica peregrina, 16; scutellata, 16, 139 Veronicastrum virginicum, 199 Vespula arenaria, 243; vulgaris, 243 Viburnum edule, 16, 140, 168 Vicia americana, 29 Viola, 29; palustris, 14, 138; sagittata, 198 Vries, B. de Iris missouriensis Nutt. in southwestern Alberta and in central and northern British Columbia, 158 Vulpes vulpes, 82 Warbler, Audubon’s, 46, Black-throated Green, 115; Orange-crowned, 46 Waxwing, Cedar, 46 Weasel, least, 99; short-tailed, 99 Weresub, Luella K. Review of: The Molds and Man, An Introduction to the Fungi, 56 Western painted turtle near Gilbert Plains, Manitoba, by J. L. Parker, 254 Tue CANADIAN Fie_tp-NaTuRALIST Vol. 80 Wet prairie community at Windsor, Ontario, by C. M. Rogers, 195 What are the blue birches?, by T. C. Bray- shaw, 187 Wheatear, 183 Whimbrel, 180 Widgeon, American, 76 Wildlife Biology, reviewed by V. E. F. Solman, 248 W olffia columbiana, 176; punctata, 176 Woodpecker, Hairy, 226; Lewis’ 46, North- ern IThree-toed, 223 W oodsia glabella, 130; ilvensis, 4 Yellowlegs, Greater, 180; Lesser, 180 Young, Harvey, R. Proboscidean molars from Manitoba, 95 Zizia aptera, 29 Zullo, Victor A., and J. Sherman Bleakney The cirriped Stomatolepas elegans (Cos- ta) on leatherback turtles from Nova Scotian waters, 162 Zygadenus gramineus, 246; venenosus, 246 Zyll de Jong, Constantinus G. van Food habits of the lynx in Alberta and the Mackenzie District, N.W.T., 18 Zonotrichia querula, 180 ws A NOTE ON THE PRODUCTION OF THIS JOURNAL The Canadian Field-Natuarlist conforms to recommendations on the lay-out of period- icals issued by the International Organization for Standardization. It is set by linotype in Janson. The title is Kennerley. Boldface headings are Bodoni. Coverstock is ‘Mayfair’ by Howard Smith and text paper is Provincial Paper “Thriftcoat’. The journal is printed by The Runge Press Limited, 124 Queen Street, Ottawa 4, Ontario. Ws The Publications Committee acknowledges with thanks the contribution of the Con- servation Council of the Canadian National Sportsmen’s Show toward the publication of this volume. 269 AFFILIATED Edmonton Bird Club President, Dr. D. Boac; Vice-President, J. H. Horton; Secretary-Treasurer, Miss J. C. SHoreE; Field Secretary, Dr. R. W. Turner; Audubon Representative, A. G. Porcuer; Librarian, Dr. J. C. HotmEs. Calgary Bird Club President, Dr. M. T. Myres, Department of Biology, University of Calgary, Calgary, Alberta; Vice-President, 1. R. Hatiapay; Treasurer, E. D. BeacuaM, Box 1102, Calgary, Alberta, Secretary, J. Price, 88 Galway Crescent, S.W., Calgary, Al- berta; Directors, B. Sparks and S. E. ALEXANDER. Mellwraith Ornithological Club President, W. G. Giruing; Past President, W. R. Jarmain; Vice-President, Dr. W. H. Minsuatz; Recording Secretary, Mrs. C. E. Spruce; Corres- ponding Secretary, Miss M. Tuomas, 534 Ever- glade Cres., London, Ont.; Treasurer, Miss E. M. Scort; Migration Secretary, P. MIDDLETON. Natural History Society of Manitoba Honorary President, A. H. Suort; President, Dr. L. B. Smitu; Treasurer, J. Jack; General Secretary, Mrs. M. H. Lioyp, c/o Manitoba Museum, Civic Auditorium, Winnipeg 1, Mani- toba; Executive Secretary, Mrs. G. Keitu. SOCIETIES Nova Scotia Bird Society President, Dr. Harrison F. Lewis; Vice-Pre dent, C. R. K. Atren; Past President, Dr. L. MacpuHerson; Secretary-Treasurer, F. A. La c/o Nova Scotia Museum of Science, Halif N.S.; Editor, Mrs. J. W. Dosson; Membersi Secretary, Miss ETHEL CRATHORNE. Provancher Society of Natural Histor of Canada President, Ronan E. Brat; First Vice-Preside Benoit PELLetier; Second Vice-President, JAMES CorisTINE; Secretary-Treasurer, (GEORGES LecLERC, 628 Fraser St., Quebec, Que. Province of Quebec Society for the Protection of Birds President, Mrs. G. H. Montcomery; Vice-Pr dents, Dr. I. A. McLaren, M. D. SpeNcerR; Hon ary Treasurer, Miss G. E. Hrsparp; Honorary § retary, Miss R. S. Aspotr, 164 Senneville Ra Senneville, P.Q.; Librarian, Mrs. B. BrossEavu. Toronto Field Naturalists’ Club President, R. F. Norman; Vice-President, Dr Peacu; Secretary-Treasurer, Mrs. H. Rosson, Craighurst Avenue, Toronto 12, Ontario; Assist Secretary, Miss RutH MarsHatt; Junior Club, MacLe.ian, 416 St. Clements Avenue, Torot Ontario; Editor, Dr. R..M. SAUNDERS. Vancouver Natural History Society President, Dr. Kay BeamisH; Honorary Presi- dent, Dr. M. Y. Wiuiams; Past President, Dr. J. E. Armstrone; Corresponding Secretary, Mrs. H. Prnver-Moss; Recording Secretary, Mrs. G. HynpMan; Treasurer, E. G. Barnes, Box 3021, Vancouver, B.C. Sree one wae AAP > +O + ~# eee + i + ‘ Scan! SUA aa SS ee